Owners Manual

Owners Manual
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) FOREWORD.QXP
1/23/2013
3:19 PM
Page 1
Kia, THE COMPANY
Thank you for becoming the owner of a new Kia vehicle.
As a global vehicle manufacturer focused on building high-quality, value for money prices, Kia Motors is dedicated to providing you with a customer service experience that exceeds your
expectations.
All information contained in this Owner’s Manual is accurate at
the time of publication. However, Kia reserves the right to make
changes at any time so that our policy of continual product
improvement can be carried out.
This manual applies to all Kia models and includes descriptions
and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As
a result, you may encounter material in this manual that is not
applicable to your specific Kia vehicle.
Drive safely and enjoy your Kia!
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) FOREWORD.QXP
1/23/2013
3:19 PM
Page 2
Foreword
Thank you for choosing a Kia vehicle.
When you require service, remember that your Kia Dealer knows your vehicle best. Your dealer has factory-trained
technicians, recommended special tools, genuine Kia replacement parts and is dedicated to your complete satisfaction. Because subsequent owners require this important information as well, this publication should remain with the
vehicle if it is sold. This manual will familiarize you with operational, maintenance and safety information about
your new vehicle. It is supplemented by a Warranty and Consumer Information manual that provides important information on all warranties regarding your vehicle. We urge you to read these publications carefully and follow the recommendations to help assure enjoyable and safe operation of your new vehicle.
Kia offers a great variety of options, components and features for its various models. Therefore, some of the equipment described in this manual, along with the various illustrations, may not be applicable to your particular vehicle.
The information and specifications provided in this manual were accurate at the time of printing. Kia reserves the
right to discontinue or change specifications or design at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation. If you have questions, always check with your Kia dealer.
We assure you of our continuing interest in your motoring pleasure and satisfaction in your Kia vehicle.
© 2013 Kia Canada Inc.
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by
any information storage and retrieval system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written authorization from Kia Canada Inc.
Printed in U. S. A.
i
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) FOREWORD.QXP
1/23/2013
3:19 PM
Page 3
Introduction
1
How to use this manual / Fuel requirements / Vehicle break-in process / Vehicle handling instructions /
Vehicle data collection and event data recorders
2
Your vehicle at a glance
Exterior overview / Interior overview / Instrument panel overview / Engine compartment
3
Safety features of your vehicle
Seats / Seat belts / Child restraint system / Air bag
Features of your vehicle
4
Keys / Door locks / Tailgate / Windows / Hood / Fuel filler lid / Panoramic sunroof / Steering wheel / Mirrors
/ Instrument cluster / Lighting / Wipers & Washers / Climate control system / Multimedia system / Etc.
table of contents
Driving your vehicle
5
Before driving / Engine start/stop button / Transaxle / All Wheel Drive (AWD) / Brake system /
Cruise control system / Active ECO system / Winter driving / Vehicle load limit / Etc.
6
What to do in an emergency
Road warning / Emergency while driving / Emergency starting / Engine overheat / Flat tire / Towing / Etc.
Maintenance
7
Engine compartment / Maintenance service / Engine oil / Engine coolant / Brake fluid / Washer fluid /
Parking brake / Air cleaner / Wiper blades / Battery / Tire and wheels / Fuses / Etc.
Specifications & Consumer information
8
Index
I
ii
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 1.QXP
3/21/2013
3:25 PM
Page 1
Introduction
How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
• Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol . . . . . . . . . 1-3
• Do not use methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
• Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
• Operation in foreign countries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Vehicle handling instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Vehicle break-in process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 1.QXP
3/21/2013
3:25 PM
Page 2
Introduction
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
We want to help you get the greatest
possible driving pleasure from your
vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual can
assist you in many ways. We strongly recommend that you read the
entire manual. In order to minimize
the chance of death or injury, you
must read the WARNING and CAUTION sections in the manual.
Illustrations complement the words
in this manual to best explain how to
enjoy your vehicle. By reading your
manual, you will learn about features, important safety information,
and driving tips under various road
conditions.
The general layout of the manual is
provided in the Table of Contents.
Use the index when looking for a
specific area or subject; it has an
alphabetical listing of all information
in your manual.
Sections: This manual has eight sections plus an index. Each section
begins with a brief list of contents so
you can tell at a glance if that section
has the information you want.
You will find various WARNINGs,
CAUTIONs, and NOTICEs in this
manual. These WARNINGs were prepared to enhance your personal safety.You should carefully read and follow
ALL procedures and recommendations provided in these WARNINGs,
CAUTIONs and NOTICEs.
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation in which harm, serious bodily injury or death could result if
the warning is ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation
in which damage to your vehicle
could result if the caution is
ignored.
✽ NOTICE
A NOTICE indicates interesting or
helpful information is being provided.
1 2
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 1.QXP
3/21/2013
3:25 PM
Page 3
Introduction
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
Your new vehicle is designed to use
only unleaded fuel having a pump
octane number ((R+M)/2) of 87
(Research Octane Number 91) or
higher.
Your new vehicle is designed to
obtain maximum performance with
UNLEADED FUEL, as well as minimize exhaust emissions and spark
plug fouling.
CAUTION
Never add any fuel system
cleaning agents to the fuel tank
other than what has been specified. (Consult an authorized Kia
dealer for details.)
WARNING
• Do not "top off" after the nozzle automatically shuts off
when refueling.
• Tighten the cap until it clicks
one time, otherwise the Check
Engine
light will illuminate.
• Always check that the fuel cap
is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage, especially
in the event of an accident.
Gasoline containing alcohol and
methanol
Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and
ethanol (also known as grain alcohol), and gasoline or gasohol containing methanol (also known as
wood alcohol) are being marketed
along with or instead of leaded or
unleaded gasoline.
Pursuant to EPA regulations, ethanol
may be used in your vehicle.
Do not use gasohol containing more
than 10% ethanol, and do not use
gasoline or gasohol containing any
methanol. Ethanol provides less
energy than gasoline and it attracts
water, and it is thus likely to reduce
your fuel efficiency and could lower
your MPG results.
Methanol may cause drivability problems and damage to the fuel system.
Discontinue using gasohol of any
kind if drivability problems occur.
Vehicle damage or drivability problems may not be covered by the
manufacturer’s warranty if they result
from the use of:
1. Gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol.
2. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.
1 3
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 1.QXP
3/21/2013
3:25 PM
Page 4
Introduction
"E85" fuel is an alternative fuel comprised of 85 percent ethanol and 15
percent gasoline, and is manufactured exclusively for use in Flexible
Fuel Vehicles. “E85” is not compatible with your vehicle. Use of “E85”
may result in poor engine performance and damage to your vehicle's
engine and fuel system. Kia recommends that customers do not use
fuel with an ethanol content exceeding 15%.
CAUTION
Your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty does not cover damage to the fuel system or any
performance problems caused
by the use of “E85” fuel.
CAUTION
Never use gasohol which contains methanol. Discontinue use
of any gasohol product which
impairs drivability.
1 4
Use of MTBE
Kia recommends avoiding fuels containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl
Ether) over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen
Content 2.7% weight) in your vehicle.
Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0%
vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight)
may reduce vehicle performance and
produce vapor lock or hard starting.
CAUTION
Your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty may not cover damage
to the fuel system and any performance problems that are
caused by the use of fuels containing methanol or fuels containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary
Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol.
(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight.)
Do not use methanol
Fuels containing methanol (wood
alcohol) should not be used in your
vehicle. This type of fuel can reduce
vehicle performance and damage
components of the fuel system.
Fuel Additives
Kia recommends that you use good
quality gasolines treated with detergent additives such as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline, which help prevent deposit formation in the engine.
These gasolines will help the engine
run cleaner and enhance performance of the Emission Control
System. For more information on
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline,
please go to the website (www.toptiergas.com)
For customers who do not use TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,
and have problems starting or the
engine does not run smoothly, additives that you can buy separately
may be added to the gasoline.
If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is
not available, one bottle of additive
should be added to the fuel tank at
every 7,500miles or every engine oil
change is recommended. Additives
are available from your authorized
Kia dealer along with information on
how to use them. Do not mix other
additives.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 1.QXP
3/21/2013
3:25 PM
Page 5
Introduction
Operation in foreign countries
If you are going to drive your vehicle
in another country, be sure to:
• Observe all regulations regarding
registration and insurance.
• Determine that acceptable fuel is
available.
VEHICLE HANDLING
INSTRUCTIONS
VEHICLE BREAK-IN
PROCESS
As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control, an
accident or vehicle rollover.
Specific design characteristics (higher ground clearance, track, etc.) give
this vehicle a higher center of gravity
than other types of vehicles. In other
words they are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional 2-wheel drive vehicles.
Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers. Again, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of
control, an accident or vehicle
rollover. Be sure to read the
“Reducing the risk of a rollover”
driving guidelines, in section 5 of
this manual.
No special break-in period is needed. By following a few simple precautions for the first 1,000 km (600
miles) you may add to the performance, economy and life of your vehicle.
• Do not race the engine.
• While driving, keep your engine
speed (rpm, or revolutions per
minute) between 2,000 rpm and
4,000 rpm.
• Do not maintain a single speed for
long periods of time, either fast or
slow. Varying engine speed is
needed to properly break-in the
engine.
• Avoid hard stops, except in emergencies, to allow the brakes to seat
properly.
• Don't let the engine idle longer
than 3 minutes at one time.
• Don't tow a trailer during the first
2,000 km (1,200 miles) of operation.
1 5
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 2.QXP
1/23/2013
3:21 PM
Page 1
Your vehicle at a glance
Exterior overview .I. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Exterior overview
Interior
overview .II.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-4
Interior overview
Instrument
panel overview
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-5
Instrument
Engine
compartment
panel overview
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2-6
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 2.QXP
1/23/2013
3:21 PM
Page 2
Your vehicle at a glance
EXTERIOR OVERVIEW
■ Front view
1. Hood......................................................4-38
2. Head lamp ...........................................4-108
3. Fog lamp .............................................4-112
4. Wheel and tire .......................................7-50
5. Outside rearview mirror.........................4-64
6. Panorama sunroof.................................4-44
7. Front windshield wiper blades ...............7-44
8. Windows ................................................4-33
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
OXMA013001
2 2
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 2.QXP
1/23/2013
3:21 PM
Page 3
Your vehicle at a glance
■ Rear view
9. Door locks .............................................4-21
10. Fuel filler lid .........................................4-40
11. Rear combination lamp
12. High mounted stop lamp
13. Rear window wiper blade ....................7-45
14. Tailgate ................................................4-25
15. Antenna .............................................4-159
16. Rearview camera ..............................4-106
17. Parking assist system .......................4-102
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
OXM013002L
2 3
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 2.QXP
1/23/2013
3:21 PM
Page 4
Your vehicle at a glance
INTERIOR OVERVIEW
1. Driver position memory system button .....3-8
2. Inside door handle ...................................4-22
3. Power window switch...............................4-33
4. Central door lock switch ..........................4-23
5. Power window lock button .......................4-36
6. Outside rearview mirror control ...............4-65
7. Outside rearview mirror folding ...............4-66
8. Fuel filler lid open switch .........................4-40
9. Parking assist system On/Off button.....4-102
10. AWD Lock button...................................5-23
11. ESC Off button ......................................5-36
12. Instrument panel illumination
control switch .........................................4-69
13. BSD On/OFF button ..............................5-49
14. Steering wheel.......................................4-49
15. Steering wheel warmer On/Off Button ..4-51
16. Tilt and telescopic steering
control lever .........................................4-50
17. Lighting control lever............................4-109
18. Inner panel fuse panel...........................7-65
19. Parking brake pedal...............................5-32
20. Hood release lever.................................4-38
21. AC inverter...........................................4-152
22. Active ECO ...........................................5-54
23. Seat..........................................................3-2
❈ The actual interior in the vehicle may differ from the illustration
2 4
OXMA013003N
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 2.QXP
1/23/2013
3:21 PM
Page 5
Your vehicle at a glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
1. Audio remote control buttons ............4-160
2. Driver’s front air bag ............................3-60
3. Horn.....................................................4-51
4. Instrument cluster................................4-68
5. Wiper and washer control lever .........4-113
6. Ignition switch or
Engine start/stop button .................5-5, 5-8
7. Cruise control button ...........................5-44
8. Digital clock .......................................4-154
9. Audio .................................................4-159
10. Hazard warning flasher .......................6-2
11. Climate control system.........4-121, 4-131
12. Front seat warmer /
Seat cooler ...............................3-12, 3-14
13. Power outlet.....................................4-151
14. Cup holder.......................................4-149
15. Center console storage box ............4-146
16. Rear seat warmer..............................3-21
17. Glove box ........................................4-146
18. Passenger’s front air bag ..................3-60
❈ The actual instrument panel in the vehicle may differ from the illustration
OXM013004L
2 5
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 2.QXP
1/23/2013
3:21 PM
Page 6
Your vehicle at a glance
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
■ Gasoline Engine (Theta II 2.4L) - GDI
1. Engine coolant reservoir ...................7-34
2. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-31
3. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir ...............7-36
4. Air cleaner.........................................7-39
5. Fuse box ...........................................7-64
6. Negative battery terminal..................7-47
■ Gasoline Engine (Lambda II 3.3L) - GDI
7. Positive battery terminal ...................7-47
8. Radiator cap .....................................7-35
9. Engine oil dipstick .............................7-31
10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir ...7-37
❈ The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
2 6
ODMEMC2001/ONCEIN2007
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:22 PM
Page 1
Safety features of your vehicle
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
• Front seat adjustment - Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
• Front seat adjustment - Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
• Seat warmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
• Seat cooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
• Rear seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
• Seat belt restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
• Pre-tensioner seat belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
• Seat belt precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
• Care of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
• Using a child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
• Tether Anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
• Securing a child restraint seat with
child seat lower anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Air bag - supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . 3-47
• How does the air bag system operate . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
• Do not Installing a child restraint on a front
passenger's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
• Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
• SRS components and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
• Occupant classification system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
• Main components of occupant detection system . . . 3-55
• Driver's and passenger's front air bag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
• Side air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
• Curtain air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
• Inflation and non-inflation conditions of
the air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70, 3-72
• SRS Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74
• Additional safety precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
• Air bag warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
3
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:22 PM
Page 2
Safety features of your vehicle
SEATS
Front seat
(1) Forward and backward
(2) Seatback angle
(3) Seat cushion height
(Driver’s seat)
(4) Lumbar support (Driver’s seat)*
(5) Seat warmer* /
Seat cooler (Air ventilation seat)*
(6) Headrest
Manual seat
Manual seat
2nd row seat
(7) Forward and backward*
(8) Seatback angle and folding
(9) Headrest
(10) Armrest
(11) Seat warmer*
Power seat
Power seat
3rd row seat*
(12) Seatback folding
(13) Headrest
* if equipped
OXMA033001
3 2
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:22 PM
Page 3
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Loose
objects
Loose objects in the driver’s
foot area could interfere with
the operation of the foot pedals,
possibly causing an accident.
Do not place anything under the
front seats.
WARNING - Uprighting
seat
When you return the seatback
to its upright position, hold the
seatback and return it slowly
and be sure there are no other
passengers around the seat. If
the seatback is returned without being held and controlled,
the back of the seat could
spring forward resulting in accidental injury to a person struck
by the seatback.
WARNING - Driver
responsibility for front seat
passenger
Riding in a vehicle with a front
seatback reclined could lead to
serious or fatal injury in an accident. If a front seat is reclined
during an accident, the occupant’s hips may slide under the
lap portion of the seat belt, applying great force to the unprotected abdomen. Serious or fatal
internal injuries could result. The
driver must advise the front passenger to keep the seatback in
an upright position whenever the
vehicle is in motion.
WARNING
Do not use a sitting cushion that
reduces friction between the seat
and passenger. The passenger’s
hips may slide under the lap portion of the seat belt during an
accident or a sudden stop.
Serious or fatal internal injuries
could result because the seat
belt cannot operate normally.
WARNING - Driver’s seat
• Never attempt to adjust the
seat while the vehicle is moving. This could result in loss
of control, and an accident
causing death, serious injury,
or property damage.
• Do not allow anything to interfere with the normal position
of the seatback. Storing items
against a seatback or in any
other way interfering with
proper locking of a seatback
could result in serious or fatal
injury in a sudden stop or collision.
• Always drive and ride with
your seatback upright and the
lap portion of the seat belt
snug and low across the hips.
This is the best position to
protect you in case of an accident.
(Continued)
3 3
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:22 PM
Page 4
Safety features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• In order to avoid unnecessary
and perhaps severe air bag
injuries, always sit as far back
as possible from the steering
wheel while maintaining comfortable control of the vehicle.
We recommend that your chest
be at least 25 cm (10 inches)
away from the steering wheel.
3 4
WARNING - Rear seatbacks
• The rear seatback must be
securely latched. If not, passengers and objects could be
thrown forward resulting in
serious injury or death in the
event of a sudden stop or collision.
• Luggage and other cargo
should be laid flat in the cargo
area. If objects are large, heavy,
or must be piled, they must be
secured. Under no circumstances should cargo be piled
higher than the seatbacks.
Failure to follow these warnings
could result in serious injury or
death in the event of a sudden
stop, collision or rollover.
• No passenger should ride in
the cargo area or sit or lie on
folded seatbacks while the
vehicle is moving. All passengers must be properly seated
in seats and restrained properly while riding.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When resetting the seatback to
the upright position, make sure
it is securely latched by pushing it forward and backwards.
• To avoid the possibility of
burns, do not remove the carpet in the cargo area. Emission
control devices beneath this
floor generate high temperatures.
WARNING
After adjusting the seat, always
check that it is securely locked
into place by attempting to
move the seat forward or backward without using the lock
release lever. Sudden or unexpected movement of the driver's seat could cause you to
lose control of the vehicle
resulting in an accident.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:22 PM
Page 5
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
• Do not adjust the seat while
wearing seat belts. Moving the
seat cushion forward may
cause strong pressure on the
abdomen.
• Use extreme caution so that
hands or other objects are not
caught in the seat mechanisms
while the seat is moving.
• Do not put a cigarette lighter
on the floor or seat. When you
operate the seat, gas may
gush out of the lighter and
cause fire.
Front seat adjustment - manual
Seatback angle
Forward and backward
OXM039003
OXM039002
To move the seat forward or backward:
1. Pull the seat slide adjustment
lever up and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seat is locked in place.
Adjust the seat before driving, and
make sure the seat is locked securely
by trying to move forward and backward without using the lever. If the
seat moves, it is not locked properly.
To recline the seatback:
1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the
seatback recline lever.
2. Carefully lean back on the seat
and adjust the seatback of the
seat to the position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seatback is locked in place.
(The lever MUST return to its original position for the seatback to
lock.)
3 5
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:23 PM
Page 6
Safety features of your vehicle
Seat height (for driver’s seat)
Lumbar support (if equipped)
Front seat adjustment - power
(if equipped)
The front seat can be adjusted by
using the control switches located on
the outside of the seat cushion.
Before driving, adjust the seat to the
proper position so you can easily
control the steering wheel, pedals
and switches on the instrument
panel.
OXM039004
OXM033018
To change the height of the seat,
push the lever upwards or downwards.
• To lower the seat cushion, push the
lever down several times.
• To raise the seat cushion, pull the
lever up several times.
The lumbar support can be adjusted
by pressing the lumbar support
switch on the side of the seat.
1. Press the front portion of the
switch to increase support, or the
rear portion of the switch, to
decrease support.
2. Release the switch once it reaches the desired position.
3 6
WARNING
The power seat is operable with
the ignition OFF.
Therefore, children should
never be left unattended in the
vehicle.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:23 PM
Page 7
Safety features of your vehicle
CAUTION
• The power seat is driven by an
electric motor. Stop operating
once the adjustment is completed. Excessive operation
may damage the electrical
equipment.
• When in operation, the power
seat consumes a large
amount of electrical power. To
prevent unnecessary charging
system drain, don’t adjust the
power seat longer than necessary while the engine is not
running.
• Do not operate two or more
power seat control switches at
the same time. Doing so may
result in power seat motor or
electrical component malfunction.
Forward and backward
Seatback angle
OXM039006
OXM039007
Push the control switch forward or
backward to move the seat to the
desired position. Release the switch
once the seat reaches the desired
position.
Push the control switch forward or
backward to move the seatback to
the desired angle. Release the
switch once the seat reaches the
desired position.
3 7
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:23 PM
Page 8
Safety features of your vehicle
Seat height (for driver’s seat)
Lumbar support (for driver’s seat)
OXM039008
OXM039009
Pull the front portion of the control
switch up to raise or press down to
lower the front part of the seat cushion. Pull the rear portion of the control switch up to raise or press down
to lower the rear part of the seat
cushion. Release the switch once the
seat reaches the desired position.
The lumbar support can be adjusted
by pressing the button.
3 8
Driver position memory system
(if equipped, for power seat)
OXM033002
A driver position memory system is
provided to store and recall the driver seat and outside rearview mirror
position with a simple button operation. By saving the desired position
into the system memory, different
drivers can reposition the driver seat
based upon their driving preference.
If the battery is disconnected, the
desired seat position memory will
need to be re-saved.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:23 PM
Page 9
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
Never attempt to operate the
driver position memory system
while the vehicle is moving.
This could result in loss of control, and an accident causing
death, serious injury, or property
damage.
Storing positions into memory
using the buttons on the door
Storing driver’s seat positions
1. Shift the shift lever into P (for
Automatic transaxle) while the
engine start/stop button is ON or
ignition switch ON.
2. Adjust the driver’s seat and outside rearview mirror comfortable
for the driver.
3. Press SET button on the control
panel. The system will beep once.
4. Press one of the memory buttons
(1 or 2) within 5 seconds after
pressing the SET button. The system will beep twice when memory
has been successfully stored.
Recalling positions from memory
1. Shift the shift lever into P (for
Automatic transaxle) while the
engine start/stop button is ON or
ignition switch ON.
2. To recall the position in the memory, press the desired memory button (1 or 2). The system will beep
once, then the driver’s seat will
automatically adjust to the stored
position.
Adjusting the control switch for the
driver’s seat while the system is
recalling the stored position will
cause the movement to stop and
move in the direction that the control
switch is moved.
WARNING
Use caution when recalling the
adjustment memory while sitting in the vehicle. Push the seat
position control switch to the
desired position immediately if
the seat moves too far in any
direction.
3 9
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:23 PM
Page 10
Safety features of your vehicle
Easy access function
(if equipped)
The system will move the driver's
seat automatically as follows:
• Without smart key system
- It will move the driver’s seat rearward when the ignition key is
removed.
- It will move the driver’s seat forward when the ignition key is
inserted.
• With smart key system
- It will move the driver’s seat rearward when the engine start/stop
button is changed to the OFF
position.
- It will move the driver’s seat forward when the engine start/stop
button is changed to the ACC or
START position.
You can activate or deactivate this
feature. Refer to "User settings" in
chapter 4.
3 10
Headrest (for front seat)
WARNING
OHM038048N
The driver's and front passenger's
seats are equipped with a headrest
for the occupant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides comfort for the driver and front passenger,
but also helps protect the head and
neck in the event of a rear collision.
• For maximum effectiveness in
case of an accident, the headrest should be adjusted so the
middle of the headrest is at
the same height of the center
of gravity of an occupant's
head. Generally, the center of
gravity of most people's head
is similar with the height of
the top of their eyes. Also,
adjust the headrest as close
to your head as possible. For
this reason, the use of a cushion that holds the body away
from the seatback is not recommended.
• Do not operate the vehicle
with the headrests removed.
Severe injury to the occupants may occur in the event
of an accident. Headrests may
provide protection against
neck injuries when properly
adjusted.
• Do not adjust the headrest
position of the driver’s seat
while the vehicle is in motion.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:23 PM
Page 11
Safety features of your vehicle
CAUTION
Excessive pulling or pushing
may damage the headrest.
OXM039011
OXM039010
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (1). To lower the
headrest, push and hold the release
button (2) on the headrest support
and lower the headrest to the desired
position (3).
Adjusting the angle (if equipped)
The headrest angle may be adjusted
by pulling or pushing the lower part of
the headrest.
Adjust the headrest so that it properly
supports the head and neck.
3 11
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:23 PM
Page 12
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
A gap between the seat and the
headrest release button may
appear when sitting on the seat
or when you push or pull the
seat. Be careful not to get your
finger, etc. caught in the gap.
Seat warmer (if equipped)
■ Type A
HNF2041-1
Active headrest
The active headrest is designed to
move forward and upward during a
rear impact. This helps prevent the
driver's and front passenger’s heads
from moving backward and thus
helps minimize neck injuries.
For your safety, the active headrest
can’t be removed. If there is any
problem with the active headrest,
take your vehicle to an authorized
Kia dealer and have the system
checked.
3 12
OXM033005
■ Type B
OXM033004
The seat warmer is provided to warm
the front seats during cold weather.
With the ignition switch in the ON
position, push either of the switches
to warm the driver's seat or the front
passenger's seat.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:23 PM
Page 13
Safety features of your vehicle
During mild weather or under conditions where the operation of the seat
warmer is not needed, keep the
switches in the "OFF" position.
• Each time you press the switch,
the temperature setting of the seat
will change as follows :
)→MIDDLE(
)→LOW(
)
→
OFF→HIGH(
• The seat warmer defaults to the
OFF position whenever the ignition
switch is turned on.
✽ NOTICE
With the seat warmer switch in the
ON position, the heating system in
the seat turns off or on automatically depending on the seat temperature.
CAUTION
• When cleaning the seats, do
not use an organic solvent
such as paint thinner, benzene, alcohol and gasoline.
Doing so may damage the surface of the heater or seats.
• To prevent overheating the
seat warmer, do not place anything on the seats that insulates against heat, such as
blankets, cushions or seat
covers while the seat warmer
is in operation.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped
with seat warmers. Damage to
the seat warming components
could occur.
• Be careful not to spill liquid
such as water or beverages on
the seat. If you spill some liquid, wipe the seat with a dry
towel. Before using the seat
warmer, dry the seat completely.
WARNING - Seat warmer
burns
Passengers should use extreme
caution when using seat warmers due to the possibility of
excess heating or burns. The
seat warmer may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of
time. In particular, the driver
must exercise extreme care for
the following types of passengers:
1. Infants, children, elderly or
handicapped persons, or
hospital outpatients
2. Persons with sensitive skin
or those that burn easily
3. Fatigued individuals
4. Intoxicated individuals
5. Individuals taking medication
that can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness (sleeping pills,
cold tablets, etc.)
3 13
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:23 PM
Page 14
Safety features of your vehicle
Seat cooler (Air ventilation seat)
(if equipped)
OXM033003
The temperature setting of the seat
changes according to the switch
position.
• If you want to cool your seat cushion, press the switch (blue color).
• Each time you press the button,
the airflow will change as follows:
→
OFF→HIGH(
3 14
)→MIDDLE(
)→LOW(
)
• The seat warmer (with air ventilation) defaults to the OFF position
whenever the ignition switch is
turned on.
CAUTION - Seat damage
• When cleaning the seats, do
not use an organic solvent
such as paint thinner, benzene, alcohol and gasoline.
Doing so may damage the air
ventilation seat.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on the seat. Those
things may damage the air
ventilation seat.
• Be careful not to spill liquid
such as water or beverages on
the seat. If you spill some liquid,
wipe the seat with a dry towel.
Before using the air ventilation
seat, dry the seat completely.
Seatback pocket
ORP032013
The seatback pocket is provided on
the back of the front passenger’s and
driver’s seatbacks.
WARNING - Seatback
pockets
Do not put heavy or sharp
objects in the seatback pockets.
In an accident they could come
loose from the pocket and
injure vehicle occupants.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:23 PM
Page 15
Safety features of your vehicle
Seatback angle (2nd row seat)
Rear seat adjustment
Forward and backward
(2nd row seat)
Walk-in seat
(2nd row seat, if equipped)
OXM039031
OXMA033104
OXMA033103
To move the seat forward or backward:
1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever
up and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seat is locked in place.
Adjust the seat before driving, and
make sure the seat is locked securely
by trying to move forward and backward without using the lever. If the
seat moves, it is not locked properly.
To recline the seatback:
1. Pull up the seatback recline lever.
2. Hold the lever and adjust the seatback of the seat to the position you
desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seatback is locked in place.
(The lever MUST return to its original position for the seatback to
lock.)
OXMA033105
To get in or out of the 3rd row seat,
1. Route the seat belt webbing
through the rear seat belt guide clip.
After inserting the seat belt, tighten
the belt webbing by pulling it up.
2. Pull up the walk-in lever (1) on the
2nd row seatback.
3 15
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:23 PM
Page 16
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
Never attempt to adjust the 2nd
row seat while the vehicle is
moving or the seat is occupied
as the seat may suddenly move
and cause the passenger on the
seat to be injured.
OXMA033106
3. Fold the 2nd row seatback and
push the seat to the farthest forward position.
After getting in or out, slide the 2nd
row seat to the farthest rearward
position and pull the seatback firmly backward until it clicks into
place. Make sure that the seat is
locked in place.
3 16
Folding the rear seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded to
facilitate carrying long items or to
increase the luggage capacity of the
vehicle.
WARNING
The purpose of the fold-down
rear seatbacks is to allow you to
carry longer objects that could
not be accommodated in the
cargo area.
Never allow passengers to sit
on top of the folded down seatback while the vehicle is moving. This is not a proper seating
position and no seat belts are
available for use. This could
result in serious injury or death
in case of an accident or sudden stop. Objects carried on the
folded down seatback should
not extend higher than the top
of the front seatbacks. This
could allow cargo to slide forward and cause injury or damage during sudden stops.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:24 PM
Page 17
Safety features of your vehicle
■ 2nd row seat
To fold down the rear seatback
1. Insert the rear seat belt buckle in
the pocket between the rear seatback and cushion, and insert the
rear seat belt webbing in the guide
to prevent the seat belt from being
damaged.
2. Set the front seatback to the
upright position and if necessary,
slide the front seat forward.
3. Lower the rear headrests to the
lowest position.
■ 3rd row seat (if equipped)
ODM032034/OXM039030/OXM039031/OXM039032
3 17
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:24 PM
Page 18
Safety features of your vehicle
4.Pull on the seatback folding lever
or strap, then fold the seat toward
the front of the vehicle. When you
return the seatback to its upright
position, always be sure it has
locked into position by pushing on
the top of the seatback.
5.To use the rear seat, lift and pull
the seatback backward by pulling
on the folding lever or strap.
Pull the seatback firmly until it
clicks into place.
Make sure the seatback is locked
in place.
6.Return the rear seat belt to the
proper position.
■ 2nd row seat
■ 3rd row seat (if equipped)
ODM032028/OXM039022/ODM032030/OXM039025
3 18
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:24 PM
Page 19
Safety features of your vehicle
To fold down the rear center seatback (for 2nd row seat)
ODM032033
1. Lower the rear headrests to the
lowest position.
2. Push the center seatback folding
lever up, then fold the seat toward
the front of the vehicle.
When you return the seatback to its
upright position, always be sure it
has locked into position by pushing
on the top of the seatback.
WARNING - 2nd row center seat folding
• Do not fold the 2nd row center
seat, if there are occupants in
the 3rd row seats, as this may
result in injury to occupants if
the seat moves during a collision. If occupants in the 3rd
row seats, fix the 2nd row center seat in its upright and
locked position.
• The 2nd row center seat back
does not lock into position
when it is folded toward the
front of the vehicle. If you use
the 2nd row center seat back
folding function to carry long
objects, you should fix the
long object to prevent it from
being thrown about the vehicle in a collision and causing
injury to vehicle occupants.
WARNING - Uprighting
seat
When you return the seatback
to its upright position, hold the
seatback and return it slowly. If
the seatback is returned without holding it, the back of the
seat could spring forward
resulting in injury caused by
being struck by the seatback.
CAUTION - Damaging
rear seat belt buckles
When you fold the rear (2nd
and/or 3rd row) seatback, insert
the buckle in the pocket between
the rear seatback and cushion.
Doing so can prevent the buckle
from being damaged by the rear
seatback.
3 19
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:24 PM
Page 20
Safety features of your vehicle
CAUTION - Rear seat belts
When returning the rear (2nd
and/or 3rd row) seatbacks to the
upright position, remember to
return the rear shoulder belts to
their proper position. Routing the
seat belt webbing through the
rear seat belt guides will help
keep the belts from being trapped
behind or under the seats.
WARNING - Cargo
Cargo should always be
secured to prevent it from being
thrown about the vehicle in a
collision and causing injury to
the vehicle occupants. Do not
place objects in the rear (2nd
and/or 3rd row) seats, since they
cannot be properly secured and
may hit the front seat occupants
in a collision.
3 20
WARNING - Cargo loading
Make sure the engine is off, the
automatic transaxle is in P (Park)
or the manual transaxle is in R
(Reverse) or 1st, and the parking
brake is securely applied whenever loading or unloading cargo.
Failure to take these steps may
allow the vehicle to move if the
shift lever is inadvertently
moved to another position.
OUN026140
WARNING - 3rd row seat
3rd row occupants should
always remain in the center of
the seat cushion so the occupants head is protected by the
headrest.
If not, the tailgate may hit the
occupant's head, which could
cause injury.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:24 PM
Page 21
Safety features of your vehicle
Rear seat warmer (if equipped)
✽ NOTICE
With the seat warmer switch in ON
position, the heating system in the
seat turns off or on automatically
depending on the seat temperature.
CAUTION
OXMA033015
The seat warmer is provided to warm
the rear seats during cold weather.
With the ignition switch in the ON
position, push either of the switches
to warm rear seats.
During mild weather or under conditions where the operation of the seat
warmer is not needed, keep the
switches in the "OFF" position.
The seat warmer defaults to the OFF
position whenever the ignition switch
is turned on.
• When cleaning the seats, do
not use an organic solvent
such as thinner, benzene, alcohol and gasoline. Doing so may
damage the surface of the
heater or seats.
• To prevent overheating the seat
warmer, do not place anything
on the seats that insulates
against heat, such as blankets,
cushions or seat covers while
the seat warmer is in operation.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped
with seat warmers. Damage to
the seat warming components
could occur.
• Be careful not to spill liquid
such as water or beverages on
the seat. If you spill some liquid,
wipe the seat with a dry towel.
Before using the seat warmer,
dry the seat completely.
WARNING - Seat warmer
burns
Passengers should use extreme
caution when using seat warmers due to the possibility of
excess heating or burns. The
seat warmer may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of
time. In particular, the driver
must exercise extreme care for
the following types of passengers:
1. Infants, children, elderly or
handicapped persons, or
hospital outpatients
2. Persons with sensitive skin
or those that burn easily
3. Fatigued individuals
4. Intoxicated individuals
5. Individuals taking medication
that can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness (sleeping pills,
cold tablets, etc.)
3 21
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:24 PM
Page 22
Safety features of your vehicle
Headrest
WARNING - Headrest
adjustment
*
*
* if equipped
OHM038049N
The rear seat(s) is equipped with
headrests in all the seating positions
for the occupant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides comfort for passengers, but also helps
protect the head and neck in the
event of a collision.
3 22
• For maximum effectiveness in
case of an accident, the headrest should be adjusted so the
middle of the headrest is at the
same height as the center of
gravity of an occupant's head.
Generally, the center of gravity of most people's head is
similar with the height of the
top of their eyes.
Also adjust the headrest as
close to your head as possible. For this reason, the use of
a cushion that holds the body
away from the seatback is not
recommended.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not operate the vehicle
with the headrests removed.
Severe injury to an occupant
may occur in the event of an
accident. Headrests may provide protection against severe
neck injuries when properly
adjusted.
• Do not adjust the headrest
height while the vehicle is in
motion.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:24 PM
Page 23
Safety features of your vehicle
Adjusting the height up and down
(for 2nd row seats)
■ Outside
OXMA033108
■ Center
To lower the headrest :
1. Push and hold the release button
(2) on the headrest support
2. Lower the headrest to the desired
position (3).
Removal and installation
(for 2nd row seats)
OXMA033107
To remove the headrest :
1. Raise it as far as it can go then
press the release button (1) while
pulling the headrest up (2).
OXMA033018
To reinstall the headrest :
1. Put the headrest poles (3) into the
holes while pressing the release
button (1).
2. Adjust it to the appropriate height.
To raise the headrest :
1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).
3 23
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:24 PM
Page 24
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
3rd row headrest (if equipped)
Armrest (2nd row seat)
• Make sure the headrest locks
in position after adjusting it to
properly protect the occupants.
• After installing the headrest,
make sure that it is installed
in the right direction.
A headrest installed reversely
could increase whiplash
injury during rear impact.
3 24
OXM039061N
OXMA043215
The headrest will fold down automatically when the seatback folding.
Always be sure the headrest has
locked into position after you return
the seatback.
To use the armrest, pull it forward
from the seatback.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:24 PM
Page 25
Safety features of your vehicle
SEAT BELTS
Seat belt restraint system
WARNING
• For maximum restraint system protection, the seat belts
must always be used whenever the vehicle is moving.
• Seat belts are most effective
when seatbacks are in the
upright position.
• Children age 12 and under
must always be properly
restrained in the rear seat.
Never allow children to ride in
the front passenger seat. If a
child over 12 must be seated
in the front seat, he/she must
be properly belted and the
seat should be moved as far
back as possible.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never wear the shoulder belt
under your arm or behind
your back. An improperly
positioned shoulder belt can
cause serious injuries in a
crash. The shoulder belt
should be positioned midway
over your shoulder across
your collarbone.
• Avoid wearing twisted seat
belts. A twisted belt can't do
its job well. In a collision, it
could even cut into you. Be
sure the belt webbing is
straight and not twisted.
• Be careful not to damage the
belt webbing or hardware. If
the belt webbing or hardware
is damaged, replace it.
WARNING
Seat belts are designed to bear
upon the bony structure of the
body, and should be worn low
across the front of the pelvis or
the pelvis, chest and shoulders,
as applicable; wearing the lap
section of the belt across the
abdominal area must be avoided.
Seat belts should be adjusted as
firmly as possible, consistent
with comfort, to provide the protection for which they have been
designed.
A slack belt will greatly reduce
the protection afforded to the
wearer.
Care should be taken to avoid
contamination of the webbing
with polishes, oils and chemicals,
and particularly battery acid.
Cleaning may safely be carried
out using mild soap and water.
The belt should be replaced if
webbing becomes frayed, contaminated or damaged.
(Continued)
3 25
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:24 PM
Page 26
Safety features of your vehicle
(Continued)
It is essential to replace the
entire assembly after it has been
worn in a severe impact even if
damage to the assembly is not
obvious.
Belts should not be worn with
straps twisted. Each belt assembly must only be used by one
occupant; it is dangerous to put
a belt around a child being carried on the occupant's lap.
3 26
WARNING
• No modifications or additions
should be made by the user
which will either prevent the
seat belt adjusting devices
from operating to remove
slack, or prevent the seat belt
assembly from being adjusted
to remove slack.
• When you fasten the seat belt,
be careful not to latch the seat
belt in buckles of other seat. It's
very dangerous and you may
not be protected by the seat
belt properly.
• Do not unfasten the seat belt
and do not fasten and unfasten
the seat belt repeatedly while
driving. This could result in
loss of control, and an accident
causing death, serious injury,
or property damage.
• When fastening the seat belt,
make sure that the seat belt
does not pass over objects that
are hard or can break easily.
• Make sure there is nothing in
the buckle. The seat belt may
not be fastened securely.
Seat belt warning (for driver’s seat)
1GQA2083
The driver's seat belt warning light
and chime will activate pursuant to
the following table when the ignition
switch is in "ON" position.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:24 PM
Page 27
Safety features of your vehicle
Conditions
Seat Belt
Vehicle
Speed
Unbuckled
Unbuckled
ChimeSound
Light-Blink
Seat belt - Driver's 3-point system
with emergency locking retractor
6 seconds
Buckled
Buckled →
Unbuckled
Warning Pattern
6 seconds
None
Below 5 km/h
6 seconds
(3 mph)
None
5 km/h~
10 km/h
6 seconds
Above 10 km/h
(6 mph)
6 sec. on / 24 sec. off
(11 times)
Above 10 km/h
(6 mph)
6 seconds *1
↓
↓
Below 5 km/h
(3 mph)
Stop *2
*1 Warning pattern repeats 11 times
with an interval of 24 seconds. If
the driver's seat belt is buckled, the
light will stop within 6 seconds and
chime will stop immediately.
*2 The light will stop within 6 seconds
and chime will stop immediately.
B180A01NF-1
To fasten your seat belt:
To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of
the retractor and insert the metal tab
(1) into the buckle (2). There will be
an audible "click" when the tab locks
into the buckle.
The seat belt automatically adjusts to
the proper length only after the lap
belt portion is adjusted manually so
that it fits snugly around your hips. If
you lean forward in a slow, easy
motion, the belt will extend and let
you move around. If there is a sudden stop or impact, however, the belt
will lock into position. It will also lock
if you try to lean forward too quickly.
✽ NOTICE
If you are not able to pull out the
seat belt from the retractor, firmly
pull the belt out and release it. Then
you will be able to pull the belt out
smoothly.
3 27
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:25 PM
Page 28
Safety features of your vehicle
Release the button to lock the
anchor into position. Try sliding the
height adjuster to make sure that it
has locked into position.
Front seat
WARNING
OXM039026
Height adjustment
You can adjust the height of the shoulder belt anchor to one of the 4 positions for maximum comfort and safety.
The height of the adjusting seat belt
should not be too close to your neck.
The shoulder portion should be
adjusted so that it lies across your
chest and midway over your shoulder
near the door and not your neck.
To adjust the height of the seat belt
anchor, lower or raise the height
adjuster into an appropriate position.
To raise the height adjuster, pull it up
(1). To lower it, push it down (3) while
pressing the height adjuster button
(2).
3 28
• Verify that the shoulder belt
anchor is locked into position
at the appropriate height.
Never position the shoulder
belt across your neck or face.
Improperly positioned seat
belts can cause serious
injuries in an accident.
• Failure to replace seat belts
after an accident could leave
you with damaged seat belts
that will not provide protection in the event of another
collision leading to personal
injury or death. Replace your
seat belts after being in an
accident as soon as possible.
B200A02NF
WARNING
You should place the lap belt
portion as low as possible and
snugly across your hips, not on
your waist. If the lap belt is located too high on your waist, it may
increase the chance of injury in
the event of a collision. Both
arms should not be under or
over the belt. Rather, one should
be over and the other under, as
shown in the illustration.
Never wear the seat belt under
the arm that is near the door.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:25 PM
Page 29
Safety features of your vehicle
Seat belts - Front passenger and
rear seat 3-point system with
combination locking retractor
To fasten your seat belt:
Combination retractor type seat belts
are installed in the rear seat positions to help accommodate the
installation of child restraint systems.
Although a combination retractor is
also installed in the front passenger
seat position, it is strongly recommended that children always be
seated in the rear seat. NEVER
place any infant restraint system in
the front seat of the vehicle.
This type of seat belt combines the
features of both an emergency locking retractor seat belt and an automatic locking retractor seat belt. To
fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the
retractor and insert the metal tab into
the buckle. There will be an audible
"click" when the tab locks into the
buckle. When not securing a child
restraint, the seat belt operates in the
same way as the driver's seat belt
(Emergency Locking Retractor Type).
It automatically adjusts to the proper
length only after the lap belt portion
of the seat belt is adjusted manually
so that it fits snugly around your hips.
When the seat belt is fully extended
from the retractor to allow the installation of a child restraint system, the
seat belt operation changes to allow
the belt to retract, but not to extend
(Automatic Locking Retractor Type).
Refer to “Using a child restraint system” in this section.
✽ NOTICE
Although the combination retractor
provides the same level of protection
for seated passengers in either emergency or automatic locking modes,
have the seated passengers use the
emergency locking feature for
improved convenience. The automatic locking function is intended to
facilitate child restraint installation.
To convert from the automatic locking feature to the emergency locking
operation mode, allow the unbuckled seat belt to fully retract.
CAUTION
Do NOT fold down the left portion of the rear seat back when
the rear center seat belt is buckled. ALWAYS UNBUCKLE the
rear center seat belt before folding down the left portion of the
rear seat back. If the rear center
seat belt is buckled when the
left portion of the rear seat back
is folded down, distortion and
damage to the top portion of the
seat back and seat belt garnish
may result, causing the seat
back to lock into the folded
down position.
3 29
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:25 PM
Page 30
Safety features of your vehicle
Stowing the rear seat belt
■ 2nd row seat
ODM032051
B210A01NF-1
When using the rear center seat belt,
the buckle with the “CENTER” mark
must be used.
To release the seat belt:
The seat belt is released by pressing
the release button (1) on the locking
buckle. When it is released, the belt
should automatically draw back into
the retractor.
If this does not happen, check the
belt to be sure it is not twisted, then
try again.
ODM032034
■ 3rd row seat (if equipped)
OXM039030
The rear seat belt buckles can be
stowed in the pocket between the
rear seatback and cushion when not
in use.
3 30
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:25 PM
Page 31
Safety features of your vehicle
■ 2nd row seat
CAUTION
Pre-tensioner seat belt
Remove the seat belt from the
guides before using. If you pull
on the seat belt when it is stored
in the guides, it may damage the
guides and/or belt webbing.
OXM039031
■ 3rd row seat (if equipped)
OXMA033101
OXM039032
Routing the seat belt webbing
through the rear seat belt guides will
help keep the belts from being
trapped behind or under the seats.
After inserting the seat belt, tighten
the belt webbing by pulling it up.
Your vehicle is equipped with driver's
and front passenger's pre-tensioner
seat belts (retractor pretensioner and
EFD (Emergency Fastening Device)).
The pre-tensioner seat belts may be
activated, when a frontal collision is
severe enough, together with the air
bags.
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or
if the occupant tries to lean forward
too quickly, the seat belt retractor
may lock into position. In certain
frontal collisions, the pre-tensioner
will activate and pull the seat belt into
tighter contact against the occupant's body.
3 31
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:25 PM
Page 32
Safety features of your vehicle
(1) Retractor Pretensioner
The purpose of the retractor pretensioner is to make sure that the
shoulder belts fit in tightly against
the occupant's upper body in certain frontal collisions.
(2) EFD (Emergency Fastening Device)
The purpose of the EFD is to
make sure that the pelvis belts fit
in tightly against the occupant's
lower body in certain frontal collisions.
If the system senses excessive tension on the driver or passenger's
seat belt when the pre-tensioner system activates, the load limiter inside
the retractor pre-tensioner will release
some of the pressure on the affected
seat belt.
3 32
WARNING
• Do not put anything near the
buckle. Placing objects near
the buckle may increase the
risk of personal injury in the
event of a collision.
• For your safety, be sure that
the belt webbing is not loose
or twisted and always sit
properly on your seat.
ODMESA2024
The seat belt pre-tensioner system
consists mainly of the following components. Their locations are shown in
the illustration:
1. SRS air bag warning light
2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly
3. SRS control module
4. Emergency fastening device (EFD)
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:25 PM
Page 33
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
To obtain maximum benefit
from a pre-tensioner seat belt:
1. The seat belt must be worn
correctly and adjusted to the
proper position. Please read
and follow all of the important
information and precautions
about your vehicle’s occupant
safety features – including
seat belts and air bags – that
are provided in this manual.
2. Be sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts
properly.
✽ NOTICE
• Both the driver's and front passenger's seat belt pre-tensioner
system may be activated not only
in certain frontal collision but also
in certain side collision or rollover,
if the vehicle is equipped with a
side or curtain air bag.
• When the pre-tensioner seat belts
are activated, a loud noise may be
heard and fine dust, which may
appear to be smoke, may be visible
in the passenger compartment.
These are normal operating conditions and are not hazardous.
• Although it is harmless, the fine
dust may cause skin irritation and
should not be breathed for prolonged periods. Wash all exposed
skin areas thoroughly after an
accident in which the pre-tensioner seat belts were activated.
• Because the sensor that activates
the SRS air bag is connected with
the pre-tensioner seat belt, the
SRS air bag warning light
on
the instrument panel will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds
after the ignition switch has been
turned to the ON position, and
then it should turn off.
CAUTION
If the pre-tensioner seat belt
system are not working properly, this warning light will illuminate even if there is no malfunction of the SRS air bag. If the
SRS air bag warning light does
not illuminate when the ignition
switch is turned ON, or if it
remains illuminated after illuminating for approximately 6 seconds, or if it illuminates while
the vehicle is being driven, have
an authorized Kia dealer inspect
the pre-tensioner seat belt and
SRS air bag system as soon as
possible.
3 33
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:25 PM
Page 34
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
• Pre-tensioners are designed
to operate only one time. After
activation, pre-tensioner seat
belts must be replaced. All
seat belts, of any type, should
always be replaced after they
have been worn during a collision.
• The pre-tensioner seat belt
assembly mechanisms become
hot during activation. Do not
touch the pre-tensioner seat
belt assemblies for several minutes after they have been activated.
• Do not attempt to inspect or
replace the pre-tensioner seat
belts yourself. This must be
done by an authorized Kia
dealer.
• Do not strike the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies.
• Do not attempt to service or
repair the pre-tensioner seat
belt system in any manner.
(Continued)
3 34
(Continued)
• Improper handling of the pretensioner seat belt assemblies, and failure to heed the
warnings not to strike, modify,
inspect, replace, service or
repair the pre-tensioner seat
belt assemblies may lead to
improper operation or inadvertent activation and serious
injury.
• Always wear the seat belts
when driving or riding in a
motor vehicle.
• If the vehicle or pre-tensioner
seat belt must be discarded,
contact an authorized Kia
dealer.
Seat belt precautions
WARNING
All occupants of the vehicle
must wear their seat belts at all
times. Seat belts and child
restraints reduce the risk of
serious or fatal injuries for all
occupants in the event of a collision or sudden stop. Without a
seat belt, occupants could be
shifted too close to a deploying
air bag, strike the interior structure or be thrown from the vehicle. Properly worn seat belts
greatly reduce these hazards.
Even with advanced air bags,
unbelted occupants can be
severely injured by a deploying
air bag.
Always follow the precautions
about seat belts, air bags and
occupant seating contained in
this manual.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:25 PM
Page 35
Safety features of your vehicle
Infant or small child
You should be aware of the specific
requirements in your state. Child
and/or infant seats must be properly
placed and installed in the rear country. For more information about the
use of these restraints, refer to “Child
restraint system” in this section.
WARNING
Every person in your vehicle
needs to be properly restrained
at all times, including infants
and children. Never hold a child
in your arms or lap when riding
in a vehicle. The violent forces
created during a crash will tear
the child from your arms and
throw the child against the interior. Always use a child restraint
appropriate for your child's
height and weight.
✽ NOTICE
Small children are best protected
from injury in an accident when
properly restrained in the rear seat
by a child restraint system that
meets the requirements of the safety
standards of your country. Before
buying any child restraint system,
make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets safety standards of
your country. The restraint must be
appropriate for your child's height
and weight. Check the label on the
child restraint for this information.
Refer to “Child restraint system” in
this section.
Larger children
Children who are too large for child
restraint systems should always
occupy the rear seat and use the
available lap/shoulder belts. The lap
portion should be fastened and
snugged on the hips and as low as
possible. Check if the belt fits periodically. A child's squirming could put
the belt out of position. Children are
given the most safety in the event of
an accident when they are restrained
by a proper restraint system in the
rear seat. If a larger child (over age
12) must be seated in the front seat,
the child should be securely
restrained by the available lap/shoulder belt and the seat should be
placed in the rearmost position.
Children age 12 and under should be
restrained securely in the rear seat.
NEVER place a child age 12 and
under in the front seat. NEVER place
a rear facing child seat in the front
seat of a vehicle.
3 35
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:25 PM
Page 36
Safety features of your vehicle
If the shoulder belt portion slightly
touches the child’s neck or face, try
placing the child closer to the center of
the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still
touches their face or neck they need to
be returned to a child restraint system.
WARNING - Shoulder
belts on small children
• Do not allow small children to
ride in the vehicle without an
appropriate child restrain system.
• Never allow a shoulder belt to
be in contact with a child’s
neck or face while the vehicle
is in motion.
• If seat belts are not properly
worn and adjusted on children, there is a risk of death or
serious injury.
3 36
Restraint of pregnant women
Pregnant women should wear
lap/shoulder belt assemblies whenever possible according to specific
recommendations by their doctors.
The lap portion of the belt should be
worn AS SECURELY AND LOW AS
POSSIBLE.
WARNING - Pregnant
women
Pregnant women must never
place the lap portion of the
safety belt over the area of the
abdomen where the fetus is
located or above the abdomen
where the belt could crush the
fetus during an impact.
Injured person
A seat belt should be used when an
injured person is being transported.
When this is necessary, you should
consult a physician for recommendations.
One person per belt
Two people (including children)
should never attempt to use a single
seat belt. This could increase the
severity of injuries in case of an accident.
Do not lie down
To reduce the chance of injuries in
the event of an accident and to
achieve maximum effectiveness of
the restraint system, all passengers
should be sitting up and the front and
rear seats should be in an upright
position when the vehicle is moving.
A seat belt cannot provide proper
protection if the person is lying down
in the rear seat or if the front and rear
seats are in a reclined position.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:25 PM
Page 37
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
Riding with a reclined seatback
increases your chance of serious or fatal injuries in the event
of a collision or sudden stop.
The protection of your restraint
system (seat belts and air bags)
is greatly reduced by reclining
your seat. Seat belts must be
secured against your hips and
chest to work properly. The
more the seatback is reclined,
the greater the chance an occupant's hips will slide under the
lap belt causing serious internal
injuries. Also, the shoulder belt
may strike the occupant's neck.
Drivers and passengers should
always sit well back in their
seats, properly belted, and with
the seatbacks upright.
Care of seat belts
Seat belt systems should never be
disassembled or modified. In addition, care should be taken to assure
that seat belts and belt hardware are
not damaged by seat hinges, doors
or other abuse.
WARNING
When you return the rear seatback to its upright position after
the rear seatback has been folded down, be careful not to damage the seat belt webbing or
buckle. Be sure that the webbing or buckle does not get
caught or pinched in the rear
seat. A seat belt with damaged
webbing or buckle could possibly fail during a collision or sudden stop, resulting in serious
injury. If the webbing or buckles
are damaged, get them replaced
immediately.
Periodic inspection
All seat belts should be inspected
periodically for wear or damage of
any kind. Any damaged parts should
be replaced as soon as possible.
Keep belts clean and dry
Seat belts should be kept clean and
dry. If belts become dirty, they can be
cleaned by using a mild soap solution and warm water. Bleach, dye,
strong detergents or abrasives
should not be used because they
may damage and weaken the fabric.
When to replace seat belts
The entire in-use seat belt assembly
or assemblies should be replaced if
the vehicle has been involved in an
accident. This should be done even if
no damage is visible. Additional
questions concerning seat belt operation should be directed to an
authorized Kia dealer.
3 37
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:25 PM
Page 38
Safety features of your vehicle
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Children riding in the vehicle should
sit in the rear seat and must always
be properly restrained to minimize
the risk of injury in an accident, sudden stop or sudden maneuver.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats than in
the front seat. Larger children not in
a child restraint should use one of
the seat belts provided.
You should be aware of the specific
requirements in your country. Child
and/or infant safety seats must be
properly placed and installed in the
rear seat. You must use a commercially available child restraint system
that meets the requirements of the
Safety Standards of your country.
Child restraint systems are designed
to be secured in vehicle seats by seat
belt, or by a tether anchor and/or
LATCH anchors (if equipped).
3 38
Children could be injured or killed in
a crash if their restraints are not
properly secured. For small children
and babies, a child seat or infant seat
must be used. Before buying a particular child restraint system, make
sure it fits your vehicle seat and seat
belts, and fits your child.
Follow all the instructions provided
by the manufacturer when installing
the child restraint system.
WARNING
• A child restraint system must
be placed in the rear seat.
Never install a child or infant
seat on the front passenger's
seat. Should an accident
occur and cause the passenger-side air bag to deploy, it
could severely injure or kill an
infant or child seated in an
infant or child seat. Thus only
use a child restraint in the
rear seat of your vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• A seat belt or child restraint
system can become very hot
if it is left in a closed vehicle
on a sunny day, even if the
outside temperature does not
feel hot. Be sure to check the
seat cover and buckles before
placing a child there.
• When the child restraint system is not in use, store it in
the cargo area or fasten it with
a seat belt so that it will not be
thrown forward in case of a
sudden stop or an accident.
• Children may be seriously
injured or killed by an inflating
air bag. All children, even
those too large for child
restraints, must ride in the
rear seat.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:25 PM
Page 39
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
To reduce the chance of serious
or fatal injuries:
• Children of all ages are safer
when restrained in the rear
seat. A child riding in the
front passenger seat can be
forcefully struck by an inflating air bag resulting in serious or fatal injuries.
• Always follow the child
restraint system manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use of the child
restraint.
• Always make sure the child
seat is secured properly in the
vehicle and your child is
securely restrained in the
child seat.
• Never hold a child in your
arms or lap when riding in a
vehicle. The violent forces created during a crash will tear
the child from your arms and
throw the child against the
vehicle’s interior.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash,
the belt could press deep into
the child causing serious internal injuries.
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle – not even for a
short time.The vehicle can heat
up very quickly, resulting in
serious injuries to children
inside. Even very young children may inadvertently cause
the vehicle to move, entangle
themselves in the windows, or
lock themselves or others
inside the vehicle.
• Never allow two children, or any
two persons, to use the same
seat belt.
• Children often squirm and
reposition themselves improperly. Never let a child ride with
the shoulder belt under their
arm or behind their back.
Always properly position and
secure children in the rear seat.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never allow a child to stand-up
or kneel on the seat or floor of
a moving vehicle. During a collision or sudden stop, the child
can be violently thrown against
the vehicle’s interior, resulting
in serious injury.
• Never use an infant carrier or a
child safety seat that "hooks"
over a seatback, it may not provide adequate security in an
accident.
• Seat belts can become very
hot, especially when the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight.
Always check the seat belt
buckles before fastening them
over a child.
• After an accident, have an
authorized Kia dealer check
the child restraint system, seat
belt, tether anchor and lower
anchor.
• If there is not enough space to
place the child restraint system
because of the driver's seat,
install the child restraint system in the rear right seat.
3 39
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:25 PM
Page 40
Safety features of your vehicle
Using a child restraint system
Rearward-facing child restraint system
For safety reasons, we recommend
that the child restraint system be
used in the rear seats.
WARNING
CRS09
Never place a rear-facing child
restraint in the front passenger
seat, because of the danger an
inflating passenger-side air bag
could impact the rear-facing
child restraint and kill the child.
Forward-facing child restraint system
Since all passenger seat belts move
freely under normal conditions and
only lock under extreme or emergency conditions (emergency lock
mode), you must manually change
these seat belts to the auto lock
mode to secure a child restraint.
OUN026150
For small children and babies, the
use of a child seat or infant seat is
required. The child seat or infant seat
should be of appropriate size for the
child and should be installed in
accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
3 40
WARNING - Child seat
installation
• A child can be seriously
injured or killed in a collision
if the child restraint is not
properly anchored to the vehicle and the child is not properly restrained in the child
restraint. Before installing the
child restraint system, read
the instructions supplied by
the child restraint system
manufacturer.
• If the seat belt does not operate as described in this section, have the system checked
immediately by your authorized Kia dealer.
• Failure to observe this manual's instructions regarding
child restraint systems and
the instructions provided with
the child restraint system
could increase the chance
and/or severity of injury in an
accident.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:25 PM
Page 41
Safety features of your vehicle
Placing a passenger seat belt
into the auto lock mode
E2MS103005
The auto lock mode will help prevent
the normal movement of the child in
the vehicle from causing the seat belt
to loosen and compromise the child
restraint system. To secure a child
restraint system, use the following
procedure.
OEN036101
OEN036102
To install a child restraint system on
the outboard or center rear seats, do
the following:
1. Place the child restraint system in
the seat and route the lap/shoulder belt around or through the
restraint, following the restraint
manufacturer’s instructions. Be
sure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted.
2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch
into the buckle. Listen for the distinct “click” sound.
Position the release button so that it
is easy to access in case of an emergency.
3. Pull the shoulder portion of the
seat belt all the way out. When the
shoulder portion of the seat belt is
fully extended, it will shift the
retractor to the “Auto Lock” (child
restraint) mode.
3 41
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:25 PM
Page 42
Safety features of your vehicle
To remove the child restraint, press
the release button on the buckle and
then pull the lap/shoulder belt out of
the restraint and allow the seat belt
to retract fully.
WARNING - Auto lock
OEN036103
OEN036104
4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion
of the seat belt to retract and listen
for an audible “clicking” or “ratcheting” sound. This indicates that the
retractor is in the “Auto Lock”
mode. If no distinct sound is
heard, repeat steps 3 and 4.
5. Remove as much slack from the
belt as possible by pushing down
on the child restraint system while
feeding the shoulder belt back into
the retractor.
6. Push and pull on the child restraint
system to confirm that the seat
belt is holding it firmly in place. If it
is not, release the seat belt and
repeat steps 2 through 6.
7. Double check that the retractor is
in the “Auto Lock” mode by
attempting to pull more of the seat
belt out of the retractor. If you cannot, the retractor is in the “Auto
Lock” mode.
3 42
mode
The lap/shoulder belt automatically returns to the “emergency
lock mode” whenever the belt is
allowed to retract fully.Therefore,
the preceding seven steps must
be followed each time a child
restraint is installed.
If the retractor is not in the
Automatic Locking mode, the
child restraint can move when
your vehicle turns or stops suddenly. A child can be seriously
injured or killed if the child
restraint is not properly anchored
to the vehicle, including setting
the retractor to the Automatic
Locking mode.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:25 PM
Page 43
Safety features of your vehicle
When the seat belt is allowed to
retract to its fully stowed position,
the retractor will automatically
switch from the “Auto Lock” mode
to the emergency lock mode for
normal adult usage.
Securing a child restraint seat
with tether anchor system
OXM039034N
OXMA033033
Child restraint hook holders are
located on the back of the rear seatbacks.
1. Route the child restraint seat strap
over the seatback.
For vehicles with adjustable headrests, route the tether strap under
the headrest and between the
headrest posts, otherwise route
the tether strap over the top of the
seatback.
2. Connect the tether strap hook to
the appropriate child restraint
hook holder and tighten to secure
the child restraint seat.
3 43
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:25 PM
Page 44
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
A child can be seriously injured
or killed in a collision if the
child restraint is not properly
anchored to the vehicle and the
child is not properly restrained
in the child restraint. Always follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions for installation
and use.
WARNING - Tether strap
Never mount more than one
child restraint to a single tether
or to a single lower anchorage
point. The increased load
caused by multiple seats may
cause the tethers or anchorage
points to break, causing serious
injury or death.
3 44
WARNING - Child
Securing a child restraint seat with
child seat lower anchor system
restraint check
Check that the child restraint
system is secure by pushing
and pulling it in different directions. Incorrectly fitted child
restraints may swing, twist, tip
or separate causing death or
serious injury.
WARNING - Child
restraint anchorage
• Child restraint anchorages
are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by
correctly fitted child restraints.
Under no circumstances are
they to be used for adult seat
belts or harnesses or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
• The tether strap may not work
properly if attached somewhere other than the correct
tether anchor.
OXM039035
Some child seat manufacturers
make child restraint seats that are
labeled as LATCH or LATCH-compatible child restraint seats. LATCH
stands for "Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children". These seats
include two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that connect to two
LATCH anchors at specific seating
positions in your vehicle. This type of
child restraint seat eliminates the
need to use seat belts to attach the
child seat in the rear seats.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:25 PM
Page 45
Safety features of your vehicle
Lower Anchor
Position Indicator
Lower Anchor
OXM039060N
Child restraint symbols are located
on the left and right 2nd row seat
backs to indicate the position of the
lower anchors for child restraints.
WARNING
• When using the vehicle's
"LATCH" system to install a
child restraint system in the
rear seat, all unused vehicle
rear seat belt metal latch
plates or tabs must be latched
securely in their seat belt
buckles and the seat belt webbing must be retracted behind
the child restraint to prevent
the child from reaching and
taking hold of unretracted
seat belts. Unlatched metal
latch plates or tabs may allow
the child to reach the unretracted seat belts which may
result in strangulation and a
serious injury or death to the
child in the child restraint.
• Do not place anything around
the lower anchors. Also make
sure that the seat belt is not
caught in the lower anchors.
WARNING
Install the child restraint seat
fully rearward against the seatback with the seatback reclined
two positions from the most
upright latched position.
3 45
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:25 PM
Page 46
Safety features of your vehicle
Once you have installed the LATCH
child restraint, assure that the seat is
properly attached to the LATCH and
tether anchors.
Also, test the child restraint seat
before you place the child in it. Tilt
the seat from side to side. Also try to
tug the seat forward. Check to see if
the anchors hold the seat in place.
OXM039036N
LATCH anchors have been provided
in your vehicle. The LATCH anchors
are located in the left and right outboard rear seating positions. Their
locations are shown in the illustration. There is no LATCH anchor provided for the center rear seating
position.
The LATCH anchors are located
between the seatback and the seat
cushion of the 2nd row seat left and
right outboard seating positions.
Follow the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions to properly install child
restraint seats with LATCH or
LATCH-compatible attachments.
3 46
CAUTION
Do not allow the rear seat belt
webbing to get scratched or
pinched by the child-seat latch
and LATCH anchor during the
installation.
WARNING
If the child restraint is not
anchored properly, the risk of a
child being seriously injured or
killed in a collision greatly
increases.
WARNING - LATCH lower
anchors
LATCH lower anchors are only
to be used with the left and right
rear outboard seating positions.
Never attempt to attach a
LATCH equipped seat in the
center seating position. You
may damage the anchors or the
anchors may fail and break in a
collision.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:25 PM
Page 47
Safety features of your vehicle
AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Driver’s front air bag
Passenger’s front air bag
Side air bag
Curtain air bag
WARNING
Even in vehicles with air bags,
you and your passengers must
always wear the safety belts
provided in order to minimize
the risk and severity of injury in
the event of a collision or
rollover.
* The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
* 3rd row seat : if equipped
OXMA032101
3 47
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:25 PM
Page 48
Safety features of your vehicle
How does the air bag system
operate
• Air bags are activated (able to
inflate if necessary) only when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
or START position.
• The appropriate air bags inflate
instantly in the event of a serious
frontal collision or side collision in
order to help protect the occupants
from serious physical injury.
• There is no single speed at which
the air bags will inflate.
Generally, air bags are designed to
inflate based upon the severity of a
collision and its direction. These
two factors determine whether the
sensors produce an electronic
deployment/ inflation signal.
• Air bag deployment depends on a
number of factors including vehicle
speed, angles of impact and the
density and stiffness of the vehicles or objects which your vehicle
hits in the collision. The determining factors are not limited to those
mentioned above.
3 48
• The front air bags will completely
inflate and deflate in an instant.
It is virtually impossible for you to
see the air bags inflate during an
accident.
It is much more likely that you will
simply see the deflated air bags
hanging out of their storage compartments after the collision.
• In addition to inflating in serious
side collisions, side and/or curtain
air bags will inflate if the sensing
system detects a rollover.
• When a rollover is detected, side
and/or curtain air bags will remain
inflated longer to help provide protection from ejection, especially
when used in conjunction with the
seat belts.
• In order to help provide protection,
the air bags must inflate rapidly.
The speed of the air bag inflation is
a consequence of extremely short
time in which to inflate the air bag
between the occupant and the
vehicle structures before the occupant impacts those structures. This
speed of inflation reduces the risk
of serious or life-threatening
injuries and is thus a necessary
part of the air bag design.
However, air bag inflation can also
cause injuries which can include
facial abrasions, bruises and broken bones because the inflation
speed also causes the air bags to
expand with a great deal of force.
• There are even circumstances
under which contact with the
steering wheel or passenger air
bag can cause fatal injuries,
especially if the occupant is
positioned excessively close to
the steering wheel or passenger
air bag.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:25 PM
Page 49
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
• To avoid severe personal
injury or death caused by
deploying air bags in a collision, the driver should sit as
far back from the steering
wheel air bag as possible (at
least 250 mm (10 inches)
away). The front passengers
should always move their
seats as far back as possible
and sit back in their seat.
• Air bags inflate instantly in the
event of a collision, and passengers may be injured by the
air bag expansion force if they
are not in a proper position.
• Air bag inflation may cause
injuries including facial or
bodily abrasions, injuries
from broken glasses or burns.
Noise and smoke
When inflated, the air bags make a
loud noise and leave smoke and
powder in the air inside the vehicle.
This is normal and is a result of the
ignition of the air bag inflator. After
the air bag inflates, you may feel substantial discomfort in breathing due
to the contact of your chest with both
the seat belt and the air bag, as well
as from breathing the smoke and
powder. Open your doors and/or
windows as soon as possible after
impact in order to reduce discomfort and prevent prolonged exposure to the smoke and powder.
Though smoke and powder are nontoxic, it may cause irritation to the
skin (eyes, nose and throat, etc). If
this is the case, wash and rinse with
cold water immediately and consult a
doctor if the symptom persists.
WARNING
When the air bags deploy, the
air bag related parts in the
steering wheel and/or instrument panel and/or in both sides
of the roof rails above the front
and rear doors are very hot. To
prevent injury, do not touch the
air bag storage area’s internal
components immediately after
an air bag has inflated.
3 49
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:25 PM
Page 50
Safety features of your vehicle
Do not install a child restraint on
the front passenger’s seat.
1JBH3051
Never place a rear-facing child
restraint in the front passenger’s
seat. If the air bag deploys, it would
impact the rear-facing child restraint,
causing serious or fatal injury.
In addition, do not place front-facing
child restraints in the front passenger’s seat either. If the front passenger air bag inflates, it could cause
serious or fatal injuries to the child.
3 50
WARNING
• Extreme Hazard! Do not use a
rearward facing child restraint
on a seat protected by an air
bag in front of it!
• Never put a child restraint in
the front passenger’s seat. If
the front passenger air bag
inflates, it would cause serious or fatal injuries.
• When children are seated in
the rear outboard seats of
vehicle equipped with side
and/or curtain air bags, be
sure to install the child
restraint system as far away
from the door side as possible,
and securely lock the child
restraint system in position.
Inflation of side and/or curtain
air bags could cause serious
injury or death to an infant or
child.
Air bag warning light
W7-147
The purpose of air bag warning light
in your instrument panel is to alert
you of a potential problem with your
air bag system, which could include
your side and/or curtain air bags
used for rollover protection.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:25 PM
Page 51
Safety features of your vehicle
SRS components and functions
OXM033200L
The SRS consists of the following
components:
1. Driver's front air bag module
2. Passenger's front air bag module
3. Side impact air bag modules
4. Curtain air bag modules
5. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies
6. Air bag warning light
7. SRS control module (SRSCM)/
Rollover sensor
8. Front impact sensors
9. Side impact sensors
10. PASSENGER “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator (Front passenger’s seat
only)
11. Occupant detection system
(Front passenger’s seat only)
12. Driver’s and front passenger’s
seat belt buckle sensors
13. Emergency fastening device
(EFD)
The SRSCM continually monitors all
SRS components while the ignition
switch is ON to determine if a crash
impact is severe enough to require
air bag deployment or pre-tensioner
seat belt deployment.
W7-147
If the airbag warning light illuminated
for more than, 6 seconds after the
ignition is turned on, or of it illuminates during vehicle operation, an
SRS component may not be functioning properly and you should have
your vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer.
3 51
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:25 PM
Page 52
Safety features of your vehicle
Driver’s front air bag (1)
Driver’s front air bag (2)
WARNING
If any of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a
malfunction in the air bag system. Have an authorized Kia
dealer inspect the air bag system as soon as possible.
• The light does not turn on
briefly when you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after illuminating for approximately 6
seconds.
• The light comes on while the
vehicle is in motion.
• The light blinks when the ignition switch is in ON position.
3 52
B240B01L
B240B02L
The front air bag modules are located both in the center of the steering
wheel and in the front passenger's
panel above the glove box. When the
SRSCM detects a sufficiently severe
impact to the front of the vehicle, it
will automatically deploy the front air
bags.
Upon deployment, tear seams molded directly into the pad covers will
separate under pressure from the
expansion of the air bags. Further
opening of the covers then allows full
inflation of the air bags.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:26 PM
Page 53
Safety features of your vehicle
Driver’s front air bag (3)
Passenger’s front air bag
B240B03L
A fully inflated air bag, in combination with a properly worn seat belt,
slows the driver's or the passenger's
forward motion, reducing the risk of
head and chest injury.
After complete inflation, the air bag
immediately starts deflating, enabling
the driver to maintain forward visibility
and the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
(Continued)
• When installing a container of
liquid air freshener inside the
vehicle, do not place it near
the instrument cluster nor on
the instrument panel surface.
It may become a dangerous
projectile and cause injury if the
passenger's air bag inflates.
B240B05L
WARNING
• Do not install or place any
accessories (drink holder,
cassette holder, sticker, etc.)
on the front passenger's
panel above the glove box in a
vehicle with a passenger's air
bag. Such objects may become
dangerous projectiles and
cause injury if the passenger's
air bag inflates.
(Continued)
3 53
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:26 PM
Page 54
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
• If an air bag deploys, there
may be a loud noise followed
by a fine dust released in the
vehicle. These conditions are
normal and are not hazardous
- the air bags are packed in this
fine powder. The dust generated during air bag deployment
may cause skin or eye irritation as well as aggravate asthma for some persons. Always
wash all exposed skin areas
thoroughly with lukewarm
water and a mild soap after an
accident in which the air bags
were deployed.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The SRS can function only
when the ignition switch is in
the ON position. If the SRS air
bag warning light does not
illuminate, or continuously
remains on after illuminating
for about 6 seconds when the
ignition switch is turned to the
ON position, or after the
engine is started, comes on
while driving, the SRS is not
working properly. If this
occurs, have your vehicle
immediately inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
• Before you replace a fuse or
disconnect a battery terminal,
turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position and remove the
ignition switch. Never remove
or replace the air bag related
fuse(s) when the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
Failure to observe this warning
will cause the SRS air bag
warning light to illuminate.
Occupant Detection System
(ODS)
OXMA033102
Your vehicle is equipped with an
occupant detection system in the
front passenger's seat.
The occupant detection system is
designed to detect the presence of a
properly-seated front passenger and
determine if the passenger's front air
bag should be enabled (may inflate)
or not. Only the front passenger front
air bag is controlled by the Occupant
Classification System.
WARNING
Do not put anything in front of the
passenger air bag
indicator.
3 54
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:26 PM
Page 55
Safety features of your vehicle
Main components of the occupant detection system
• A detection device located within
the front passenger seat cushion.
• An electronic system which determines whether the passenger air
bag systems should be activated
or deactivated.
• A indicator light located on the
instrument panel which illuminates
the words PASSENGER AIR BAG
“OFF” indicating the front passenger air bag system is deactivated.
• The instrument panel air bag warning light is interconnected with the
occupant detection system.
If the front passenger seat is occupied by a person that the system
determines to be of appropriate size,
and he/she sits properly (sitting
upright with the seatback in an
upright position, centered on the
seat cushion with their seat belt on,
legs comfortably extended and their
feet on the floor), the PASSENGER
AIR BAG “OFF” indicator will turn off
and the front passenger's air bag will
be able to inflate, if necessary, in
frontal crashes.
You will find the PASSENGER AIR
BAG “OFF” indicator on the center
facia panel. This system detects the
conditions 1~4 in the following table
and activates or deactivates the front
passenger air bag based on these
conditions.
Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants are seated and
restrained properly (sitting upright
with the seat in an upright position,
centered on the seat cushion, with
the person’s legs comfortably extended, feet on the floor, and wearing the
safety belt properly) for the most
effective protection by the air bag and
the safety belt.
• The ODS (Occupant Detection
System) may not function properly if
the passenger takes actions which
can defeat the detection system.
These include:
(1) Failing to sit in an upright position.
(2) Leaning against the door or center console.
(3) Sitting towards the sides or the
front of the seat.
(4) Putting legs on the dashboard or
resting them on other locations
which reduce the passenger
weight on the front seat.
(5) Improperly wearing the safety
belt.
(6) Reclining the seat back.
3 55
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:26 PM
Page 56
Safety features of your vehicle
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant detection
system
Condition detected by the
occupant detection
system
1. Adult or child*1
2. Child restraint system*
2
3. Unoccupied
4. There is a malfunction
in the system
Indicator/Warning light
Devices
"PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF" indicator
light
SRS warning light
Front passenger
air bag
Off
Off
Activated
On
On
Off
Off
Deactivated
Off
On
Activated
Deactivated
*1 : The ODS system uses a field to evaluate a person's size to determine whether the
air bag should deploy. It is possible for a child to be detected and activate the ODS,
thus allowing the air bag to deploy. To maximize safety, do not allow children to ride
in the front passenger seat.
2
* : Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat.
3 56
WARNING
Riding in an improper position
or placing weight on the front
passenger's seat when it is
unoccupied by a passenger
adversely affects the Occupant
Detection System (ODS). Your
ODS is designed to resist electronic waves, but do not place an
electronic device (ex. laptop
computer, after market DMB/navigation/satellite audio, video
game machine, MP3, etc.) on or
near the seat cushion since it
may defeat the proper functioning of the ODS or turn on the air
bag warning light.
(Continued)
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:26 PM
Page 57
Safety features of your vehicle
(Continued)
OVQ036013N
1KMN3663
1KMN3665
- Never put a heavy load or an
active electronic device on
the front passenger seat or
seatback pocket.
- Never sit with hips shifted
towards the front of the seat.
- Never place feet on the dashboard.
OVQ036014N
1KMN3662
1KMN3664
- Never place feet on the front
passenger seatback.
- Never excessively recline the
front passenger seatback.
- Never lean on the door or center console.
- Never sit on one side of the
front passenger seat.
3 57
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:26 PM
Page 58
Safety features of your vehicle
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator is still on, ask the passenger to move to the rear seat.
Proper position
WARNING
B990A01O
When an adult is seated in the front
passenger seat, if the PASSENGER
AIR BAG “OFF” indicator is on, turn
the ignition switch to the LOCK position and ask the passenger to sit
properly (sitting upright with the seat
back in an upright position, centered
on the seat cushion with their seat
belt on, legs comfortably extended
and their feet on the floor). Restart
the engine and have the person
remain in that position. This will allow
the system to detect the person and
to enable the passenger air bag.
3 58
Do not allow an adult passenger
to ride in the front seat when the
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF”
indicator is illuminated because
the air bag will not deploy in the
event of a crash. If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator remains illuminated after the
adult passenger repositions
themselves properly and the
vehicle is restarted, have the
passenger move to the rear seat
because the passenger's front
air bag will not deploy.
The "PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF" indicator will not change
according to the occupants
posture after the vehicle has
been running for 30 seconds.
Front seat passengers must
stay properly seated to avoid
serious injury from a deploying
air bag.
✽ NOTICE
The PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator illuminates for about 4 seconds after the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position or after
the engine is started. If the front
passenger seat is occupied, the occupant detection sensor will then classify the front passenger after several
more seconds.
WARNING
Do not put a heavy load or an
active electronic device (ex. laptop computer, after market
DMB/navigation/satellite audio,
video game machine, MP3, etc.)
in the front passenger seatback
pocket or on the front passenger
seat. Do not hang onto the front
passenger seat. Do not hang any
items such as seatback table on
the front passenger seatback.
Do not place feet on the front
passenger seatback. Do not
place any items under the front
passenger seat. Any of these
could interfere with proper sensor operation or turn on the air
bag warning light.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:26 PM
Page 59
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
• Even though your vehicle is
equipped with the occupant
detection system, never install a
child restraint system in the
front passenger's seat.
A
deploying air bag can forcefully
strike a child resulting in serious injuries or death. Any child
age 12 and under should ride in
the rear seat. Children too large
for child restraints should use
the available lap/shoulder belts.
No matter what type of crash,
children of all ages are safer
when restrained in the rear seat.
• If the PASSENGER AIR BAG
“OFF” indicator is illuminated
when the front passenger's seat
is occupied by an adult and
he/she sits properly (sitting
upright with the seatback in an
upright position, centered on
the seat cushion with their seat
belt on, legs comfortably
extended and their feet on the
floor), have that person sit in the
rear seat.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If the front passenger seat is
occupied by a child who is not
in a CRS, the "PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF" indicator may
or may not be on and the passenger air bag may or may not
deploy in a collision. Have the
child move to a rear seat to
increase their safety.
• Do not modify or replace the
front passenger seat. Don't
place anything on or attach
anything such as a blanket or
seat heater to the front passenger seat. This can adversely affect the occupant detection system.
• Do not place sharp objects on
the front passenger seat.
These may damage the occupant detection system, if they
puncture the seat cushion.
• Do not use accessory seat
covers on the front seats.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Accident statistics show that
children are safer if they are
restrained in the rear, as
opposed to the front seat. It is
recommended
that
child
restraints be secured in a rear
seat, including an infant riding
in a rear-facing infant seat, a
child riding in a forward-facing
child seat and an older child
riding in a booster seat.
• Air bags can only be used
once – have an authorized Kia
dealer replace the air bag
immediately after deployment.
• The occupant detection system may not work properly if
water, coffee or any other liquid including rain gets on the
seat. Keep the front seat dry
at all times.
(Continued)
3 59
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:26 PM
Page 60
Safety features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• Do not place an electronic
device (ex. laptop computer,
after market DMB/navigation/
satellite audio, video game
machine, MP3, etc.) on the
front passenger seat. Its electronic field may cause the ODS
to switch to the "on" condition
and thus turn on the air bag
warning light or allow the passenger airbag to deploy needlessly in a collision, increasing
your repair costs.
3 60
WARNING
If the occupant detection system is not working properly, the
SRS air bag warning light
on
the instrument panel will illuminate because the passenger's
front air bag is connected with
the occupant detection system.
If there is a malfunction of the
occupant detection system, the
PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator will not illuminate and
the passenger's front air bag
will inflate in frontal impact
crashes even if there is no occupant in the front passenger's
seat. If the SRS air bag warning
light does not illuminate when
the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position, remains illuminated after approximately 6 seconds when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position, or if it
illuminates while the vehicle is
being driven, have an authorized Kia dealer inspect the occupant detection system and the
SRS air bag system as soon as
possible.
Driver's and passenger's front air
bag
Driver’s front air bag
OXM033009
Passenger’s front air bag (if equipped)
OXM033010
Your vehicle is equipped with an
Advanced Supplemental Restraint
(Air Bag) System and lap/shoulder
belts at both the driver and passenger seating position.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:26 PM
Page 61
Safety features of your vehicle
The indication of the system's presence are the letters "AIR BAG"
embossed on the air bag pad cover
on the steering wheel and the passenger's side front panel pad above
the glove box.
The SRS consists of air bags
installed under the pad covers in the
center of the steering wheel and the
passenger's side front panel above
the glove box.
The purpose of the SRS is to provide
the vehicle's driver and/or the front
passenger with additional protection
than that offered by the seat belt system alone in case of a frontal impact
of sufficient severity. The SRS uses
sensors to gather information about
the driver's and front passenger's
seat belt usage and impact severity.
WARNING
If the occupant detection system is not working properly, the
SRS air bag warning light
on
the instrument panel will illuminate because the SRS air bag
warning light is connected with
the occupant detection system.
If the SRS air bag warning light
does not illuminate when the
ignition switch is turned to the
ON position, remains illuminated after approximately 6 seconds when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON position, or
if it illuminates while the vehicle
is being driven, have an authorized Kia dealer inspect the
advanced SRS air bag system
as soon as possible.
The seat belt buckle sensors determine if the driver and front passenger's seat belts are fastened.
These sensors provide the ability to
control the SRS deployment based on
whether or not the seat belts are fastened, and how severe the impact is.
The advanced SRS offers the ability
to control the air bag inflation with
two levels. A first stage level is provided for moderate-severity impacts.
A second stage level is provided for
more severe impacts.
The passenger’s front air bag is
designed to help reduce the injury of
children sitting close to the instrument panel in low speed collisions.
However, children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
According to the impact severity and
seat belt usage, the SRSCM (SRS
Control Module) controls the air bag
inflation. Failure to properly wear
seat belts can increase the risk or
severity of injury in an accident.
3 61
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:26 PM
Page 62
Safety features of your vehicle
Additionally, your vehicle is equipped
with an occupant detection system in
the front passenger's seat. The occupant detection system detects the
presence of a passenger in the front
passenger's seat and will turn off the
front passenger's air bag under certain conditions. For more detail, see
"Occupant detection system" in this
section.
WARNING
• Modification to the seat structure can cause the air bag to
deploy at a different level than
should be provided.
• Do not place any objects
underneath the front seats as
they could damage and/or
interfere with the occupant
detection system.
3 62
WARNING
Manufacturers are required by
government regulations to provide a contact point concerning
modifications to the vehicle for
persons with disabilities, which
modifications may affect the
vehicle’s advanced air bag system. However, Kia does not
endorse nor will it support any
changes to any part or structure
of the vehicle that could affect
the advanced air bag system,
including the occupant detection system.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Specifically, the front passenger
seat, dashboard or door should
not be replaced except by an
authorized Kia dealer using
original Kia parts designed for
this vehicle and model. Any
other such replacement or modification could adversely affect
the operation of the occupant
detection system and your
advanced air bags. For the
same reason, do not attach anything to the seat, dashboard or
door, even temporarily. If the
system is adversely affected, it
could cause severe personal
injuries or death in a collision.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:26 PM
Page 63
Safety features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
• Be sure to read information about
the SRS on the labels provided on
the sunvisor.
• Advanced air bags are combined
with pre-tensioner seat belts to
help provide enhanced occupant
protection in frontal crashes. Front
air bags are not intended to deploy
in collisions in which sufficient
protection can be provided by the
pre-tensioner seat belt.
WARNING
Always use seat belts and child
restraints – every trip, every
time, everyone! Air bags inflate
with considerable force and in
the blink of an eye. Seat belts
help keep occupants in proper
position to obtain maximum
benefit from the air bag. Even
with advanced air bags, improperly and unbelted occupants
can be severely injured when
the air bag inflates. Always follow the precautions about seat
belts, air bags and occupant
safety contained in this manual.
To reduce the chance of serious
or fatal injuries and receive the
maximum safety benefit from
your restraint system:
• Never place a child in any
child or booster seat in the
front seat.
• ABC
–
Always
Buckle
Children in the 2nd Row seat.
It is the safest place for children of any age to ride.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Front and side air bags can
injure occupants improperly
positioned in the front seats.
• Move your seat as far back as
practical from the front air
bags, while still maintaining
control of the vehicle.
• You and your passengers
should never sit or lean
unnecessarily close to the air
bags. Improperly positioned
drivers and passengers can
be severely injured by inflating air bags.
• Never lean against the door or
center console – always sit in
an upright position.
• Do not allow a passenger to
ride in the front seat when the
PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator
is
illuminated,
because the air bag will not
deploy in the event of a moderate or severe frontal crash.
(Continued)
3 63
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:26 PM
Page 64
Safety features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• No objects should be placed
over or near the air bag modules on the steering wheel,
instrument panel or the front
passenger's panel above the
glove box, because any such
object could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a crash severe
enough to cause the air bags
to deploy.
• Never place covers, blankets
or aftermarket seat warmers
on the passenger seat as
these may interfere with the
occupant detection system.
• Do not tamper with or disconnect SRS wiring or other components of the SRS system.
Doing so could result in injury,
due to accidental deployment
of the air bags or by rendering
the SRS inoperative.
(Continued)
3 64
(Continued)
• If the SRS air bag warning
light
remains illuminated
while the vehicle is being driven, have an authorized Kia
dealer inspect the air bag system as soon as possible.
• Air bags can only be used
once – have an authorized Kia
dealer replace the air bag
immediately after deployment.
• The SRS is designed to
deploy the front air bags only
when an impact is sufficiently
severe and when the impact
angle is less than 30° from the
forward longitudinal axis of
the vehicle. Additionally, the
air bags will only deploy once.
Seat belts must be worn at all
times.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Front air bags are not intended to deploy in side-impact,
rear-impact or rollover crashes. In addition, front air bags
will not deploy in frontal
crashes below the deployment threshold.
(Continued)
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:26 PM
Page 65
Safety features of your vehicle
Rear impact
OEP036096N
Side impact
OVQ036018N
Rollover
(Continued)
• Even though your vehicle is
equipped with the occupant
detection system, do not
install a child restraint system
in the front passenger seat
position. A child restraint system must never be placed in
the front seat. The infant or
child could be severely
injured or killed by an air bag
deployment in case of an accident.
• Children age 12 and under
must always be properly
restrained in the rear seat.
Never allow children to ride in
the front passenger seat. If a
child over 12 must be seated
in the front seat, he or she
must be properly belted and
the seat should be moved as
far back as possible.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• For maximum safety protection
in all types of crashes, all occupants including the driver
should always wear their seat
belts whether or not an air bag
is also provided at their seating
position to minimize the risk of
severe injury or death in the
event of a crash. Do not sit or
lean unnecessarily close to the
air bag while the vehicle is in
motion.
• Sitting improperly or out of
position can result in serious
or fatal injury in a crash. All
occupants should sit upright
with the seat back in an upright
position, centered on the seat
cushion with their seat belt on,
legs comfortably extended and
their feet on the floor until the
vehicle is parked and the ignition key is removed or the
engine is shut off.
(Continued)
1VQA2091
3 65
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:26 PM
Page 66
Safety features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• The SRS air bag system must
deploy very rapidly to provide
protection in a crash. If an
occupant is out of position
because of not wearing a seat
belt, the air bag may forcefully
contact the occupant causing
serious or fatal injuries.
Side air bag
OXM039039
• The side air bags are designed to
deploy during certain side-impact
collisions, depending on the crash
severity, angle, speed and point of
impact.
• The side air bags do not only
deploy on the side of the impact
but also on the opposite side.
• The side and/or curtain air bags on
both sides of the vehicle will deploy
if a rollover or possible rollover is
detected.
• The side air bags are not designed
to deploy in all side impact or
rollover situations.
WARNING
OXMA032054
Your vehicle is equipped with a side
air bag in each front seat. The purpose of the air bag is to provide the
vehicle's driver and/or the front passenger with additional protection than
that offered by the seat belt alone.
3 66
Do not allow the passengers to
lean their heads or bodies onto
doors, put their arms on the
doors, stretch their arms out of
the window, or place objects
between the doors and passengers when they are seated on
seats equipped with side and/or
curtain air bags.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:26 PM
Page 67
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
• The side air bag is supplemental to the driver's and the
passenger's seat belt systems
and is not a substitute for
them. Therefore your seat
belts must be worn at all times
while the vehicle is in operation.
• For best protection from the
side air bag system and to
avoid being injured by the
deploying side air bag, both
front seat occupants should
sit in an upright position with
the seat belt properly fastened. The driver's hands
should be placed on the steering wheel at the 9:00 and 3:00
positions. The passenger's
arms and hands should be
placed on their laps.
• Do not use any accessory
seat covers.
• Use of seat covers could
reduce or prevent the effectiveness of the system.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not install any accessories
on the side or near the side air
bag.
• Do not place any objects over
the air bag or between the air
bag and yourself.
• Do not place any objects (an
umbrella, bag, etc.) between the
front door and the front seat.
Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause
injury if the supplemental side
air bag inflates.
• To prevent unexpected deployment of the side air bag that
may result in personal injury,
avoid impact to the side impact
sensor when the ignition
switch is on.
• If seat or seat cover is damaged, have the vehicle checked
and repaired by an authorized
Kia dealer. Inform the dealer
that your vehicle is equipped
with side air bags and an occupant detection system.
Curtain air bag
OXM039055
OXMA032056
Curtain air bags are located along
both sides of the roof rails above the
front and rear doors.
3 67
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:26 PM
Page 68
Safety features of your vehicle
They are designed to help protect
occupants in certain side impacts
and to help prevent them from ejecting out of the vehicle as a result of a
rollover, especially when the seatbelts are also in use.
• The curtain air bags are designed
to deploy during certain side
impact collisions, depending on the
crash severity, angle, speed and
point of impact.
• The curtain air bags do not only
deploy on the side of the impact
but also on the opposite side.
• Also, the curtain air bags on both
sides of the vehicle will deploy in
certain rollover situations.
• The curtain air bags are not
designed to deploy in all side
impact or rollover situations.
3 68
WARNING
• In order for side and curtain
air bags to provide the best
protection, front seat occupants and outboard rear occupants should sit in an upright
position with the seat belts
properly fastened.
Importantly, children should
sit in a proper child restraint
system in the rear seat.
• When children are seated in
the rear outboard seats, they
must be seated in the proper
child restraint system. Make
sure to position the child
restraint system as far away
from the door side as possible, and secure the child
restraint system in a locked
position.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not allow the passengers
to lean their heads or bodies
against the doors, put their
arms on the doors, stretch
their arms out of the window
or place objects between the
doors and passengers when
they are seated on seats
equipped with side impact
and/or curtain air bags.
• Never try to open or repair any
components of the side and
curtain air bag system. This
should only be done by an
authorized Kia dealer.
Failure to follow the above mentioned instructions can result in
injury or death to the vehicle
occupants in an accident.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:26 PM
Page 69
Safety features of your vehicle
Why didn’t my air bag go off in a
collision? (Inflation and non-inflation conditions of the air bag)
There are many types of accidents
in which the air bag would not be
expected to provide additional
protection.
These include rear impacts, second or third collisions in multiple
impact accidents, as well as low
speed impacts.
Air bag collision sensors
1
2
3
4
OXM033012L/OXM033013/OXM033014/OXM039043/OXM039044
(1) SRS control module/
Rollover sensor
(2) Front impact sensor
(3) Side impact sensor
(4) Side impact sensor
3 69
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:26 PM
Page 70
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
• Do not hit or allow any objects
to impact the locations where
air bags or sensors are
installed.
This may cause unexpected
air bag deployment, which
could result in serious personal injury or death.
• If the installation location or
angle of the sensors is altered
in any way, the air bags may
deploy when they should not
or they may not deploy when
they should, causing severe
injury or death.
Therefore, do not try to perform maintenance on or
around the air bag sensors.
Have the vehicle checked and
repaired by an authorized Kia
dealer.
(Continued)
3 70
(Continued)
• Problems may arise if the sensor installation angles are
changed due to the deformation of the front bumper, front
end module, body or front
doors and/or C pillar where
side collision sensors are
installed. Have the vehicle
checked and repaired by an
authorized Kia dealer.
• Installing bumper guards (or
side step or running board) or
replacing a bumper (or front
door module) with non-genuine parts may adversely
affect your vehicle’s collision
and air bag deployment performance.
Air bag inflation conditions
1VQA2084
Front air bags
Front air bags are designed to inflate
in a frontal collision depending on
the intensity, speed or angles of
impact of the front collision.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:26 PM
Page 71
Safety features of your vehicle
OVQ036018N
OXMA032057
Side and/or curtain air bags
Side and/or curtain air bags are
designed to inflate when an impact is
detected by side collision sensors
depending on the strength, speed or
angles of impact resulting from a
side impact collision.
Also, the side and curtain air bags are
designed to inflate when a rollover is
detected by a rollover sensor.
Although the front air bags (driver’s
and front passenger’s air bags) are
designed to inflate in frontal collisions, they also may inflate in other
types of collisions if the front impact
sensors detect a sufficient frontal
force in another type of impact. side
and curtain air bags are designed to
inflate in certain side impact collisions. They may inflate in other type
of collisions where a side force is
detected by the sensors. Side air bag
and/or curtain air bags may also
inflate where rollover sensors indicate the possibility of a rollover
occurring (even if none actually
occurs) or in other situations, incluiding when the vehicle is tilted while
being towed. Even where side and/or
curtain air bags would not provide
impact protection in a rollover, however, they will deploy to prevent ejection of occupants, especially those
who are restrained with seat belts.
If the vehicle chassis is impacted by
bumps or objects on unimproved
roads, the air bags may deploy. Drive
carefully on unimproved roads or on
surfaces not designed for vehicle
traffic to prevent unintended air bag
deployment.
3 71
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:26 PM
Page 72
Safety features of your vehicle
Air bag non-inflation conditions
1VQA2086
• In certain low-speed collisions the
air bags may not deploy. The air
bags are designed not to deploy in
such cases because they may not
provide benefits beyond the protection of the seat belts in such collisions.
3 72
OUN036087
OVQ036018N
• Air bags are not designed to inflate
in rear collisions, because occupants are moved backward by the
force of the impact. In this case,
inflated air bags would not be able
to provide any additional benefit.
• Front air bags may not inflate in
side impact collisions, because
occupants move to the direction of
the collision, and thus in side
impacts, frontal air bag deployment
would not provide additional occupant protection.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:26 PM
Page 73
Safety features of your vehicle
1VQA2089
1VQA2090
1VQA2091
• In an angled collision, the force of
impact may direct the occupants in
a direction where the air bags
would not be able to provide any
additional benefit, and thus the
sensors may not deploy any air
bags.
• Just before impact, drivers often
brake heavily. Such heavy braking
lowers the front portion of the vehicle causing it to “ride” under a vehicle with a higher ground clearance.
Air bags may not inflate in this
"under-ride" situation because
deceleration forces that are detected by sensors may be significantly
reduced by such “under-ride” collisions.
• Front air bags may not inflate in all
rollover accidents where the
SRSCM indicates that the front air
bag deployment would not provide
additional occupant protection.
3 73
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:26 PM
Page 74
Safety features of your vehicle
SRS Care
The SRS is virtually maintenancefree and so there are no parts you can
safely service by yourself. If the SRS
air bag warning light does not illuminate, or continuously remains on,
have your vehicle immediately
inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.
1VQA2092
• Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle collides with objects such as
utility poles or trees, where the
point of impact is concentrated to
one area and the full force of the
impact is not delivered to the sensors.
3 74
Any work on the SRS system, such
as removing, installing, repairing, or
any work on the steering wheel, the
front passenger’s panel, front seats
and roof rails must be performed by
an authorized Kia dealer. Improper
handling of the SRS system may
result in serious personal injury.
WARNING
• Modification to SRS components or wiring, including the
addition of any kind of badges
to the pad covers or modifications to the body structure,
can adversely affect SRS performance and lead to possible
injury.
• For cleaning the air bag pad
covers, use only a soft, dry
cloth or one which has been
moistened with plain water.
Solvents or cleaners could
adversely affect the air bag
covers and proper deployment of the system.
• No objects should be placed
over or near the air bag modules on the steering wheel,
instrument panel, and the front
passenger's panel above the
glove box, because any such
object could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a crash severe
enough to cause the air bags to
inflate.
(Continued)
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:26 PM
Page 75
Safety features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• If the air bags inflate, they
must be replaced by an
authorized Kia dealer.
• Do not tamper with or disconnect SRS wiring, or other
components of the SRS system. Doing so could result in
injury, due to accidental inflation of the air bags or by rendering the SRS inoperative.
• If components of the air bag
system must be discarded, or
if the vehicle must be
scrapped, certain safety precautions must be observed.
An authorized Kia dealer
knows these precautions and
can give you the necessary
information. Failure to follow
these precautions and procedures could increase the risk
of personal injury.
• If your vehicle was flooded
and has soaked carpeting or
water on flooring, you shouldn't try to start the engine;
have the vehicle towed to an
authorized Kia dealer.
Additional safety precautions
• Never let passengers ride in the
cargo area or on top of a foldeddown back seat. All occupants
should sit upright, fully back in their
seats with their seat belts on and
their feet on the floor.
• Passengers should not move
out of or change seats while the
vehicle is moving. A passenger
who is not wearing a seat belt during a crash or emergency stop can
be thrown against the inside of the
vehicle, against other occupants,
or out of the vehicle.
• Each seat belt is designed to
restrain one occupant. If more
than one person uses the same
seat belt, they could be seriously
injured or killed in a collision.
• Do not use any accessories on
seat belts. Devices claiming to
improve occupant comfort or reposition the seat belt can reduce the
protection provided by the seat belt
and increase the chance of serious
injury in a crash.
• Passengers should not place
hard or sharp objects between
themselves and the air bags.
Carrying hard or sharp objects on
your lap or in your mouth can result
in injuries if an air bag inflates.
• Keep occupants away from the
air bag covers. All occupants
should sit upright, fully back in their
seats with their seat belts on and
their feet on the floor. If occupants
are too close to the air bag covers,
they could be injured if the air bags
inflate.
• Do not attach or place objects
on or near the air bag covers.
Any object attached to or placed
on the front or side air bag covers
could interfere with the proper
operation of the air bags.
• Do not modify the front seats.
Modification of the front seats
could interfere with the operation of
the supplemental restraint system
sensing components or side air
bags.
3 75
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:26 PM
Page 76
Safety features of your vehicle
• Do not place items under the
front seats. Placing items under
the front seats could interfere with
the operation of the supplemental
restraint system sensing components and wiring harnesses.
• Never hold an infant or child on
your lap. The infant or child could
be seriously injured or killed in the
event of a crash. All infants and
children should be properly
restrained in appropriate child
safety seats or seat belts in the
rear seat.
3 76
WARNING
• Sitting improperly or out of
position can cause occupants
to be shifted too close to a
deploying air bag, strike the
interior structure or be thrown
from the vehicle resulting in
serious injury or death.
• Always sit upright with the
seatback in an upright position, centered on the seat
cushion with your seat belt
on, legs comfortably extended
and your feet on the floor.
• Always have the ignition OFF
when the vehicle is being
towed or where it may otherwise be tilted, since the side
and/or curtain airbags may
inflate if the sensors interpret
those tilt angles as a potential
rollover.
• Be careful not to cause impact
to the doors when the ignition
is ON.The air bags may inflate.
Adding equipment to or modifying your air bag-equipped
vehicle
If you modify your vehicle by changing your vehicle's frame, bumper system, front end or side sheet metal or
ride height, this may affect the operation of your vehicle's air bag system.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 3.QXP
1/23/2013
3:26 PM
Page 77
Safety features of your vehicle
Air bag warning label
OXM039050N
Air bag warning labels, some required by the
Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(CMVSS), are attached to the sunvisor to
alert the driver and passengers of potential
risks of the air bag system.
3 77
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:46 PM
Page 1
Features of your vehicle
Folding key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
• Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
• Key operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
• Transmitter precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
• Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
• Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
• Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
• Smart key function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
• Loss of the smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
• Smart key precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
• Smart key immobilizer system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
• Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Theft-alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
• Armed stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
• Theft-alarm stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
• Disarmed stage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
• Operating door locks from outside the vehicle . . . . 4-21
• Operating door locks from inside the vehicle. . . . . . 4-22
• Impact sensing door unlock system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
• Auto door lock/unlock feature (Automatic transaxle) . 4-24
• Child-protector rear door lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
• Opening the tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
• Closing the tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
• Power tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
• Emergency tailgate safety release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
• Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
• Opening the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
• Closing the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
• Opening the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
• Closing the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
• Emergency fuel filler lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Panoramic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
• Sunroof open warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
• Sliding the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
• Tilting the sunroof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
• Sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
• Resetting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
• Electric power steering (EPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
• Tilt and telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
• Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
• Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
• Flex steer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
4
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:46 PM
Page 2
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
• Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
• Outside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
• Instrument cluster control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
• LCD display control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
• Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
• Transaxle shift indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Rearview camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106
Hazard warning flasher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
• LCD modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
• Service mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
• User settings mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
• A/V Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
• Turn by turn mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
• Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
• Battery saver function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
• Headlight escort function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
• Headlight welcome function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
• Daytime running light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109
• Lighting control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109
• High beam operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
• Turn signals and lane change signals . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112
• Front fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112
Trip computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
Windshield wiper/washers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113
• Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
• Trip A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
• Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
• Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
• Front windshield washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
• Rear window wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . 4-116
Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117
• Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
• Indicator lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
• Automatic turn off function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117
• Room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117
• Map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
• Luggage lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119
• Vanity mirror lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119
LCD display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
4
• Non-operational conditions of
rear parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
• Rear parking assist system precautions . . . . . . . . . 4-104
• Self-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105
Rear parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
• Operation of the rear parking assist system. . . . . . 4-102
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:46 PM
Page 3
Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120
Interior features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-149
• Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120
• Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-149
• Bottle holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-150
• Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-150
• Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-151
• AC inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152
• Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154
• Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154
• Clothes hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-155
• Floor mat anchor(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-155
• Side curtain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-156
• Luggage net holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-156
Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
• Heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
• 3rd row air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126
• System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
• Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129
• Air Conditioning refrigerant label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130
• Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant
and compressor lubricant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130
Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131
• Automatic heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . 4-133
• Manual heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
• Outside thermometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137
• 3rd row air conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140
Windshield defrosting and defogging. . . . . . . . . 4-142
• Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-142
• Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143
• Defogging logic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144
Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-146
• Center console storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-146
• Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-146
• Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
• Luggage box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-148
Exterior features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157
• Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157
Audio system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-159
• Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-159
4
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:46 PM
Page 4
Features of your vehicle
FOLDING KEY
Record your key number
Key operations
The key code number
is stamped on the bar
code tag attached to
the key set. Should
you lose your keys,
this number will enable an authorized Kia dealer to duplicate the keys
easily. Remove the bar code tag and
store it in a safe place. Also, record
the code number and keep it in a
safe and handy place, but not in the
vehicle.
WARNING
Use only Kia original parts for
the ignition key in your vehicle.
If an aftermarket key is used,
the ignition switch may not
return to ON after START. If this
happens, the starter will continue to operate causing damage
to the starter motor and possible fire due to excessive current
in the wiring.
OXMA043331
• Used to start the engine.
• Used to lock and unlock the doors.
• Used to lock and unlock the glove
box.
• To unfold the key, press the release
button then the key will unfold automatically. To fold the key, fold the
key manually while pressing the
release button.
CAUTION
Do not fold the key without
pressing the release button.
This may damage the key.
4 4
WARNING - Ignition key
Leaving children unattended in
a vehicle with the ignition key is
dangerous even if the key is not
in the ignition. Children copy
adults and they could place the
key in the ignition. The ignition
key would enable children to
operate power windows or
other controls, or even make
the vehicle move, which could
result in serious bodily injury or
even death. Never leave the
keys in your vehicle with unsupervised children.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:46 PM
Page 5
Features of your vehicle
Door Lock (1)
Door Unlock (2)
1. Press the unlock button(2).
2. The driver's door will unlock. The
hazard warning lights will blink two
times.
3. Press the unlock button(2) twice
within 4 seconds and all doors and
tailgate will unlock. The hazard
warning lights will blink two times.
✽ NOTICE
OXMA043317
1. Close all doors, engine hood and
tailgate.
2. Press the lock button(1).
3. All doors and tailgate will lock. The
hazard warning lights will blink
once.
4. If the lock button is pressed once
more within 4 seconds, the hazard
warning lights will blink and the
horn will sound once.
5. Make sure that doors are locked by
checking the door lock button inside
or pulling the outside door handle.
You can activate or deactivate the
Two Turn Unlock function. Refer to
"User settings" in this chapter.
Tailgate unlock (3)
The tailgate is unlocked if the button
is pressed for more than 1 second.
Also, once the tailgate is opened and
then closed, the tailgate will be
locked automatically.
• For Power Tailgate Only:
The Power Tailgate will open if the
button is pressed for more than 1
second. Also, once the tailgate is
opened and then closed, the tailgate
will be locked again automatically.
If the power tailgate is switched ‘Off’
using the button in the overhead console, the tailgate unlock button will
operate to unlock the tailgate as
described above.
See section 4-26 for more information on the power tailgate option.
4 5
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:46 PM
Page 6
Features of your vehicle
Panic (4)
The horn sounds and hazard warning lights flash for about 27 seconds
if this button is pressed for more than
0.5 second. To stop the horn and
lights, press any button except the
trunk button on the transmitter.
4 6
Transmitter precautions
✽ NOTICE
The transmitter will not work if any
of following occur:
• The ignition key is in the ignition
switch.
• You exceed the operating distance
limit (about 10 m [30 feet]).
• The battery in the transmitter is
weak.
• Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
• The weather is extremely cold.
• The transmitter is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio substation or an airport which can interfere with normal operation of the
transmitter.
When the transmitter does not work
correctly, open and close the door
with the ignition key. If you have a
problem with the transmitter, contact
an authorized Kia dealer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If the transmitter is in close proximity to your mobile phone, the
signal could be blocked by your
mobile phones normal operational
signals. This is especially important when the phone is active such
as making and receiving calls, text
messaging, and/or sending/receiving emails. Avoid placing the
transmitter and your mobile
phone in the same pants or jacket
pocket and always try to maintain
an adequate distance between the
two devices.
CAUTION
Keep the transmitter away from
water or any liquid. If the keyless entry system is inoperative
due to exposure to water or liquids, it will not be covered by
your manufacturer’s vehicle
warranty.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:46 PM
Page 7
Features of your vehicle
Battery replacement
OYDDCO2005
The transmitter uses a 3 volt lithium
battery which will normally last for
several years. When replacement is
necessary, use the following procedure.
1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and
gently pry open the transmitter
center cover.
2. Replace the battery with a new
battery (CR2032). When replacing
the battery, make sure the battery
is positioned battery.
3. Install the battery in the reverse
order of removal.
For replacement transmitters, see an
authorized Kia dealer for transmitter
reprogramming.
• The transmitter is designed to give
you years of trouble-free use, however it can malfunction if exposed to
moisture or static electricity. If you
are unsure how to use your transmitter or replace the battery, contact
an authorized Kia dealer.
• Using the wrong battery can cause
the transmitter to malfunction. Be
sure to use the correct battery.
• To avoid damaging the transmitter,
don't drop it, get it wet, or expose it
to heat or sunlight.
•
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to the
environment and may cause
human health. Dispose the
battery according to your
local law(s) or regulation.
CAUTION - Transmitter
damage
Do not drop, wet or expose the
keyless entry system transmitter to heat or sunlight.
IC WARNING
This device complies with
Industry
Canada
licenceexempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this
device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference, including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the
device.
4 7
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:46 PM
Page 8
Features of your vehicle
Immobilizer system
Your vehicle is equipped with an
electronic engine immobilizer system
to reduce the risk of unauthorized
vehicle use.
Your immobilizer system is comprised of a small transponder in the
ignition key and electronic devices
inside the vehicle.
With the immobilizer system, whenever you insert your ignition key into
the ignition switch and turn it to ON,
it checks and determines and verifies
if the ignition key is valid.
If the key is determined to be valid,
the engine will start.
If the key is determined to be invalid,
the engine will not start.
4 8
To activate the immobilizer system:
Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. The immobilizer system activates automatically. Without a valid
ignition key for your vehicle, the
engine will not start.
To deactivate the immobilizer
system:
Insert the ignition key into the key
cylinder and turn it to the ON position.
WARNING
In order to prevent theft of your
vehicle, do not leave spare keys
anywhere in your vehicle. Your
Immobilizer password is a customer unique password and
should be kept confidential. Do
not leave this number anywhere
in your vehicle.
✽ NOTICE
When starting the engine, do not use
the key with other immobilizer keys
around. Otherwise the engine may
not start or may stop soon after it
starts. Keep each key separate in
order to avoid a starting malfunction.
CAUTION
Do not put metal accessories
near the ignition switch.
Metal accessories may interrupt
the transponder signal and may
prevent the engine from being
started.
✽ NOTICE
If you need additional keys or lose
your keys, contact an authorized
Kia dealer.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:46 PM
Page 9
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
The transponder in your ignition
key is an important part of the
immobilizer system. It is
designed to give years of trouble-free service, however you
should avoid exposure to moisture, static electricity and rough
handling. Immobilizer system
malfunction could occur.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Do not change, alter or adjust
the immobilizer system because
it could cause the immobilizer
system to malfunction and
should only be serviced by an
authorized Kia dealer.
Malfunctions caused by improper alterations, adjustments or
modifications to the immobilizer
system are not covered by your
vehicle manufacturer warranty.
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment. If the
keyless entry system is inoperative due to changes or modifications not approved by the party
responsible for compliance, it
will not be covered by your manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.
"Limp Home" Mode and Related
Procedures
If the immobilizer warning indicator
blinks for five seconds when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position, this indicates the immobilizer
system requires service. The engine
cannot be started without using the
procedure below.
The following procedure describes
how to start the engine using the
limp home function (0, 1, 2, 3 as a
sample password).
✽ NOTICE
You can get a limp home password
when the vehicle is first delivered to
you. If you do not have a password,
consult your authorized Kia dealer.
4 9
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:46 PM
Page 10
Features of your vehicle
1. To activate the password, turn the
ignition key "ON" and "OFF"
according to the digit numbers.
The immobilizer indicator will blink
along with the operation of the
ignition key. For example, turn the
ignition key once for digit number
"1", and twice for "2", and so on.
For the digit number "0", you must
cycle the ignition key 10 times.
2. Wait for 3~10 seconds.
3. You may set the remaining number
of digits by following steps 1 and 2.
4. If all of the four password digits
have been successfully entered,
turn the ignition key "ON" and
check that the immobilizer indicator illuminates. From this time, you
have to start your engine within 30
seconds. If you try to start your
engine after 30 seconds, your
engine will not start.
4 10
✽ NOTICE
If the engine stalls while driving in
the "limp home" mode, you can
start your engine within 3 seconds
without re-entering the password.
If the immobilizer indicator blinks for
five seconds, you must re-enter the
password (steps 1~4).
After performing the limp home activation procedure, consult with your
authorized Kia dealer as soon as
possible.
CAUTION
• If the password is entered
incorrectly three consecutive
times, wait for about one hour
to perform the limp home activation procedure again.
• If you cannot start your engine
using the limp home activation procedure, have your
vehicle towed by an authorized Kia dealer.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:46 PM
Page 11
Features of your vehicle
SMART KEY
Record your key number
The key code number
is stamped on the bar
code tag attached to
the key set. Should
you lose your keys,
this number will enable an authorized Kia dealer to duplicate the keys
easily. Remove the bar code tag and
store it in a safe place. Also, record
the code number and keep it in a
safe and handy place, but not in the
vehicle.
With a smart key, you can lock or
unlock a door (and Tailgate) and start
the engine.
Refer to the following for more details.
Smart key function
WARNING - Smart key
OXMA043316
To remove the mechanical key, press
and hold the release button(1) and
remove the mechanical key (2).
To reinstall the mechanical key, put
the key into the hole and push it until
a click sound is heard.
Leaving children unattended in
a vehicle with the smart key is
dangerous. Unattended children
mimic adults and they could
press the engine start/stop button which would enable children
to operate power windows or
other controls, or even make the
vehicle move, which could
result in serious bodily injury or
even death. Never leave the keys
in your vehicle with unsupervised children.
4 11
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:46 PM
Page 12
Features of your vehicle
Door Lock
4. The hazard warning lights will blink
and the chime will sound once.
5. Make sure that doors are locked
by pulling the outside door handle.
✽ NOTICE
OXMA043316/Q
OXM049002
Using the door handle button
1. Carry the smart key.
2. Close all doors, engine hood and
tailgate.
3. Press the button of the outside
door handle.
4 12
• The button will only operate when
the smart key is within 0.7~1m.
(28~40in) from the outside door
handle.
• Even though you press the outside
door handle button, the doors will
not lock and the chime will sound
for 3 seconds if any of following
occur:
- The smart key is in the vehicle.
- The engine start/stop button is
in ACC or ON position.
- Any door except the tailgate is
open.
Using the button on the smart key
1 Close all doors, engine hood and
tailgate.
2. Press the lock button(1).
3. The hazard warning lights will blink
and the chime will sound once.
4. Make sure that doors are locked
by pulling the outside door handle.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:46 PM
Page 13
Features of your vehicle
Unlocking
Using the door handle button
1. Carry the smart key.
2. Press the button of the driver's
outside door handle.
3. The driver’s door will unlock. The
hazard warning lights will blink and
the chime will sound two times.
4. Press the button twice within 4
seconds and all doors and the tailgate will unlock and the hazard
warning lights will blink and the
chime will sound two times.
❈ If you press the button of the front
passenger’s outside door handle
while carrying the smart key, all
doors will unlock.
✽ NOTICE
• The button will only operate when
the smart key is within 0.7~1m.
(28~40in) from the outside door
handle.
• When the smart key is recognized
in the area of 0.7~1m. (28~40in)
from the front outside door handle, other people can also open the
doors.
• After unlocking the driver’s door
or all doors, the door(s) will lock
automatically unless the door is
opened.
Using the button on the smart key
1. Press the unlock button(2) of the
smart key.
2. The driver’s door will unlock. The
hazard warning lights will blink and
the chime will sound two times.
3. Press the unlock button(2) twice
within 4 seconds and all doors and
the tailgate will unlock. The hazard
warning lights will blink and the
chime will sound two times.
✽ NOTICE
After pressing the button, the doors
will lock automatically unless any
door is opened within 30 seconds.
✽ NOTICE
You can activate or deactivate the
Two Turn Unlock function. Refer to
"User settings" in this chapter.
4 13
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:46 PM
Page 14
Features of your vehicle
Tailgate unlocking
Using the tailgate handle button
1. Carry the smart key.
2. Press the tailgate handle button.
3. When all doors are locked, the
hazard warning lights will blink two
times.
Once the tailgate is opened and
then closed, the tailgate will lock
automatically.
✽ NOTICE
The button will only operate when
the smart key is within 0.7~1m.
(28~40in) from the tailgate handle.
Using the button on the smart key
1. Press the tailgate unlock button(3)
for more than 1 second.
2. When all doors are locked, the
hazard warning lights will blink two
times.
• For Power Tailgate Only:
The Power Tailgate will open if the
button is pressed for more than 1
second. Also, once the tailgate is
opened and then closed, the tailgate
will be locked again automatically.
If the power tailgate is switched ‘Off’
using the button in the overhead console, the tailgate unlock button will
operate to unlock the tailgate as
described above.
See section 4-26 for more information on the power tailgate option.
4 14
Panic
1. Press the panic button(4) for more
than 1 second.
2. The horn sounds and hazard
warning light flash for about 30
seconds.
✽ NOTICE
To stop the horn and lights, press
any button on the smart key.
Start-up
You can start the engine without
inserting the key. For detailed information refer to the “Engine start/stop
button” in chapter 5.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:46 PM
Page 15
Features of your vehicle
Loss of the smart key
Smart key precautions
A maximum of 2 smart keys can be
registered to a single vehicle.
If you happen to lose your smart key,
you will not be able to start the
engine. You should immediately take
the vehicle and remaining key to your
authorized Kia dealer(tow the vehicle, if necessary) to protect it from
potential theft.
• The smart key will not work if any
of the following occur:
- The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station or an airport which can interfere with normal operation of the
smart key.
- The smart key is near a mobile
two way radio system or a cellular phone.
- Another vehicle’s smart key is
being operated close to your
vehicle.
• When the smart key does not work
correctly, open and close the door
with the mechanical key and contact
an authorized Kia dealer.
• If the smart key is in close proximity to your cell phone or smart
phone, the signal from the smart
key could be blocked by normal
operation of your cell phone or
smart phone. This is especially
important when the phone is active
such as making a call, receiving
calls, text messaging, and/or sending/receiving emails. Avoid placing
the smart key and your cell phone
or smart phone in the same pants
or jacket pocket and maintain adequate distance between the two
devices.
CAUTION
Keep the smart key away from
water or any liquid. If the keyless entry system is inoperative
due to exposure to water or
other liquids, it will not be covered by your manufacturer’s
vehicle warranty.
4 15
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:46 PM
Page 16
Features of your vehicle
Smart key immobilizer system
Your vehicle is equipped with an
electronic engine immobilizer system
to reduce the risk of unauthorized
vehicle use.
Your immobilizer system is comprised of a small transponder in the
smart key and electronic devices
inside the vehicle.
With the immobilizer system, whenever you turn the engine start/stop
button to the ON position by pressing
the button while carrying the smart
key, it checks and determines and
verifies if the smart key is valid or not.
If the key is determined to be valid,
the engine will start.
If the key is determined to be invalid,
the engine will not start.
4 16
To deactivate the immobilizer
system:
Turn the engine start/stop button to
the ON position by pressing the button while carrying the smart key.
To activate the immobilizer system:
Turn the engine start/stop button to
the OFF position. The immobilizer
system activates automatically.
Without a valid smart key for your
vehicle, the engine will not start.
CAUTION
In order to prevent theft of your
vehicle, do not leave spare keys
anywhere in your vehicle. Your
Immobilizer password is a customer unique password and
should be kept confidential. Do
not leave this number anywhere
in your vehicle.
✽ NOTICE
When starting the engine, do not use
the key with other immobilizer keys
around. Otherwise the engine may
not start or may stop soon after it
starts. Keep each key separate in
order to avoid a starting malfunction.
CAUTION
Do not put metal accessories
near the smart key.
The engine may not start
because the metal accessories
may interrupt the transponder
signal from transmitting normally.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:46 PM
Page 17
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
If you need additional keys or lose
your keys, contact an authorized
Kia dealer.
CAUTION
The transponder in your smart
key is an important part of the
immobilizer system. It is
designed to give years of trouble-free service, however you
should avoid exposure to moisture, static electricity and rough
handling. Immobilizer system
malfunction could occur.
CAUTION
Do not change, alter or adjust
the immobilizer system because
it could cause the immobilizer
system to malfunction and
should only be serviced by an
authorized Kia dealer.
Malfunctions caused by improper alterations, adjustments or
modifications to the immobilizer
system are not covered by your
vehicle manufacturer warranty.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment. If the
keyless entry system is inoperative due to changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for
compliance, it will not be covered by your manufacturer’s
vehicle warranty.
4 17
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:46 PM
Page 18
Features of your vehicle
Battery replacement
OXM043005
A smart key battery should last for
several years, but if the smart key is
not working properly, try replacing
the battery with a new one. If you are
unsure how to use your smart key or
replace the battery, contact an
authorized Kia dealer.
1. Remove the mechanical key.
2. Pry open the rear cover.
3. Replace the battery with a new
battery (CR2032). When replacing
the battery, make sure the battery
position.
4 18
4. Install the battery in the reverse
order of removal.
• The smart key is designed to give
you years of trouble-free use, however it can malfunction if exposed
to moisture or static electricity. If
you are unsure how to use or
replace the battery, contact an
authorized Kia dealer.
• Using the wrong battery can cause
the smart key to malfunction. Be
sure to use the correct battery.
• To avoid damaging the smart key,
don't drop it, get it wet, or expose it
to heat or sunlight.
•
An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and
human health. Dispose the
battery according to your
local law(s) or regulation.
CAUTION - Smart key
damage
Do not drop, get wet or expose
the smart key to heat or sunlight, or it will be damaged.
IC WARNING
This device complies with
Industry Canada licence-exempt
RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:46 PM
Page 19
Features of your vehicle
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM
Armed stage
Armed
stage
Disarmed
stage
Theft-alarm
stage
This system is designed to provide
protection from unauthorized entry
into the vehicle. This system is operated in three stages: the first is the
"Armed" stage, the second is the
"Theft-alarm" stage, and the third is
the "Disarmed" stage. If triggered,
the system provides an audible
alarm with blinking of the hazard
warning lights.
Park the vehicle and stop the engine.
Arm the system as described below.
1. Remove the ignition key from the
ignition switch and exit the vehicle.
2. Make sure that all doors (and tailgate) and engine hood are closed
and latched.
3. Lock the doors using the transmitter of the keyless entry system (or
smart key) or ignition key.
After completion of the steps above,
the hazard warning lights will blink
(for smart key, the chime also
sounds) once to indicate that the
system is armed.
If any door (or tailgate) or engine
hood remains open, the hazard
warning lights and the chime will not
operate and the theft-alarm will not
arm. If all doors (and tailgate) and
engine hood are closed after the lock
button is pressed, the hazard warning lights blink once.
The system can also be armed by
locking the doors with the key from
the front doors; however, the hazard
warning lights will not blink using this
method.
✽ NOTICE
The theft-alarm system can be deactivated by an authorized Kia dealer.
If you want this feature, consult an
authorized Kia dealer.
Do not arm the system until all
passengers have left the vehicle. If
the system is armed while a passenger(s) remains in the vehicle,
the alarm may be activated when
the remaining passenger(s) leave
the vehicle. If any door (or tailgate)
or engine hood is opened within
30 seconds after the system
enters the armed stage, the system is disarmed to prevent an
unnecessary alarm.
4 19
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:46 PM
Page 20
Features of your vehicle
Theft-alarm stage
Disarmed stage
The alarm will be activated if any of
the following occurs while the system
is armed.
• A front or rear door is opened without using the ignition key or transmitter (or smart key).
• The tailgate is opened without
using the transmitter (or smart
key).
• The engine hood is opened.
The horn will sound and the hazard
warning lights will blink continuously
for approximately 27 seconds, and
repeat the horn 3 times unless the
system is disarmed. To turn off the
system, unlock the doors with the
ignition key or transmitter (or smart
key).
The system will be disarmed when
the doors (and tailgate) are unlocked
with the transmitter (or smart key) or
the ignition key.
After depressing the unlock button,
the hazard warning lights will blink
and the chime will sound twice (in
smart key) to indicate that the system is disarmed.
After depressing the unlock button, if
any door (or tailgate) is not opened
within 30 seconds, the system will be
rearmed.
4 20
✽ NOTICE
• Avoid trying to start the engine
while the alarm is activated. The
vehicle starting motor is disabled
during the theft-alarm stage.
If the system is not disarmed with
the transmitter, insert the key into
the ignition switch, turn the ignition switch to the ON position and
wait for 30 seconds. Then the system will be disarmed. (if equipped)
• If you lose your keys, consult your
authorized Kia dealer.
CAUTION
Do not change, alter or adjust
the theft-alarm system because
it could cause the theft-alarm
system to malfunction and
should only be serviced by an
authorized Kia dealer.
Malfunctions caused by improper alterations, adjustments or
modifications to the theft-alarm
system are not covered by your
vehicle manufacturer warranty.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:46 PM
Page 21
Features of your vehicle
DOOR LOCKS
Operating door locks from
outside the vehicle
■ Type A
■ Type B
Unlock
Unlock
Lock
Lock
OXMA043319
• Turn the key clockwise to unlock
and counterclockwise to lock.
• If you lock the driver’s door with a
key, all vehicle doors will lock automatically.
• From the driver’s door, turn the key
to the right once to unlock the door
and once more within 4 seconds to
unlock all doors.
• Doors can also be locked and
unlocked with the transmitter.
• Once the doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.
• When closing the door, push the
door by hand. Make sure the doors
are closed securely.
✽ NOTICE
• In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not
work properly due to freezing conditions.
• If the door is locked/unlocked
multiple times in rapid succession
with either the vehicle key or door
lock switch, the system may stop
operating temporarily in order to
protect the circuit and prevent
damage to system components.
WARNING
• If you don’t close the door
securely, the door may open
again.
• Be careful that someone’s
body and hands are not
trapped when closing the door.
OXM049006
• To lock a door without the key,
push the inside door lock button (1)
or central door lock switch (2) to
the “Lock” position and close the
door (3).
• If you lock the door with the central
door lock switch (2), all vehicle
doors will lock automatically.
✽ NOTICE
Always remove the ignition key,
engage the parking brake, close all
windows and lock all doors when
leaving your vehicle unattended.
4 21
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:46 PM
Page 22
Features of your vehicle
Operating door locks from
inside the vehicle
With the door lock button
Unlock
Lock
OXM049007
• To unlock a door, push the door
lock button (1) to the “Unlock” position. The red mark (2) on the button
will be visible.
• To lock a door, push the door lock
button (1) to the “Lock” position. If
the door is locked properly, the red
mark (2) on the door lock button
will not be visible.
• To open a door, pull the door handle (3) outward.
4 22
• If the inner door handle of the driver’s (or front passenger’s) door is
pulled when the door lock button is
in the lock position, the button will
unlock and the door will open. (if
equipped)
• Front doors cannot be locked if the
ignition key is in the ignition switch
and any front door is opened.
WARNING - Door lock
malfunction
If a power door lock ever fails to
function while you are in the
vehicle, try one or more of the
following techniques to exit:
• Operate the door unlock feature repeatedly (both electronic and manual) while simultaneously pulling on the door
handle.
• Operate the other door locks
and handles, front and rear.
• Lower a front window and use
the key to unlock the door
from outside.
• Move to the cargo area and
open the tailgate.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:46 PM
Page 23
Features of your vehicle
With central door lock switch
Driver’s door
OXMA042008
Passenger’s door
OXMA042009
Operate by pressing the central door
lock switch.
• When pressing the front portion (1)
of the switch, all vehicle doors will
lock.
• When pressing the rear portion (2)
of the switch, all vehicle doors will
unlock.
• If the key is in the ignition switch
and any front door is opened, the
doors will not lock even though the
front portion (1) of the central door
lock switch is pressed.
WARNING - Doors
• The doors should always be
fully closed and locked while
the vehicle is in motion to prevent accidental opening of the
door. Locked doors will also
discourage potential intruders
when the vehicle stops or
slows down.
• Be careful when opening
doors and watch for vehicles,
motorcycles, bicycles or
pedestrians approaching the
vehicle in the path of the door.
Opening a door when something is approaching can
cause damage or injury.
WARNING - Unlocked
vehicles
Leaving your vehicle unlocked
can invite theft or possible harm
to you or others from someone
hiding in your vehicle while you
are gone. Always remove the
ignition key, engage the parking
brake, close all windows and
lock all doors when leaving
your vehicle unattended.
WARNING - Unattended
children
An enclosed vehicle can become
extremely hot, causing death or
severe injury to unattended children or animals who cannot
escape the vehicle. Furthermore,
children might operate features
of the vehicle that could injure
them, or they could encounter
other harm, possibly from someone gaining entry to the vehicle.
Never leave children or animals
unattended in your vehicle.
4 23
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:46 PM
Page 24
Features of your vehicle
Impact sensing door unlock
system (if equipped)
Child-protector rear door lock
In the event of air bag deployment
resulting from a vehicle impact, all
doors will automatically unlock.
Auto door lock/unlock feature
(Automatic transaxle, if equipped)
• All doors will automatically lock
when the transaxle shift lever is
shifted out of P(Park).
• All doors will automatically unlock
when the transaxle shift lever is
shifted into P (Park).
✽ NOTICE
You can select some auto door
lock/unlock features in “User
Settings” as follows;
• Speed sensing auto door lock
• Auto door unlock when the ignition key is removed from the ignition switch or engine is turned off.
• Auto door lock/unlock by shifting
the shift lever out of P(Park) or
into P(Park).
For more information, refer to
“User Settings” in this chapter.
4 24
3. Close the rear door.
To open the rear door, pull the outside door handle.
Even though the doors may be
unlocked, the rear door will not open
by pulling the inner door handle (1)
until the rear door child safety lock is
unlocked.
WARNING - Rear door
OXM049010
The child safety lock is provided to
help prevent children from accidentally opening the rear doors from
inside the vehicle. The rear door
safety locks should be used whenever children are in the vehicle.
1. Open the rear door.
2. Push the child safety lock located
on the rear edge of the door to the
lock ( ) position. When the child
safety lock is in the lock position, the
rear door will not open even when
the inner door handle is pulled.
locks
If children accidentally open the
rear doors while the vehicle is
in motion, they could fall out of
the vehicle, resulting in severe
injury or death. To prevent children from opening the rear
doors from the inside, the rear
door safety locks should be
used whenever children are in
the vehicle.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:46 PM
Page 25
Features of your vehicle
TAILGATE
✽ NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not work
properly due to freezing conditions.
Opening the tailgate
Closing the tailgate
WARNING
The tailgate swings upward.
Make sure no objects or people
are near the rear of the vehicle
when opening the tailgate.
OXM043023
• The tailgate is locked or unlocked
when all doors are locked or
unlocked with the key, transmitter
(or smart key) or central door lock
switch.
• If unlocked, the tailgate can be
opened by pressing the handle
switch and then pulling the handle
up.
• Only the tailgate is unlocked if the
tailgate unlock button on the smart
key is pressed (if equipped). Once
the tailgate is opened and then
closed, the tailgate is locked automatically.
OXM043024
CAUTION
Make certain that you close the
tailgate before driving your
vehicle. Possible damage may
occur to the tailgate lift cylinders and attached hardware if
the tailgate is not closed prior to
driving.
To close the tailgate, lower and push
down the tailgate firmly. Make sure
that the tailgate is securely latched.
WARNING
Make sure your hands, feet and
other parts of your body are
safely out of the way before
closing the tailgate.
4 25
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:47 PM
Page 26
Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Exhaust
fumes
If you drive with the tailgate
open, you may draw dangerous
exhaust fumes into your vehicle
which can cause serious injury
or death to vehicle occupants.
If you must drive with the tailgate opened, keep the air vents
and all windows open so that
additional outside air comes
into the vehicle.
Power tailgate (if equipped)
OXMA043008
OXMA043023
OXMA043325
4 26
Power
Power
Power
Power
tailgate
tailgate
tailgate
tailgate
open/close button
off button
handle switch
close button
✽ NOTICE
The power tailgate operates when:
• Automatic shift lever is in P (Park).
• Manual shift lever is in neutral.
WARNING
WARNING - Rear cargo
area
Occupants should never ride in
the rear cargo area where no
restraints are available. To avoid
injury in the event of an accident or sudden stops, occupants should always be properly restrained.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Never leave children or animals
unattended in your vehicle.
Unattended children or animals
could activate the power tailgate
which may result in injury to
themselves or others, or damage
to the vehicle.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:47 PM
Page 27
Features of your vehicle
WARNING
• Make sure there are no people
or objects around the tailgate
before operating the power
tailgate. Wait until the tailgate
is opened fully and stopped
before loading or unloading
cargo or passengers from the
vehicle.
• During power operation, serious personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Make sure
the tailgate is CLOSED and
latched before driving.
CAUTION
Do not close or open the power
tailgate manually during automatic operation. This may cause
damage to the power tailgate or
to the vehicle.
If it is necessary to close or
open the power tailgate manually when the battery is discharged or disconnected, make
sure the tailgate is not in operation. Switch the power tailgate
to the off position. Do not apply
excessive force.
Opening the tailgate
OXMA043327
The power tailgate will open automatically by doing one of the following:
• Press the tailgate unlock button on
the transmitter or smart key.
• Press the power tailgate open button.
4 27
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:47 PM
Page 28
Features of your vehicle
Closing the tailgate
WARNING
The chime will sound and the
hazard warning flasher will blink
10 times if you drive with the
tailgate closed but not fully
secured. Stop your vehicle
immediately at a safe place to
check if your tailgate is securely
locked.
OXMA043023
• Press the tailgate handle switch
carrying the smart key with you.
4 28
OXMA043325
1. Press the power tailgate close button on the tailgate or inside the
vehicle (approximately 1 second).
2. The tailgate will close and lock
automatically.
✽ NOTICE
The button on the tailgate will not
illuminate or function when the system is in the off/manual mode.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:47 PM
Page 29
Features of your vehicle
Power tailgate non-opening conditions
WARNING
The chime will sound continuously if you drive over 3km/h
(2mph) with the tailgate opened.
Stop your vehicle at a safe place
as soon as possible to check if
your tailgate is opened.
WARNING
OXMA043326
• The power tailgate will not open or
close automatically, when the vehicle
is moving more than 3km/h (2mph).
• If you press the power tailgate off
button (1), the power tailgate will
not open or close automatically.
The chime will sound and the
hazard warning flasher will blink
10 times if you drive with the tailgate closed but not fully secured.
Stop your vehicle immediately at
a safe place to check if your tailgate is securely locked.
✽ NOTICE
• The power tailgate can be operated when the engine is not running.
However the power tailgate operation consumes large amounts of
vehicle electric power. To prevent
the battery from being discharged,
do not operate it excessively e.g.:
more than approximately 10 times
repeatedly.
• To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the power
tailgate in the open position for a
long time.
• Do not modify or repair any part
of the power tailgate by yourself.
This must be done by an authorized Kia dealer.
• When jacking up the vehicle to
change a tire or repair the vehicle,
do not operate the power tailgate.
This could cause the power tailgate to operate improperly.
(Continued)
4 29
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:47 PM
Page 30
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• In cold and wet climates, the
power tailgate may not work properly due to freezing conditions.
• It is recommended to wait until
the power tailgate is fully closed
before starting the vehicle. The
power tailgate may not close fully
if the vehicle is started during
automatic closing.
Automatic reversal
If the automatic reversal feature
operates continuously more than
twice during opening or closing operation, the power tailgate may stop at
that position. At this time, close the
tailgate manually and operate the
tailgate automatically again.
WARNING
OXMA043328
During power opening and closing if
the power tailgate is blocked by an
object or part of the body, the power
tailgate will detect the resistance.
• If the resistance is detected while
opening the tailgate, it will stop and
move in the opposite direction.
• If the resistance is detected while
closing the tailgate, it will stop and
move in the opposite direction.
However, if the resistance is weak
such as from an object that is thin or
soft, or the tailgate is near the latched
position, the automatic stop and reversal may not detect the resistance.
4 30
Never place any object or part of
your body in the path of the
power tailgate as it is operating.
Doing so could result in personal
injury or damage to the vehicle.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:47 PM
Page 31
Features of your vehicle
How to reset the power tailgate
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, or if the related fuse has
been replaced or disconnected, for the
power tailgate to operate normally,
reset the power tailgate as follows:
1. Put the shift lever in P (Park).
2. Press the tailgate handle switch
and tailgate close button at the
same time for more than 3 seconds. (the chime will sound).
3. Close the tailgate manually.
4. Open the tailgate using the tailgate handle switch and allow it to
fully open.
5. After fully opening, the tailgate will
complete initialization and lights
will flash twice indicating reset
complete.
If the power tailgate does not work
properly after the above procedure,
have the system checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
✽ NOTICE
If the power tailgate does not operate normally, first check the following condition before using the power
tailgate.
• Make sure the shift lever is in
Park
• Make sure the Power Tailgate Off
switch is not pressed.
If any of the power tailgate buttons
are pressed while the power tailgate
is in operation, the power tailgate
will stop. If any button is pressed
again the power tailgate will reverse
direction.
Power tailgate opening height
user setting
OXMA043325
The driver may set the height of a
fully opened tailgate by following the
below instruction.
1. Position the tailgate manually to
the height you prefer.
2. Press the tailgate close button for
more than 3 seconds.
3. You will hear the system beep twice
indicating height has been set up.
The tailgate will open to the height
the driver has set up.
4 31
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:47 PM
Page 32
Features of your vehicle
Emergency tailgate safety
release
OXM043006
Your vehicle is equipped with an
emergency tailgate safety release
lever located on the bottom of the
tailgate. When someone is inadvertently locked in the cargo area, the
tailgate can be opened by pushing
the release lever and pushing open
the tailgate.
4 32
WARNING
• For emergencies, be fully
aware of the location of the
emergency tailgate safety
release lever in the vehicle
and how to open the tailgate if
you are accidentally locked in
the cargo area.
• No one should be allowed to
occupy the cargo area of the
vehicle at any time. The cargo
area is a very dangerous location in the event of a crash.
• Use the release lever for
emergencies only. Use with
extreme caution, especially
while the vehicle is in motion.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:47 PM
Page 33
Features of your vehicle
WINDOWS
(1) Driver’s door power window
switch
(2) Front passenger’s door power
window switch
(3) Rear door (left) power window
switch
(4) Rear door (right) power window
switch
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window
up/down* (Driver’s window)
(7) Power window lock switch
* if equipped
✽ NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, power windows may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
OXM049014N
4 33
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:47 PM
Page 34
Features of your vehicle
Power windows
✽ NOTICE
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for power windows to operate.
Each door has a power window
switch that controls the door's window. The driver has a power window
lock button which can block the operation of passenger windows. The
power windows can be operated for
approximately 30 seconds after the
ignition key is removed or turned to
the ACC or LOCK position. However,
if the front doors are opened, the
power windows cannot be operated
even within the 30 second period.
While driving with the rear windows
down or with the sunroof (if
equipped) in an open (or partially
open) position, your vehicle may
demonstrate a wind buffeting or
pulsation noise. This noise is a normal occurrence and can be reduced
or eliminated by taking the following actions. If the noise occurs with
one or both of the rear windows
down, partially lower both front
windows approximately one inch. If
you experience the noise with the
sunroof open, slightly reduce the
size of the sunroof opening.
4 34
Window opening and closing
OXM049016
The driver’s door has a master power
window switch that controls all the
windows in the vehicle.
To open or close a window, press
down or pull up the front portion of
the corresponding switch to the first
detent position (5).
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:47 PM
Page 35
Features of your vehicle
Auto down window
(Driver’s window, if equipped)
Auto up/down window
(Driver's window, if equipped)
OXM049017
OXM049015
Pressing the power window switch
momentarily to the second detent
position (6) completely lowers the
driver’s window even when the
switch is released. To stop the window at the desired position while the
window is in operation, momentarily
pull the switch in the direction opposite of the window’s movement.
Pressing or pulling up the power window switch momentarily to the second
detent position (6) completely lowers
or raises the window even when the
switch is released. To stop the window
at the desired position while the window is in operation, pull up or press
down and release the switch.
If the power window does not operate
normally, the automatic power window system must be reset as follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Close the driver’s window and
continue pulling up the driver’s
power window switch for at least 1
second after the window is completely closed.
4 35
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:47 PM
Page 36
Features of your vehicle
And if the power window switch is
pulled up continuously again within 5
seconds after the window is lowered
by the automatic window reversal
feature, the automatic window reversal will not operate.
Power window lock button
✽ NOTICE
OUN026013
Automatic reversal
If the upward movement of the window is blocked by an object or part of
the body, the window will detect the
resistance and will stop upward
movement. The window will then
lower approximately 30 cm. (11.8 in)
to allow the object to be cleared.
The distance may vary based on the
size or position of the window. If the
window detects the resistance while
the power window switch is pulled up
continuously, the window will stop
upward movement then lower
approximately 2.5 cm. (1 in).
4 36
The automatic reverse feature for
the driver’s window is only active
when the “auto up” feature is used
by fully pulling up the switch. The
automatic reverse feature will not
operate if the window is raised using
the halfway position on the power
window switch.
WARNING
Always check for obstructions
before raising any window to
avoid injuries or vehicle damage.
If an object less than 0.16 in. (4
mm) in diameter is caught
between the window glass and
the upper window channel, the
automatic reverse window may
not detect the resistance and will
not stop and reverse direction.
OXM049018
• The driver can disable the power
window switches on the passenger
doors by pressing the power window lock button located on the driver’s door to the LOCK position
(pressed).
• When the power window lock
button is in the LOCK position
(pressed), the driver’s master
control cannot operate the passenger door power windows.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:47 PM
Page 37
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
• To prevent possible damage
to the power window system,
do not open or close two windows or more at the same
time. This will also ensure the
longevity of the fuse.
• Never try to operate the main
switch on the driver's door
and the individual door window switch in the opposite
directions at the same time. If
this is done, the window will
stop and cannot be opened or
closed.
WARNING - Windows
• NEVER leave the ignition key
in the vehicle.
• NEVER leave any child unattended in the vehicle. Even
very young children may inadvertently cause the vehicle to
move, entangle themselves in
the windows, or otherwise
injure themselves or others.
• Always double check to make
sure all arms, hands, head
and other obstructions are
safely out of the way before
closing a window.
• Do not allow children to play
with the power windows. Keep
the driver’s door power window lock button in the LOCK
position (pressed). Serious
injury can result from unintentional window operation by
the child.
• Do not extend heads or any
limbs outside the window
while the vehicle is in motion.
4 37
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:47 PM
Page 38
Features of your vehicle
HOOD
Opening the hood
Closing the hood
OXM043025
OXM049019
1. Pull the release lever to unlatch
the hood. The hood should pop
open slightly.
WARNING
Open the hood after turning off
the engine on a flat surface,
shifting the shift lever to the P
(Park) position for automatic
transaxle and to the 1st (First)
gear or R (Reverse) for manual
transaxle, and setting the parking brake.
4 38
2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise
the hood slightly, pull the secondary latch (1) inside of the hood
center and lift the hood (2).
3. Raise the hood. It will completely
rise by itself after it has been
raised about halfway.
1. Before closing the hood, check the
following:
• All filler caps in the engine compartment must be correctly
installed.
• Gloves, rags or any other combustible material must be
removed from the engine compartment.
2. Lower the hood halfway and push
down to securely lock in place.
WARNING
• Before closing the hood,
ensure that all obstructions
are removed from the hood
opening. Closing the hood
with an obstruction present in
the hood opening may result
in property damage or severe
personal injury.
• Do not leave gloves, rags or
any other combustible material in the engine compartment.
Doing so may cause a heatinduced fire.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:47 PM
Page 39
Features of your vehicle
WARNING
• Always double check to be
sure that the hood is firmly
latched before driving away. If
it is not latched, the hood
could open while the vehicle
is being driven, causing total
loss of visibility, which might
result in an accident.
• Do not move the vehicle with
the hood raised. The view will
be blocked and the hood
could fall or get damaged.
WARNING
ODMNMC2034
When you check the engine
compartment, Take caution to
avoid contacting your head with
the safety hook which is located
inside of the hood.
4 39
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:48 PM
Page 40
Features of your vehicle
FUEL FILLER LID
Opening the fuel filler lid
Closing the fuel filler lid
(if equipped)
1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise
until it “clicks” one time. This indicates that the cap is securely tightened.
2. Close the fuel filler lid and push it
in lightly making sure that it is
securely closed.
✽ NOTICE
OAM049089
OXMA042021
The fuel filler lid must be opened
from inside the vehicle by pressing
the fuel filler lid opener button on the
driver’s door. (if equipped)
✽ NOTICE
If the fuel filler lid does not open
because ice has formed around it,
tap lightly or push on the lid to break
the ice and release the lid. Do not pry
on the lid. If necessary, spray around
the lid with an approved de-icer fluid
(do not use radiator anti-freeze) or
move the vehicle to a warm place
and allow the ice to melt.
4 40
1. Stop the engine.
2. To open the fuel filler lid, push the
fuel filler lid opener button.
3. Pull open the fuel filler lid (1).
4. To remove the cap, turn the fuel
filler cap (2) counterclockwise.
5. Refuel as needed.
There may be an intermittent noise
near the refueling hole while the
engine is idling if the fuel cap is not
closed securely. This occurs normally with the OBD system.
✽ NOTICE
When refueling fully at an up hill,
the fuel gauge may not point to the F
position.
It is not a malfunction. If you move
your vehicle to a level ground, the
fuel gauge will move to the full position.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:48 PM
Page 41
Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Refueling
WARNING - Refueling
• If pressurized fuel sprays out,
it can cover your clothes or
skin and subject you to the
risk of fire and burns. Always
remove the fuel cap carefully
and slowly. If the cap is venting fuel or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until the condition stops before completely removing the cap.
• Do not "top off" after the nozzle automatically shuts off
when refueling.
• Tighten the cap until it clicks
one time, otherwise the Check
Engine
light will illuminate.
• Always check that the fuel cap
is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in the event
of an accident.
dangers
Automotive fuels are flammable
materials. When refueling, please
note the following guidelines
carefully. Failure to follow these
guidelines may result in severe
personal injury, severe burns or
death by fire or explosion.
• Read and follow all warnings
posted at the gas station facility.
• Before refueling, note the
location of the Emergency
Gasoline Shut-Off, if available,
at the gas station facility.
• Before touching the fuel nozzle, you should eliminate
potentially dangerous static
electricity discharge by touching another metal part of the
vehicle, a safe distance away
from the fuel filler neck, nozzle, or other gas source.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not get back into a vehicle
once you have begun refueling since you can generate
static electricity by touching,
rubbing or sliding against any
item or fabric (polyester, satin,
nylon, etc.) capable of producing static electricity. Static
electricity discharge can
ignite fuel vapors resulting in
rapid burning. If you must reenter the vehicle, you should
once again eliminate potentially dangerous static electricity discharge by touching a
metal part of the vehicle, away
from the fuel filler neck, nozzle or other gasoline source.
(Continued)
4 41
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:48 PM
Page 42
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• When using an approved
portable fuel container, be
sure to place the container on
the ground prior to refueling.
Static electricity discharge
from the container can ignite
fuel vapors causing a fire.
Once refueling has begun,
contact with the vehicle
should be maintained until the
filling is complete.
Use only approved portable
plastic
fuel
containers
designed to carry and store
gasoline.
• Do not use cellular phones
while refueling. Electric current and/or electronic interference from cellular phones can
potentially ignite fuel vapors
causing a fire.
(Continued)
4 42
(Continued)
• When refueling, always shut
the engine off. Sparks produced by electrical components related to the engine
can ignite fuel vapors causing
a fire. Once refueling is complete, check to make sure the
filler cap and filler door are
securely closed, before starting the engine.
• DO NOT use matches or a
lighter and DO NOT SMOKE or
leave a lit cigarette in your
vehicle while at a gas station
especially during refueling.
Automotive fuel is highly
flammable and can, when
ignited, result in fire.
• If a fire breaks out during refueling, leave the vicinity of the
vehicle, and immediately contact the manager of the gas
station and then contact the
local
fire
department.
Follow any safety instructions
they provide.
CAUTION
• Make sure to refuel your vehicle according to the “Fuel
requirements” suggested in
section 1.
• If the fuel filler cap requires
replacement, use only a genuine Kia cap or the equivalent
specified for your vehicle. An
incorrect fuel filler cap can
result in a serious malfunction
of the fuel system or emission
control system.
• Do not spill fuel on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Any
type of fuel spilled on painted
surfaces may damage the paint.
• After refueling, make sure the
fuel cap is installed securely
to prevent fuel spillage in the
event of an accident.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:48 PM
Page 43
Features of your vehicle
Emergency fuel filler lid release
OXM043007
If the fuel filler lid does not open
using the remote fuel filler lid
release, you can open it manually.
Remove the panel in the cargo area.
Pull the handle out slightly.
CAUTION
Do not pull the handle excessively, otherwise the luggage
compartment area trim or
release handle may be damaged.
4 43
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:48 PM
Page 44
Features of your vehicle
PANORAMIC SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
✽ NOTICE
• In cold and wet climates, the sunroof may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
• After a vehicle is washed or in a
rainstorm be sure to wipe off any
water that is on the sunroof before
operating it.
CAUTION
OXMA043008
If your vehicle is equipped with a
sunroof, you can slide or tilt your
sunroof with the sunroof control lever
located on the overhead console (1).
The sunroof can only be opened,
closed, or tilted when the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
4 44
Do not continue to pull or push
the sunroof control lever after
the sunroof is fully opened,
closed, or tilted. Damage to the
motor or system components
could occur.
✽ NOTICE
The sunroof cannot tilt when it is in
the slide position but can be slid
while in a tilt position.
WARNING
• Never adjust the sunroof or
roller blind while driving. This
could result in loss of control
and an accident that may
cause death, serious injury, or
property damage.
• If you would like to carry items
on the roof rack using a cross
bar, do not operate the sunroof.
• When carrying cargo on the
roof rack, do not load heavy
items above the sunroof or
glass roof.
• All occupants of the vehicle
must wear their seat belts at
all times. Seat belts and child
restraints reduce serious or
fatal injuries for all occupants
in the event of a collision or
sudden stop.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:48 PM
Page 45
Features of your vehicle
Sunroof open warning
(if equipped)
When the sunshade is opened
If you pull the sunroof control lever
backward, the sunroof glass will slide
all the way open. To stop the sunroof
movement at any point, pull or push
the sunroof control lever momentarily.
❈ The front part of the sunroof glass
can only be opened and closed.
Sliding the sunroof
OXM043010
OXM043114E
If the driver removes the ignition key
(smart key: turns off the engine) and
opens the driver-side door when the
sunroof is not fully closed, the warning chime will sound for a few seconds and a message "Sunroof Open"
will appear on the LCD display.
Close the sunroof securely when
leaving your vehicle.
When the sunshade is closed
If you pull the sunroof control lever
backward, the sunshade and sunroof
glass will slide all the way open. To
stop the sunroof movement at any
point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
4 45
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:48 PM
Page 46
Features of your vehicle
Automatic reversal
Tilting the sunroof
OXM049029
OXM043011
If an object or part of the body is
detected while the sunroof is closing
automatically, it will reverse the direction, and then stop.
The auto reverse function does not
work if a tiny obstacle is between the
sliding glass and the sunroof sash.
You should always check that all passengers and objects are away from
the sunroof before closing it.
Before opening or closing the sunroof, open the roller blind (refer to the
following page for instructions on
how to use the roller blind).
To open the sunroof, push the sunroof control lever upward.
To close the sunroof, pull the sunroof
lever downward or forward until the
sunroof moves to the desired position.
4 46
WARNING - Sunroof
• Be careful that no head, hands
and body parts are obstructed
by a closing sunroof.
• Do not extend the face, neck,
arms or body outside the sunroof while driving.
• Make sure your hands and
head are safely out of the way
before closing a sunroof.
• A panoramic sunroof is made
of glass, therefore it may
break in an accident. If you do
not have your seat belt on,
you may contact the broken
glass and get injured or killed.
For all passengers safety,
have the seat belts on. (ex.
seat belt, CRS, etc.)
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:48 PM
Page 47
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
• Periodically remove any dirt
that may accumulate on the
guide rail.
• If you try to open the sunroof
when the temperature is
below freezing or when the
sunroof is covered with snow
or ice, the glass or the motor
could be damaged.
• Do not leave the roller blind
closed while the sunroof is
opened.
To close the sunshade when the
sunroof glass is closed
- Press the sunshade close button (2).
❈ When you press the sunshade
close button (2) with the sunroof
glass opened, the sunshade will
be closed halfway.
- Push the sunroof control lever forward or pull it down.
To stop the sliding at any point, press
the sunshade control switch momentarily.
Sunshade
OXMA043009
To open the sunshade
Press the sunshade open button (1).
✽ NOTICE
Wrinkles formed on the sunshade as
material characteristic are normal.
CAUTION
• Do not pull or push the sunshade by hand as such action
may damage the sunshade or
cause it to malfunction.
• Close the sunroof when driving in dusty environments.
Dust may cause a malfunction
of the vehicle system.
4 47
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:48 PM
Page 48
Features of your vehicle
Resetting the sunroof
Whenever the vehicle battery is disconnected or discharged, you must
reset your sunroof system as follows:
1.Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2.Close the sunshade and sunroof
completely if opened.
3.Release the sunroof control lever.
4.Push the sunroof control lever forward in the direction of close (about
10 seconds) until the sunroof moves
a little. Then, release the lever.
5.Push the sunroof control lever forward in the direction of close, until
the sunroof operates as follows
again:
The sunshade and sunroof glass
slide open → The sunroof glass
slide close → The sunshade close
Then, release the lever.
When this is complete, the sunroof
system has been reset.
✽ NOTICE
If you do not reset the sunroof, it
may not work properly.
4 48
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:48 PM
Page 49
Features of your vehicle
STEERING WHEEL
Electric power steering (EPS)
The power steering uses a motor to
assist you in steering the vehicle. If
the engine is off or if the power steering system becomes inoperative, the
vehicle may still be steered, but it will
require increased steering effort.
The motor driven power steering is
controlled by a power steering control unit which senses the steering
wheel torque and vehicle speed to
command the motor.
The steering becomes heavier as
the vehicle’s speed increases and
becomes lighter as the vehicle’s
speed decreases for optimum steering control.
Should you notice any change in the
effort required to steer during normal
vehicle operation, have the power
steering checked by an authorized
Kia dealer.
CAUTION
• If the Electric Power Steering
System does not operate normally, the warning light will
illuminate on the instrument
cluster. The steering wheel
may require increased steering effort. Take your vehicle to
an authorized Kia dealer and
have the vehicle checked as
soon as possible.
• When you operate the steering
wheel in low temperature,
noise may occur. If temperature
rises, the noise will likely disappear.This is a normal condition.
• When the vehicle is stationary,
when the steering wheel is
turned all the way to the left or
right continuously, the steering wheel becomes harder to
turn. The power assist is limited to protect the motor from
overheating.
As time passes, the steering
wheel return to its normal
condition.
✽ NOTICE
The following symptoms may occur
during normal vehicle operation:
• The EPS warning light does not
illuminate.
• The steering gets heavy immediately after turning the ignition
switch on. This happens as the system performs the EPS system
diagnostics. When the diagnostics
are completed, the steering wheel
will return to its normal condition.
• A click noise may be heard from
the EPS relay after the ignition
switch is turned to the ON or
LOCK (OFF) position.
• A motor noise may be heard when
the vehicle is at a stop or at a low
driving speed.
• If the Electric Power Steering
System does not operate normally,
the warning light will illuminate on
the instrument cluster. The steering wheel may become difficult to
control or operate abnormally.
Take your vehicle to an authorized
Kia dealer and have the vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
(Continued)
4 49
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:48 PM
Page 50
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• When you operate the steering
wheel in low temperature, abnormal noise may occur. If temperature rises, the noise will likely disappear. This is a normal condition.
• When the charging system warning light comes on due to the low
voltage (When the alternator or
battery) does not operate normally or it malfunctions), the steering
wheel may require increased
steering effort.
Tilt and telescopic steering
Tilt and telescopic steering allows
you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive. You can also raise it
to give your legs more room when
you exit and enter the vehicle.
The steering wheel should be positioned so that it is comfortable for
you to drive, while permitting you to
see the instrument panel warning
lights and gauges.
WARNING
• Never adjust the angle of the
steering wheel while driving.
You may lose steering control
and cause severe personal
injury, death or accidents.
• After adjusting, push the
steering wheel both up and
down to be certain it is locked
in position.
4 50
OXMA043020
To change the steering wheel angle,
pull down the lock-release lever (1),
adjust the steering wheel to the
desired angle (2) and height (3, if
equipped) then pull up the lockrelease lever to lock the steering
wheel in place. Be sure to adjust the
steering wheel to the desired position before driving.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:48 PM
Page 51
Features of your vehicle
Heated steering wheel
(if equipped)
CAUTION
Horn
Do not install any grip to operate the steering wheel. This
causes damage to the heated
steering wheel system.
OXM043305
OXMA043012
With the ignition switch in the ON
position, pressing the heated steering wheel button warms the steering
wheel. The indicator on the button
will illuminate and notify you on the
LCD display.
To turn the heated steering wheel off,
press the button once again. The
indicator on the button will turn off
and notify you on the LCD display.
To sound the horn, press the horn
symbols on your steering wheel.
Check the horn regularly to be sure it
operates properly.
✽ NOTICE
To sound the horn, press the area
indicated by the horn symbol on
your steering wheel (see illustration). The horn will operate only
when this area is pressed.
4 51
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:48 PM
Page 52
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
FLEX STEER (if equipped)
Do not strike the horn severely
to operate it, or hit it with your
fist. Do not press on the horn
with a sharp-pointed object.
OXM053122
OXM053044
The FLEX STEER controls steering
effort based upon as driver's preference or road condition.
You can select the desired steering
mode by pressing the FLEX STEER
button.
4 52
When the steering mode button is
pressed, the selected steering mode
will appear on the LCD display.
If the steering mode button is pressed
within 4 seconds, the steering mode
will change as shown above.
If the steering wheel mode button is
not pressed for about 4 seconds, the
LCD display will change to the previous screen.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:48 PM
Page 53
Features of your vehicle
Normal mode
Sport mode
Comfort mode
OXM053103
OXM053101
OXM053102
The normal mode offers medium
steering effort.
The steering wheel becomes heavier. The sport mode is usually used
when driving on the highway.
The steering wheel becomes lighter.
The comfort mode is usually used
when driving in the city or when parking the vehicle.
4 53
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
• For your safety, if you press
the steering mode button
while operating the steering
wheel, the LCD display will
change, but the steering effort
will not change immediately.
After operating the steering
wheel, the steering effort will
change automatically to the
selected mode.
• Use caution when changing the
steering mode while driving.
• When the electronic power
steering is not operating properly, the flex steering wheel
will not work.
4 54
3:48 PM
Page 54
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:48 PM
Page 55
Features of your vehicle
MIRRORS
Inside rearview mirror
Adjust the rearview mirror so that the
center view through the rear window
is seen. Make this adjustment before
you start driving.
WARNING - Rear
visibility
Do not place objects in the rear
seat or cargo area which would
interfere with your vision
through the rear window.
WARNING
Day/night rearview mirror
(if equipped)
Do not adjust the rearview mirror while the vehicle is moving.
This could result in loss of control, and an accident which
could cause death, serious
injury or property damage.
Night
WARNING
Do not modify the inside mirror
and don’t install a wide mirror. It
could result in injury, during an
accident or deployment of the
air bag.
Day
OAM049023
Make this adjustment before you
start driving and while the day/night
lever is in the day position.
Pull the day/night lever toward you to
reduce the glare from the headlights
of the vehicles behind you during
night driving.
Remember that you lose some
rearview clarity in the night position.
4 55
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:49 PM
Page 56
Features of your vehicle
Electric chromic mirror (ECM)
with compass
Automatic-Dimming Night Vision
Safety™ (NVS®) Mirror
The NVS® Mirror in your vehicle is
the most advanced way to reduce
annoying glare in the rearview mirror
during any driving situation. For more
information regarding NVS® mirrors
and other applications, please refer
to the Gentex website:
www.gentex.com
CAUTION
OXM049035
1. Feature Control Button
2. Status Indicator LED
3. Rear Light Sensor
4. Display Window
4 56
The NVS® Mirror automatically
reduces glare during driving conditions based upon light levels
monitored in front of the vehicle
and from the rear of the vehicle.
These light sensors are visible
through openings in the front and
rear of the mirror case. Any object
that would obstruct either light
sensor will degrade the automatic dimming control feature.
Automatic-dimming function
Your mirror will automatically dim
upon detecting glare from the vehicles traveling behind you. The autodimming function can be controlled
by pushing the ON/OFF Button:
1. Pressing the button turns the autodimming function OFF which is
indicated by the green Status
Indicator LED turning off.
2. Pressing the button again turns
the auto-dimming function ON
which is indicated by the green
Status Indicator LED turning on.
✽ NOTICE
The mirror defaults to the ON position each time the vehicle is started.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:49 PM
Page 57
Features of your vehicle
Z-Nav™ Compass Display
The NVS™ Mirror in your vehicle is
also equipped with a Z-Nav™
Compass that shows the vehicle
Compass heading in the Display
Window using the 8 basic cardinal
headings (N, NE, E, SE, etc.).
Compass function
The Compass can be turned ON and
OFF and will remember the last state
when the ignition is cycled. To turn
the display feature ON/OFF:
1. Press and release the button to
turn the display feature OFF.
2. Press and release the button
again to turn the display back ON.
Additional options can be set with
press and hold sequences of the
button and are detailed below.
There is a difference between magnetic north and true north. The compass in the mirror can compensate
for this difference when it knows the
Magnetic Zone in which it is operating. This is set either by the dealer or
by the user. The operating Zone
Numbers for North America are
shown in the figure on the following
section.
4 57
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:49 PM
Page 58
Features of your vehicle
To adjust the Zone setting:
1. Determine the desired Zone
Number based upon your current
location on the Zone Map.
2. Press and hold the button for more
than 3 but less than 6 seconds,
the current Zone Number will
appear on the display.
3. Pressing and holding the button
again will cause the numbers to
increment (Note: they will repeat
…13, 14, 15, 1, 2, …). Releasing
the button when the desired Zone
Number appears on the display
will set the new Zone.
4. Within about 5 seconds the compass will start displaying a compass heading again.
B520C05NF
4 58
There are some conditions that can
cause changes to the vehicle magnets, such as installing a ski rack or
a CB antenna. Body repair work on
the vehicle can also cause changes
to the vehicle's magnetic field. In
these situations, the compass will
need to be re-calibrated to quickly
correct for these changes. To re-calibrate the compass:
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:49 PM
Page 59
Features of your vehicle
1. Press and hold the button for more
than 6 seconds. When the compass memory is cleared a "C" will
appear in the display.
2. To calibrate the compass, drive
the vehicle in 2 complete circles at
less than 8 km/h (5 mph).
Electrochromic mirror with
HomeLink system (if equipped)
Glare detection sensor
Indicator light
Homelink buttons
OHD046025N
To operate the electric rearview mirror
Press the I button (1) to turn the
automatic- dimming function on. The
mirror indicator light will illuminate.
Press the O button (2) to turn the
automatic- dimming function off. The
mirror indicator light will turn off.
OHD046305N
HomeLink® Wireless Control System
Your new mirror comes with an integrated
HomeLink
Universal
Transceiver, which allows you to program the mirror to activate your
garage door(s), estate gate, home
lighting, etc. The mirror actually
learns the codes from your various
existing transmitters.
4 59
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:49 PM
Page 60
Features of your vehicle
WARNING
• When
programming
the
HomeLink® Wireless Control
System, you may be operating
a garage door or gate operator.
Make sure that people and
objects are out of the way of
the moving door or gate to prevent potential harm or damage.
• Do not use HomeLink with any
garage door opener that lacks
the safety stop and reverse
feature as required by federal
safety
standards.
(This
includes any garage door
opener model manufactured
before April 1, 1982.) A garage
door opener which cannot
detect an object, signaling the
door to stop and reverse, does
not meet current federal safety
standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features
increases risk of serious injury
or death. For more information,
call 1-800-355-3515 or on the
internet at www.homelink.com.
4 60
Retain the original transmitter for
future programming procedures (i.e.,
new vehicle purchase). It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink buttons be erased for security purposes
(follow step 1 in the “Programming”
portion of this text).
Programming
Your vehicle may require the ignition
switch to be turned to the ACC position for programming and/or operation of HomeLink. It is also recommended that a new battery be
replaced in the hand-held transmitter
of the device being programmed to
HomeLink for quicker training and
accurate transmission of the radiofrequency.
Follow these steps to train your
HomeLink mirror:
Flashing
OHD046306N
1. When programming the buttons for
the first time, press and hold the
left and center buttons ( ,
)
simultaneously until the indicator
light begins to flash after approximately 20 seconds. (This procedure erases the factory-set default
codes. Do not perform this step
when programming the additional
HomeLink buttons.)
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:49 PM
Page 61
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
For non rolling code garage door
openers, follow steps 2 - 3.
For rolling code garage door openers, follow steps 2 - 6.
For Canadian Programming, please
follow the Canadian Programming
section.
For help with determining whether
your garage door opener is nonrolling code or rolling code, please
refer to the garage door openers
owner’s manual or contact
HomeLink customer service at 1800-355-3515.
✽ NOTICE
Flashing
Some gate and garage door openers
may require you to replace step #3
with the “cycling” procedure noted
in the “Canadian Programming”
section of this document.
s
he
inc
3
1-
Transmitter
OHD046307N
2. Press and hold the button on the
HomeLink system you wish to
train and the button on the transmitter while the transmitter is
approximately 2-8 cm (1 to 3 inches) away from the mirror. Do not
release the buttons until step 3
has been completed.
3. The HomeLink indicator light will
flash, first slowly and then rapidly.
When the indicator light flashes
rapidly, both buttons may be
released. (The rapid flashing light
indicates successful programming
of the new frequency signal.)
4 61
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:49 PM
Page 62
Features of your vehicle
Rolling code programming
To train a garage door opener (or
other rolling code equipped devices)
with the rolling code feature, follow
these instructions after completing
the “Programming” portion of this
text. (A second person may make the
following training procedures quicker
& easier.)
4. Locate the “learn” or “smart” button on the device’s motor head
unit. Exact location and color of
the button may vary by product
brand. If there is difficulty locating
the “learn” or “smart” button, reference the device’s owner’s manual
or contact HomeLink at 1-800355-3515 or on the internet at
www.homelink.com.
5. Press and release the “learn” or
“smart” button on the device’s
motor head unit. You have 30 seconds to complete step number 6.
4 62
6. Return to the vehicle and firmly
press and release the programmed HomeLink button up to
three times. The rolling code
equipped device should now recognize the HomeLink signal and
activate when the HomeLink button is pressed. The remaining two
buttons may now be programmed
if this has not previously been
done. Refer to the “Programming”
portion of this text.
Operating HomeLink
To operate, simply press the programmed
HomeLink
button.
Activation will now occur for the
trained product (garage door, security system, entry door lock, estate
gate, or home or office lighting). For
convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used
at any time. The HomeLink Wireless
Controls System (once programmed)
or the original hand-held transmitter
may be used to activate the device
(e.g. garage door, entry door lock,
etc.). In the event that there are still
programming difficulties, contact
HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515 or on
the internet at www.homelink.com.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:49 PM
Page 63
Features of your vehicle
Erasing programmed HomeLink
buttons
Flashing
OHD046306N
To erase the three programmed buttons (individual buttons cannot be
erased):
• Press and hold the left and center
buttons simultaneously, until the
indicator light begins to flash
(approximately 20 seconds).
Release both buttons. Do not hold
for longer than 30 seconds.
HomeLink is now in the train (or
learning) mode and can be programmed at any time.
Reprogramming a single
HomeLink button
To program a device to HomeLink
using a HomeLink button previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired
HomeLink button. Do NOT release
until step 4 has been completed.
2. When the indicator light begins to
flash slowly (after 20 seconds),
position the hand-held transmitter
2-8 cm (1 to 3 inches) away from
the HomeLink surface.
3. Press and hold the hand-held
transmitter button (or press and
“cycle” - as described in “Canadian
Programming”).
4. The HomeLink indicator light will
flash, first slowly and then rapidly.
When the indicator light begins to
flash rapidly, release both buttons.
The previous device has now been
erased and the new device can be
activated by pushing the HomeLink
button that has just been programmed. This procedure will not
affect any other programmed
HomeLink buttons.
Canadian Programming
Garage & gate openers
During programming, your hand-held
transmitter may automatically stop
transmitting. Continue to press and
hold the HomeLink button (note
steps 2 through 4 in the
“Programming” portion of this text)
while you press and re-press
(“cycle”) your handheld transmitter
every two seconds until the frequency signal has been learned. The indicator light will flash slowly and then
rapidly after several seconds upon
successful training.
CAUTION
If programming a garage door
opener or gate, it is advised to
unplug the device during the
“cycling” process to prevent
possible motor burn-up.
4 63
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:49 PM
Page 64
Features of your vehicle
Accessories
If you would like additional information on the HomeLink Wireless
Control System, HomeLink compatible products, or to purchase other
accessories such as the HomeLink®
Lighting Package, please contact
HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515 or on
the internet at www.homelink.com.
FCC ID: NZLZTVHL3
IC: 4112A-ZTVHL3
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING
The transceiver has been tested
and complies with FCC and
Industry Canada rules. Changes
or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate
the device.
4 64
Outside rearview mirror
Be sure to adjust the mirror angles
before driving.
Your vehicle is equipped with both
left-hand and right-hand outside
rearview mirrors. The mirrors can be
adjusted remotely with the remote
switch. The mirror heads can be folded back to prevent damage during an
automatic vehicle wash or when
passing through a narrow street.
WARNING - Rearview
mirrors
• The right outside rearview
mirror is convex. Objects seen
in the mirror are closer than
they appear.
• Use your interior rearview
mirror or direct observation to
determine the actual distance
of following vehicles when
changing lanes.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:49 PM
Page 65
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
Remote control
CAUTION
Do not scrape ice off the mirror
face; this may damage the surface of the glass. If ice should
restrict the movement of the mirror, do not force the mirror for
adjustment. To remove ice, use a
deicer spray, or a sponge or soft
cloth with very warm water.
CAUTION
If the mirror is jammed with ice,
do not adjust the mirror by force.
Use an approved spray de-icer
(not radiator antifreeze) to
release the frozen mechanism or
move the vehicle to a warm
place and allow the ice to melt.
WARNING
Do not adjust or fold the outside
rearview mirrors while the vehicle is moving.This could result in
loss of control, and an accident
which could cause death, serious injury or property damage.
OXMA042038
Electric type
The electric remote control mirror
switch allows you to adjust the position
of the left and right outside rearview
mirrors. To adjust the position of either
mirror the ignition switch should be in
the ACC position. Move the switch (1)
to R or L to select the right side mirror
or the left side mirror, then press a corresponding point on the mirror adjustment control to position the selected
mirror up, down, left or right.
After the adjustment, put the switch
into the neutral (center) position to
prevent inadvertent adjustment.
• The mirrors stop moving when
they reach the maximum
adjusting angles, but the
motor continues to operate
while the switch is pressed.
Do not press the switch longer
than necessary, the motor
may be damaged.
• Do not attempt to adjust the
outside rearview mirror by
hand. Doing so may damage
the parts.
4 65
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:49 PM
Page 66
Features of your vehicle
Folding the outside rearview mirror
CAUTION
In case it is an electric type outside rearview mirror, don’t fold it
by hand. It could cause motor
failure.
OXMA042040
OXM049039
Manual type
To fold the outside rearview mirror,
grasp the housing of the mirror and
then fold it toward the rear of the
vehicle.
Electric type
To fold the outside rearview mirror,
press the button.
To unfold it, press the button again or
press the unlock button.
CAUTION
The electric type outside
rearview mirror operates even
though the ignition switch is in
the LOCK position. However, to
prevent unnecessary battery
discharge, do not adjust the
mirrors longer than necessary
while the engine is not running.
4 66
The outside rearview mirror can be
folded when you press the door lock
button on the smart key within 4 seconds after locking the doors by
pressing the button.
The outside rearview mirror can be
unfolded when you press the door
unlock button on the smart key within 4 seconds after unlocking the
doors by pressing the button.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:49 PM
Page 67
Features of your vehicle
Reverse parking aid function
(if equipped)
Left or Right : When the L or R
switch is selected,
both outside rearview
mirrors will move
downward.
Neutral : When neither switch is
selected,
the
outside
rearview mirrors will not
operate.
✽ NOTICE
OXM043022
When you shift the shift lever to the R
(Reverse) position, the outside
rearview mirror(s) will move downward to aid reverse parking.
According to the position of the outside rearview mirror switch (1), the
outside rearview mirror(s) will operate as follows:
The outside rearview mirrors will
automatically revert to their original
positions under the following conditions:
1. Engine start/stop button is turned
to the ACC or OFF position.
2. Shift lever is moved to any position except R.
3. Remote control outside rearview
mirror switch is not selected.
4 67
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:49 PM
Page 68
Features of your vehicle
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
■ Type A
1. Tachometer
2. Speedometer
3. Engine coolant temperature gauge
4. Fuel gauge
5. LCD display
6. Warning and indicator lights (if equipped)
■ Type B
7. Turn signal indicator lights
❈ The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
For more details, refer to the "Gauges" in
this chapter.
OXMA043081C/OXMA043091C
4 68
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:49 PM
Page 69
Features of your vehicle
Instrument Cluster Control
■ Type A
Adjusting Instrument Cluster
Illumination (if equipped)
OXM043132
■ Type B
OXMA043332
The brightness of the instrument
panel illumination is changed by
pressing the illumination control button
("+" or "-") when the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop button is ON, or the
tale lights are turned on.
OXM043117E
• If you hold the illumination control
button ("+" or "-"), the brightness
will be changed continuously.
• If the brightness reaches to the
maximum or minimum level, an
alarm will sound.
4 69
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:49 PM
Page 70
Features of your vehicle
LCD Display Control
[Type B]
(1)
: MODE button for changing
modes or SELECT button
for setting the selected item
(2)
: MOVE button for changing
items or RESET button for
resetting the selected item
OXM043124
The LCD display modes can be
changed by using the control buttons
on the steering wheel.
[Type A]
(1)
: TRIP button for changing trip
modes
(2)
: RESET button for resetting
items
❈ For the LCD modes, refer to “LCD
Display” in this chapter.
4 70
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:49 PM
Page 71
Features of your vehicle
Gauges
Speedometer
Tachometer
■ Type A
Use the tachometer to select the correct shift points and to prevent lugging and/or over-revving the engine.
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine within the tachometer's RED ZONE.
This may cause severe engine
damage.
OXM043084
■ Type B
OXMA043085
The tachometer indicates the
approximate number of engine revolutions per minute (rpm).
OXM043095
The speedometer indicates the
speed of the vehicle and is calibrated
in kilometers per hour (km/h) and/or
miles per hour (mph).
4 71
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:49 PM
Page 72
Features of your vehicle
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge
Fuel Gauge
CAUTION
If the gauge pointer moves
beyond the normal range area
toward the “H” position, it indicates overheating that may
damage the engine.
Do not continue driving with an
overheated engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer to “If the
Engine Overheats” in chapter 6.
OXM043087
This gauge indicates the temperature of the engine coolant when the
ignition switch or Engine Start/Stop
button is ON.
4 72
WARNING
Never remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. The
engine coolant is under pressure
and could severely burn. Wait
until the engine is cool before
adding coolant to the reservoir.
OXM043089
This gauge indicates the approximate amount of fuel remaining in the
fuel tank.
✽ NOTICE
• The fuel tank capacity is given in
chapter 8.
• The fuel gauge is supplemented by
a low fuel warning light, which
will illuminate when the fuel tank
is nearly empty.
• On inclines or curves, the fuel
gauge pointer may fluctuate or the
low fuel warning light may come
on earlier than usual due to the
movement of fuel in the tank.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:49 PM
Page 73
Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Fuel Gauge
Running out of fuel can expose
vehicle occupants to danger.
You must stop and obtain additional fuel as soon as possible
after the warning light comes
on or when the gauge indicator
comes close to the “E (Empty)”
level.
CAUTION
Avoid driving with a extremely
low fuel level. Running out of
fuel could cause the engine to
misfire damaging the catalytic
converter.
✽ NOTICE
Fuel display may not be accurate if
you are filling in sloping places.
Odometer
■ Type A
Outside Temperature Gauge
■ Type B
■ Type A
■ Type B
OXM049061/OXM043125
OXM043127/OXM043126
The odometer Indicates the total distance that the vehicle has been driven and should be used to determine
when periodic maintenance should
be performed.
- Odometer range : 0 ~ 999999 kilometers or miles.
This gauge indicates the current outside air temperatures by 1°C (1°F).
- Temperature range : -40°C ~ 60°C
(-40°F ~ 140°F)
The outside temperature on the display may not change immediately
like a general thermometer to prevent the driver from being inattentive.
The temperature unit (from °F to °C
or from °C to °F) can be changed by
using the “User Settings” mode of the
LCD display.
❈ For more details, refer to “LCD
Display” in this chapter.
4 73
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:49 PM
Features of your vehicle
Transaxle Shift Indicator
Automatic Transaxle Shift
Indicator (if equipped)
■ Type A
■ Type B
OXMA043321/OXMA043322
This indicator displays which automatic transaxle shift lever is selected.
•
•
•
•
•
Park : P
Reverse : R
Neutral : N
Drive : D
Sports Mode : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
4 74
Page 74
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:49 PM
Page 75
Features of your vehicle
LCD DISPLAY (IF EQUIPPED)
LCD Modes
Modes
Trip Computer
Service
Symbol
Explanation
This mode displays driving information like the tripmeter, fuel economy, and so on.
For more details, refer to “Trip Computer” in this chapter.
This mode informs of service interval (mileage or days) and warning messages
related to TPMS or washer fluid.
User Settings
On this mode, you can change settings of the doors, lamps, and so on.
A/V
(if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the A/V system.
Turn By Turn
(if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the navigation.
❈ For controlling the LCD modes, refer to "LCD Display Control" in this chapter.
4 75
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:49 PM
Page 76
Features of your vehicle
Service Mode
Service Interval
OXM043119E
OXM043129E
OXM043130E
Service in
It calculates and displays when you
need a scheduled maintenance
service (mileage or days).
If the remaining mileage or time
reaches 1,500 km. (900 mi) or 30
days, "Service in" message is displayed for several seconds each time
you set the ignition switch or Engine
Start/Stop Button to the ON position.
Service required
If you do not have your vehicle serviced according to the already inputted
service interval, “Service required”
message is displayed for several seconds each time you set the ignition
switch or Engine Start/Stop Button to
the ON position (The mileage and
time changes to "---").
To reset the service interval to the
mileage and days you inputted before:
- Press the RESET button
for
more than 1 second.
Service in OFF
If the service interval is not set,
“Service in OFF” message is displayed on the LCD display.
4 76
✽ NOTICE
If any of the following conditions
occurs, the mileage and days may be
incorrect.
- The battery cable is disconnected.
- The fuse switch is turned off.
- The battery is discharged.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:49 PM
Page 77
Features of your vehicle
Master Warning Mode
(if equipped)
• This warning light informs the driver the following situations
- Low washer fluid (if equipped)
- TPMS (if equipped)
- Service reminder (if equipped)
The Master Warning Light illuminates when more than one of the
above warning situations occur. At
this time, the LCD Modes Icon will
change from ( ) to ( ).
If the warning situation is solved, the
master warning light will be turned off
and the LCD Modes Icon will be
changed back to its previous icon ( ).
(ex : refill the washer fluid)
4 77
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:49 PM
Page 78
Features of your vehicle
User Settings Mode
Description
OXM043120E
On this mode, you can change setting of the doors, lamps, and so on.
4 78
Door
Auto Door Lock (if equipped)
• Off:
The auto door lock operation will
be deactivated.
• Speed:
All doors will be automatically
locked when the vehicle speed
exceeds 15km/h (9.3mph).
• Shift Lever:
All doors will be automatically
locked if the automatic transaxle
shift lever is shifted from the P
(Park) position to the R (Reverse),
N (Neutral), or D (Drive) position.
Auto Door Unlock (if equipped)
• Off:
The auto door unlock operation will
be canceled.
• Key Out or Power Off:
All doors will be automatically
unlocked when the ignition key is
removed from ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button is set to
the OFF position.
• Shift Lever:
All doors will be automatically
unlocked if the automatic transaxle
shift lever is shifted to the P (Park)
position.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:49 PM
Page 79
Features of your vehicle
Two Press Unlock (if equipped)
• Off:
The two press unlock function will
be deactivated. Therefore, all doors
will unlock if the door is unlocked.
• On:
The driver’s door will unlock if the
door is unlocked. When the door is
unlocked again within 4 seconds,
all doors will unlock.
Lamp
Head Lamp Delay (if equipped)
If this item is checked, the headlamp
delay and headlamp welcome function will be activated.
Horn Feedback (if equipped)
• Off:
The Horn feedback operation will
be deactivated.
• On:
After locking the door by pressing
the lock button on the transmitter, if
you press the lock button again
within 4 seconds, the warning
sound will operate once to indicate
that all doors are locked.
Auto Triple Turn (One-touch triple
turn signal) (if equipped)
If this item is checked, the lane
change signals will blink 3 times when
the turn signal lever is moved slightly.
Welcome Light (if equipped)
If this item is checked, the welcome
light function of the pocket lamp will
be activated.
Settings
Temperature Unit
Convert the temperature unit from °C
to °F or from °F to °C.
Welcome Sound
If this item is checked, the welcome
sound function will be activated.
Seat Easy Access (if equipped)
If this item is checked, the driver’s
seat will automatically move forward
or rearward for the driver to enter or
exit the vehicle comfortably.
AVG Fuel Eco Reset
• Auto Reset:
The average fuel economy will
reset automatically when refueling.
• Manual Reset:
The average fuel economy will not
reset automatically whenever refueling.
For more details, refer to “Trip
Computer” in this chapter.
4 79
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:49 PM
Page 80
Features of your vehicle
Service Interval
A/V Mode (if equipped)
Turn By Turn Mode (if equipped)
OXM043121E
OXM043122
OXM043123
On this mode, you can activate the
service interval function with mileage
(mi. or km) and period (months).
This mode displays the state of the
A/V system.
This mode displays the state of the
navigation.
4 80
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:50 PM
Page 81
Features of your vehicle
Warning Messages
Shift to "P" position (for smart key
system and automatic transaxle)
Low Key Battery
(for smart key system)
Press start button while turn
steering (for smart key system)
OXM043105E
OXM043111E
OXM043101E
• This warning message illuminates if
you try to turn off the engine without
the shift lever in P (Park) position.
• At this time, the Engine Start/Stop
Button turns to the ACC position (If
you press the Engine Start/Stop
Button once more, it will turn to the
ON position).
• This warning message illuminates
if the battery of the smart key is
discharged when the Engine
Start/Stop Button changes to the
OFF position.
• This warning message illuminates
if the steering wheel does not
unlock normally when the Engine
Start/Stop Button is pressed.
• It means that you should press the
Engine Start/Stop Button while
turning the steering wheel right
and left.
4 81
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:50 PM
Page 82
Features of your vehicle
Press brake pedal to start engine
(for smart key system and automatic transaxle)
OXMA043106
• This warning message illuminates
if the Engine Start/Stop Button
changes to the ACC position twice
by pressing the button repeatedly
without depressing the brake pedal.
• It means that you should depress
the brake pedal to start the engine.
4 82
Key not in vehicle
(for smart key system)
Key not detected
(for smart key system)
OXMA043108
OXMA043109
• This warning message illuminates
if the smart key is not in the vehicle
when you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button.
• It means that you should always
have the smart key with you.
• This warning message illuminates
if the smart key is not detected
when you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:50 PM
Page 83
Features of your vehicle
Press start button again
(for smart key system)
Press start button with smart key
(for smart key system)
OXMA043102
OXMA043110
• This warning message illuminates
if you can not operate the Engine
Start/Stop Button when there is a
problem with the Engine Start/Stop
Button system.
• It means that you could start the
engine by pressing the Engine
Start/ Stop Button once more.
• If the warning illuminates each
time you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
• This warning message illuminates
if you press the Engine Start/Stop
Button while the warning message
“Key not detected” is illuminating.
• At this time, the immobilizer indicator light blinks.
Check fuse "BRAKE SWITCH"
(for smart key system and automatic transaxle)
OXMA043116
• This warning message illuminates
if the brake switch fuse is disconnected.
• It means that you should replace
the fuse with a new one. If that is
not possible, you can start the
engine by pressing the Engine
Start/Stop Button for 10 seconds in
the ACC position.
4 83
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:50 PM
Page 84
Features of your vehicle
Shift to "P" or "N" to start engine
(for smart key system and automatic transaxle)
Door Open
Trunk Open
OXM043113E
• It means that any door is open.
OXMA043104
• This warning message illuminates
if you try to start the engine with
the shift lever not in the P (Park) or
N (Neutral) position.
✽ NOTICE
You can start the engine with the
shift lever in the N (Neutral) position.
But, for your safety, we recommend
that you start the engine with the
shift lever in the P (Park) position.
4 84
OXM043112E
• It means that the trunk is open.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:50 PM
Page 85
Features of your vehicle
Sunroof Open (if equipped)
Align steering wheel (if equipped)
Low Washer Fluid (if equipped)
OXM043114E
OXM043098E
OXM043118E
• The warning message illuminates
if you turn off the engine and then
open the driver's door when the
sunroof is open.
• This warning message illuminates
if you start the engine when the
steering wheel is turned to more
than 90 degrees to the left or right.
• It means that you should turn the
steering wheel and make the angle
of the steering wheel be less than
30 degrees.
• This warning message illuminates
on the service reminder mode if
the washer fluid level in the reservoir is nearly empty.
• It means that you should refill the
washer fluid.
4 85
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:50 PM
Features of your vehicle
Turn on "FUSE SWITCH"
(if equipped)
OXM043099E
• This warning message illuminates
if the fuse switch on the fuse box is
OFF.
• It means that you should turn the
fuse switch on.
For more details, refer to “Fuses” in
chapter 7.
4 86
Page 86
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:50 PM
Page 87
Features of your vehicle
TRIP COMPUTER
Overview
Description
The trip computer is a microcomputer-controlled driver information system that displays information related
to driving.
✽ NOTICE
Some driving information stored in
the trip computer (for example
Average Vehicle Speed) resets if the
battery is disconnected.
Trip Modes (Type A)
Trip Modes (Type B)
Tripmeter A
TRIP A
Tripmeter B
• Tripmeter [A]
• Average Vehicle Speed [A]
• Elapsed Time [A]
Distance To Empty*
Average Fuel Economy*
TRIP B
Instant Fuel Economy*
• Tripmeter [B]
• Average Vehicle Speed [B]
• Elapsed Time [B]
Average Vehicle Speed*
Elapsed Time*
* if equipped
To change the trip mode, press the
TRIP button
.
FUEL ECONOMY
• Distance To Empty
• Average Fuel Economy
• Instant Fuel Economy
To change the trip mode, press the
MOVE button
.
4 87
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:50 PM
Page 88
Features of your vehicle
Tripmeter (1)
• The tripmeter is the total driving distance since the last tripmeter reset.
- Distance range: 0.0 ~ 9999.9 km.
or mi
• To reset the tripmeter, press the
RESET button
on the steering
wheel for more than 1 second
when the tripmeter is displayed.
Trip A/B
■ Type A
OXMA043323C
■ Type B
OXMA043096C
Average Vehicle Speed (2)
• The average vehicle speed is calculated by the total driving distance and driving time since the
last average vehicle speed reset.
- Speed range: 0 ~ 999 km/h or MPH
• To reset the average vehicle speed,
press the RESET button
on the
steering wheel for more than 1 second when the average vehicle
speed is displayed.
✽ NOTICE
• The average vehicle speed is not displayed if the driving distance is less
than 50 meters (0.03 miles) or the
driving time is less than 10 seconds
since the ignition switch or Engine
Start/Stop button is turned to ON.
• Even if the vehicle is not in motion,
the average vehicle speed keeps
going while the engine is running.
Elapsed Time (3)
• The elapsed time is the total driving time since the last elapsed time
reset.
- Time range (hh:mm): 00:00 ~ 99:59
• To reset the elapsed time, press
the RESET button
on the steering wheel for more than 1 second
when the elapsed time is displayed.
✽ NOTICE
Even if the vehicle is not in motion,
the elapsed time keeps going while
the engine is running.
4 88
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:50 PM
Page 89
Features of your vehicle
• If the estimated distance is below
50 km. (30 mi), the trip computer will
display “---” as distance to empty.
Fuel Economy
Distance To Empty (1)
■ Type A
✽ NOTICE
OXMA043324C
■ Type B
• If the vehicle is not on level ground
or the battery power has been
interrupted, the distance to empty
function may not operate correctly.
• The distance to empty may differ
from the actual driving distance as
it is an estimate of the available
driving distance.
• The trip computer may not register
additional fuel if less than 6 liters
(1.6 gallons) of fuel are added to the
vehicle.
• The fuel economy and distance to
empty may vary significantly based
on driving conditions, driving
habits, and condition of the vehicle.
Average Fuel Economy (2)
• The average fuel economy is calculated by the total driving distance
and fuel consumption since the last
average fuel economy reset.
- Fuel economy range: 0.0 ~ 99.9
L/100km or MPG
• The average fuel economy can be
reset both manually and automatically.
Manual reset
To clear the average fuel economy
manually, press the RESET button
on the steering wheel for more than 1
second when the average fuel economy is displayed.
OXMA043097C
• The distance to empty is the estimated distance the vehicle can be
driven with the remaining fuel.
- Distance range : 50 ~ 9999 km. or
30 ~ 9999 mi
4 89
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:50 PM
Page 90
Features of your vehicle
Automatic reset
To make the average fuel economy
be reset automatically whenever refueling, select the “Auto Reset” mode in
User Setting menu of the LCD display
(Refer to “LCD Display”).
Under “Auto Reset” mode, the average fuel economy will be cleared to
zero (---) when the vehicle speed
exceeds 1 km/h after refueling more
than 6 liters (1.6 gallons).
✽ NOTICE
The average fuel economy is not displayed for more accurate calculation
if the vehicle does not drive more
than 10 seconds or 50 meters (0.03
miles) since the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop button is turned
to ON.
4 90
Instant Fuel Economy (3)
• This mode displays the instant fuel
economy during the last few seconds when the vehicle speed is
more than 10 km/h (6.2 MPH).
- Fuel economy range: 0 ~ 30
L/100km or 0 ~ 50 MPG
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:50 PM
Page 91
Features of your vehicle
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
Warning lights
✽ NOTICE - Warning lights
Make sure that all warning lights
are OFF after starting the engine. If
any light is still ON, this indicates a
situation that needs attention.
Air bag Warning Light
Seat Belt Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 6
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the SRS.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
This warning light informs the driver
that the seat belt is not fastened.
For more details, refer to the “Seat
Belts” in chapter 3.
4 91
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:50 PM
Page 92
Features of your vehicle
Parking Brake & Brake
Fluid Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds
- It remains on if the parking brake
is applied.
• When the parking brake is applied.
• When the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is low.
- If the warning light illuminates
with the parking brake released, it
indicates the brake fluid level in
reservoir is low.
4 92
If the brake fluid level in the reservoir
is low:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. With the engine stopped, check the
brake fluid level immediately and add
fluid as required (For more details,
refer to “Brake Fluid” in chapter 7).
Then check all brake components
for fluid leaks. If any leaks in the
brake system is still found, the
warning light remains on, or the
brakes do not operate properly, do
not drive the vehicle.
In this case, have your vehicle
towed to an authorized Kia dealer
and inspected.
Dual-diagonal braking system
Your vehicle is equipped with dualdiagonal braking systems. This
means you still have braking on two
wheels even if one of the dual systems should fail.
With only one of the dual systems
working, more than normal pedal
travel and greater pedal pressure are
required to stop the vehicle.
Also, the vehicle will not stop in as
short a distance with only a portion
of the brake system working.
If the brakes fail while you are driving, shift to a lower gear for additional engine braking and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:50 PM
Page 93
Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Parking Brake
& Brake Fluid Warning Light
Driving the vehicle with a warning light ON is dangerous. If the
Parking Brake & Brake Fluid
Warning Light illuminates with
the parking brake released, it
indicates that the brake fluid
level is low.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the ABS (The normal braking system will still be operational without
the assistance of the anti-lock
brake system).
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Electronic
Brake force
Distribution
(EBD) System
Warning Light
These two warning lights illuminate at
the same time while driving:
• When the ABS and regular brake
system may not work normally.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
WARNING - Electronic
Brake force Distribution
(EBD) System Warning Light
When both ABS and Parking
Brake & Brake Fluid Warning
Lights are on, the brake system
will not work normally and you
may experience an unexpected
and dangerous situation during
sudden braking.
In this case, avoid high speed
driving and abrupt braking.
Have your vehicle inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer as
soon as possible.
4 93
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:50 PM
Page 94
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE - Electronic Brake
Electronic Power
Steering (EPS) Warning
Light (if equipped)
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL)
When the ABS Warning Light is on
or both ABS and Parking Brake &
Brake Fluid Warning Lights are on,
the speedometer, odometer, or tripmeter may not work. Also, the EPS
Warning Light may illuminate and
the steering effort may increase or
decrease.
In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer as
soon as possible.
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with
the EPS.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with
the emission control system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
force Distribution
(EBD) System
Warning Light
CAUTION - Malfunction
Indicator
Lamp (MIL)
Driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Lamp (MIL) on may
cause damage to the emission
control systems which could
effect drivability and/or fuel
economy.
4 94
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:50 PM
Page 95
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION - Gasoline
Engine
If the Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL) illuminates, potential catalytic converter damage
is possible which could result in
loss of engine power.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
Charging System
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with
either the alternator or electrical
charging system.
If there is a malfunction with either
the alternator or electrical charging
system:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and check the
alternator drive belt for looseness
or breakage.
If the belt is adjusted properly,
there may be a problem in the
electrical charging system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
4 95
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:50 PM
Page 96
Features of your vehicle
Engine Oil Pressure
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When the engine oil pressure is low.
If the engine oil pressure is low:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and check the
engine oil level (For more details,
refer to “Engine Oil” in section 7). If
the level is low, add oil as required.
If the warning light remains on
after adding oil or if oil is not available, have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized Kia dealer as
soon as possible.
4 96
CAUTION - Engine Oil
Pressure
Warning Light
• If the engine does not stop
immediately after the Engine
Oil Pressure Warning Light is
illuminated, severe damage
could result.
• If the warning light stays on
while the engine is running, it
indicates that there may be
serious engine damage or
malfunction. In this case,
1. Stop the vehicle as soon as
it is safe to do so.
2. Turn off the engine and
check the oil level. If the oil
level is low, fill the engine
oil to the proper level.
3. Start the engine again. If the
warning light stays on after
the engine is started, turn
the engine off immediately.
In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.
Low Fuel Level Warning
Light
This warning light illuminates:
When the fuel tank is nearly empty.
If the fuel tank is nearly empty:
Add fuel as soon as possible.
CAUTION - Low Fuel
Level
Driving with the Low Fuel Level
warning light on or with the fuel
level below “0 or E” can cause
the engine to misfire and damage the catalytic converter (if
equipped).
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:50 PM
Page 97
Features of your vehicle
Door Ajar Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
When a door is not closed securely.
Tailgate Open Warning
Light
This warning light illuminates:
When the tailgate is not closed
securely.
All Wheel Drive (AWD)
Warning Light
(if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the AWD system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
4 97
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:50 PM
Page 98
Features of your vehicle
Indicator Lights
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the ESC system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
This indicator light blinks:
While the ESC is operating.
For more details, refer to “Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)” in chapter 5.
4 98
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) OFF
Indicator Light
ECOMINDERtm indicator
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When you deactivate the ESC system by pressing the ESC OFF button.
The ECOMINDERtm indicator is a
system that illuminates ECO when
the driver has reached optimum fuel
efficiency.
• The ECOMINDERtm indicator will
turn the ECO light green on the
instrument panel when you are
driving fuel efficiently in the ECO
ON mode.
If you don't want the indicator displayed, you can turn the ECO ON
mode to OFF mode by pressing
the TRIP button.
For ECO ON/OFF Mode operation,
please refer to the previous page.
• Fuel efficient driving can be influenced by driving habits and road
conditions.
• The indicator will not display while in
P (Park), N (Neutral) or R (Reverse).
For more details, refer to “Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)” in chapter 5.
ECO
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:50 PM
Page 99
Features of your vehicle
Immobilizer Indicator
Light (Without Smart Key)
Immobilizer Indicator
Light (With Smart Key)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the vehicle detects the
immobilizer in your key properly
while the ignition switch is ON.
- At this time, you can start the
engine.
- The indicator light goes off after
starting the engine.
This indicator light illuminates for up
to 30 seconds:
• When the vehicle detects the
smart key in the vehicle properly
while the Engine Start/Stop Button
is ACC or ON.
- At this time, you can start the
engine.
- The indicator light goes off after
starting the engine.
This indicator light blinks:
• When there is a malfunction with
the immobilizer system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
This indicator light blinks for a few
seconds:
• When the smart key is not in the
vehicle.
- At this time, you can not start the
engine.
This indicator light illuminates for 2
seconds and goes off:
• When the vehicle can not detect
the smart key which is in the vehicle while the Engine Start/Stop
Button is ON.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
This indicator light blinks:
• When the battery of the smart key
is weak.
- At this time, you can not start the
engine. However, you can start
the engine if you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button with the smart
key. (For more details, refer to
“Starting the Engine” in section 5).
• When there is a malfunction with
the immobilizer system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
4 99
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:50 PM
Page 100
Features of your vehicle
Turn Signal Indicator
Light
High Beam Indicator
Light
Light ON Indicator Light
This indicator light blinks:
• When you turn the turn signal light
on.
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the headlights are on and in
the high beam position
• When the turn signal lever is pulled
into the Flash-to-Pass position.
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the tail lights or headlights
are on.
If any of the following occurs, there
may be a malfunction with the turn
signal system. In this case, have your
vehicle inspected by an authorized
Kia dealer.
- The indicator light does not blink
but illuminates.
- The indicator light blinks more
rapidly.
- The indicator light does not illuminate at all.
4 100
Front Fog Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the front fog lights are on.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:50 PM
Page 101
Features of your vehicle
All Wheel Drive (AWD)
LOCK Indicator Light
(if equipped)
Washer Fluid Warning
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When you select AWD Lock mode
by pressing the AWD LOCK button.
- The AWD LOCK mode is to
increase the drive power when
driving on wet pavement, snow
covered roads and/or off-road.
This warning light illuminates:
• When the washer fluid level in the
reservoir is nearly empty.
In this case, you should refill the
washer fluid.
CAUTION - AWD Lock
Mode
Do not use AWD LOCK mode on
dry paved roads or highway, it
can cause noise, vibration or
damage of AWD related parts.
Cruise Indicator Light
(if equipped)
Cruise SET Indicator
Light (if equipped)
SET
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the cruise control speed is set.
For more details, refer to “Cruise
Control System” in chapter 5.
CRUISE
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the cruise control system is
enabled.
For more details, refer to “Cruise
Control System” in chapter 5.
4 101
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:50 PM
Page 102
Features of your vehicle
REAR PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
Sensors
OXM053105
The rear parking assist system
assists the driver during backward
movement of the vehicle by chiming if
any object is sensed within a distance
of 120 cm. (47 in) behind the vehicle.
This system is a supplemental system
and it is not intended to nor does it
replace the need for extreme care and
attention of the driver. The sensing
range and objects detectable by the
back sensors are limited. Whenever
backing-up, pay as much attention to
what is behind you as you would in a
vehicle without a rear parking assist
system.
4 102
The rear parking assist system
is a supplementary function
only. The operation of the rear
parking assist system can be
affected by several factors
(including environmental conditions). It is the responsibility of
the driver to always check the
area behind the vehicle before
and while backing up.
Operation of the rear parking
assist system
Operating condition
OXM053032
• This system will activate when the
indicator on the rear parking assist
OFF button is not illuminated. If
you desire to deactivate the rear
parking assist system, press the
rear parking assist OFF button
again. (The indicator on the button
will illuminate.) To turn the system
on, press the button again. (The
indicator on the button will go off.)
If the vehicle is moving at a speed
over 5 km/h (3 mph), the system
may not be activated correctly.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:50 PM
Page 103
Features of your vehicle
• The sensing distance while the
rear parking assist system is in
operation is approximately 120 cm.
(47 in).
• When more than two objects are
sensed at the same time, the closest one will be recognized first.
Types of warning sound
• When an object is 120 cm to 61 cm
(47 in. to 24 in.) from the rear
bumper: Buzzer beeps intermittently.
• When an object is 60 cm to 31 cm
(24 in. to 12 in.) from the rear
bumper: Buzzer beeps more frequently.
• When an object is within 30 cm (12
in.) of the rear bumper:
Buzzer sounds continuously.
Non-operational conditions of
rear parking assist system
The rear parking assist system
may not operate properly when:
1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It
will operate normally when the
moisture has been cleared.)
2. The sensor is covered with foreign
matter, such as snow or water, or
the sensor cover is blocked. (It will
operate normally when the material is removed or the sensor is no
longer blocked.)
3. Driving on uneven road surfaces
(unpaved roads, gravel, bumps,
gradient).
4. Objects generating excessive
noise (vehicle horns, loud motorcycle engines, or truck air brakes)
are within range of the sensor.
5. Heavy rain or water spray exists.
6. Wireless transmitters or mobile
phones are within range of the
sensor.
7. The sensor is covered with snow.
8. Trailer towing
4 103
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:50 PM
Page 104
Features of your vehicle
The detecting range may decrease
when:
1. The sensor is stained with foreign
matter such as snow or water.
(The sensing range will return to
normal when removed.)
2. Outside air temperature is
extremely hot or cold.
The following objects may not be
recognized by the sensor:
1. Sharp or slim objects such as
ropes, chains or small poles.
2. Objects which tend to absorb the
sensor frequency such as clothes,
spongy material or snow.
3. Undetectable objects smaller than
1 m. (40 in) in height and narrower
than 14 cm. (6 in) in diameter.
4 104
Rear parking assist system
precautions
• The rear parking assist system
may not sound consistently
depending on the speed and
shapes of the objects detected.
• The rear parking assist system
may malfunction if the vehicle
bumper height or sensor installation has been modified or damaged. Any non-factory installed
equipment or accessories may
also interfere with the sensor performance.
• The sensor may not recognize
objects less than 40 cm. (15 in)
from the sensor, or it may sense an
incorrect distance. Use caution.
• When the sensor is frozen or
SOILED with snow, dirt, or water,
the sensor may be inoperative until
the MATERIAL IS removed using a
soft cloth.
• Do not push, scratch or strike the
sensor. Sensor damage could
occur.
WARNING
Pay close attention when the
vehicle is driven close to
objects on the road, particularly
pedestrians, and especially
children. Be aware that some
objects may not be detected by
the sensors, due to the object’s
distance, size or material, all of
which can limit the effectiveness of the sensor. Always perform a visual inspection to
make sure the vehicle is clear of
all obstructions before moving
the vehicle in any direction.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:50 PM
Page 105
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
Self-diagnosis
This system can only sense objects
within the range and location of the
sensors. It cannot detect objects in
other areas where sensors are not
installed. Also, small or slim objects,
such as poles or objects located
between sensors may not be detected
by the sensors.
Always visually check behind the
vehicle when backing up.
Be sure to inform any drivers of the
vehicle that may be unfamiliar with
the system regarding the systems
capabilities and limitations.
If you don’t hear an audible warning
sound or if the buzzer sounds intermittently when shifting the gear to
the R (Reverse) position, this may
indicate a malfunction in the rear
parking assist system. If this occurs,
have your vehicle checked by an
authorized Kia dealer as soon as
possible.
WARNING
Your new vehicle warranty does
not cover any accidents or damage to the vehicle or injuries to
its occupants due to a rear
parking assist system malfunction. Always drive safely and
cautiously.
4 105
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:50 PM
Page 106
Features of your vehicle
REARVIEW CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)
Rear view display
OXM053120
OXM053121
The rearview camera will activate
with the ignition switch ON and the
shift lever in the R (Reverse) position.
4 106
This system is a supplemental system that shows behind the vehicle
through the rearview display mirror
while backing up unless equipped
with a navigation system, then will
display on the screen.
The rearview camera may be turned
off by pressing the ON/OFF button
when the rearview camera is activated.
To turn the camera on again, press
the ON/OFF button again when the
ignition switch is on and the shift
lever in R (Reverse). Also, the camera will turn on automatically whenever the ignition switch is turned off
and on again.
WARNING
• This system is a supplementary function only. It is the
responsibility of the driver to
always check the inside/outside rearview mirrors and the
area behind the vehicle before
and while backing up because
there is a dead zone that can't
be seen by the camera.
• Always keep the camera lens
clean. If lens is covered with
foreign matter, the camera
may not operate normally.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:50 PM
Page 107
Features of your vehicle
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
The hazard warning lights are turned
on by pushing in the hazard switch.
Both turn signal lights will blink. The
hazard warning lights will operate
even though the key is not in the ignition switch.
To turn the hazard warning lights off,
push the switch again.
■ Type A
OXM063001
■ Type B
OXM063002
The hazard warning flasher should be
used whenever you find it necessary
to stop the vehicle in a hazardous
location. When you must make such
an emergency stop, always pull off
the road as far as possible.
4 107
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:50 PM
Page 108
Features of your vehicle
LIGHTING
Battery saver function
• The purpose of this feature is to
prevent the battery from being discharged if the lights are left in the
ON position. The system automatically shuts off the parking lights 30
seconds after the ignition key is
removed and the driver’s door is
opened and closed.
• With this feature, the parking lights
will turn off automatically if the driver
parks on the side of the road at night
and opens the driver’s side door.
If necessary, to keep the parking
lights on when the ignition key is
removed, perform the following:
1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the parking lights OFF and
ON again using the light switch
on the steering column.
4 108
Headlight escort function
(if equipped)
Headlight welcome function
(if equipped)
If you turn the ignition switch to the
ACC or OFF position with the headlights ON, the headlights remain on
for about 30 minutes. However, if the
driver's door is opened and closed,
the headlights are turned off after 15
seconds.
The headlights can be turned off by
pressing the lock button on the transmitter (or smart key) twice or turning
the light switch to the OFF position.
When the headlight (light switch in
the headlight or AUTO position) is on
and all doors (and tailgate) are
locked and closed, the position light
and headlight will come on for 15
seconds if any of the below is performed.
• Without smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the transmitter.
• With the smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the smart key.
CAUTION
If the driver gets out of the vehicle through other doors (except
driver’s door), the battery saver
function does not operate and
the headlight escort function
does not turn off automatically.
Therefore, It causes the battery
to be discharged. In this case,
make sure to turn off the lamp
before getting out of the vehicle.
At this time, if you press the door lock
button, the position light and headlight will turn off immediately.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:50 PM
Page 109
Features of your vehicle
Daytime running light
Lighting control
Position & Tail light (
)
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) can
make it easier for others to see the
front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different
driving conditions, and it is especially
helpful after dawn and before sunset.
The DRL system will turn OFF when:
• The headlights are ON.
• Engine stops.
• The parking brake is applied.
OXM049110
OBK049046N
The light switch has a Headlight and
a Parking light position.
To operate the lights, turn the knob at
the end of the control lever to one of
the following positions:
(1) OFF position
(2) Position & Tail light
(3) Headlight position
(4) Auto light position (if equipped)
When the light switch is in the parking light position (1st position), the
tail, license and instrument panel
lights will turn ON.
4 109
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:50 PM
Page 110
Features of your vehicle
Headlight position (
Auto light position (if equipped)
)
OBK049047N
OXM049128
When the light switch is in the headlight position (2nd position), the
head, tail, license and instrument
panel lights will turn ON.
When the light switch is in the AUTO
light position, the taillights and headlights will turn ON or OFF automatically depending on the amount of
light outside the vehicle.
✽ NOTICE
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position to turn on the headlights.
4 110
CAUTION
• Never place anything over the
sensor (1) located on the
instrument panel. This will
ensure better auto-light system
control.
• Don’t clean the sensor using a
window cleaner. The cleaner
may leave a light film which
could interfere with sensor
operation.
• If your vehicle has window tint
or other types of metallic coating on the front windshield,
the Auto light system may not
work properly.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:50 PM
Page 111
Features of your vehicle
High beam operation
WARNING
Do not use high beam when
there are other vehicles. Using
high beam could obstruct the
other driver’s vision.
OBK049049N
OBK049050N
To turn on the high beam headlights,
push the lever away from you. Pull it
back for low beams.
The high beam indicator will light
when the headlight high beams are
switched on.
To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the lights
on for a prolonged time while the
engine is not running.
To flash the headlights, pull the lever
towards you. It will return to the normal (low beam) position when
released. The headlight switch does
not need to be on to use this flashing
feature.
4 111
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:50 PM
Page 112
Features of your vehicle
Turn signals and lane change
signals
OBK049051N
The ignition switch must be on for the
turn signals to function. To turn on
the turn signals, move the lever up or
down (A). The green arrow indicators
on the instrument panel indicate
which turn signal is operating. They
will self-cancel after a turn is completed. If the indicator continues to
flash after a turn, manually return the
lever to the OFF position.
To signal a lane change, move the
turn signal lever slightly and hold it in
position (B). The lever will return to
the OFF position when released.
If an indicator stays on and does not
flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of
the turn signal bulbs may be burned
out and will require replacement.
One-touch lane change function
(if equipped)
To activate the one-touch lane
change function, move the turn signal lever slightly for less than 0.7
second and then release it. The lane
change signals will blink 3 times.
✽ NOTICE
If an indicator flash is abnormally
quick or slow, a bulb may be burned
out or have a poor electrical connection in the circuit.
Front fog light (if equipped)
OBK049052L
Fog lights are used to provide
improved visibility when visibility is
poor due to fog, rain or snow, etc. The
fog lights will turn on when the fog light
switch (1) is turned to the on position
after the headlight is turned on.
To turn off the fog lights, turn the fog
light switch (1) to the OFF position.
CAUTION
When in operation, the fog lights
consume large amounts of vehicle electrical power. Only use the
fog lights when visibility is poor.
4 112
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:51 PM
Page 113
Features of your vehicle
WIPERS AND WASHERS
Windshield wiper/washer
Rear window wiper/washer
■ Type A
■ Type A
A : Wiper speed control (front)
· MIST/
– Single wipe
· OFF / O – Off
· INT / --- – Intermittent wipe
AUTO* – Auto control wipe
· LO / 1 – Low wiper speed
· HI / 2 – High wiper speed
B : Intermittent control wipe time
adjustment
C : Wash with brief wipes (front)
■ Type B
■ Type B
D : Rear wiper/washer control
· ON /
– Continuous wipe
· INT / --- – Intermittent wipe*
· OFF / O – Off
E : Wash with brief wipes (rear)
* if equipped
OXM049231L/OXM049230L/OAM049048N/OAM049048L
4 113
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:51 PM
Page 114
Features of your vehicle
Windshield wipers
Operates as follows when the ignition switch is turned ON.
MIST/
: For a single wiping cycle,
move the lever to this
(MIST/
) position and
release it. The wipers will
operate continuously if
the lever is held in this
position.
OFF / O : Wiper is not in operation
INT / --- : Wiper operates intermittently at the same wiping
intervals. Use this mode in
light rain or mist. To vary
the speed setting, turn the
speed control knob.
LO / 1 : Normal wiper speed
HI / 2 : Fast wiper speed
✽ NOTICE
If there is heavy accumulation of
snow or ice on the windshield, defrost
the windshield for about 10 minutes,
or until the snow and/or ice is
removed before using the windshield
wipers to ensure proper operation.
4 114
Auto control (if equipped)
■ Type A
■ Type B
To vary the speed setting, turn the
speed control knob (1).
If the wiper switch is set in AUTO
mode when the ignition switch is ON,
the wiper will operate once to perform a self-check of the system. Set
the wiper to OFF (O) position when
the wiper is not in use.
CAUTION
Rain sensor
OXM049123L
The rain sensor located on the upper
end of the windshield glass senses
the amount of rainfall and controls
the wiping cycle for the proper interval. The more it rains, the faster the
wiper operates. When the rain stops,
the wipers stop.
When the ignition switch is ON
and the windshield wiper switch
is placed in the AUTO mode, use
caution in the following situations to avoid any injury to the
hands or other parts of the
body:
• Do not touch the upper end of
the windshield glass facing
the rain sensor.
• Do not wipe the upper end of
the windshield glass with a
damp or wet cloth.
• Do not put pressure on the
windshield glass.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:51 PM
Page 115
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
When washing the vehicle, set
the wiper switch in the OFF (O)
position to stop the auto wiper
operation.
The wiper may operate and be
damaged if the switch is set in
the AUTO mode while washing
the vehicle.
Do not remove the sensor cover
located on the upper end of the
passenger side windshield
glass. Damage to system parts
could occur and may not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
When starting the vehicle in
winter, set the wiper switch in
the OFF (O) position. Otherwise,
wipers may operate and ice may
damage the windshield wiper
blades. Always remove all snow
and ice and defrost the windshield properly prior to operating the windshield wipers.
Front windshield washers
■ Type A
OAM049102N
■ Type B
If the washer does not work, check
the washer fluid level. If the fluid level
is not sufficient, you will need to add
appropriate non-abrasive windshield
washer fluid to the washer reservoir.
The reservoir filler neck is located in
the front of the engine compartment
on the passenger side.
CAUTION
To prevent possible damage to
the washer pump, do not operate the washer when the fluid
reservoir is empty.
OXM049048E
In the OFF position, pull the lever
gently toward you to spray washer
fluid on the windshield and to run the
wipers 1-3 cycles.
Use this function when the windshield is dirty.
The spray and wiper operation will
continue until you release the lever.
4 115
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:51 PM
Page 116
Features of your vehicle
WARNING
Do not use the washer in freezing temperatures without first
warming the windshield with
the defrosters; the washer solution could freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision.
Rear window wiper and washer
switch
■ Type A
■ Type A
OXM049125
■ Type B
CAUTION
• To prevent possible damage
to the wipers or windshield,
do not operate the wipers
when the windshield is dry.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or
other solvents on or near them.
• To prevent damage to the
wiper arms and other components, do not attempt to move
the wipers manually.
4 116
OXM049126
■ Type B
OXM049125L
OXM049235L
The rear window wiper and washer
switch is located at the end of the
wiper and washer switch lever. Turn
the switch to the desired position to
operate the rear wiper and washer.
ON /
: Continuous wipe
INT / --- : Intermittent wipe
OFF / O : OFF
Push the lever away from you to
spray rear washer fluid and to run the
rear wipers 1~3 cycles. The spray
and wiper operation will continue
until you release the lever
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:51 PM
Page 117
Features of your vehicle
INTERIOR LIGHTS
CAUTION
Do not use the interior lights for
extended periods when the
engine is not running.
It may cause battery discharge.
Room lamp
■ Type A
WARNING
Do not use the interior lights
when driving in the dark.
Accidents could happen because
the view may be obscured by
interior lights.
OXM049225
■ Type B
Automatic turn off function
(if equipped)
The interior lights automatically turn
off approximately 20 minutes after
the ignition switch is turned off, if the
lights are in the ON position.
If your vehicle is equipped with the
theft alarm system, the interior lights
automatically turn off approximately
3 seconds after the system in armed
stage.
OXM043014
The light will turn on and off as below
if the switch is pressed. The light will
turn off if the button is pressed again.
• ON : The light stays on at all times.
• DOOR : The light comes on when
any door (or tailgate) is
opened regardless of the
ignition switch position.
When doors are unlocked
by the transmitter (or
smart key) or the key is
removed from the ignition
switch, the light comes on
for approximately 30 seconds as long as any door
is not opened. The light
goes out gradually after
approximately 30 seconds
if the door is closed.
However, if the ignition
switch is ON or all doors
are locked, the light will
turn off immediately. If a
door is opened with the
ignition switch in the ACC
or LOCK position, the light
stays on for about 20 minutes. However, if a door is
opened with the ignition
switch in the ON position,
the light stays on continuously.
4 117
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:51 PM
Page 118
Features of your vehicle
Map lamp
OXM043013
Press the lens (1) to turn the map
lamp on or off
• ROOM (2) :
- The map lamp and room lamp
stays on at all times.
- To turn off the ROOM mode,
press the ROOM button (2) once
again (not pressed.)
4 118
• DOOR (3) :
- The map lamp and room lamp
comes on when a door is opened.
The lamps go out after approximately 30 seconds.
- The map lamp and room lamp
comes on for approximately 30
seconds when doors are unlocked
with a transmitter or smart key as
long as the doors are not opened.
- The map lamp and room lamp will
stay on for approximately 20 minutes if a door is opened with the
ignition switch in the ACC or
LOCK/OFF position.
- The map lamp and room lamp will
stay on continuously if the door is
opened with the ignition switch in
the ON position.
- The map lamp and room lamp will
go out immediately if the ignition
switch is changed to the ON position or all doors are locked.
- To turn off the DOOR mode,
press the DOOR button (3) once
again (not pressed).
✽ NOTICE
• The DOOR mode and ROOM
mode can not be selected at the
same time.
• When the lamp is turned on by
pressing the lens (1), the lamp does
not turn off even if the DOOR
mode or ROOM mode is not
selected (not pressed).
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:51 PM
Page 119
Features of your vehicle
Luggage lamp (if equipped)
Vanity mirror lamp (if equipped)
OXM049136
• DOOR : The light comes on when
the tailgate is opened.
• OFF : The light stays off at all times.
• ON : The light stays on at all times.
OXM049133
•
•
: The lamp will turn on if this
button is pressed.
: The lamp will turn off if this
button is pressed.
✽ NOTICE
Turn off the lamp before returning
the sunvisor to its original position.
4 119
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:51 PM
Page 120
Features of your vehicle
DEFROSTER
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the conductors bonded to the inside
surface of the rear window,
never use sharp instruments or
window cleaners containing
abrasives to clean the window.
Rear window defroster
■ Type A
✽ NOTICE
If you want to defrost and defog the
front
windshield,
refer
to
“Windshield defrosting and defogging” in this section.
OXM043200
■ Type B
OXM043050
The defroster heats the window to
remove frost, fog and thin ice from
the rear window, while the engine is
running.
4 120
To activate the rear window
defroster, press the rear window
defroster button located in the center
facia switch panel. The indicator on
the rear window defroster button illuminates when the defroster is ON.
If there is heavy accumulation of
snow on the rear window, brush it off
before operating the rear defroster.
The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 20
minutes or when the ignition switch is
turned off. To turn off the defroster,
press the rear window defroster button
again.
Outside rearview mirror defroster
(if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the
outside rearview mirror defrosters,
they will operate at the same time you
turn on the rear window defroster.
Wiper deicer (if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the
wiper deicer, it will operate at the
same time you turn on the rear window defroster.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:52 PM
Page 121
Features of your vehicle
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
■ Front climate control (Type A)
■ Front climate control (Type B)
1. Fan speed control knob
2. Mode selection knob
3. Temperature control knob
4. Air conditioning button
5. Air intake control button
6. 3rd row air conditioning ON/OFF
■ 3rd row air conditioning control (for Type A)
button* (controlled from the front)
7. 3rd row air conditioning fan speed
control switch*
* if equipped
OXM043201/OXMA043201/OXM049141
4 121
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:52 PM
Page 122
Features of your vehicle
Heating and air conditioning
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
For improving the effectiveness of
heating and cooling;
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position (if
equipped).
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
4 122
OXM043052
❈ 2nd and 3rd row outlet vents (E, F, G, H) (G, H : if equipped)
• The air flow of the 2nd and 3rd row outlet vents is controlled by the front climate
control system and delivered through the inside air duct of the floor (E, F, H).
• The air flow of the 2nd and 3rd row outlet vents (E, F, H) may be weaker
than the instrument panel vents due to the long air duct.
• Close the air vents (F) in cold weather. The air flow of the 2nd and 3rd row
outlet vents may cool a little during heating operation. (Use the 2nd and 3rd
row outlet vents (F, G) during cooling operation.)
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:52 PM
Page 123
Features of your vehicle
Mode selection
Face-Level (B, D, F)
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face. Additionally, each
outlet can be controlled to direct the
air discharged from the outlet.
Bi-Level (B, D, E, C, F, H)
OXM043203
The mode selection knob controls
the direction of the air flow through
the ventilation system.
Air can be directed to the floor, dashboard outlets, or windshield. Six
symbols are used to represent MAX
A/C, Face, Bi-Level, Floor, FloorDefrost and Defrost air position.
The MAX A/C mode is used to cool
the inside of the vehicle faster.
Air flow is directed towards the face
and the floor.
Floor/Defrost-Level
(A, C, D, E, H)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters.
Defrost-Level (A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.
Floor-Level (C, E,H, A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air
being directed to the windshield and
side window defrosters.
4 123
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:53 PM
Page 124
Features of your vehicle
Temperature control
Air intake control
■ Type A
■ Type B
OXM043061
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or
closed separately using the thumbwheel (if equipped).
Also, you can adjust the direction of
air delivery from these vents using
the vent control lever as shown.
4 124
OXM043205
OXMA043206
The temperature control knob allows
you to control the temperature of the
air flowing from the ventilation system.
To change the air temperature in the
passenger compartment, turn the
knob to the right position for warm and
hot air or left position for cooler air.
The air intake control is used to
select the outside (fresh) air position
or recirculated air position.
To change the air intake control position, press the control button.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:53 PM
Page 125
Features of your vehicle
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air
from the passenger
compartment will be
drawn through the heating system and heated
or cooled according to
the function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
■ Type A
With the outside (fresh)
air position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
■ Type B
function selected.
✽ NOTICE
Prolonged operation of the heater in
the recirculated air position (without air conditioning selected) may
cause fogging of the windshield and
side windows and the air within the
passenger
compartment
may
become stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air
conditioning with the recirculated
air position selected will result in
excessively dry air in the passenger
compartment.
WARNING
• Continue using the climate
control system in the recirculated air position may allow
humidity to increase inside
the vehicle which may fog the
glass and obscure visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with
the air conditioning or heating
system on. It may cause serious harm or death due to a
drop in the oxygen level
and/or body temperature.
• Continue using the climate
control system in the recirculated air position can cause
drowsiness or sleepiness, and
loss of vehicle control. Set the
air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position as much as
possible while driving.
4 125
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:53 PM
Page 126
Features of your vehicle
Fan speed control
Air conditioning
3rd row air conditioning
(if equipped)
OXM043207
OXM043217
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for fan operation.
The fan speed control knob allows
you to control the fan speed of the air
flowing from the ventilation system.
To change the fan speed, turn the
knob to the right for higher speed or
left for lower speed.
Setting the fan speed control knob to
the “0” position turns off the fan.
Press the A/C button to turn the air
conditioning system on (indicator
light will illuminate). Press the button
again to turn the air conditioning system off.
4 126
OXM043068
To turn on the 3 row air conditioning
control system
1. Press the 3rd row air conditioning
ON/OFF button (indicator light on
the ON/OFF button will illuminate)
located on the front climate control
panel and set the fan speed to the
desired speed with the 3rd row fan
speed switch.
rd
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:53 PM
Page 127
Features of your vehicle
2. To turn off the 3rd row air conditioning control system, press the
3rd row air conditioning ON/OFF
button once more located on the
front climate control panel or set
the fan speed to the "OFF" position
with the 3rd row fan speed switch.
System operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the
position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1. Set the mode to the
position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired,
turn the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the
mode to the
or
position.
Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes
from entering the vehicle through
the ventilation system, temporarily
set the air intake control to the
recirculated air position. Be sure to
return the control to the fresh air
position when the irritation has
passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle. This will help keep the driver alert and comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system
is drawn in through the grilles just
ahead of the windshield. Care
should be taken that these are not
blocked by leaves, snow, ice or
other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the windshield, set the air intake control to
the fresh air position and fan speed
to the desired position, turn on the
air conditioning system, and adjust
the temperature control to desired
temperature.
4 127
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:53 PM
Page 128
Features of your vehicle
Air conditioning
Kia Air Conditioning Systems are
filled with refrigerant*.
1. Start the engine. Push the air conditioning button.
2. Set the mode to the
position.
3. Set the air intake control to the
outside air or recirculated air position.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and
temperature control to maintain
maximum comfort.
CAUTION
• The refrigerant system should
only be serviced by trained
and certified technicians to
insure proper and safe operation.
• The refrigerant system should
be serviced in a well-ventilated place.
(Continued)
4 128
(Continued)
• The air conditioning evaporator
(cooling coil) shall never be
repaired or replaced with one
removed from a used or salvaged vehicle and new replacement MAC evaporators shall be
certified (and labeled) as meeting SAE Standard J2842.
✽ NOTICE
• When using the air conditioning system, monitor the temperature gauge
closely while driving up hills or in
heavy traffic when outside temperatures are high. Air conditioning system operation may cause engine
overheating. Continue to use the
blower fan but turn the air conditioning system off if the temperature
gauge indicates engine overheating.
• When opening the windows in
humid weather air conditioning
may create water droplets inside
the vehicle. Since excessive water
droplets may cause damage to
electrical equipment, air conditioning should only be used with
the windows closed.
Air conditioning system operation tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in
direct sunlight during hot weather,
open the windows for a short time
to let the hot air inside the vehicle
escape.
• To help reduce moisture inside of
the windows on rainy or humid
days, decrease the humidity inside
the vehicle by operating the air
conditioning system.
• During air conditioning system
operation, you may occasionally
notice a slight change in engine
speed as the air conditioning compressor cycles. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system
every month only for a few minutes
to ensure maximum system performance.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:53 PM
Page 129
Features of your vehicle
• When using the air conditioning
system, you may notice clear water
dripping (or even puddling) on the
ground under the passenger side
of the vehicle. This is a normal system operation characteristic.
• Operating the air conditioning system in the recirculated air position
provides maximum cooling, however, continual operation in this
mode may cause the air inside the
vehicle to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and
humid air intake. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
✽ NOTICE
• Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is being driven in
severe conditions such as dusty or
rough roads, more frequent climate control air filter inspections
and changes are required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly
decreases, we recommend that the
system should be checked at an
authorized Kia dealer.
Climate control air filter
(if equipped)
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Blower
Climate control
air filter
Evaporator
core
Heater core
1LDA5047
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust
or other pollutants that come into the
vehicle from the outside through the
heating and air conditioning system.
If dust or other pollutants accumulate
in the filter over a period of time, the
air flow from the air vents may
decrease, resulting in moisture accumulation on the inside of the windshield even when the outside (fresh)
air position is selected. If this happens, we recommend that the climate control air filter be replaced by
an authorized Kia dealer.
4 129
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:53 PM
Page 130
Features of your vehicle
Air Conditioning refrigerant
label
Each symbols and specification on
air conditioning refrigerant label
means as below ;
1. Classification of refrigerant
2. Amount of refrigerant
3. Classification of Compressor lubricant
OXM063009
❈ The actual Air Conditioning refrigerant
label in the vehicle may differ from the
illustration.
4 130
You can find out which air conditioning refrigerant is applied your vehicle
at the label inside of the engine room.
Refer to section 8 for more detail
location of air conditioning refrigerant
label.
Checking the amount of air
conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is
low, the performance of the air conditioning is reduced. Overfilling also
has a negative influence on the air
conditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, have the system inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING
Because the refrigerant is at very high
pressure, the air conditioning
system
should only be serviced by trained and certified
technicians. It is important that
the correct type and amount of
oil and refrigerant is used, otherwise damage to the vehicle
and personal injury may occur.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:54 PM
Page 131
Features of your vehicle
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
■ Front climate control (Type A)
■ Front climate control (Type B)
1. A/C display
2. Driver's temperature control knob
3. AUTO (automatic control) button
4. Front blower OFF button
5. Front fan speed control switch
6. Mode selection button
7. Dual temperature control selection button
8. Passenger's temperature control knob
9. Air conditioning button*
10. 3rd row air conditioning ON/OFF button*
(controlled from the front)
■ 3rd row air conditioning control (for Type A)
11. Air intake control button* or recirculated air position button*
12. Front windshield defroster button
13. 3rd row air conditioning fan speed
control switch*
* if equipped
OXM043208/OXM043209/OXM049141
4 131
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:54 PM
Page 132
Features of your vehicle
■ Type C
1. Driver's temperature control knob
2. AUTO (automatic control) button
3. Front blower OFF button
4. Front fan speed control switch
■ Type D
5. Mode selection button
6. Dual temperature control selection button
7. Passenger's temperature control knob
8. Air conditioning button*
9. 3rd row air conditioning ON/OFF button*
(controlled from the front)
10. Air intake control button* or
recirculated air position button*
11. Front windshield defroster button
■ 3rd row air conditioning control (for Type C)
12. Climate control display
13. 3rd row air conditioning fan speed control
switch*
* if equipped
OXM043064/OXM043063/OXM049141
4 132
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:54 PM
Page 133
Features of your vehicle
Automatic heating and air conditioning
■ Driver’s side
■ Passenger’s side
OXM043210/OXM043211
OXM043056
1. Press the AUTO button. The
modes, fan speeds, air intake and
air-conditioning will be controlled
automatically by setting the temperature.
2. Turn the temperature control knob
to the desired temperature.
✽ NOTICE
• To turn the automatic operation
off, select any button or switch of
the following:
- Mode selection button
- Air conditioning button
- Front windshield defroster button
- Air intake control button
- Fan speed control switch
The selected function will be controlled manually while other functions operate automatically.
• For your convenience and to
improve the effectiveness of the
climate control, use the AUTO
button and set the temperature to
23°C (73°F).
4 133
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:54 PM
Page 134
Features of your vehicle
Manual heating and air conditioning
OXM043058
✽ NOTICE
Never place anything over the sensor located on the instrument panel
to ensure better control of the heating and cooling system.
4 134
The heating and cooling system can
be controlled manually by pressing
buttons or turning knob(s) other than
the AUTO button. In this case, the
system works sequentially according
to the order of buttons or knob(s)
selected.
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
For improving the effectiveness of
heating and cooling;
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system on.
Press the AUTO button in order to
convert to full automatic control of
the system.
Mode selection
OXM043059
The mode selection button controls
the direction of the air flow through
the ventilation system.
The air flow outlet port is converted
as follows:
Refer to the illustration in the
“Manual climate control system”.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:55 PM
Page 135
Features of your vehicle
Face-Level
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face. Additionally, each
outlet can be controlled to direct the
air discharged from the outlet.
Bi-Level
Floor-Level
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air
being directed to the windshield and
side window defrosters.
Floor/Defrost-Level
OXM043060
Air flow is directed towards the face
and the floor.
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters.
Defrost-Level
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.
4 135
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:55 PM
Page 136
Features of your vehicle
Temperature control
■ Driver’s side
■ Passenger’s side
OXM043061
OXM043129
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or
closed separately using the thumbwheel (if equipped).
Also, you can adjust the direction of
air delivery from these vents using
the vent control lever as shown.
Adjusting the driver and passenger
side temperature individually
1. Press the DUAL button to operate
the driver and passenger side
temperature individually. Also, if
the passenger side temperature
control knob is operated, it will
automatically change to the DUAL
mode as well.
2. Operate the left temperature control to adjust the driver side temperature. Operate the right temperature control to adjust the passenger side temperature.
4 136
OXM043210/OXM043211
The temperature will increase to the
maximum (HI) by turning the knob to
the extreme right.
The temperature will decrease to the
minimum (Lo) by turning the knob to
the extreme left.
When turning the knob, the temperature will increase or decrease by
0.5°C/1°F. When set to the lowest
temperature setting, the air conditioning will operate continuously.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:55 PM
Page 137
Features of your vehicle
When the driver side temperature is
set to the highest (HI) or lowest (Lo)
temperature setting, the DUAL mode
is deactivated for maximum heating
or cooling.
Adjusting the driver and passenger
side temperature equally
1. Press the DUAL button again to
deactivate DUAL mode. The passenger side temperature will be
set to the same temperature as
the driver side.
2. Operate the driver side temperature control switch. The driver and
passenger side temperature will
be adjusted equally.
Temperature conversion
You can switch the temperature
mode from Centigrade to Fahrenheit
as follows:
While pressing the OFF button,
press the AUTO button for 3 seconds
or more.
The display will change from
Centigrade to Fahrenheit, or from
Fahrenheit to Centigrade.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, the temperature mode
display will reset to Fahrenheit.
Outside thermometer
■ Type A
■ Type B
OXM043127/OXM043126
The current outside temperature is
displayed in 1°C (1°F) increments.
The temperature range is between -40°C ~ 60°C (40°F ~ 140°F).
• The outside temperature on the
display may not change immediately like a general thermometer to
prevent the driver from being inattentive.
4 137
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:55 PM
Page 138
Features of your vehicle
Air intake control
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air
from the passenger
compartment will be
drawn through the heating system and heated
or cooled according to
the function selected.
■ Type A
■ Type B
OXM043212
■ Type C
OXM043055
■ Type D
OXM043054
This is used to select the outside
(fresh) air position or recirculated air
position.
To change the air intake control position, push the control button.
4 138
Outside (fresh) air position
■ Type A, C
With the outside (fresh)
air position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
■ Type B, D
function selected.
✽ NOTICE
Prolonged operation of the heater in
the recirculated air position (without air conditioning selected) may
cause fogging of the windshield and
side windows and the air within the
passenger
compartment
may
become stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air
conditioning with the recirculated
air position selected will result in
excessively dry air in the passenger
compartment.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:55 PM
Page 139
Features of your vehicle
WARNING
• Continue using the climate
control system in the recirculated air position may allow
humidity to increase inside
the vehicle which may fog the
glass and obscure visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with
the air conditioning or heating
system on. It may cause serious harm or death due to a
drop in the oxygen level
and/or body temperature.
• Continuous use of the climate
control system in the recirculated air position can cause
drowsiness or sleepiness,
and loss of vehicle control.
Set the air intake control to
the outside (fresh) air position
as much as possible while
driving.
Fan speed control
Air conditioning
■ Type A, B
OXM043213
■ Type C, D
OXM043065
The fan speed can be set to the
desired speed by operating the fan
speed control switch.
To change the fan speed, press (
)
the switch for higher speed, or push
(
) the switch for lower speed. To
turn the fan speed control off, press
the front blower OFF button.
OXM043066
Press the A/C button to turn the air
conditioning system on (indicator
light will illuminate).
Press the button again to turn the air
conditioning system off.
4 139
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:55 PM
Page 140
Features of your vehicle
OFF mode
Climate information screen selection (for Type C, D)
3rd row air conditioning
(if equipped)
OXM043067
Press the front blower OFF button to
turn off the front air climate control
system. However, you can still operate the mode and air intake buttons
as long as the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
4 140
OXM043079
OXM043068
Press the climate information screen
selection button to display climate
information on the screen.
To turn on the 3rd row air conditioning control system
1. Press the 3rd row air conditioning
ON/OFF button (indicator light on
the ON/OFF button will illuminate)
located on the front climate control
panel and set the fan speed to the
desired speed with the 3rd row fan
speed switch located in the rear of
the vehicle.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:55 PM
Page 141
Features of your vehicle
2. To turn off the 3rd row air conditioning control system, press the
3rd row air conditioning ON/OFF
button once more located on the
front climate control panel or set
the fan speed to the “OFF” position
with the 3rd row fan speed switch.
4 141
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:55 PM
Page 142
Features of your vehicle
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING
WARNING - Windshield
heating
Do not use the
or
position during cooling operation in
extremely humid weather. The
difference between the temperature of the outside air and the
windshield could cause the
outer surface of the windshield
to fog up, causing loss of visibility. In this case, set the mode
selection to the
position
and fan speed control to the
lower speed.
4 142
• For maximum defrosting, set the
temperature control to the extreme
right/hot position and the fan speed
control to the highest speed.
• If warm air to the floor is desired
while defrosting or defogging, set
the mode to the floor-defrost position.
• Before driving, clear all snow and
ice from the windshield, rear window, outside rear view mirrors, and
all side windows.
• Clear all snow and ice from the
hood and air inlet in the cowl grill to
improve heater and defroster efficiency and to reduce the probability of fogging up the inside of the
windshield.
Manual climate control system
To defog inside windshield
OXM043069
1. Set the fan speed to the desired
position.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Select the
or
position.
4. The outside (fresh) air and air conditioning will be selected automatically.
If the air conditioning and/or outside
(fresh) air position are not selected
automatically, press the corresponding button manually.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:55 PM
Page 143
Features of your vehicle
To defrost outside windshield
Automatic climate control
system
To defog inside windshield
If the air conditioning and outside
(fresh) air position are not selected
automatically, adjust the corresponding button manually. If the
position is selected, lower fan speed is
adjusted to a higher fan speed.
OXM043070
1. Set the fan speed to the highest
position.
2. Set the temperature to the
extreme hot position.
3. Select the
position.
4. The outside (fresh) air and air conditioning will be selected automatically.
If the air conditioning is not selected
automatically press the corresponding button manually.
OXM043073
1. Set the fan speed to the desired
position.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Press the defroster button (
).
4. The outside (fresh) air position will
be selected automatically and the
air conditioning will turn on
according to the detected ambient
temperature.
4 143
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:55 PM
Page 144
Features of your vehicle
To defrost outside windshield
Defogging logic
Manual climate control system
To reduce the possibility of fogging
up the inside of the windshield, the
air intake or air conditioning is controlled automatically according to
certain conditions such as
or
position. To cancel or return to the
defogging logic, do the following.
OXM043074
OXM049169
1. Set the fan speed to the highest
position.
2. Set the temperature to the
extreme hot (HI) position.
3. Press the defroster button (
).
4. The outside (fresh) air position will
be selected automatically and the
air conditioning will turn on
according to the detected ambient
temperature.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Turn the mode selection knob to
the defrost position ( ).
3. Press the air intake control button
at least 5 times within 3 seconds.
The indicator light in the air intake
control button will blink 3 times with
0.5 second of interval. It indicates that
the defogging logic is canceled or
returned to the programmed status.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, it resets to the defog
logic status.
4 144
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:55 PM
Page 145
Features of your vehicle
Automatic climate control system
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, it resets to the defog
logic status.
OXMA043170
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Select the defroster position pressing the defroster button ( ).
3. While pressing the air conditioning
button (A/C), press the air intake
control button at least 5 times within 3 seconds.
The A/C display blinks 3 times with
0.5 second of interval. It indicates that
the defogging logic is canceled or
returned to the programmed status.
4 145
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:56 PM
Page 146
Features of your vehicle
STORAGE COMPARTMENTS
These compartments can be used to
store small items.
Center console storage
(if equipped)
Glove box
CAUTION
• To avoid possible theft, do not
leave valuables in the storage
compartment.
• Always keep the storage compartment covers closed while
driving. Do not attempt to
place so many items in the
storage compartment that the
storage compartment cover
cannot close securely.
WARNING - Flammable
materials
Do not store cigarette lighters,
propane cylinders, or other
flammable/explosive materials
in the vehicle. These items may
catch fire and/or explode if the
vehicle is exposed to hot temperatures for extended periods.
4 146
OXM049174L
OXM049212
To open the center console storage,
pull up the lever.
The glove box can be locked and
unlocked with a master key. (if
equipped)
To open the glove box, pull the handle and the glove box will automatically open. Close the glove box after
use.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:56 PM
Page 147
Features of your vehicle
WARNING
Sunglass holder
WARNING
To reduce the risk of injury in an
accident or sudden stop, always
keep the glove box door closed
while driving.
WARNING
Do not keep food in the glove
box for a long time.
OXM043017
• Do not keep objects except
sunglasses inside the sunglass holder. Such objects can
be thrown from the holder in
the event of a sudden stop or
an accident, possibly injuring
the passengers in the vehicle.
• Do not open the sunglass
holder while the vehicle is
moving. The rear view mirror
of the vehicle can be blocked
by an opened sunglass holder.
To open the sunglass holder, press
the cover and the holder will slowly
open. Place your sunglasses with the
lenses facing out. To close the sunglass holder, push it up.
4 147
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:56 PM
Page 148
Features of your vehicle
Grasp the handle on the edge of the
cover and lift it.
Luggage box
Small
■ Type A
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the goods
or the vehicle, care should be
taken when carrying fragile or
bulky objects in the luggage box.
OXM049213
■ Type B (if equipped)
OXM049227L
You can place a first aid kit, a reflector triangle, tools, etc. in the box for
easy access.
4 148
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:56 PM
Page 149
Features of your vehicle
INTERIOR FEATURES
Cup holder
■ Front
■ Center
Type A
WARNING - Hot liquids
• Do not place uncovered cups
with hot liquid in the cup holder while the vehicle is in
motion. If the hot liquid spills,
you may burn yourself. Such a
burn to the driver could lead to
loss of control of the vehicle.
• To reduce the risk of personal
injury in the event of sudden
stop or collision, do not place
uncovered or unsecured bottles, glasses, cans, etc., in the
cup holder while the vehicle is
in motion.
WARNING
Keep cans or bottles out of
direct sun light and do not put
them in a vehicle that is heated
up. It may explode.
OXM049180
OXMA043215
■ Rear (if equipped)
Type B
OXM049240N
OXM049214
Cups or small beverage cans may be placed in the cup holders.
4 149
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:56 PM
Page 150
Features of your vehicle
Bottle holder
The ticket holder (5) is provided for
holding a tollgate ticket. (if equipped)
Sunvisor
*
* The actual sunvisor lamp in the
vehicle may differ from the illustration.
CAUTION - Vanity mirror
OXM043016
Bottles may be placed in the holder.
✽ NOTICE
Only bottles should be place in the
holder as it is written in the vehicle
“BOTTLE ONLY”.
4 150
OXM049183
Use the sunvisor to shield direct light
through the front or side windows.
To use the sunvisor, pull it downward.
To use the sunvisor for the side window, pull it downward, unsnap it from
the bracket (1) and swing it to the
side (2).
Adjust the sunvisor extension forward or backward (3).
To use the vanity mirror, pull down
the visor and slide the mirror cover
(4).
lamp
If you use the vanity mirror
lamp, turn off the lamp before
returning the sunvisor to its
original position, otherwise it
could result in battery discharge and possible sunvisor
damage.
WARNING
For your safety, do not obstruct
your vision when using the sunvisor
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:56 PM
Page 151
Features of your vehicle
Power outlet
The power outlet is designed to provide power for mobile telephones or
other devices designed to operate
with vehicle electrical systems. The
devices should draw less than 10
amps with the engine running.
■ Front
CAUTION
ODMECO2037
■ Center
OXMA043318
■ Rear (if equipped)
• Use the power outlet only when
the engine is running and
remove the accessory plug
after use. Using the accessory
plug for prolonged periods of
time with the engine off could
cause the battery to discharge.
• Only use 12V electric accessories which are less than 10A
in electric capacity.
• Adjust the air-conditioner or
heater to the lowest operating
level when using the power
outlet.
• Close the cover when not in
use.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Some electronic devices can
cause electronic interference
when plugged into a vehicle’s
power outlet. These devices
may cause excessive audio
static and malfunctions in
other electronic systems or
devices used in your vehicle.
WARNING
Do not put a finger or a foreign
element (pen, etc.) into a power
outlet and do not touch with a
wet hand. You may get an electric shock.
OANNCO43015
4 151
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:56 PM
Page 152
Features of your vehicle
AC inverter (if equipped)
If you press the AC inverter button
again, the AC inverter will be deactivated and the light on the AC inverter button will turn off.
✽ NOTICE
When turning on the AC inverter,
the indicator on the AC inverter button illuminates late while the system
conducts a self-check.
OXMA043400
OXMA073132
OXMA043402
• Rated voltage : AC 115V
• Maximum electric power : 150W
• In order to avoid an electrical system failure, electric shock, etc., be
sure to read owner's manual
before use.
• Be sure to close the cover except
the time of use.
✽ NOTICE
The AC inverter supplies 115V/150W
electric power to operate electric
accessories or equipments.
If you wish to use the AC inverter,
press the AC inverter button while
the engine is running. The light on
the AC inverter button will illuminate.
4 152
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:56 PM
Page 153
Features of your vehicle
WARNING
To reduce a risk of serious or
fatal injuries:
• Do not use a heated electric
device such as a coffeepot,
toaster, heater, iron, etc.
• Do not insert foreign objects
into the outlet and do not
touch the outlet as you may
get shocked.
• Do not let children touch the
AC inverter.
CAUTION
• To prevent the battery from
being discharged, do not use
the AC inverter while the
engine is not running.
• When not using the AC inverter, make sure to turn off the
AC inverter (the indicator on
the button does not illuminate) and close the AC inverter cover.
• After using an electric accessory or equipment, pull the
plug out. Leaving the accessory or equipment plugged in for
a long time may cause battery
discharge.
• Do not use an electric accessory or equipment the power
consumption of which is
greater than 150W(115V).
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Some electric accessories or
equipments can cause electronic interference. It may
cause excessive audio noise
and malfunctions in other
electric systems or devices in
the vehicle.
• Do not use broken electric
accessories or equipments,
which may damage the AC
inverter and electrical systems of the vehicle.
• Do not use two or more electric accessories or equipments at the same time. It may
cause damage to the electrical
systems of the vehicle.
• When the input voltage is
under 11V, the outlet LED will
blink and the AC inverter will
turn off automatically. If the
input voltage goes up to normal, the AC inverter will turn
on again.
4 153
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:56 PM
Page 154
Features of your vehicle
Clock
Ashtray (if equipped)
WARNING - Ashtray use
• Do not use the vehicle’s ashtrays as waste receptacles.
• Putting lit cigarettes or matches in an ashtray with other
combustible materials may
cause a fire.
■ Type A
OXM043018
OXM043304
■ Type B
Hour (1)
Pressing the H button will advance
the time displayed by one hour.
Minute (2)
Pressing the M button will advance
the time displayed by one minute.
OXM043301
To change the 24 hour format to the
12 hours format (if equipped), while
pressing the “H” button, press the “M”
button for 3 seconds or more. For
example, if the “H” and “M” buttons
are pressed for more than 3 seconds
while the time is 22:15, the display
will change to 10:15.
4 154
To use the ashtray, open the cover.
To clean or empty the ashtray, pull it
out.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:56 PM
Page 155
Features of your vehicle
Clothes hanger (if equipped)
Floor mat anchor (s)
(if equipped)
■ Driver seat
OUN026348
WARNING
■ Passenger seat
OXM043309
■ Rear seat
❈ This actual feature may differ from the
illustration.
To use the hanger, pull down the
upper portion of hanger.
CAUTION
Do not hang heavy clothes, since
those may damage the hook.
OXMA043401
When using a floor mat on the front
floor carpet, make sure it attaches to
the floor mat anchor(s) in your vehicle. This keeps the floor mat from
sliding forward.
The following must be observed
when installing ANY floor mat
to the vehicle.
• Ensure that the floor mats are
securely attached to the vehicle's floor mat anchor(s) before
driving the vehicle.
• Do not use ANY floor mat that
cannot be firmly attached to
the vehicle's floor mat anchors.
• Do not stack floor mats on top
of one another (e.g. all-weather
rubber mat on top of a carpeted floor mat). Only a single
floor mat should be installed in
each position.
IMPORTANT – Your vehicle was
manufactured with driver's side
floor mat anchors that are
designed to securely hold the
floor mat in place. To avoid any
interference with pedal operation, Kia recommends that only
the Kia floor mat designed for
use in your vehicle be installed.
4 155
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:57 PM
Page 156
Features of your vehicle
Side curtain (if equipped)
Luggage net holder
(if equipped)
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the goods
or the vehicle, care should be
taken when carrying fragile or
bulky objects in the luggage
compartment.
■ Type A
WARNING
OXM049217
OXM043303
■ Type B
To use the side curtain:
1. Lift the curtain by the handle (1).
2. Hang the curtain on the hooks on
both sides of the handle.
WARNING
To avoid injury or damage to the
side curtain and door moldings,
lower side curtain by the handle
all the way back to the stowed
position. Do not release handle
after disengaging from the hooks
on the door.
4 156
OXM043308
To keep items from shifting in the
cargo area, you can use the holders
located in the cargo area to attach
the luggage net.
If necessary, we recommend that
you contact an authorized Kia dealer.
To avoid eye injury, DO NOT
overstretch the luggage net.
ALWAYS keep your face and
body out of the luggage net’s
recoil path. DO NOT use the luggage net when the strap has visible signs of wear or damage.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
3:57 PM
Page 157
Features of your vehicle
EXTERIOR FEATURES
✽ NOTICE
Roof rack (if equipped)
If the vehicle is equipped with a sunroof, be sure not to position cargo
onto the roof rack in such a way that
it could interfere with sunroof operation.
■ Type A
CAUTION
OXM049222
■ Type B
OXMA043222
If the vehicle has a roof rack, you can
load cargo on top of your vehicle.
• When carrying cargo on the
roof rack, take the necessary
precautions to make sure the
cargo does not damage the
roof of the vehicle.
• When carrying large objects
on the roof rack, make sure
they do not exceed the overall
roof length or width.
• When you are carrying cargo
on the roof rack, do not operate
the sunroof (if equipped).
WARNING
• The following specification is
the maximum weight that can
be loaded onto the roof rack.
Distribute the load as evenly
as possible on the roof rack
and secure the load firmly.
ROOF
RACK
100 kg (220 lbs.)
EVENLY DISTRIBUTED
Loading cargo or luggage in
excess of the specified weight
limit on the roof rack may
damage your vehicle.
• The vehicle center of gravity
will be higher when items are
loaded onto the roof rack.
Avoid sudden starts, braking,
sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers or high speeds that may
result in loss of vehicle control or rollover resulting in an
accident.
(Continued)
4 157
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4a(~158).QXP
1/23/2013
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• Always drive slowly and turn
corners carefully when carrying items on the roof rack.
Severe wind updrafts, caused
by passing vehicles or natural
causes, can cause sudden
upward pressure on items
loaded on the roof rack. This
is especially true when carrying large, flat items such as
wood panels or mattresses.
This could cause the items to
fall off the roof rack and cause
damage to your vehicle or
others around you.
• To prevent damage or loss of
cargo while driving, check frequently before or while driving to make sure the items on
the roof rack are securely fastened.
4 158
3:57 PM
Page 158
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:42 PM
Page 159
Features of your vehicle
AUDIO SYSTEM
✽ NOTICE
Antenna
CAUTION
If you install an after market HID
head lamp, your vehicle’s audio and
electronic device may malfunction.
OXM049252N
Your vehicle uses a roof antenna to
receive AM or/and FM broadcast signals.
This antenna is removable. To
remove the roof antenna, turn it
counterclockwise. To install the roof
antenna, turn it clockwise.
• Before entering a place with a
low height clearance or a vehicle wash, remove the antenna
by rotating it counter-clockwise. If not, the antenna may
be damaged.
• When reinstalling your roof
antenna, it is important that it
is fully tightened and adjusted
to the upright position to
ensure proper reception. But it
could be removed when parking the vehicle or when loading cargo on the roof rack.
• When cargo is loaded on the
roof rack, do not place the
cargo near the antenna pole to
ensure proper reception.
4 159
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:42 PM
Page 160
Features of your vehicle
Steering wheel audio control
(if equipped)
1
4
SEEK/PRESET ( / ) (2)
The SEEK/PRESET button has different functions based on the system
mode. For the following functions the
button should be pressed for 0.8 seconds or more.
2
3
OXMA043078
The steering wheel may incorporate
audio control buttons. These buttons
are installed to promote safe driving.
CAUTION
Do not operate audio remote
control buttons simultaneously.
4 160
VOLUME (VOL + / - ) (1)
• Push the lever upward (+) to
increase the volume.
• Push the lever downward (-) to
decrease the volume.
RADIO mode
It will function as the AUTO SEEK
select button.
CD/USB/iPod® mode
It will function as the FF/REW button.
If the SEEK/PRESET button is
pressed for less than 0.8 seconds, it
will work as follows in each mode.
RADIO mode
It will function as the PRESET STATION buttons.
CD/USB/iPod® mode
It will function as TRACK UP/DOWN
button.
MODE (3)
Press the button to change audio
source.
- FM(1~2) ➟ AM ➟ SAT(1~3) ➟ CD ➟
USB AUX(iPod®) FM...
MUTE (4)
• Press the button to mute the
sound.
• Press the button to turn off the
microphone during a telephone
call.
Detailed information for audio control
buttons are described in the following
pages in this section.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:42 PM
Page 161
Features of your vehicle
Aux, USB port (if equipped)
✽ NOTICE
When using a portable audio device
connected to the power outlet, noise
may occur during playback. If this
happens, use the power source of the
portable audio device.
* iPod ® is a trademark of Apple Inc.
OXM043306
If your vehicle has an aux and/or
USB(universal serial bus) port, you
can use an aux port to connect audio
devices and an USB and also an
iPod®.
4 161
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:42 PM
Page 162
Features of your vehicle
This can be due to factors, such as
the distance from the radio station,
closeness of other strong radio stations or the presence of buildings,
bridges or other large obstructions in
the area.
How vehicle audio works
FM reception
AM reception
JBM002
JBM001
AM and FM radio signals are broadcast from transmitter towers located
around your city. They are intercepted by the radio antenna on your vehicle. This signal is then processed by
the radio and sent to your vehicle
speakers.
When a strong radio signal has
reached your vehicle, the precise
engineering of your audio system
ensures the best possible quality
reproduction. However, in some
cases the signal coming to your vehicle may not be strong and clear.
4 162
AM broadcasts can be received at
greater distances than FM broadcasts. This is because AM radio
waves are transmitted at low frequencies. These long distance,low
frequency radio waves can follow the
curvature of the earth rather than
travelling straight. In addition, they
curve around obstructions resulting
in better signal coverage.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:42 PM
Page 163
Features of your vehicle
FM radio station
JBM003
JBM004
JBM005
FM broadcasts are transmitted at
high frequencies and do not bend to
follow the earth's surface. Because
of this, FM broadcasts generally
begin to fade within short distances
from the station. short distances from
the station. Also, FM signals are easily affected by buildings, mountains,
and obstructions. This can lead to
undesirable or unpleasant listening
conditions which might lead you to
believe a problem exists with your
radio. The following conditions are
normal and do not indicate radio
trouble:
• Fading - As your vehicle moves
away from the radio station, the
signal will weaken and sound will
begin to fade. When this occurs,
we suggest that you select another
stronger station.
• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or
large obstructions between the
transmitter and your radio can disturb the signal causing static or
fluttering noises to occur. Reducing
the treble level may lessen this
effect until the disturbance clears.
• Station Swapping - As an FM signal weakens, another more powerful signal near the same frequency
may begin to play. This is because
your radio is designed to lock onto
the clearest signal. If this occurs,
select another station with a
stronger signal.
• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio
signals being received from several directions can cause distortion
or fluttering. This can be caused by
a direct and reflected signal from
the same station, or by signals
from two stations with close frequencies. If this occurs, select
another station until the condition
has passed.
4 163
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:42 PM
Page 164
Features of your vehicle
Using a cellular phone or a twoway radio
When a cellular phone is used inside
the vehicle, noise may be produced
from the audio system. This does not
mean that something is wrong with
the audio equipment. In such a case,
try to operate mobile devices as far
from the audio equipment as possible.
CAUTION
When using a communication
system such as a cellular phone
or a radio set inside the vehicle,
a separate external antenna
must be fitted. When a cellular
phone or a radio set is used
with an internal antenna alone,
it may interfere with the vehicle's electrical system and
adversely affect safe operation
of the vehicle.
4 164
WARNING
Do not use a cellular phone
while driving. Stop at a safe
location to use a cellular phone.
Caring for disc
• If the temperature inside the car is too
high, open the car windows to ventilate before using the system.
• It is illegal to copy and use
MP3/WMA files without permission.
Use CDs that are created only by
lawful means.
• Do not apply volatile agents, such
as benzene and thinner, normal
cleaners and magnetic sprays
made for analogue disc onto CDs.
• To prevent the disc surface from
getting damaged, hold CDs by the
edges or the center hole only.
• Clean the disc surface with a piece
of soft cloth before playback (wipe
it from the center to the outside
edge).
• Do not damage the disc surface or
attach pieces of sticky tape or
paper.
• Make certain only CDs are inserted into the CD player (Do not insert
more than one CD at a time).
• Keep CDs in their cases after use to
protect them from scratches or dirt.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:42 PM
Page 165
Features of your vehicle
• Depending on the type of CDR/CD-RW CDs, certain CDs may
not operate normally according to
the manufacturing companies. In
such circumstances, continued
use may cause malfunctions to
your audio system.
NOTE:
Order of playing files (folders) :
1. Song playing order :
to
sequentially.
2. Folder playing order :
❋ If no song file is contained in the
folder, that folder is not displayed.
✽ NOTICE
- Playing an Incompatible
Copy Protected Audio CD
Some copy protected CDs, which do
not comply with international audio
CD standards (Red Book), may not
play on your car audio. Please note
that inabilities to properly play a
copy protected CD may indicate
that the CD is defective, not the CD
player.
4 165
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:42 PM
Page 166
Features of your vehicle
WARNING
• Do not stare at the screen
while driving. Staring at the
screen for prolonged periods
of time could lead to traffic
accidents.
• Do not disassemble, assemble, or modify the audio system. Such acts could result in
accidents, fire, or electric
shock.
• Using the phone while driving
may lead to a lack of attention of
traffic conditions and increase
the likelihood of accidents.
Use the phone feature after
parking the vehicle.
• Heed caution not to spill water
or introduce foreign objects
into the device. Such acts
could lead to smoke, fire, or
product malfunction.
(Continued)
4 166
(Continued)
• Please refrain from use if the
screen is blank or no sound
can be heard as these signs
may indicate product malfunction.
Continued use
in such conditions could lead
to accidents(fires, electric
shock) or product malfunctions.
• Do not touch the antenna during thunder or lightening as
such acts may lead to lightning induced electric shock.
• Do not stop or park in parking-restricted areas to operate
the product. Such acts could
lead to traffic accidents.
• Use the system with the vehicle ignition turned on.
Prolonged use with the ignition turned off could result in
battery discharge.
CAUTION
• Operating the device while
driving could lead to accidents due to a lack of attention to external surroundings.
First park the vehicle before
operating the device.
• Adjust the volume to levels
that allow the driver to hear
sounds from outside of the
vehicle. Driving in a state
where external sounds cannot
be heard may lead to accidents.
• Pay attention to the volume
setting when turning the
device on. A sudden output of
extreme volume upon turning
the device on could lead to
hearing impairment. (Adjust
the volume to a suitable levels
before turning off the device.)
(Continued)
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:42 PM
Page 167
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• If you want to change the position of device installation,
please inquire with your place
of purchase or service maintenance
center.
Technical
expertise is required to install
or disassemble the device.
• Turn on the car ignition before
using this device. Do not operate the audio system for long
periods of time with the ignition turned off as such operations may lead to battery discharge.
• Do not subject the device to
severe shock or impact. Direct
pressure onto the front side of
the monitor may cause damage to the LCD or touch
screen.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When cleaning the device,
make sure to turn off the
device and use a dry and
smooth cloth. Never use
tough materials, chemical
cloths, or solvents (alcohol,
benzene, thinners, etc.) as
such materials may damage
the device panel or cause
color/quality deterioration
• Do not place beverages close
to the audio system. Spilling
beverages may lead to system
malfunction.
• In case of product malfunction,
please contact your place of purchase or After Service center.
• Placing the audio system
within an electromagnetic
environment may result in
noise interference.
4 167
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:42 PM
Page 168
Features of your vehicle
USING THE USB DEVICE
• To use an external USB device,
make sure the device is not connected when starting up the
vehicle. Connect the device after
starting up.
• If you start the engine when the
USB device is connected, it may
damage the USB device. (USB
flashdrives are very sensitive to
electric shock.)
• If the engine is started up or
turned off while the external USB
device is connected, the external
USB device may not work.
• The System may not play unauthenticated MP3 or WMA files.
1) It can only play MP3 files with
the
compression
rate
between 8Kbps ~ 320Kbps.
2) It can only play WMA music
files with the compression
rate between 8Kbps ~
320Kbps.
• Take precautions for static electricity when connecting or disconnecting the external USB device.
(Continued)
4 168
(Continued)
• An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is
not recognizable.
• Depending on the condition of
the external USB device, the
connected external USB device
can be unrecognizable.
• When the formatted byte/sector
setting of External USB device is
not
either
512BYTE
or
2048BYTE, then the device will
not be recognized.
• Use only a USB device formatted to FAT 12/16/32.
• USB devices without USB I/F
authentication may not be recognizable.
• Make sure the USB connection
terminal does not come in contact with the human body or
other objects.
• If you repeatedly connect or disconnect the USB device in a
short period of time, it may break
the device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• You may hear a strange noise
when connecting or disconnecting a USB device.
• If you disconnect the external
USB device during playback in
USB mode, the external USB
device can be damaged or may
malfunction. Therefore, disconnect the external USB device
when the audio is turned off or in
another mode. (e.g, Radio, CD)
• Depending on the type and
capacity of the external USB
device or the type of the files
stored in the device, there is a
difference in the time taken for
recognition of the device.
• Do not use the USB device for
purposes other than playing
music files.
• Playing videos through the USB
is not supported.
• Use of USB accessories such as
rechargers or heaters using USB
I/F may lower performance or
cause trouble.
(Continued)
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:42 PM
Page 169
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• If you use devices such as a USB
hub purchased separately, the
vehicle’s audio system may not
recognize the USB device. In that
case, connect the USB device
directly to the multimedia terminal
of the vehicle.
• If the USB device is divided by logical drives, only the music files on
the highest-priority drive are recognized by car audio.
• Devices such as MP3 Player/
Cellular phone/Digital camera can
be unrecognizable by standard
USB I/F can be unrecognizable.
• Charging through the USB may
not be supported in some mobile
devices.
• USB HDD or USB types liable to
connection failures due to vehicle
vibrations are not supported.
(i-stick type)
• Some non-standard USB devices
(METAL COVER TYPE USB) can
be unrecognizable.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Some USB flash memory readers (such as CF, SD, micro SD,
etc.) or external-HDD type
devices can be unrecognizable.
• Music files protected by DRM
(DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGEMENT) are not recognizable.
• The data in the USB memory
may be lost while using this
audio. Always back up important
data on a personal storage
device.
• Please avoid using
USB memory products which can be
used as key chains or
cellular phone accessories as they could cause damage to the USB jack. Please
make certain only to use plug
type connector products.
4 169
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:42 PM
Page 170
Features of your vehicle
USING THE iPod® DEVICE
• Some iPod models may not support communication protocol
and files may not properly play.
Supported iPod models:
- iPhone 3GS/4
- iPod touch 1st~4th generation
- iPod nano 1st~6th generation
- iPod classic
• The order of search or playback
of songs in the iPod can be different from the order searched in
the audio system.
• If the iPod is disabled due to its
own malfunction, reset the iPod.
(Reset: Refer to iPod manual)
• An iPod may not operate normally on low battery.
(Continued)
4 170
(Continued)
• Some iPod devices, such as the
iPhone, can be connected
through the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology interface. The device
must have audio Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology capability
(such as for stereo headphone
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology).
The device can play, but it will not
be controlled by the audio system.
• To use iPod features within the
audio, use the cable provided
upon purchasing an iPod device.
• Skipping or improper operation
may occur depending on the
characteristics
of
your
iPod/Phone device.
• If your iPhone is connected to
both the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology and USB, the sound
may not be properly played. In
your iPhone, select the Dock
connector
or
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology to change
the sound output (source).
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When connecting iPod with the
iPod Power Cable, insert the
connector to the multimedia
socket completely. If not inserted
completely,
communications
between iPod and audio may be
interrupted.
• When adjusting the sound
effects of the iPod and the audio
system, the sound effects of
both devices will overlap and
might reduce or distort the quality of the sound.
• Deactivate (turn off) the equalizer function of an iPod when
adjusting the audio system’s volume, and turn off the equalizer
of the audio system when using
the equalizer of an iPod.
• When not using iPod with car
audio, detach the iPod cable
from iPod. Otherwise, iPod may
remain in accessory mode, and
may not work properly.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:42 PM
Page 171
Features of your vehicle
Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology
Before Using the Bluetooth®
Handsfree
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos
are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, lnc. and any use of
such marks by Kia is under license.
A Bluetooth® enabled call phone is
required to use Bluetooth® wireless
technology.
What is Bluetooth® ?
• Bluetooth® refers to a short-distance wireless networking technology which uses a 2.45GHz frequency to connect various devices
within a certain distance.
• Supported within PCs, external
devices, Bluetooth® phones, PDAs,
various electronic devices, and
automotive
environments,
Bluetooth® allows data to be transmitted at high speeds without having to use a connector cable.
• Bluetooth® Handsfree refers to a
device which allows the user to conveniently make phone calls with
Bluetooth® mobile phones through
the AV/Navigation system.
• Bluetooth® Handsfree may not be
supported in some mobile phones.
To learn more about mobile device
compatibility, visit www.kia.com.
Precautions for Safe Driving
• Bluetooth® Handsfree is a feature
that enables drivers to practice safe
driving. Connecting the head unit
with a Bluetooth® phone allows the
user to conveniently make and
receive calls and use contacts.
Before using Bluetooth®, carefully
read the contents of this user’s
manual.
• Excessive use or operations while
driving may lead to negligent driving practices and result in accidents. Refrain from excessive operations while driving.
• Viewing the screen for prolonged
periods of time is dangerous and
may lead to accidents. When driving, view the screen only for short
periods of time.
4 171
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:42 PM
Page 172
Features of your vehicle
When connecting a Bluetooth®
Phone
• Before connecting the head unit
with the mobile phone, check to
see that the mobile phone supports Bluetooth® features.
• Even if the phone supports
Bluetooth®, the phone will not be
found during device searches if
the phone has been set to hidden
state or the Bluetooth® power is
turned off. Disable the hidden
state or turn on the Bluetooth®
power prior to searching/connecting with the Head unit.
• Bluetooth phone is automatically
connected when the ignition on.
• If you do not want automatic connection with your Bluetooth®
device, turn off the Bluetooth®
feature within your mobile phone.
• The Handsfree call volume and
quality may differ depending on
the mobile phone.
4 172
• Park the vehicle when connecting
the head unit with the mobile
phone.
• Bluetooth®
connection
may
become intermittently disconnected in some mobile phones.
Follow these steps to try again.
1. Within the mobile phone, turn
the Bluetooth® function off/on
and try again.
2. Turn the mobile phone power
Off/On and try again.
3. Completely remove the mobile
phone battery, reboot, and then
again.
4. Reboot the Audio Video
Navigation System and try
again.
5. Delete all paired devices, pair
and try again.
• Handsfree call quality and volume
may differ depending on the
model of your mobile phone.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:42 PM
Page 173
Features of your vehicle
Voice Recognition
• When using the voice recognition
feature, only commands listed within the user's manual are supported.
• Be aware that during the operation
of the voice recognition system,
pressing any key other than the
key terminate voice recognition
mode.
• For superior voice recognition performance, position the microphone
used for voice recognition above
the head of the driver’s seat and
maintain a proper position when
saying commands.
• Within the following situations,
voice recognition may not function
properly due to external sound.
- When the windows and sunroof
are open
- When the wind of the cooling /
heating device is strong
- When entering and passing
through tunnels
(Continued)
(Continued)
- When driving on rugged and
uneven roads
- During severe rain (heavy rains,
windstorms)
• Phone related voice commands can
be used only when a Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device is connected.
• When making calls by stating a
name, the corresponding contact
must be downloaded and stored
within the audio system.
• After downloading the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology phone book, it
takes some times to convert the
phone book data into voice information. During this time, voice
recognition may not properly operate.
• Pronounce the voice commands
naturally and clearly as if in a normal conversation.
4 173
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:42 PM
Features of your vehicle
■ CD
4 174
Player : AM1A0IXAN, AM1A0IXKN
Page 174
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:42 PM
Page 175
Features of your vehicle
SYSTEM CONTROLLERS
AND FUNCTIONS
❈ Display and settings may differ
depending on the selected audio.
Audio Head Unit
(1)
(EJECT)
Ejects the disc.
(2) RADIO
Changes to FM/AM/SIRIUS mode.
Each time the key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of FM1 ➟
FM2 ➟ AM ➟ SAT1 ➟ SAT2 ➟ SAT3.
❈ In Setup>Display, the radio pop up
screen will be displayed when
[Mode Pop up] is turned On .
When the pop up screen is displayed, use the
TUNE knob or
keys 1 ~ 6 to select the
desired mode.
(3) MEDIA
Changes to CD, USB(iPod), AUX, My
Music, BT Audio mode.
Each time the key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of CD,
USB(iPod), AUX, My Music, BT Audio.
❈ In Setup>Display, the media pop
up screen will be displayed when
[Mode Pop up] is turned On .
When the pop up screen is displayed, use the
TUNE knob or
keys 1 ~ 5 to select the
desired mode.
(4) PHONE
Operates Phone Screen
❈ When a phone is not connected,
the connection screen is displayed.
(5) PWR/VOL knob
Power : Turns power On/Off by
pressing the knob
Volume : Sets volume by turning
the knob left/right
SEEK
(6) TRACK
Radio Mode : Automatically searches for broadcast frequencies.
CD, USB, iPod, My Music modes
- Shortly press the key (under 0.8 seconds): Moves to next or previous song
(file)
- Press and hold the key (over 0.8 seconds): Rewinds or fast-forwards the
current song.
BT Audio mode : Moves to next or
previous song(file)
❈ The Play/Pause feature may operate differently depending on the
mobile phone.
4 175
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:42 PM
Page 176
Features of your vehicle
(7) DISP
Each time the button is shortly
pressed (under 0.8 seconds), it sets
the screen Off ➟ Screen On ➟
Screen Off
❈ Audio operation is maintained and
only the screen will be turned Off.
In the screen Off state, press any
key to turn the screen On again.
(8) SCAN
Radio Mode
- Shortly press the key : Previews
each broadcast for 5 seconds
each.
- Press and hold the key (over 0.8
seconds): Previews the broadcasts
saved in Preset 1 ~ 6 for 5
seconds each.
❈ Press the SCAN key again to
continue listening to the current
frequency.
❈ SAT Radio does not support the
Preset scan feature.
CD, USB, My Music mode
- Shortly press the key (under 0.8
seconds): Previews each song
(file) for 10 seconds each.
❈ Press the SCAN key again to
continue listening to the current
song (file).
(9) SETUP
Moves to the Display, Sound, Phone,
System setting modes.
4 176
(10) MENU
Displays menus for the current mode.
(11) TUNE knob
Radio mode : Changes frequency by
turning the knob left/right.
CD, USB, iPod, My Music mode:
Searches songs (files) by turning the
knob left/right.
❈ When the desired song is displayed, press the knob to play the
song.
Moves focus in all selection menus
and selects menus.
CAT
(12) FOLDER
Radio Mode
- SIRIUS RADIO : Category Search
MP3, CD, USB mode : Folder Search
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:42 PM
Page 177
Features of your vehicle
(13) 1 ~ 6 (Preset)
Radio Mode: Saves frequencies
(channels) or receives saved frequencies (channels)
CD, USB, iPod, My Music mode
- 1 : Repeat
- 2 : Random
In the Radio, Media, Setup, and
Menu pop up screen, the number
menu is selected.
4 177
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:42 PM
Page 178
Features of your vehicle
SETUP
Mode Pop up
Display Settings
[Mode Pop up] Changes On / Off
selection mode
• During On state, press the RADIO
or MEDIA key to display the mode
change pop up screen.
Press the SETUP key Select [Display]
through
TUNE knob or 1 key
Select menu through
TUNE knob
Text Scroll
[Text Scroll] Set On / Off
• On : Maintains scroll
• Off : Scrolls only one (1) time.
Media Display
When playing an MP3 file, select the
desired display info from ‘Folder/File’
or ‘Album/Artist/Song’.
4 178
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:42 PM
Page 179
Features of your vehicle
SOUND SETTINGS
Press the SETUP key Select [Sound]
through
TUNE knob or 2 key
Select menu through
TUNE knob
Sound Settings
This menu allows you to set the ‘Bass,
Middle, Treble’ and the Sound Fader and
Balance.
Select [Sound Settings] Select
menu through
TUNE knob Turn
TUNE knob left/right to set
• Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects the
sound tone.
• Fader, Balance : Moves the sound
fader and balance.
• Default : Restores default settings.
❈ Back : While adjusting values,
pressing the
TUNE knob will
restore the parent menu.
Speed Dependent Volume Control
This feature is used to automatically
control the volume level according to
the speed of the vehicle.
Select [Speed Dependent Vol.] Set
in 4 levels [Off/Low/Mid/High] of
TUNE knob
Voice Recognition Volume
Adjusts voice recognition volume.
Select [Voice Recognition Vol.] Set
volume of
TUNE knob
4 179
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:42 PM
Page 180
Features of your vehicle
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Memory Information
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[System] through tune knob or 4
key Select menu through
TUNE
knob
Displays currently used memory and
total system memory.
Select [Memory Information] OK
The currently used memory is displayed on the left side while the total
system memory is displayed on the
right side.
• Off : This mode is for expert users
and omits some information during
voice command operation. (When
using Expert mode, guidance
instructions can be heard through
the [Help] or [Menu] commands.
Language
This menu is used to set the display
and voice recognition language.
Select [Language]
Set through
TUNE knob
Prompt Feedback
This feature is used to change voice
command feedback between Normal
and Expert modes.
Select [Prompt Feedback] Set
through
TUNE knob
• On : This mode is for beginner
users and provides detailed instructions during voice command operation.
4 180
❈ The system will reboot after the
language is changed.
❈ Language support by region
- English, Francais, Espanol
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:42 PM
Page 181
Features of your vehicle
RADIO : FM, AM OR SIRIUS
Adjust Volume
SCAN
Changing RADIO mode (FM, AM
or SIRIUS)
Turn the
VOL knob left/right to
adjust the volume.
Press the SCAN key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): The broadcast frequency
increases and previews each
broadcast for 5 seconds each. After
scanning all frequencies, returns
and plays the current broadcast frequency.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Previews the broadcasts saved in Preset 1 ~ 6
for 5 seconds each.
SEEK
Press the RADIO key to change the
mode in order of FM1➟FM2➟
AM➟SAT1➟SAT2➟SAT3.
• When the power is off, press the
RADIO key to turn on the audio
system and receive radio broadcasts.
• [Mode Pop up] On state : Displays
the change radio mode pop up
screen. While the pop up screen is
displayed, you can change the
radio mode (FM1 ➟ FM2 ➟ AM ➟
SAT1 ➟ SAT2 ➟ SAT3) through the
tune knob or 1 ~ 6 keys.
SEEK
Press the TRACK
key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Automatically searches
for the next station.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): While holding the key
, frequency changes without stopping. When the key is released,
automatically searches for the next
frequency from that point.
Preset SEEK
Press the 1 ~ 6 key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Plays the frequency
saved in the corresponding key.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Pressing and holding
the desired key from 1 ~ 6
will save the currently playing
broadcast to the selected key and
sound a BEEP.
Selecting through manual
search
Turn the
TUNE knob left/right to
adjust the frequency.
• FM : Changes by 200KHz
• AM : Changes by 10KHz
4 181
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
Features of your vehicle
MENU
Within MENU key are the A.Store
(Auto Store) and Info functions.
A.Store
Press the MENU key Set [A.Store]
through
TUNE knob or 1 key.
Saves broadcasts with superior
reception to 1 ~ 6 keys. If no
frequencies are received, then the
most recently received frequency will
be broadcast.
4 182
3:42 PM
Page 182
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:42 PM
Page 183
Features of your vehicle
SIRIUS Satellite Radio information
Satellite Radio channels:
SIRIUS Satellite Radio has over 130
channels, including 69 channels of
100% commercial-free music, plus
sports, news, talk and entertainment
available nationwide in your vehicle.
For more information and a complete
list of SIRIUS Satellite Radio channels, visit sirius.com in the United
States, sirius-canada.ca in Canada,
or call SIRIUS at 1-888-539-7474.
Satellite Radio reception factors:
To receive the satellite signal, your
vehicle has been equipped with a
satellite radio antenna located on the
roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof
provides the best location for an
unobstructed, open view of the sky, a
requirement of a satellite radio system. Like AM/FM, there are several
factors that can affect satellite radio
reception performance:
• Antenna obstructions: For optimal
reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice
build-up and keep luggage and
other material as far away from the
antenna as possible.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway over-
passes, parking garages, dense
tree foliage and thunderstorms can
interfere with your reception.
SIRIUS Satellite Radio service:
SIRIUS Satellite Radio is a subscription-based satellite radio service that
broadcasts music, sports, news and
entertainment programming to radio
receivers, which are available for installation in motor vehicles or factory
installed, as well as for the home,
portable and wireless devices, and
through an Internet connection on personal computer.
Vehicles that are equipped with a
factory installed SIRIUS Satellite
Radio system include:
• Hardware and an introductory trial
subscription term, which begins on
the date of sale or lease of the
vehicle.
• For a small upgrade fee, access to
SIRIUS music channels, and other
select channels over the Internet
using any computer connected to
the Internet (U.S. customers only).
For information on extended subscription terms, contact SIRIUS at
1-888-539-7474.
NOTE:
Satellite Radio requires SIRIUS®
compatible receiver and a subscription service fee after trial
period.
Vehicles without a factory-installed
radio receiver require hardware
purchase and installation. Please
see your dealer for further details.
All fees and programming subject
to change.
Subscriptions governed by the
SIRIUS Terms & Conditions available at www.sirius.com / service
terms.
Available only in the 48 contiguous
United States and the District of
Columbia. Service available in
Canada; see www.siriuscanada.ca
KIA shall not be responsible for
any such programming changes.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial
Number (ESN): This 12-digit
Satellite Serial Number is needed to
re-activate, modify or track your
satellite radio account. You will need
this number when communicating
with SIRIUS.
4 183
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:42 PM
Page 184
Features of your vehicle
SIRIUS RADIO
Using SIRIUS Satellite Radio
Your Kia vehicle is equipped with a 3
month complimentary period of SIRIUS Satellite Radio so you have
access to over 130 channels of
music, information, and entertainment programming.
Activation
In order to extend or reactivate your
subscription to SIRIUS Satellite
Radio, you will need to contact SIRIUS Customer Care at 1-888-5397474. Have your 12 digit SID (Sirius
Identification Number) / ESN
(Electronic Serial Number) ready. To
retrieve the SID / ESN, turn on the
radio, press the [RADIO] button, and
tune to channel zero.
4 184
Please note that the vehicle will need
to be turned on, in Sirius mode, and
have an unobstructed view of the sky
in order for the radio to receive the
activation signal.
SEEK
Press the RADIO key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): select previous or next
channel.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): continuously move to
previous or next channel.
❈ If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the
current category.
SCAN
Press the RADIO key SCAN
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Previews each broadcast for 5 seconds each
❈ Press the SCAN key again to
continue listening to the current
frequency
❈ If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the
current category.
Category
CAT
Press the FOLDER
key Set through
the
TUNE knob
• The display will indicate the category
menus, highlight the category that
the current channel belongs to.
• In the Category List Mode, press the
CAT
key to navigate category
FOLDER
list.
• Press the tune knob to select the lowest channel in the highlighted category.
❈ If channel is selected by selecting
category, then the “CATEGORY”
icon is displayed at the top of the
screen.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:42 PM
Page 185
Features of your vehicle
Preset
Tune
1
Press the RADIO key
~ 6
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Plays the frequency
saved in the corresponding key.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Pressing and holding
the desired key from 1 ~ 6
will save the current broadcast to
the selected key and sound a
BEEP.
• Rotate
TUNE knob : Changes
the channel number or scrolls category list.
• Press
TUNE knob : Selects the
menu.
✽ Troubleshooting
1. Antenna Error
If this message is displayed, the
antenna or antenna cable is broken or unplugged. Please consult
with your Kia dealership.
2. Acquiring Signal
If this message is displayed, it
means that the antenna is covered
and that the SIRIUS Satellite
Radio signal is not available.
Ensure the antenna is uncovered
and has a clear view of the sky.
Menu
Select category menu through the
TUNE knob Press the MENU
key Select [ Info] through the
TUNE knob or 1 key
Info (Information)
Displays the Artist/Song info of the
current song.
4 185
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:42 PM
Page 186
Features of your vehicle
BASIC METHOD OF USE :
Audio CD / MP3 CD / USB /
iPod / My Music
Press the MEDIA key to change the
mod mode in order of CD ➟
USB(iPod) ➟ AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BT
Audio.
The folder/file name is displayed on
the screen.
Repeat
<USB>
<My Music>
<Audio CD>
<CD MP3>
4 186
❈ The CD is automatically played
when a CD is inserted.
❈ The USB music is automatically
played when a USB is connected.
While song (file) is playing 1 RPT
(RPT) key
Audio CD, MP3 CD, USB, iPod, My
Music mode: RPT on screen
• To repeat one song (press the key)
: Repeats the current song.
MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RPT on
screen
• To repeat folder (pressing twice):
repeats all files within the current
folder.
❈ Press the 1 RPT key again to turn
off repeat.
Random
While song (file) is playing 2 RDM
(RDM) key
Audio CD, My Music mode: RDM on
screen
• Random (press the key) : Plays all
songs in random order.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:42 PM
Page 187
Features of your vehicle
MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RDM on
screen
• Folder Random (press the key) :
Plays all files within the current folder in random order.
iPod mode: ALL RDM on screen
• All Random (press the key) : Plays
all files in random order.
MP3 CD, USB : ALL RDM on screen
• All Random (pressing twice): Plays
all files in random order.
❈ Press the 2 RDM key again to turn
off repeat.
Changing Song/File
While
song (file) is playing
key
• Shortly pressing the key : Plays the
current song from the beginning.
SEEK
❈ If the
key is pressed
TRACK
again within 2 second, the previous song is played.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Rewinds the song.
SEEK
TRACK
While
song (file) is playing
key
• Shortly pressing the key : Plays the
next song.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Fast forwards the
song.
SEEK
TRACK
Scan
While song (file) is playing SCAN
key
• Shortly pressing the key : Scans all
songs from the next song for 10
seconds each.
❈ Press the SCAN key again to turn
off.
❈ The SCAN function is not supported in iPod mode.
Folder Search : MP3 CD, USB
Mode
CAT
While file is playing
FOLDER
(Folder Up) key
• Searches the next folder.
CAT
While file is playing
FOLDER
(Folder Down) key
• Searches the parent folder.
❈ If a folder is selected by pressing
the
TUNE knob, the first file
within the selected folder will be
played.
❈ In iPod mode, moves to the Parent
Folder.
Searching Songs (File)
• Turning
TUNE knob : Searches
for songs (files)
• Pressing
TUNE knob : Plays
selected song (file).
4 187
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:42 PM
Page 188
Features of your vehicle
MENU : Audio CD
Press the CD MP3 mode
to set the Repeat,
Information features.
key
Random,
MENU
Information
MENU : MP3 CD / USB
Press the MENU key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE knob or 3
key to display information of the current song.
❈ Press the MENU key to turn off
info display.
Press the CD MP3 mode MENU key
to set the Repeat, Folder Random,
Folder Repeat, All Random,
Information, and Copy features.
Repeat
Press the MENU key Set [ RPT]
through the
TUNE knob or 1 RPT
key to repeat the current song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn off.
Random
Press the MENU key Set [ RDM]
through the
TUNE knob or 2 RDM
key to randomly play songs within
the current folder.
❈ Press RDM again to turn off.
4 188
Repeat
Press the MENU key Set [ RPT]
through the
TUNE knob or 1 RPT
key to repeat the current song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn off.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:42 PM
Page 189
Features of your vehicle
Folder Random
Press the MENU key Set [ F.RDM]
through the
TUNE knob or 2 RDM
key to randomly play songs within the
current folder.
❈ Press F.RDM again to turn off.
Folder Repeat
Press the MENU key Set [ F.RPT]
through the
TUNE knob or 3
key to repeat songs within the current folder.
❈ Press F.RPT again to turn off.
All Random
Press the MENU key Set [ A.RDM]
through the TUNE knob or 4 key
to randomly play all songs within the
CD.
❈ Press A.RDM again to turn off.
Information
Press the MENU key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE knob or 5
key to display information of the current song.
❈ Press the MENU key to turn off
info display.
Copy
Press the MENU key Set [
Copy] through the TUNE knob
or 6 key.
This is used to copy the current
song into My Music. You can play
the copied Music in My Music
mode.
❈ If another key is pressed while
copying is in progress, a pop up
asking you whether to cancel
copying is displayed.
❈ If another media is connected or
inserted (USB, CD, iPod, AUX)
while copying is in progress, copying is canceled.
❈ Music will not be played while
copying is in progress.
MENU : iPod
In iPod mode, press the MENU key to
set the Repeat, Album Random, All
Random, Information and Search features.
Repeat
Press the MENU key Set [ RPT]
through the
TUNE knob or 1 RPT
key to repeat the current song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat off.
All Random
Press the MENU key Set [ RDM]
through the
TUNE knob or 2
key.
Plays all songs within the currently
playing category in random order.
❈ Press RDM again to turn off.
4 189
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
Features of your vehicle
Information
Press the MENU key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE knob or 3
key.
Displays information of the current
song.
❈ Press the MENU key to turn off
info display.
Search
Press the MENU key Set [ Search]
through the
TUNE knob or 4
key.
Displays iPod category list.
❈ Searching iPod category is MENU
key pressed, move to parent category.
4 190
3:42 PM
Page 190
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:42 PM
Page 191
Features of your vehicle
MENU : My Music Mode
Information
In My Music mode, press the MENU
key to set the Repeat, Random,
Information, Delete, Delete All, and
Delete Selection features.
Press the MENU key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE knob or 3
key.
Displays information of the current
song.
❈ Press the MENU key to turn off
info display.
Delete
Repeat
Press the MENU key Set [ RPT]
through the
TUNE knob or 1 RPT
key.
Repeats the currently playing song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat
off.
Press the MENU key Set [ Delete]
through the
TUNE knob or 4
key.
Deletes currently playing file
In the play screen, pressing delete
will delete the currently playing song.
Deletes file from list
➀ Select the file you wish to delete
by using the
TUNE knob.
➁ Press the MENU key and select
the delete menu to delete the
selected file.
Delete All
Press the MENU key Set [ Del.All]
through the TUNE knob or 5 key.
Deletes all songs of My Music.
Delete Selection
Press the MENU key Set [
through the
TUNE knob
key.
Songs within My Music are
and deleted.
➀ Select the songs you
delete from the list.
Del.Sel]
or 6
selected
wish to
Random
Press the MENU key Set [ RDM]
through the
TUNE knob or 2 RDM
key.
Plays all songs in random order.
❈ Press RDM again to turn random off.
4 191
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:42 PM
Page 192
Features of your vehicle
➁ After selecting, press MENU key
and select the delete menu.
AUX
AUX is used to play external MEDIA
currently connected with the AUX
terminal.
AUX mode will automatically start
when an external device is connected with the AUX terminal.
If an external device is connected,
you can also press the MEDIA key to
change to AUX mode.
My Music
• Even if memory is available, a
maximum of 6,000 songs can be
stored.
• The same song can be copied up
to 1,000 times.
• Memory info can be checked in the
System menu of Setup.
❈ AUX mode cannot be started
unless there is an external device
connected to the AUX terminal.
AUX
Fully insert the AUX cable into the
AUX terminal for use.
4 192
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:42 PM
Page 193
Features of your vehicle
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
AUDIO
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
audio can be used only when the
[Audio Streaming] of Phone is
turned On .
What is Bluetooth Wireless
Technology?
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology is a
wireless technology that allows multiple devices to be connected in a
short range, low-powered devices
like hands-free, stereo headset, wireless remote controller, etc. For more
information, visit the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology website at
www.Bluetooth.com
❈ Setting
Wireless Technology
Audio Streaming : Press the SETUP
key Select [Phone] through the tune
3
knob or
key Select [Audio
Streaming] through the
TUNE
knob Set On / Off
®
Before using Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology audio features
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
audio may not be supported
depending on the compatibility of
your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
mobile phone.
• In order to use Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology audio, you must first
pair and connect the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology mobile phone.
Bluetooth®
Using the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology audio features
• Play / Stop
Press the
TUNE knob to play and
pause the current song.
Starting Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Audio
• Press the MEDIA key to change the
mode
in
order
of
CD➟USB➟AUX➟My Music➟BT
Audio.
• If BT Audio is selected, Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology audio will start
playing.
❈ Audio may not automatically start
playing in some mobile phones.
• Previous / Next song
SEEK
SEEK
Press TRACK
or TRACK
to play
previous or next song.
❈ The previous song / next song /
play / pause functions may not be
supported in some mobile phones.
4 193
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:43 PM
Page 194
Features of your vehicle
PHONE
Making a call using the
Steering remote controller
• Check call history and making call
➀ Shortly press (under 0.8 seconds)
the
key on the steering
remote controller.
➁ The call history list will be displayed on the screen.
➂ Press the
key again to connect a call to the selected number.
• Redialing the most recently called
number
➀ Press and hold (over 0.8 seconds)
the
key on the steering
remote controller.
➁ The most recently called number
is redialed.
(1) VOLUME button : Raises or lowers speaker volume.
(2) MUTE button : Mute the microphone during a call.
(3)
button : Activates voice recognition.
(4)
button : Places and transfers
calls.
(5)
button : Ends calls or cancels
functions.
4 194
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:43 PM
Page 195
Features of your vehicle
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Pairing a Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology wireless technology Device
What is Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Pairing?
Pairing refers to the process of synchronizing your Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology phone or device with the
car audio system for connection.
Pairing is necessary to connect and
use the Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology feature.
Pairing PHONE Key /
Key
on the Steering Remote
Controller
When No Devices have been
Paired
1. Press the PHONE key or the
key on the steering remote controller. The following screen is displayed.
2. Select [OK] button to enter the
Pair Phone screen.
1) Car Name : Name of device as
shown when searching from your
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device
2) Passkey : Passkey used to pair
the device
3. From your Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device (i.e. Mobile
Phone), search and select your
car audio system.
4. After a few moments, a screen is
displayed where the passkey is
entered.
Here, enter the
passkey “0000” to pair your
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device with the car audio system.
5. Once pairing is complete, the following screen is displayed.
4 195
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:43 PM
Page 196
Features of your vehicle
Pairing through [PHONE]
Setup
Press the SETUP key
Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
Select TUNE knob
• If Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
devices are paired but none are
currently connected, pressing the
PHONE key or the
key on the
steering remote controller displays
the following screen. Select [Pair]
button to pair a new device or
select [Connect] to connect a previously pair device.
4 196
1. The following steps are the same
as the steps described in the
“When No Devices have been
Paired” section.
• Bluetooth® features supported within the vehicle are as follows. Some
features may not be supported
depending on your Bluetooth®
device.
-O u t g o i n g / I n c o m i n g
Handsfreecalls
- Operations during a call (Switch
to Private, Switch to call waiting,
MIC on/off)
- Downloading Call History
- Downloading Mobile Contacts
- Bluetooth® device auto connection
- Bluetooth Audio Streaming
• Up to five Bluetooth® devices can be
paired to the Car Handsfreesystem.
• Only one Bluetooth® device can be
connected at a time.
• Other devices cannot be paired
while a Bluetooth® device is connected.
• Only Bluetooth® Handsfreeand
Bluetooth audio related features
are supported.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:43 PM
Page 197
Features of your vehicle
• Normal operations are possible
only within devices that support
Handsfree or audio features, such
as a Bluetooth® mobile phone or a
Bluetooth audio device.
• If a connected Bluetooth® device
becomes disconnected due to
being out of communication range,
turning the device OFF, or a
Bluetooth® communication error,
corresponding Bluetooth® devices
are automatically searched and
connected.
• the system becomes unstable due
to communication errors between
the car Handsfreeand the Bluetooth®
device, reset the Bluetooth® and try
again. Upon resetting Bluetooth®, the
system is restored to its factory
release state.
• After Pairing is complete, a contacts download request is sent
once to the mobile phone. As some
mobile phones may require confirmation upon receiving a download
request, check the mobile phone
screen.
Connecting a Device
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to connect and
select [Connect].
1) Connected Phone : Device that is
currently connected
2) Paired Phone : Device that is
paired but not connected
4 197
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:43 PM
Page 198
Features of your vehicle
Changing Priority
What is Priority?
It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
devices with the car audio system.
As a result, the “Change Priority’ feature is used to set the connection priority of paired phones.
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
4 198
From the paired phone list, select
the phone you want to change to the
highest priority, then select [Change
Priority] button from the Menu. The
selected device will be changed to
the highest priority.
• Priority icon will be displayed
whenset a priority phone
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:43 PM
Page 199
Features of your vehicle
Disconnecting a Device
Deleting a Device
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select the
currently connected device and
select [Disconnect] button.
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to delete and select
[Delete] button.
• When deleting the currently connected device, the device will automatically be disconnected to proceed with the deleting process.
• If a paired Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device is deleted, the
device’s call history and contacts
data will also be deleted.
• To re-use a deleted device, you
must pair the device again.
4 199
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:43 PM
Page 200
Features of your vehicle
USING Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology
Phone Menu Screen
Phone Menus
With a Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology device connected, press
the PHONE key to display the Phone
menu screen.
1) Favorite : Up to 20 frequently used
contact saved so help your fast
call.
2) Call History : Displays the call history list screen
3) Contacts : Displays the Contacts
list screen
4) Setup : Displays Phone related
settings.
4 200
• If you select the [Call History] button but there is no call history data,
a prompt is displayed which asks to
download call history data.
• If you select the [Contacts] button
but there is no contacs data, a
prompt is displayed which asks to
download contacts data.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones. For more
information on download support,
refer to your mobile phone user’s
manual.
Answering Calls
Answering a Call
Answering a call with a Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device connected will display the following screen.
To accept the call, press
key on
the steering wheel during call is
incoming.
1) Caller : Displays the other part’s
name when the incoming caller is
saved within your contacts
2) Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:43 PM
Page 201
Features of your vehicle
• When the incoming call pop-up is
displayed, most Audio and SETUP
mode features will not operate.
Only the call volume can be operated.
• The telephone number may not be
properly displayed in some mobile
phones.
• When a call is answered with the
mobile phone, the call mode will
automatically convert to Private
mode.
Favorites
Press the
[Favorites]
Call History
PHONE
key
Select
1) Saved favorite contact : Connects
call upon selection
2) To add favorite : Downloaded contacts are saved as favorite.
• In order to save Favorite, contacts
should be downloaded.
• Contact which saved in Favorite not
changed automatically although the
information changed in the mobile
phone. In this case, delete it and
save new information.
Press the
History]
PHONE
key
Select [Call
A list of incoming, outgoing and
missed calls is displayed.
• The call history may not be saved
in the call history list in some
mobile phones.
• Calls received with hidden caller ID
will not become saved in the call
history list.
• Calling through the call history is
not possible when there is no call
history or the Bluetooth® phone has
not been connected.
• Up to 20 received, dialed and
missed calls are each saved.
4 201
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:43 PM
Page 202
Features of your vehicle
• Time of received/dialed calls and
call time information are not saved.
Contacts
Press the
[Contacts]
PHONE
key Select
The list of saved phone book entries
is displayed.
4 202
• Up to 1,000 contacts saved in your
Bluetooth® phone can be downloaded into the car contacts.
Contacts that have been downloaded to the car cannot be edited
or deleted on the phone.
• Mobile phone contacts are managed separately for each paired
Bluetooth® device(max 1 devices x
5,000 contacts each). Previously
downloaded data is maintained
even if the Bluetooth® device has
been disconnected. (However, the
contacts and call history saved to
the phone will be deleted if a paired
phone is deleted.)
• It is possible to download contacts
even during Bluetooth streaming
audio.
• When downloading contacts, the
icon will be displayed within the status bar.
• It is not possible to commence
download when the contacts download feature has been turned off
within the Bluetooth® device. In
addition, some devices may require
device authorization upon attempting to download contacts. If downloading does not normally occur,
check the Bluetooth® device settings or the screen state.
• The download feature may not be
supported in some mobile phones.
Check to see that the Bluetooth®
device supports the download feature. For more information of supported Bluetooth® devices and
function support, visit.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:43 PM
Page 203
Features of your vehicle
Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Setting
Viewing Paired Phone List
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
Pairing a New Device
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
devices can be paired with the audio
system.
For more information, refer to the
“Pairing through Phone Setup” section within Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology.
1) Connect/Disconnect Phone :
Connect/ disconnects currently
selected phone
2) Change Priority : Sets currently
selected phone to highest connection priority
3) Delete : Deletes the currently
selected phone
4) Return : Moves to the previous
screen
This feature is used to view mobile
phones that have been paired with
the audio system. Upon selecting a
paired phone, the setup menu is displayed.
For more information, refer to the
“Setting Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology Connection” section within Bluetooth® Wireless Technology.
4 203
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:43 PM
Page 204
Features of your vehicle
• Only contacts within connected
phones can be downloaded. Also
check to see that your mobile
phone supports the download feature.
• To learn more about whether your
mobile phone supports contacts
downloads, refer to your mobile
phone user’s manual.
• The contacts for only the connected
phone can be downloaded. Before
downloading, check to see whether
your phone supports the download
feature.
Downloading Contacts
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Contacts Download]
Auto Download (Contacts)
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Auto Download]
The contacts is downloaded from the
mobile phone and the download
progress is displayed.
This feature is used to automatically
download mobile contacts entries
once
a
Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology phone is connected.
• Upon downloading phone contacts,
the previous corresponding data is
deleted.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones.
• Voice Recognition may not operate
for several moments while contacts
are being downloaded.
4 204
• The Auto Download feature will
download mobile contacts entries
every time the phone is connected.
The download time may differ
depending on the number of saved
contacts entries and the communication state.
• Before downloading contacts, first
check to see that your mobile
phone supports the contacts
download feature.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:43 PM
Page 205
Features of your vehicle
Audio Streaming
Press the SETUP key Select
[Phone] Select [Audio Streaming]
Outgoing Volume
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume]
When Audio Streaming is turned on,
you can play music files saved in your
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
device from the car.
Use
TUNE know to adjust the outgoing volume level.
Turning Bluetooth System Off
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Bluetooth System
Off]
Once
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology is turned off, Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology related features
will not be supported within the audio
system.
• Even while on a call, the volume
can be changed by using the
SEEK
TRACK key.
Wireless
• To turn Bluetooth®
Technology back on, go to SETUP
[Phone] and select “Yes”.
4 205
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:43 PM
Page 206
Features of your vehicle
VOICE RECOGNITION
Using Voice Recognition
Starting Voice Recognition
Shortly press the
key on the
steering remote controller. Say a
command
If prompt feedback is in [ON], then
the system will say “Please say a
command after the beep (BEEP)”
• If prompt feedback is in [OFF], then
the system will only say “(BEEP)”
• To change Prompt Feedback
[On]/[Off], go to SETUP [System]
[Prompt Feedback]
• For proper recognition, say the
command after the voice instruction and beep tone.
4 206
Skipping Prompt Messages
While prompt message is being stated Shortly press the
key on the
steering remote controller (under 0.8
seconds)
The prompt message is immediately
ended and the beep tone will sound.
After the “beep”, say the voice command.
Re-starting Voice Recognition
While system waits for a command
Shortly press the
key on the
steering remote controller (under 0.8
seconds)
The command wait state is immediately ended and the beep ton will
sound. After the “beep”, say the voice
command.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:43 PM
Page 207
Features of your vehicle
ENDING VOICE
RECOGNITION
While Voice Recognition is operating
Press and hold the
key on the
steering remote controller (over 0.8
seconds)
• While using voice command, pressing any steering wheel control or a
different key will end voice command.
• In a state where the system is waiting for a voice command, say “cancel” or “end” to end voice command.
• In a state where the system is waiting for a voice command, press and
hold the
key on the steering
remote controller to end voice command.
4 207
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:43 PM
Page 208
Features of your vehicle
Illustration on using voice commands
• End voice command.
Shortly pressing the
• Starting voice command.
Shortly pressing the
key (under 0.8 seconds):
Please say a command after
the beep (BEEP)
key (under 0.8 seconds):
(BEEP)
Contacts
Beep~
More Help
Contacts.
Please say the name of the contact you want
to call.
More Help.
You can say Radio, FM, AM, SIRIUS, Media, CD,
USB, Aux, My Music, iPod, Bluetooth Audio, Phone,
Call History or Contacts. Please say a command.
Cancel
Beep Beep.. (end beep)
• Skipping Voice Recognition
Shortly pressing the
key (under 0.8 seconds):
Please say a...
while guidance message is being stated
Shortly pressing the
key (under 0.8 seconds)
(BEEP)
More Help
More Help.
You can say Radio, FM, AM, SIRIUS, Media, CD,
USB, Aux, My Music, iPod, Bluetooth Audio, Phone,
Call History or Contacts. Please say a command.
4 208
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:43 PM
Page 209
Features of your vehicle
Voice Command List
• Common Commands: These are commands that can be used in all situations. (However, some commands may not
be supported in special circumstances.)
Command
More Help
Help
Call<Name>
Phone
Favorites
Call History
Contacts
(Call by Name)
Dial Number
Redial
Function
Provides guidance on commands that can be
used anywhere in the system.
Provides guidance on commands that can be
used within the current mode.
Calls <Name> saved in Contacts
Ex) Call “John”
Provides guidance on Phone related commands. After saying this command, say
“Favorites”,“Call History”, “Contacts” or ”Dial
Number” execute corresponding functions.
Display the Favorite screen.
Displays the Call History screen.
Displays the Contacts screen. After saying
this command, say the name of a contact
saved in the Contacts to automatically connect the call.
Display the Dial number screen. After saying
this command, you can say the number what
you want to call.
Connects the most recently called number.
Command
Function
• When listening to the radio, displays the next
radio screen. (FM1➟FM2➟AM➟SAT1➟
SAT2➟SAT3➟FM1)
Radio
• When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played radio screen.
• When currently listening to the FM radio,
maintains the current state.
• When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played FM screen.
FM1(FM One)
Displays the FM1 screen.
FM2(FM Two)
Displays the FM2 screen.
AM
Displays the AM screen.
FM Preset 1~6
Plays the most recently played broadcast
saved in FM Preset 1~6.
AM Preset 1~6
Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.
FM 87.5~107.9
Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
AM 530~1710
Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
SIRIUS (Satellite) • When currently listening to the SIRIUS,
maintains the current state.
• When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played SIRIUS screen.
4 209
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:43 PM
Page 210
Features of your vehicle
Command
SIRIUS (Satellite)
1~3
Function
Displays the selected SIRIUS screen.
SIRIUS Channel Plays the selected SIRIUS channel.
0~223
Media
CD
USB
iPod
4 210
Moves to the most recently played media
screen.
Plays the music saved in the CD.
Plays USB music.
Plays iPod music.
Command
My Music
AUX (Auxiliary)
Bluetooth Audio
Please repeat
Cancel (Exit)
Function
Plays the music saved in My Music.
Plays the connected external device.
Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth®
device.
Repeats the most recent comment.
Ends voice command.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:43 PM
Page 211
Features of your vehicle
• FM/AM radio commands: Commands that can be
used while listening to FM, AM radio.
Command
Preset 1~6
Auto Store
Seek up
Seek down
Scan
Preset Scan
Information
Function
Plays the broadcast station saved in Preset 1~6.
Automatically selects radio broadcast frequencies with superior reception and saves in
Presets 1~6.
Plays the next receivable broadcast.
Plays the previous receivable broadcast.
Scans receivable frequencies from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Moves to the next preset from the current
present and plays for 10 seconds each.
Displays the information of the current broadcast.(This feature can be used when receiving
RBDS broadcasts.)
• Satellite radio commands: Commands that can be
used while listening to Satellite Radio.
Command
Scan
Preset 1~6
Information
Function
Scans receivable channels from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Displays the information of the current broadcast.
4 211
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:43 PM
Page 212
Features of your vehicle
• Audio CD commands: Commands that can be used
while listening to Audio CD.
Command
Random
Random Off
Repeat
Repeat Off
Scan
Track 1~30
Information
Function
Randomly plays the tracks within the CD.
Cancels random play to play tracks in sequential order.
Repeats the current track.
Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequential order.
Scans the tracks from the next track for 10
seconds each.
Plays the desired track number.
Displays the information screen of the current
track.
• MP3 CD / USB commands: Commands that can be
used while listening to music files saved in CD and
USB.
Command
Random
All Random
Random Off
Repeat
Folder Repeat
Repeat Off
Next File
Previous File
Scan
Information
Copy
4 212
Function
Randomly plays the files within the current
folder.
Randomly plays all saved files.
Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeats the current file.
Repeats all files in the current folder.
Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Plays the next file.
Plays the previous file.
Scans the files from the next files for 10 seconds each.
Displays the information screen of the current
file.
Copies the current file into My Music.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:43 PM
Page 213
Features of your vehicle
• iPod Commands: Commands that can be used while
playing iPod.
Command
Random
Random Off
Repeat
Repeat Off
Information
Function
Randomly plays the songs within the current
category.
Cancels random play to play songs in sequential order.
Repeats the current song.
Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequential order.
Displays the information screen of the current
song.
• My Music Commands: Commands that can be used
while playing My Music.
Command
Random
Random Off
Repeat
Repeat Off
Scan
Information
Delete
Delete All
Function
Randomly plays all saved files.
Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeats the current file.
Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Scans the files from the next files for 10 seconds each.
Displays the information screen of the current
file.
Deletes the current file. You will bypass an
additional confirmation process.
Deletes all files saved in My Music. You will
bypass an additional confirmation process.
4 213
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 4b(AUDIO).qxp
1/23/2013
3:43 PM
Page 214
Features of your vehicle
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio Commands:
Commands that can be used while playing Phone
Music.
Command
Play
Pause
4 214
Function
Plays the currently paused song.
Pauses the current song.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:29 PM
Page 1
Driving your vehicle
Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Engine start/stop button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Manual transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
• Manual transaxle operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Automatic transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
• Automatic transaxle operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
All wheel drive (AWD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
• Power brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
• Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
• Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
• Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
• Vehicle stability management (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
• Hill-start assist control (HAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Cruise control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Blind spot detection system (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
Active ECO system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
Economical operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
• Hazardous driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
• Rocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
• Smooth cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
• Driving at night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
• Driving in the rain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
• Driving in flooded areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
• Driving off-road. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
• Highway driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
Vehicle load limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
Vehicle weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81
• Base curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81
• Vehicle curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81
• Cargo weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81
• GAW (Gross axle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81
• GAWR (Gross axle weight rating). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81
• GVW (Gross vehicle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81
• GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81
5
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:29 PM
Page 2
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!
Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle,
open the windows immediately.
• Do not inhale exhaust fumes.
Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death
by asphyxiation.
• Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.
The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose.
If you hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side
of the vehicle, have the exhaust system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Kia dealer.
• Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.
Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the
engine in your garage any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the vehicle out.
• Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the vehicle.
If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the vehicle, be sure to do so only in
an open area with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn
into the interior.
If you must drive with the tailgate open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:
1. Close all windows.
2. Open side vents.
3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher
speeds.
To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the
windshield are kept clear of snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.
5 2
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:29 PM
Page 3
Driving your vehicle
BEFORE DRIVING
Before entering vehicle
Necessary inspections
Before starting
• Be sure that all windows, outside
mirror(s), and outside lights are
clean.
• Check the condition of the tires.
• Check under the vehicle for any
sign of leaks.
• Be sure there are no obstacles
behind you if you intend to back up.
Fluid levels, such as engine oil,
engine coolant, brake fluid, and
washer fluid should be checked on a
regular basis, at the exact interval
depending on the fluid. Further
details are provided in chapter 7,
“Maintenance”.
• Close and lock all doors.
• Position the seat so that all controls are easily reached.
• Adjust the inside and outside
rearview mirrors.
• Be sure that all lights work.
• Check all gauges.
• Check the operation of warning
lights when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position.
• Release the parking brake and
make sure the brake warning light
goes out.
For safe operation, be sure you are
familiar with your vehicle and its
equipment.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle control, that may lead to an accident, severe personal injury,
and death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle systems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a
vehicle or which are not permissible by law should never be
used during operation of the
vehicle.
5 3
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:29 PM
Page 4
Driving your vehicle
WARNING
All passengers must be properly belted whenever the vehicle
is moving. Refer to “Seat belts”
in chapter 3 for more information on their proper use.
WARNING
Always check the surrounding
areas near your vehicle for people, especially children, before
putting a vehicle into D (Drive)
or R (Reverse).
5 4
WARNING - Driving
under the influence of
alcohol or drugs
Drinking and driving is dangerous. Drunk driving is the number one contributor to the highway death toll each year. Even a
small amount of alcohol will
affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgment. Driving
while under the influence of
drugs is as dangerous or more
dangerous than driving drunk.
You are much more likely to
have a serious accident if you
drink or take drugs and drive.
If you are drinking or taking
drugs, don’t drive. Do not ride
with a driver who has been
drinking or taking drugs.
Choose a designated driver or
call a cab.
WARNING
• When you intend to park or
stop the vehicle with the
engine on, be careful not to
depress the accelerator pedal
for a long period of time. It
may overheat the engine or
exhaust system and ignite a
fire.
• When you make a sudden
stop or turn the steering
wheel rapidly, loose objects
may drop on the floor and it
could interfere with the operation of the foot pedals, possibly causing an accident. Keep
all things in the vehicle safely
stored.
• If you do not focus on driving,
it may cause an accident. Be
careful when operating what
may disturb driving such as
audio or heater. It is the
responsibility of the driver to
always drive safely.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:29 PM
Page 5
Driving your vehicle
KEY POSITIONS (IF EQUIPPED)
Illuminated ignition switch
(if equipped)
Ignition switch position
LOCK
ACC (Accessory)
The steering wheel is unlocked and
electrical accessories are operative.
✽ NOTICE
If difficulty is experienced turning
the ignition switch to the ACC position, turn the key while turning the
steering wheel right and left to
release the tension.
OXM059001N
OXM059029N
Whenever a front door is opened, the
ignition switch will illuminate for your
convenience, provided the ignition
switch is not in the ON position. The
light will go off immediately when the
ignition switch is turned on. It will
also go off after about 30 seconds
when the door is closed.
The steering wheel locks to protect
against theft (if equipped). The ignition key can be removed only in the
LOCK position.
When turning the ignition switch to
the LOCK position, push the key
inward at the ACC position and turn
the key toward the LOCK position.
ON
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. This is
the normal running position after the
engine is started.
Do not leave the ignition switch ON if
the engine is not running to prevent
battery discharge.
START
Turn the ignition switch to the START
position to start the engine. The
engine will crank until you release
the key; then it returns to the ON
position. The brake warning light can
be checked in this position.
5 5
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:29 PM
Page 6
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - Ignition
switch
• Never turn the ignition switch
to LOCK or ACC while the
vehicle is moving. This would
result in loss of directional
control and braking function,
which could cause an accident.
• The anti-theft steering column
lock is not a substitute for the
parking brake. Before leaving
the driver’s seat, always make
sure the shift lever is engaged
in 1st gear for the manual
transaxle or P (Park) for automatic transaxle, set the parking brake fully and shut the
engine off. Unexpected and
sudden vehicle movement
may occur if these precautions are not taken.
(Continued)
5 6
(Continued)
• Never reach for the ignition
switch, or any other controls
through the steering wheel
while the vehicle is in motion.
The presence of your hand or
arm in this area could cause a
loss of vehicle control, an
accident and serious bodily
injury or death.
• Do not place any movable
objects around the driver’s
seat as they may move while
driving, interfere with the driver and lead to an accident.
Starting the engine
WARNING
Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes (high heels,
ski boots,etc.) may interfere
with your ability to use the
brake and accelerator pedal.
1.Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2.Automatic Transaxle - Place the
transaxle shift lever in P (Park).
Depress the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when
the shift lever is in the N (Neutral)
position.
3.Turn the ignition switch to START
and hold it there until the engine
starts (a maximum of 10 seconds),
then release the key.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:29 PM
Page 7
Driving your vehicle
4.In extremely cold weather (below
0°F / -18°C) or after the vehicle has
not been operated for several days,
let the engine warm up without
depressing the accelerator.
Whether the engine is cold or warm,
it should be started without
depressing the accelerator.
CAUTION
If the engine stalls while you are
in motion, do not attempt to
move the shift lever to the P
(Park) position. If traffic and
road conditions permit, you may
put the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position while the
vehicle is still moving and turn
the ignition switch to the START
position in an attempt to restart
the engine.
CAUTION
Do not engage the starter for
more than 10 seconds. If the
engine stalls or fails to start,
wait 5 to 10 seconds before reengaging the starter. Improper
use of the starter may damage it.
5 7
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:29 PM
Page 8
Driving your vehicle
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON (IF EQUIPPED)
Illuminated ENGINE
START/STOP button
ENGINE START/STOP button
position
OFF
Not illuminated
OXM053001
Whenever the front door is opened,
the ENGINE START/STOP button
will illuminate for your convenience.
The light will go off after about 30
seconds when the door is closed. It
will also go off immediately when the
theft-alarm system is armed.
5 8
• With automatic transaxle
To turn off the engine (START/RUN
position) or vehicle power (ON position),
press
the
ENGINE
START/STOP button with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position. When
you
press
the
ENGINE
START/STOP button without the shift
lever in the P (Park) position, the
ENGINE START/STOP button will
not change to the OFF position but to
the ACC position.
CAUTION
You are able to turn off the
engine (START/RUN) or vehicle
power (ON), only when the vehicle is not in motion. In an emergency situation while the vehicle is in motion, you are able to
turn the engine off and to the
ACC position by pressing the
ENGINE START/STOP button for
more than 2 seconds or 3 times
successively within 3 seconds.
If the vehicle is still moving, you
can restart the engine without
depressing the brake pedal by
pressing
the
ENGINE
START/STOP button with the
shift lever in the N (Neutral)
position.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:29 PM
Page 9
Driving your vehicle
ACC(Accessory)
ON
Orange indicator
• With automatic transaxle
Press the ENGINE START/STOP
button while it is in the OFF position
without depressing the brake pedal.
If the ENGINE START/STOP button
is in the ACC position for more than
1 hour, the button is turned off automatically to prevent battery discharge.
START/RUN
Red indicator
• With automatic transaxle
Press the ENGINE START/STOP
button while it is in the ACC position
without depressing the brake pedal.
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. Do not
leave the ENGINE START/STOP
button in the ON position for a long
time. The battery may discharge,
because the engine is not running.
Not illuminated
• With automatic transaxle
To start the engine, depress the
brake pedal and press the ENGINE
START/ STOP button with the shift
lever in the P (Park) or the N
(Neutral) position. For your safety,
start the engine with the shift lever in
the P (Park) position.
✽ NOTICE
If you press the ENGINE
START/STOP button without
depressing the brake pedal for automatic transaxle vehicles, the engine
will not start and the ENGINE
START/STOP button changes as follow:
OFF ➔ ACC ➔ ON ➔ OFF or ACC
5 9
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:29 PM
Page 10
Driving your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
If you leave the ENGINE START/
STOP button in the ACC or ON
position for a long time, the battery
will discharge.
WARNING
• Never press the ENGINE
START/STOP button while the
vehicle is in motion except in
an emergency. If the engine
stops while the vehicle is in
motion, this would result in
loss of directional control and
braking function, which could
cause an accident.
• Before leaving the driver's
seat, always make sure the
shift lever is engaged in P
(Park), set the parking brake
fully and shut the engine off.
Unexpected and sudden vehicle movement may occur if
these precautions are not
taken.
(Continued)
5 10
(Continued)
• Never reach for the ENGINE
START/STOP button or any
other controls through the
steering wheel while the vehicle is in motion. The presence
of your hand or arm in the
area could cause loss of vehicle control, an accident and
serious bodily injury or death.
• Do not place any movable
objects around the driver's
seat as they may move while
driving, interfere with the driver and lead to an accident.
Starting the engine with a
smart key (if equipped)
1.Carry the smart key or leave it
inside the vehicle.
2.Make sure the parking brake is
firmly applied
3.Automatic Transaxle - Place the
transaxle shift lever in P (Park).
Depress the brake pedal fully.
4.Press the ENGINE START/STOP
button while depressing the brake
pedal.
5.In extremely cold weather (below
(-18°C) 0°F) or after the vehicle
has not been operated for several
days, let the engine warm up without depressing the accelerator.
Whether the engine is cold or warm,
it should be started without depressing the accelerator.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:29 PM
Page 11
Driving your vehicle
• Even if the smart key is in the vehicle, if it is far away from you, the
engine may not start.
• When the ENGINE START/STOP
button is in the ACC position or
above, if any door is opened, the
system checks for the smart key. If
the smart key is not in the vehicle,
the "KEY OUT" indicator will blink.
And if all doors are closed, the
chime will sound for 5 seconds.
The indicator or warning will turn
off while the vehicle is moving.
Always have the smart key with
you.
WARNING
The engine will start, only when
the smart key is in the vehicle.
Never allow children or any person who is unfamiliar with the
vehicle to touch the ENGINE
START/STOP button or related
parts.
CAUTION
If the engine stalls while the
vehicle is in motion, do not
attempt to move the shift lever
to the P (Park) position. If the
traffic and road conditions permit, you may put the shift lever
in the N (Neutral) position while
the vehicle is still moving and
press the ENGINE START/STOP
button in an attempt to restart
the engine.
5 11
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:29 PM
Page 12
Driving your vehicle
OXM053002
✽ NOTICE
• If the battery is weak or the smart
key does not work correctly, you
can start the engine by pressing
the engine start/stop button with
the smart key.
The side with the lock button
should contact the engine
start/stop button directly.
When you press the engine
start/stop button directly with the
smart key, the smart key should
contact the button at a right angle.
(Continued)
5 12
(Continued)
• When the stop lamp fuse is blown,
you can't start the engine normally. Replace the fuse with a new
one. If it is not possible, you can
start the engine by pressing the
ENGINE START/STOP button
for 10 seconds while it is in the
ACC position. The engine can
start without depressing the brake
pedal. But for your safety always
depress the brake pedal before
starting the engine.
CAUTION
Do not press the ENGINE
START/ STOP button for more
than 10 seconds except when
the stop lamp fuse is blown.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:29 PM
Page 13
Driving your vehicle
MANUAL TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
Manual transaxle operation
The shift lever can be moved without pulling
the ring (1).
The ring (1) must be pulled up while moving
the shift lever.
OXM053041
The manual transaxle has 6 forward
gears.
This shift pattern is imprinted on the
shift knob. The transaxle is fully synchronized in all forward gears so
shifting to either a higher or a lower
gear is easily accomplished.
Press the clutch pedal down fully
while shifting, then release it slowly.
If your vehicle is equipped with an
ignition lock switch, the engine will
not start when starting the engine
without depressing the clutch pedal.
(if equipped)
The gearshift lever must be returned
to the neutral position before shifting
into R (Reverse).
The button (1) located immediately
below the shift knob must be pulled
upward while moving the shift lever
to the R (Reverse) position. (if
equipped)
Make sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before shifting into R
(Reverse).
Never operate the engine with the
tachometer (rpm) in the red zone.
CAUTION
• When downshifting from fifth
gear to fourth gear, caution
should be taken not to inadvertently press the gear shift
lever sideways in such a manner that second gear is
engaged. Such a drastic
downshift may cause the
engine speed to increase to
the point that the tachometer
will enter the red-zone. Such
over-revving of the engine
may possibly cause engine
damage.
• Do not downshift more than 2
gears or downshift the gear
when the engine is running at
high speed (5,000 RPM or
higher). Such a downshifting
may damage the engine.
5 13
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:29 PM
Page 14
Driving your vehicle
• During cold weather, shifting may
be difficult until the transaxle lubricant has warmed up. This is normal and not harmful to the
transaxle.
• If you've come to a complete stop
and it's hard to shift into 1st or R
(Reverse), put the shift lever in N
(Neutral) position and release the
clutch. Press the clutch pedal back
down, and then shift into 1st or R
(Reverse) gear position.
CAUTION
• To avoid premature clutch
wear and damage, do not
drive with your foot resting on
the clutch pedal. Also, don’t
use the clutch to hold the
vehicle stopped on an uphill
grade, while waiting for a traffic light, etc.
• Do not use the shift lever as a
handrest during driving, as
this can result in premature
wear of the transaxle shift
forks.
5 14
WARNING
• Before leaving the driver’s
seat, always set the parking
brake fully and shut the
engine off. Then make sure
the transaxle is shifted into
1st gear when the vehicle is
parked on a level or uphill
grade, and shifted into R
(Reverse) on a downhill
grade. Unexpected and sudden vehicle movement can
occur if these precautions are
not followed in the order identified.
• If your vehicle has a manual
transaxle not equipped with a
ignition lock switch, it may
move and cause a serious
accident when starting the
engine without depressing
the clutch pedal while the
parking brake is released and
the shift lever not in the N
(neutral) position.
Using the clutch
The clutch should be pressed all the
way to the floor before shifting, then
released slowly. The clutch pedal
should always be fully released while
driving. Do not rest your foot on the
clutch pedal while driving. This can
cause unnecessary wear. Do not
partially engage the clutch to hold
the vehicle on an incline. This causes
unnecessary wear. Use the foot
brake or parking brake to hold the
vehicle on an incline. Do not operate
the clutch pedal rapidly and repeatedly.
Downshifting
When you must slow down in heavy
traffic or while driving up steep hills,
downshift before the engine starts to
labor. Downshifting reduces the
chance of stalling and gives better
acceleration when you again need to
increase your speed. When the vehicle is traveling down steep hills,
downshifting helps maintain safe
speed and prolongs brake life.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:29 PM
Page 15
Driving your vehicle
Good driving practices
• Never take the vehicle out of gear
and coast down a hill. This is
extremely hazardous. Always leave
the vehicle in gear.
• Don't "ride" the brakes. This can
cause them to overheat and malfunction. Instead, when you are
driving down a long hill, slow down
and shift to a lower gear. When you
do this, engine braking will help
slow down the vehicle.
• Slow down before shifting to a
lower gear. This will help avoid
over-revving the engine, which can
cause damage.
• Slow down when you encounter
cross winds. This gives you much
better control of your vehicle.
• Be sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before you attempt to shift
into reverse. The transaxle can be
damaged if you do not. To shift into
reverse, depress the clutch, move
the shift lever to neutral, then shift
to the reverse position.
• Exercise extreme caution when
driving on a slippery surface. Be
especially careful when braking,
accelerating or shifting gears. On a
slippery surface, an abrupt change
in vehicle speed can cause the
drive wheels to lose traction and
the vehicle to go out of control.
WARNING
• Always buckle-up! In a collision, an unbelted occupant is
significantly more likely to be
seriously injured or killed than
a properly belted occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when cornering or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as
sharp lane changes or fast,
sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control
of your vehicle at highway
speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off
the roadway and the driver
oversteers to reenter the roadway.
• In the event your vehicle
leaves the roadway, do not
steer sharply. Instead, slow
down before pulling back into
the travel lanes.
• Never exceed posted speed
limits.
5 15
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:29 PM
Page 16
Driving your vehicle
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
Automatic transaxle operation
The automatic transaxle has 6 forward speeds and one reverse speed.
The individual speeds are selected
automatically, depending on the
position of the shift lever.
✽ NOTICE
The first few shifts on a new vehicle,
if the battery has been disconnected,
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a
normal condition, and the shifting
sequence will adjust after shifts are
cycled a few times by the TCM
(Transaxle Control Module) or
PCM (Powertrain Control Module).
UP
DOWN
Depress the brake pedal and the lock release button when shifting.
(If the shift lock system is not equipped, it is not necessary to depress the brake
pedal. However, it is recommended to depress the brake pedal to avoid inadvertent movement of the vehicle.)
Press the lock release button when shifting.
The shift lever can be shifted freely.
5 16
OXM053022
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:29 PM
Page 17
Driving your vehicle
For smooth operation, depress the
brake pedal and the lock release button when shifting from P (Parking) to
a forward or reverse gear.
WARNING - Automatic
transaxle
• Always check the surrounding
areas near your vehicle for
people, especially children,
before shifting the shift lever
into D (Drive) or R (Reverse).
• Before leaving the driver’s
seat, always make sure the
shift lever is in the P (Park)
position; then set the parking
brake fully and shut the
engine off. Unexpected and
sudden vehicle movement
can occur if these precautions
are not followed in the order
identified.
CAUTION
• To avoid damage to your
transaxle, do not accelerate
the engine in R (Reverse) or
any forward gear position with
the brakes on.
• When stopped on an incline,
do not hold the vehicle with
the engine power. Use the
service brake or the parking
brake.
• Do not shift from N (Neutral)
or P (Park) into D (Drive), or R
(Reverse) when the engine is
above idle speed.
Transaxle ranges
The indicator in the instrument cluster displays the shift lever position
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into P (Park). This
position locks the transaxle and prevents the drive wheels from rotating.
WARNING
• Shifting into P (Park) while the
vehicle is in motion will cause
the drive wheels to lock which
will cause you to lose control
of the vehicle.
• Do not use the P (Park) position in place of the parking
brake. Always make sure the
shift lever is latched in the P
(Park) position and set the
parking brake fully.
• Never leave a child unattended in a vehicle.
5 17
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:29 PM
Page 18
Driving your vehicle
CAUTION
The transaxle may be damaged
if you shift into P (Park) while
the vehicle is in motion.
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
CAUTION
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into or out of R
(Reverse); you may damage the
transaxle if you shift into R
(Reverse) while the vehicle is in
motion, except when “Rocking
the vehicle” explained in this
section.
N (Neutral)
The wheels and transaxle are not
engaged. The vehicle will roll freely
even on the slightest incline unless
the parking brake or service brakes
are applied.
D (Drive)
This is the normal forward driving
position. The transaxle will automatically shift through a 6-gear
sequence, providing the best fuel
economy and power.
For extra power when passing another vehicle or climbing grades,
depress the accelerator fully, at
which time the transaxle will automatically downshift to the next lower
gear.
✽ NOTICE
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into D (Drive).
5 18
Spor ts
mode
OXM053023
Sports mode
Whether the vehicle is stationary or
in motion, sports mode is selected by
pushing the shift lever from the D
(Drive) position into the manual gate.
To return to D (Drive) range operation, push the shift lever back into the
main gate.
In sports mode, moving the shift
lever backwards and forwards will
allow you to make gearshifts rapidly.
In contrast to a manual transaxle, the
sports mode allows gearshifts with
the accelerator pedal depressed.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:29 PM
Page 19
Driving your vehicle
Up (+) : Push the lever forward once
to shift up one gear.
Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards
once to shift down one
gear.
✽ NOTICE
• In sports mode, the driver must
execute upshifts in accordance
with road conditions, taking care
to keep the engine speed below the
red zone.
• In sports mode, only the 6 forward
gears can be selected. To reverse
or park the vehicle, move the shift
lever to the R (Reverse) or P
(Park) position as required.
• In sports mode, downshifts are
made automatically when the
vehicle slows down. When the
vehicle stops, 1st gear is automatically selected.
• In sports mode, when the engine
rpm approaches the red zone shift
points are varied to upshift automatically.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• To maintain the required levels of
vehicle performance and safety,
the system may not execute certain gearshifts when the shift lever
is operated.
• When driving on a slippery road,
push the shift lever forward into
the +(up) position. This causes the
transaxle to shift into the 2nd gear
which is better for smooth driving
on a slippery road. Push the shift
lever to the -(down) side to shift
back to the 1st gear.
Shift lock system (if equipped)
For your safety, the automatic
transaxle has a shift lock system
which prevents shifting the transaxle
from P (Park) into R (Reverse)
unless the brake pedal is depressed.
To shift the transaxle from P (Park)
into R (Reverse):
1.Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2.Start the engine or turn the ignition
switch to the ON position.
3.Move the shift lever.
If the brake pedal is repeatedly
depressed and released with the
shift lever in the P (Park) position, a
chattering noise near the shift lever
may be heard. It is a normal condition.
5 19
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:29 PM
Page 20
Driving your vehicle
Ignition key interlock system
The ignition key cannot be removed
unless the shift lever is in the P
(Park) position. Even if the ignition
switch is in the LOCK position, the
key also cannot be removed.
If your vehicle is equipped with
ENGINE START/STOP button, the
button will not change to the OFF
position unless the shift lever is in the
P (Park) position.
WARNING
Always fully depress the brake
pedal before and while shifting
out of the P (Park) position into
another position to avoid inadvertent motion of the vehicle
which could injure persons in
or around the vehicle.
OXM053025
Shift-lock override
If the shift lever cannot be moved
from the P (Park) position into R
(Reverse) position with the brake
pedal depressed, continue depressing the brake, then do the following:
1.Carefully remove the cap covering
the shift-lock access hole (1).
2.Insert a key (or screwdriver) into
the access hole and press down
on the key (or screwdriver).
3.Move the shift lever.
4.Have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer immediately.
5 20
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:29 PM
Page 21
Driving your vehicle
Good driving practices
• Never move the gear shift lever
from P (Park) to any other position
with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
• Never move the gear shift lever into
P (Park) when the vehicle is in
motion.
• Be sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before you attempt to shift
into R (Reverse) or D (Drive).
• Never take the vehicle out of gear
and coast down a hill. This may be
extremely hazardous. Always leave
the vehicle in gear when moving.
• Do not "ride" the brakes. This can
cause them to overheat and malfunction. Instead, when you are
driving down a long hill, slow down
and shift to a lower gear. When you
do this, engine braking will help
slow down the vehicle.
• Slow down before shifting to a
lower gear. Otherwise, the lower
gear may not be engaged.
• Always use the parking brake. Do
not depend on placing the
transaxle in P (Park) to keep the
vehicle from moving.
• Exercise extreme caution when
driving on a slippery surface. Be
especially careful when braking,
accelerating or shifting gears. On a
slippery surface, an abrupt change
in vehicle speed can cause the
drive wheels to lose traction and
the vehicle to go out of control.
• Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the
accelerator pedal.
WARNING
• Always buckle-up! In a collision, an unbelted occupant is
significantly more likely to be
seriously injured or killed than
a properly belted occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when cornering or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as
sharp lane changes or fast,
sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control
of your vehicle at highway
speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off
the roadway and the driver
oversteers to reenter the roadway.
• In the event your vehicle
leaves the roadway, do not
steer sharply. Instead, slow
down before pulling back into
the travel lanes.
• Never exceed posted speed
limits.
5 21
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:29 PM
Page 22
Driving your vehicle
WARNING
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
snow, mud, sand, etc., then you
may attempt to rock the vehicle
free by moving it forward and
backward. Do not attempt this
procedure if people or objects
are anywhere near the vehicle.
During the rocking operation
the vehicle may suddenly move
forward or backward as it
becomes unstuck, causing
injury or damage to nearby people or objects.
5 22
Moving up a steep grade from a
standing start
To move up a steep grade from a
standing start, depress the brake
pedal, shift the shift lever to D
(Drive). Select the appropriate gear
depending on load weight and steepness of the grade, and release the
parking brake. Depress the accelerator gradually while releasing the
service brakes.
When accelerating from a stop on
a steep hill, the vehicle may have a
tendency to roll backwards.
Shifting the shift lever into 2
(Second Gear) will help prevent
the vehicle from rolling backwards.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:29 PM
Page 23
Driving your vehicle
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) (IF EQUIPPED)
OXMA053039
Engine power can be delivered to all
front and rear wheels for maximum
traction. AWD is useful when extra
traction is required on roads, such
as, when driving on slippery, muddy,
wet, or snow-covered roads. These
vehicles are not designed for challenging off-road use. Occasional offroad use such as established
unpaved roads and trails are OK. It is
always important when traveling offhighway that the driver carefully
reduces the speed to a level that
does not exceed the safe operating
speed for those conditions.
In general, off-road conditions provide less traction and braking effectiveness than normal road conditions. The driver must be especially
alert to avoid driving on slopes which
tilt the vehicle to either side.
These factors must be carefully considered when driving off-road.
Keeping the vehicle in contact with
the driving surface and under control
in these conditions is always the driver's responsibility for the safety of
him/herself and his / her passengers.
WARNING - Off road
driving
This vehicle is designed primarily for on road use although it
can operate effectively off road.
However, it was not designed to
drive in challenging off-road
conditions. Driving in conditions that exceed the vehicle's
intended design or the driver's
experience level may result in
severe injury or death.
WARNING
If the AWD system warning light
( ) illuminates, this indicates
that there is a malfunction in the
AWD system.
If this occurs, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
Tight corner brake effect
CAUTION - AWD
When turning sharply on a
paved road at low speed while
in four-wheel drive, steering
control will be difficult.
Tight corner brake effect is a unique
characteristic of four-wheel drive
vehicles caused by the difference in
tire rotation at the four wheels and
the zero-degree alignment of the
front wheels and suspension.
Sharp turns at low speeds should be
carried out with caution.
5 23
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:29 PM
Page 24
Driving your vehicle
All Wheel Drive (AWD) transfer mode selection
Transfer mode
AWD AUTO
(AWD LOCK is
deactivated)
Selection button
Indicator light
(Indicator light is
not illuminated)
AWD LOCK
(Indicator light is
illuminated)
Description
• When driving in AWD AUTO mode, the vehicle operates similar to conventional 2WD vehicles under normal operating
conditions. However, if the system determines that there is a
need for the AWD mode, the engine’s driving power is distributed to all four wheels automatically without driver intervention.
• When driving on normal roads and pavement, the vehicle
moves similar to conventional 2WD vehicles.
• This mode is used for climbing or descending sharp grades,
off-road driving, driving on sandy and muddy roads, etc., to
maximize traction.
• This mode automatically begins to deactivate at speeds
above 30 km/h (19 mph) and is shifted to AWD AUTO mode
at speed above 40 km/h (25 mph). If the vehicle decelerates
to speeds below 30 km/h (19 mph), however, the transfer
mode is shifted into AWD LOCK mode again.
✽ NOTICE
• When driving on normal roads, deactivate the AWD LOCK mode by pushing the AWD LOCK button (the indicator light goes off). Driving on normal roads with AWD LOCK mode (especially, when cornering) may cause
mechanical noise or vibration. The noise and vibration will disappear when the AWD LOCK mode is deactivated. Some parts of the power train may be damaged by prolonged driving with the noise and vibration.
• When the AWD LOCK mode is deactivated, a shock may be felt as the drive power is delivered entirely to the
front wheels. This shock is not a mechanical failure.
5 24
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:29 PM
Page 25
Driving your vehicle
For safe All-wheel drive operation
WARNING - Four-wheel
driving
The conditions of on-road or
off-road that demand fourwheel drive mean all functions
of your vehicle are exposed to
extreme stress than under normal road conditions. Slow down
and be ready for changes in the
composition and traction of the
surface under your tires. If you
have any doubt about the safety
of the conditions you are facing, stop and consider the best
way to proceed. Do not exceed
the ability of yourself or your
vehicle to operate safely.
• Do not try to drive in deep standing
water or mud since such conditions
can stall your engine and clog your
exhaust pipes. Do not drive down
steep hills since it requires extreme
skill to maintain control of the vehicle.
HILL1
• When you are driving up or down
hills drive as straight as possible.
Use extreme caution in going up or
down steep hills, since you may flip
your vehicle over depending on the
grade, terrain and water/mud conditions.
HILL2
WARNING - Hills
Driving across the contour of
steep hills can be extremely
dangerous. This danger can
come from slight changes in the
wheel angle which can destabilize the vehicle or even if the
vehicle is maintaining stability
under power, it can lose that
stability if the vehicle stops its
forward motion. Your vehicle
may roll over without warning
and without time for you to correct a mistake that could cause
serious injury or death.
5 25
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:29 PM
Page 26
Driving your vehicle
• You must consciously take the
effort to learn how to corner in an
AWD vehicle. Do not rely on your
experience in conventional 2WD
vehicles in choosing safe cornering
speed in AWD mode. For starters,
you must drive more slowly in
AWD.
• Drive carefully off-road because
your vehicle may be damaged by
rocks or roots of trees. Become
familiar with the off-road conditions
where you are going to drive
before you begin driving.
• Always hold the steering wheel
firmly when you are driving offroad.
• Make sure all passengers are
wearing seat belts.
WARNING - Wind
danger
OXM053026
WARNING - Steering
If you are driving in heavy wind,
the vehicle's higher center of
gravity decreases your steering
control capacity and requires
you to drive more slowly.
wheel
WARNING - 4WD
Reduce speed when you turn
corners. The center of gravity of
AWD vehicles is higher than
that of conventional 2WD vehicles, making them more likely to
roll over when you turn corners
too fast.
5 26
Do not grab the inside of the
steering wheel when you are
driving off-road. You may hurt
your arm by a sudden steering
maneuver or from steering
wheel rebound due to impact
with objects on the ground. You
could lose control of the steering wheel.
• If you need to drive in the water,
stop your vehicle, set your transfer
to the AWD LOCK mode and drive
at less than 8 km/h (5 mph).
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:30 PM
Page 27
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - Driving
through
water
Drive slowly. If you are driving
too fast in water, the water can
get into the engine compartment and wet the ignition system, causing your vehicle to
suddenly stop. If this happens
and your vehicle is in a tilted
position, your vehicle may roll
over.
✽ NOTICE
• Do not drive in water if the level is
higher than the bottom of the vehicle.
• Check your brake condition once
you are out of mud or water. Press
the brake pedal several times as
you move slowly until you feel normal braking forces return.
• Shorten your scheduled maintenance interval if you drive in offroad conditions such as sand, mud
or water (see “Maintenance under
severe usage conditions” in chapter 7). Always wash your vehicle
thoroughly after off-road use,
especially cleaning the bottom of
the vehicle.
• Since the driving torque is always
applied to the 4 wheels the performance of the AWD vehicle is
greatly affected by the condition of
the tires. Be sure to equip the vehicle with four tires of the same size
and type.
• A full time four wheel drive vehicle cannot be towed by an ordinary tow truck. Make sure that
the vehicle is placed on a flat bed
truck for moving.
WARNING - AWD driving
• Avoid high cornering speed.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as
sharp lane changes or fast,
sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control
of your vehicle at high speed.
• In a collision, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die compared to a person
wearing a seat belt.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off
the roadway and the driver
oversteers to re-enter the
roadway. In the event your
vehicle leaves the roadway, do
not steer sharply. Instead,
slow down before pulling
back into the travel lanes.
5 27
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:30 PM
Page 28
Driving your vehicle
CAUTION - Mud or snow
If one of the front or rear wheels
begins to spin in mud, snow,
etc. the vehicle can sometimes
be driven out by depressing the
accelerator pedal further; however avoid running the engine
continuously at high rpm
because doing so could damage the AWD system.
WARNING - Jacked
vehicle
While the full-time AWD vehicle
is being raised on a jack, never
start the engine or cause the
tires to rotate.
There is the danger that rotating
tires touching the ground could
cause the vehicle to go off the
jack and to jump forward.
5 28
Reducing the risk of a rollover
This multi-purpose passenger vehicle is defined as a Sports Utility
Vehicle (SUV). A SUV has higher
ground clearance and a narrower
track to make it more capable of performing in a wide variety of off-road
applications. Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of
gravity than ordinary vehicles. An
advantage of the higher ground
clearance is a better view of the
road, which allows you to anticipate
problems. A SUV is not designed for
cornering at the same speeds as
conventional passenger vehicles,
any more than low profile sports cars
are designed to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions. Due to this
risk, driver and passengers are
strongly recommended to buckle
their seat belts. In a rollover crash,
an unbelted person is more likely to
die than a person wearing a seat
belt. There are steps that a driver can
take to reduce the risk of a rollover.
Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed,
and or abrupt maneuvers, do not
load your roof rack with heavy cargo,
and never modify your vehicle in any
way.
WARNING - Rollover
As with other Sports Utility
Vehicle (SUV), failure to operate
this vehicle correctly may result
in loss of control, an accident or
vehicle rollover.
• Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles.
• Specific design characteristics (higher ground clearance,
narrower track, etc.) give this
vehicle a higher center of
gravity than ordinary vehicles.
• A SUV is not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional vehicles.
• Avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers.
• In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Make
sure everyone in the vehicle is
properly buckled up.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:30 PM
Page 29
Driving your vehicle
WARNING
Your vehicle is equipped with
tires designed to provide safe
ride and handling capability. Do
not use a size and type of tire
and wheel that is different from
the one that is originally
installed on your vehicle. It can
affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which
could lead to steering failure or
rollover and serious injury.
When replacing the tires, be
sure to equip all four tires with
the tire and wheel of the same
size, type, tread, brand and
load-carrying capacity. If you
nevertheless decide to equip
your vehicle with any tire/wheel
combination not recommended
by Kia for off road driving, you
should not use these tires for
highway driving.
• Full-time AWD vehicles must be
tested on a special four wheel
chassis dynamometer.
✽ NOTICE
Never engage the parking brake
while performing these tests.
• A full-time AWD vehicle should not
be tested on a 2WD roll tester. If a
2WD roll tester must be used, perform the following:
Temporary free roller
Roll tester (speedometer)
OXM059025
1.Check the tire pressures recommended for your vehicle.
2.Place the front wheels on the roll
tester for a speedometer test as
shown in the illustration.
3.Release the parking brake.
4.Place the rear wheels on the temporary free roller as shown in the
illustration.
WARNING Dynamometer testing
Keep away from the front of the
vehicle while the vehicle is in
gear on the dynamometer. This
is very dangerous as the vehicle can jump forward and cause
serious injury or death.
5 29
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:30 PM
Page 30
Driving your vehicle
BRAKE SYSTEM
Power brakes
Your vehicle has power-assisted
brakes that adjust automatically
through normal usage.
In the event that the power-assisted
brakes lose power because of a
stalled engine or some other reason,
you can still stop your vehicle by
applying greater force to the brake
pedal than you normally would. The
stopping distance, however, will be
longer.
When the engine is not running, the
reserve brake power is partially
depleted each time the brake pedal
is applied. Do not pump the brake
pedal when the power assist has
been interrupted.
Pump the brake pedal only when
necessary to maintain steering control on slippery surfaces.
5 30
WARNING - Brakes
• Do not drive with your foot
resting on the brake pedal.
This will create abnormal high
brake temperatures, excessive brake lining and pad
wear, and increased stopping
distances.
• When descending a long or
steep hill, shift to a lower gear
and avoid continuous application of the brakes. Continuous
brake application will cause
the brakes to overheat and
could result in a temporary
loss of braking performance.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Wet brakes may impair the
vehicle’s ability to safely slow
down; the vehicle may also
pull to one side when the
brakes are applied. Applying
the brakes lightly will indicate
whether they have been
affected in this way. Always
test your brakes in this fashion after driving through deep
water. To dry the brakes, apply
them lightly while maintaining
a safe forward speed until
brake performance returns to
normal.
• Always, confirm the position
of the brake and accelerator
pedal before driving. If you
don’t check the position of the
accelerator and brake pedal
before driving, you may
depress
the
accelerator
instead of the brake pedal. It
may cause a serious accident.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:30 PM
Page 31
Driving your vehicle
In the event of brake failure
If service brakes fail to operate while
the vehicle is in motion, you can
make an emergency stop with the
parking brake. The stopping distance, however, will be much greater
than normal.
WARNING - Parking
brake
Applying the parking brake
while the vehicle is moving at
normal speeds can cause a
sudden loss of control of the
vehicle. If you must use the
parking brake to stop the vehicle, use great caution in applying the brake.
WARNING
Disc brakes wear indicator
When your brake pads are worn and
new pads are required, you will hear
a high-pitched warning sound from
your front brakes or rear brakes. You
may hear this sound come and go or
it may occur whenever you depress
the brake pedal.
Please remember that some driving
conditions or climates may cause a
brake squeal when you first apply (or
lightly apply) the brakes. This is normal and does not indicate a problem
with your brakes.
WARNING - Brake wear
This brake wear warning sound
means your vehicle needs service. If you ignore this audible
warning, you will eventually
lose braking performance,
which could lead to a serious
accident.
CAUTION
• To avoid costly brake repairs,
do not continue to drive with
worn brake pads.
• Always replace the front or
rear brake pads as pairs.
Do not operate the parking
brake while the vehicle is moving except in an emergency situation. It could damage the
vehicle system and endanger
driving safety.
5 31
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:30 PM
Page 32
Driving your vehicle
Parking brake
CAUTION
Applying the parking brake
Driving with the parking brake
applied will cause excessive
brake pad and brake rotor wear.
OXM053118
OXM059013
Foot type
To engage the parking brake, first
apply the foot brake and then
depress the parking brake pedal
down as far as possible.
5 32
Hand type
To engage the parking brake, first
apply the foot brake and then without
pressing the release button in, pull
the parking brake lever up as far as
possible.
In addition it is recommended that
when parking the vehicle on a gradient, the shift lever should be positioned in the appropriate low gear on
manual transaxle vehicles.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:30 PM
Page 33
Driving your vehicle
Releasing the parking brake
WARNING
OXM053119
OXM059014
Foot type
To release the parking brake,
depress the parking brake pedal a
second time while applying the foot
brake. The pedal will automatically
extend to the fully released position.
Hand type
To release the parking brake, first
apply the foot brake and pull up the
parking brake lever slightly. Secondly
press the release button (1) and
lower the parking brake lever (2)
while holding the button.
• To prevent unintentional
movement when stopped and
leaving the vehicle, do not use
the shift lever instead of the
parking brake. Set the parking
brake AND make sure the shift
lever is securely positioned in
1st (First) gear or R (Reverse)
for
manual
transaxle
equipped vehicles and in P
(Park) for automatic transaxle
equipped vehicles.
• Never allow anyone who is
unfamiliar with the vehicle to
touch the parking brake. If the
parking brake is released
unintentionally, serious injury
may occur.
• All vehicles should always
have the parking brake fully
engaged when parking to
avoid inadvertent movement
of the vehicle which can injure
occupants or pedestrians.
5 33
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:30 PM
Page 34
Driving your vehicle
If at all possible, cease driving the
vehicle immediately. If that is not possible, use extreme caution while
operating the vehicle and only continue to drive the vehicle until you
can reach a safe location or repair
shop.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
W-75
Check the brake warning light by
turning the ignition switch ON (do not
start the engine). This light will be
illuminated when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the
START or ON position.
Before driving, be sure the parking
brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off.
If the brake warning light remains on
after the parking brake is released
while the engine is running, there
may be a malfunction in the brake
system. Immediate attention is necessary.
5 34
WARNING
ABS (or ESC) will not prevent
accidents due to improper or
dangerous driving maneuvers.
Even though vehicle control is
improved during emergency
braking, always maintain a safe
distance between you and
objects ahead. Vehicle speeds
should always be reduced during extreme road conditions.
The braking distance for vehicles equipped with an anti-lock
braking system (or Electronic
Stability Control System) may
be longer than for those without
it in the following road conditions.
(Continued)
(Continued)
During these conditions the
vehicle should be driven at
reduced speeds:
• Rough, gravel or snow-covered roads.
• On roads where the road surface is pitted or has different
surface height.
The safety features of an ABS
(or ESC) equipped vehicle
should not be tested by high
speed driving or cornering. This
could endanger the safety of
yourself or others.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:30 PM
Page 35
Driving your vehicle
The ABS continuously senses the
speed of the wheels. If the wheels
are going to lock, the ABS system
repeatedly modulates the hydraulic
brake pressure to the wheels.
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the
wheels, you may hear a “tik-tik’’
sound from the brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation in the brake
pedal. This is normal and it means
your ABS is active.
In order to obtain the maximum benefit from your ABS in an emergency
situation, do not attempt to modulate
your brake pressure and do not try to
pump your brakes. Press your brake
pedal as hard as possible or as hard
as the situation allows the ABS to
control the force being delivered to
the brakes.
✽ NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehicle begins to move after the engine is
started. These conditions are normal
and indicate that the anti-lock brake
system is functioning properly.
• Even with the anti-lock brake system, your vehicle still requires sufficient stopping distance. Always
maintain a safe distance from the
vehicle in front of you.
• Always slow down when cornering.
The anti-lock brake system cannot
prevent accidents resulting from
excessive speeds.
• On loose or uneven road surfaces,
operation of the anti-lock brake
system may result in a longer stopping distance than for vehicles
equipped with a conventional
brake system.
W-78
CAUTION
• If the ABS warning light is on
and stays on, you may have a
problem with the ABS. In this
case, however, your regular
brakes will work normally.
• The ABS warning light will stay
on for approximately 3 seconds after the ignition switch
is ON. During that time, the
ABS will go through self-diagnosis and the light will go off if
everything is normal. If the
light stays on, you may have a
problem with your ABS.
Contact an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
5 35
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:30 PM
Page 36
Driving your vehicle
CAUTION
• When you drive on a road having poor traction, such as an
icy road, and have operated
your brakes continuously, the
ABS will be active continuously and the ABS warning light
may illuminate. Pull your vehicle over to a safe place and
stop the engine.
• Restart the engine. If the ABS
warning light goes off, then
your ABS system is normal.
Otherwise, you may have a
problem with the ABS.
Contact an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
5 36
✽ NOTICE
When you jump start your vehicle
because of a drained battery, the
engine may not run as smoothly and
the ABS warning light may turn on
at the same time. This happens
because of low battery voltage. It
does not mean your ABS has malfunctioned.
• Do not pump your brakes!
• Have the battery recharged before
driving the vehicle.
Electronic stability control
(ESC)
OXMA053031
The Electronic Stability control
(ESC) system is designed to stabilize the vehicle during cornering
maneuvers. ESC checks where you
are steering and where the vehicle is
actually going. ESC applies the
brakes on individual wheels and
intervenes with the engine management system to stabilize the vehicle.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:30 PM
Page 37
Driving your vehicle
WARNING
Never drive too fast according
to the road conditions or too
quickly
when
cornering.
Electronic stability control
(ESC) will not prevent accidents. Excessive speed in
turns, abrupt maneuvers and
hydroplaning on wet surfaces
can still result in serious accidents. Only a safe and attentive
driver can prevent accidents by
avoiding maneuvers that cause
the vehicle to lose traction.
Even with ESC installed, always
follow all the normal precautions for driving - including driving at safe speeds for the conditions.
The Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system is an electronic system designed to help the driver maintain vehicle control under adverse
conditions. It is not a substitute for
safe driving practices. Factors including speed, road conditions and driver steering input can all affect
whether ESC will be effective in preventing a loss of control. It is still your
responsibility to drive and corner at
reasonable speeds and to leave a
sufficient margin of safety.
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the
wheels, you may hear a “tik-tik’’
sound from the brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation in the brake
pedal. This is normal and it means
your ESC is active.
✽ NOTICE
ESC operation
ESC ON condition
• When the ignition is turned
ON, ESC and ESC OFF
indicator lights illuminate for
approximately 3 seconds,
then ESC is turned on.
• Press the ESC OFF button for at least half a second after turning the ignition ON to turn ESC off.
(ESC OFF indicator will
illuminate). To turn the
ESC on, press the ESC
OFF button (ESC OFF
indicator light will go off).
• When starting the engine,
you may hear a slight ticking sound. This is the ESC
performing an automatic
system self-check and does
not indicate a problem.
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehicle begins to move after the engine is
started. These conditions are normal
and indicate that the Electronic
Stability Control System is functioning properly.
5 37
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:30 PM
Page 38
Driving your vehicle
When operating
When the ESC is in operation, the ESC indicator light
blinks.
• When the Electronic
Stability Control is operating properly, you can feel a
slight pulsation in the vehicle. This is only the effect
of brake control and indicates nothing unusual.
• When moving out of the
mud or driving on a slippery road, pressing the
accelerator pedal may not
cause the engine rpm
(revolutions per minute) to
increase.
5 38
ESC operation off
ESC OFF state
This car has 2 kinds of ESC
off states.
If the engine stops when
ESC is off, ESC remains off.
Upon restarting the engine,
the ESC will automatically
turn on again.
• ESC off state 1
To cancel ESC operation,
press the ESC OFF button
(ESC OFF ) shortly (ESC
OFF indicator light (ESC
OFF ) illuminates). At this
state, the engine control
function does not operate. It
means the traction control
function does not operate.
Brake control function only
operates.
• ESC off state 2
To cancel ESC operation,
press the ESC OFF button
(ESC OFF ) for more than 3
seconds. ESC OFF indicator
light (ESC OFF ) illuminates
and ESC OFF warning chime
will sound. At this state, the
engine control function and
brake control function do not
operate. It means the car stability control function does not
operate any more.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:30 PM
Page 39
Driving your vehicle
Indicator light
■ ESC indicator light
■ ESC OFF indicator light
CAUTION
Driving with varying tire or
wheel sizes may cause the ESC
system to malfunction. When
replacing tires, make sure they
are the same size as your original tires.
ESC OFF usage
When driving
• ESC should be turned on for daily
driving whenever possible.
• To turn ESC off while driving, press
the ESC OFF button while driving
on a flat road surface.
WARNING
WARNING
When ignition switch is turned to ON,
the indicator light illuminates, then
goes off if the ESC system is operating normally.
The ESC indicator light blinks whenever ESC is operating or illuminates
when ESC fails to operate.
The ESC OFF indicator light comes
on when the ESC is turned off with
the button.
The Electronic Stability Control
system is only a driving aid; use
precautions for safe driving by
slowing down on curved,
snowy, or icy roads. Drive slowly and don’t attempt to accelerate whenever the ESC indicator
light is blinking, or when the
road surface is slippery.
Never press the ESC OFF button while ESC is operating (ESC
indicator light blinks).
If ESC is turned off while ESC is
operating, the vehicle may slip
out of control.
✽ NOTICE
• When operating the vehicle on a
dynamometer, ensure that the
ESC is turned off (ESC OFF light
illuminated). If the ESC is left on,
it may prevent the vehicle speed
from increasing, and result in false
diagnosis.
• Turning the ESC off does not
affect ABS or brake system operation.
5 39
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:30 PM
Page 40
Driving your vehicle
Vehicle stability management
(VSM)
This system provides further
enhancements to vehicle stability
and steering responses when a vehicle is driving on a slippery road or a
vehicle detects changes in coefficient of friction between right wheels
and left wheels when braking.
VSM operation
When the VSM is in operation, ESC
indicator light ( ) blinks.
When the vehicle stability management is operating properly, you can
feel a slight pulsation in the vehicle
and/or abnormal steering responses
(EPS). This is only the effect of brake
and EPS control and indicates nothing unusual.
5 40
The VSM does not operate when:
• Driving on bank road such as gradient or incline
• Driving in reverse
• ESC OFF indicator light ( )
remains on the instrument cluster
• EPS indicator light remains on the
instrument cluster
VSM operation off
If you press the ESC OFF button to
turn off the ESC, the VSM will also
cancel and the ESC OFF indicator
light ( ) illuminates.
To turn on the VSM, press the button
again. The ESC OFF indicator light
goes out.
Malfunction indicator
The VSM can be deactivated even if
you don’t cancel the VSM operation
by pressing the ESC OFF button. It
indicates that a malfunction has
been detected somewhere in the
Electric Power Steering system or
VSM system. If the ESC indicator
light ( ) or EPS warning light
remains on, take your vehicle to an
authorized Kia dealer and have the
system checked.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:30 PM
Page 41
Driving your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
• The VSM is designed to function
above approximately 15 km/h (9
mph) on curves.
• The VSM is designed to function
above approximately 30 km/h (18
mph) when a vehicle is braking on
a split-mu road. The split-mu road
is made of surfaces which have different friction forces.
WARNING
• The
Vehicle
Stability
Management system is not a
substitute for safe driving
practices but a supplementary function only. It is the
responsibility of the driver to
always check the speed and
the distance to the vehicle
ahead. Always hold the steering wheel firmly while driving.
• Your vehicle is designed to
activate according to the driver’s intention, even with
installed VSM. Always follow
all the normal precautions for
driving at safe speeds for the
conditions – including driving
in clement weather and on a
slippery road.
• Driving with varying tire or
wheel sizes may cause the
VSM system to malfunction.
When replacing tires, make
sure they are the same size as
your original tires.
Hill-start assist control (HAC)
A vehicle has the tendency to roll
back on a steep hill when it starts to
go after stopping. The Hill-start
Assist Control (HAC) prevents the
vehicle from rolling back by applying
the brakes automatically for about
1.5 seconds. The brakes are
released when the accelerator pedal
is depressed or after about 1.5 seconds.
WARNING
The HAC is activated only for
about 1.5 seconds, so when the
vehicle is starting off always
depress the accelerator pedal.
✽ NOTICE
• The HAC does not operate when
the transaxle shift lever is in the P
(Park) or N (Neutral) position.
• The HAC activates even though
the ESC is off but it does not activate when the ESC has malfunctioned.
5 41
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:30 PM
Page 42
Driving your vehicle
Good braking practices
WARNING
• Whenever you leave or park
your vehicle, always set the
parking brake as far as possible and shift the vehicle to 1st
(First) gear or R (Reverse) for
manual transaxle, or P (Park)
for automatic transaxle. If the
parking brake is not fully
engaged, the vehicle may
move inadvertently and injure
yourself and others.
• All vehicles should always
have the parking brake fully
engaged when parking to
avoid inadvertent movement
of the vehicle which can injure
occupants or pedestrians.
5 42
• Check to be sure the parking brake
is not engaged and the parking
brake indicator light is out before
driving away.
• Driving through water may get the
brakes wet. They can also get wet
when the vehicle is washed. Wet
brakes can be dangerous! Your
vehicle will not stop as quickly if the
brakes are wet. Wet brakes may
cause the vehicle to pull to one
side.
To dry the brakes, apply the brakes
lightly until the braking action
returns to normal, taking care to
keep the vehicle under control at
all times. If the braking action does
not return to normal, stop as soon
as it is safe to do so and call an
authorized Kia dealer for assistance.
• Don't coast down hills with the
vehicle out of gear. This is extremely hazardous. Keep the vehicle in
gear at all times, use the brakes to
slow down, then shift to a lower
gear so that engine braking will
help you maintain a safe speed.
• Don't "ride" the brake pedal.
Resting your foot on the brake
pedal while driving can be dangerous because the brakes might
overheat and lose their effectiveness. It also increases the wear of
the brake components.
• If a tire goes flat while you are driving, apply the brakes gently and
keep the vehicle pointed straight
ahead while you slow down. When
you are moving slowly enough for it
to be safe to do so, pull off the road
and stop in a safe place.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:30 PM
Page 43
Driving your vehicle
• If your vehicle is equipped with an
automatic transaxle, don't let your
vehicle creep forward. To avoid
creeping forward, keep your foot
firmly on the brake pedal when the
vehicle is stopped.
• Be cautious when parking on a hill.
Firmly engage the parking brake
and place the shift lever in P (automatic transaxle) or in first or
reverse gear (manual transaxle). If
your vehicle is facing downhill, turn
the front wheels into the curb to
help keep the vehicle from rolling. If
your vehicle is facing uphill, turn
the front wheels away from the
curb to help keep the vehicle from
rolling. If there is no curb or if it is
required by other conditions to
keep the vehicle from rolling, block
the wheels.
• Under some conditions your parking brake can freeze in the
engaged position. This is most likely to happen when there is an
accumulation of snow or ice
around or near the rear brakes or if
the brakes are wet. If there is a risk
that the parking brake may freeze,
apply it only temporarily while you
put the shift lever in P (automatic
transaxle) or in first or reverse gear
(manual transaxle) and block the
rear wheels so the vehicle cannot
roll. Then release the parking
brake.
• Do not hold the vehicle on the
upgrade with the accelerator
pedal. This can cause the transaxle
to overheat. Always use the brake
pedal or parking brake.
5 43
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:30 PM
Page 44
Driving your vehicle
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
OXMA053020
1. Cruise indicator
2. Cruise set indicator
The cruise control system allows you
to program the vehicle to maintain a
constant speed without pressing the
accelerator pedal.
This system is designed to function
above approximately 40 km/h (25
mph).
5 44
• If the cruise control is left on
(CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster illuminated), the cruise control can be
switched on accidentally.
Keep the cruise control system off (CRUISE indicator
light OFF) when the cruise
control is not in use, to avoid
inadvertently setting a speed.
• Use the cruise control system
only when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
• Do not use the cruise control
when it may not be safe to
keep the vehicle at a constant
speed, for instance, driving in
heavy or varying traffic, or on
slippery (rainy, icy or snowcovered) or winding roads or
over 6% up-hill or down-hill
roads.
• Pay particular attention to the
driving conditions whenever
using the cruise control system.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Be careful when driving
downhill using the cruise control system, which may
increase the vehicle speed.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:30 PM
Page 45
Driving your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
• During normal cruise control
operation, when the SET switch is
activated or reactivated after
applying the brakes, the cruise
control will energize after approximately 3 seconds. The delay is
normal.
• To activate cruise control, depress
the brake pedal at least once after
turning the ignition switch to the
ON position or starting the engine.
This is to check if the brake switch
which is important part to cancel
cruise control is in normal condition.
Cruise control switch
To set cruise control speed:
OXM053004
OXM053006
CRUISE : Turns cruise control system on or off.
CANCEL: Cancels cruise control
operation.
RES+: Resumes or increases cruise
control speed.
SET-: Sets or decreases cruise control speed.
1. Press the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel to turn the system
on. The CRUISE indicator light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed,
which must be more than 40 km/h
(25 mph ).
5 45
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:30 PM
Page 46
Driving your vehicle
To increase cruise control set
speed:
To decrease the cruising
speed:
OXM053008
3. Move the lever down (to SET-),
and release it at the desired
speed. The SET indicator light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. Release the accelerator
pedal at the same time. The
desired speed will automatically
be maintained.
On a steep grade, the vehicle may
slow down or speed up slightly while
going uphill or downhill.
5 46
OXM053009
OXM053008
Follow either of these procedures:
• Move the lever up (to RES+) and
hold it. Your vehicle will accelerate.
Release the lever at the speed you
want.
• Move the lever up (to RES+) and
release it immediately.
The cruising speed will increase by
2km/h (or 1 mph) each time you
move the lever up (to RES+) in this
manner.
Follow either of these procedures:
• Move the lever down (to SET-) and
hold it. Your vehicle will gradually
slow down. Release the lever at the
speed you want to maintain.
• Move the lever down (to SET-) and
release it immediately.
The cruising speed will decrease
by 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each time you
move the lever down (to SET-) in
this manner.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:30 PM
Page 47
Driving your vehicle
To temporarily accelerate with
the cruise control on:
To cancel cruise control, do
one of the following:
If you want to speed up temporarily
when the cruise control is on,
depress the accelerator pedal.
Increased speed will not interfere
with cruise control operation or
change the set speed.
To return to the set speed, take your
foot off the accelerator.
Each of these actions will cancel
cruise control operation (the SET
indicator light in the instrument cluster will go off), but it will not turn the
system off. If you wish to resume
cruise control operation, push the
RES + switch located on your steering wheel. You will return to your previously preset speed.
OXM053010
• Press the brake pedal.
• Shift into N (Neutral) with an automatic transaxle.
• Push the CANCEL switch located
on the steering wheel.
• Decrease the vehicle speed lower
than the memory speed by 15
km/h (9 mph ).
• Decrease the vehicle speed to less
than approximately 40 km/h (25
mph).
5 47
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:30 PM
Page 48
Driving your vehicle
To resume cruising speed at
more than approximately 40
km/h (25 mph):
To turn cruise control off, do
one of the following:
OXM053006
OXM053009
If any method other than the
CRUISE button was used to cancel
cruising speed and the system is still
activated, the most recent set speed
will automatically resume when you
move the lever up (to RES+).
It will not resume, however, if the
vehicle speed has dropped below
approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).
5 48
• Press the CRUISE button (the
CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster will go off).
• Turn the ignition off.
Both of these actions cancel cruise
control operation. If you want to
resume cruise control operation,
repeat the steps provided in “To set
cruise control speed” on the previous
page.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
2/13/2013
9:53 AM
Page 49
Driving your vehicle
BLIND SPOT DETECTION SYSTEM (BSD) (IF EQUIPPED)
OXM053013
➀ BSD(Blind spot detection)
Warning range is dependent on your
vehicle speed. However, if your vehicle speed is speedy about 10km/h
than other vehicle, the warning is not
operated.
➁ LCA(Lane change assist)
When the vehicle is approaching to
your vehicle at high speed, the warning is operated.
WARNING
• Always check the road conditions while driving for unexpected
situations
even
though the BSD (Blind spot
detection) system is operating.
• Never use the BSD system as
a replacement for careful driving practices. Drivers should
always use their mirrors and
look over their shoulders to
detect other vehicles when
changing lanes. The BSD system is only intended to supplement safe practices.
OXMA053126
The BSD (Blind spot detection) system uses a radar sensor to alert the
driver while driving.
It senses the rear side territory of the
vehicle and provides information to
the driver.
5 49
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:30 PM
Page 50
Driving your vehicle
Operating conditions
Warning type
The indicator on the switch will illuminate when the BSD (Blind spot
detection) system switch is pressed
with the ignition switch ON. If vehicle
speed exceeds 30 km/h (18.6 mph)
the system will activate.
If the ignition switch is turned OFF
and ON the system returns to the
previous state.
When the system is not used turn the
system off by turning off the switch.
When the system is turned on the
warning light will illuminate for 3 seconds on the outside rearview mirror.
The system will activate when:
1.The system is on
2.Vehicle speed is above 30 km/h
(18.6 mph)
3.Other vehicles are detected in the
rear side
5 50
1st stage
OXMA053014
If a vehicle is detected within the
boundary of the system, a yellow
warning light will illuminate inside of
the outside rearview mirror glass.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:31 PM
Page 51
Driving your vehicle
Detecting sensor
2nd stage
Warning message
OXMA053015
The second stage alarm will activate
when:
1.The first stage alert is on
2.The turn signal is on to change a
lane or the hazard warning light is
on
When the second stage alert is activated, a warning light will illuminate
on the outside rearview mirror housing and a alarm will sound.
OXM053016
OXM053053E
The sensors are located on inside of
the rear bumper.
Always keep the rear bumper clean
for the system to work properly.
The message will appear to notify
the driver if there are foreign substances on the rear bumper or it is
hot near the rear bumper. The light
on the switch and the system will
turn off automatically.
Remove the foreign matter on the
rear bumper.
If the system does not work normally
even though the foreign matter is
removed, take your vehicle to an
authorized Kia dealer and have the
system checked.
5 51
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:31 PM
Page 52
Driving your vehicle
WARNING
OXM053054E
If the system does not work properly,
a warning message will appear and
the light on the switch will turn off.
The system will turn off automatically.
Have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
5 52
• The warning light on the outside rearview mirror housing
will illuminate whenever a
vehicle is detected at the rear
side by the system.
To avoid accidents, do not
focus only on the warning
light and neglect to see the
surroundings of the vehicle.
• Drive safely even though the
vehicle is equipped with a
BSD (Blind spot detection)
system. Do not solely rely on
the system but check for yourself before changing lanes.
The system may not alert the
driver in some conditions so
always check the surroundings while driving.
CAUTION
• The system may not work
properly if the bumper has
been replaced or if repair work
has been done near the sensor.
• The detection area differs
according to the roads width.
If the road is narrow the system may detect other vehicles
in the next lane.
• To the contrary, if the road is
very wide the system may not
detect other vehicles.
• The system may turn off due
to strong electromagnetic
waves.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:31 PM
Page 53
Driving your vehicle
Non-operating condition
Driver's Attention
The driver must be cautious in the
following situations in which the system may not assist the driver and
may not function properly.
- Curved roads, tollgates, etc.
- The surrounding of the sensor is
covered by rain, snow, mud, etc
- The rear bumper near the sensor is
covered or hidden with a foreign
matter such as a sticker, bumper
guard, bicycle stand etc.
- The rear bumper is damaged or the
sensor is out of place.
- The height of the vehicle is
changed or altered such as when
the trunk is loaded with heavy
objects, or has abnormal tire pressure etc.
- Due to bad weather such as heavy
rain or snow.
- A fixed object is near such as a
guardrail, etc.
- A lot of amount of metal substances are near the vehicles such
as a construction area.
- A big vehicle is near such as a bus
or truck.
- A motorcycle or bicycle is near.
- A flat trailer like vehicle is near.
- If the vehicle has started at the
same time as the vehicle next to it
and has accelerated.
- When the other vehicle passes by
very fast.
- When changing lanes.
- When going down or up a steep
road where the height of the lane is
different.
- When the other vehicle drives at
the rear very nearby or drives very
close.
- When the temperature near the
bumper is high.
- When a trailer or carrier is installed.
Outside rearview mirror may not
alert the driver when:
- The outside rearview mirror housing is covered with foreign matter.
- The window is covered with foreign
matter.
- The windows are severely tinted.
5 53
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:31 PM
Page 54
Driving your vehicle
ACTIVE ECO SYSTEM
Active ECO operation
OXM053017
Active ECO helps improve fuel efficiency by controlling certain engine
and transaxle system operating
parameters. Fuel efficiency depends
on the driver's driving habit and road
condition.
5 54
• When the Active ECO button is
pressed the ECO indicator (green)
will illuminate to show that the
Active ECO is operating.
• When the Active ECO is activated,
it will remain on until the Active
ECO button is pressed again.
Active ECO does not turn off when
the engine is restarted. To turn off
Active ECO, press the Active ECO
button again.
• If Active ECO is turned off, the system will return to normal mode.
When Active ECO is activated:
• The engine noise may get louder.
• The vehicle speed may slightly be
reduced.
• The air conditioner performance
may be affected.
Limitation of Active ECO operation:
If the following conditions occur while
Active ECO is operating, the system
operation is limited even though
there is no change in the ECO indicator.
• When the coolant temperature is
low: The system will be limited until
engine performance becomes normal.
• When driving up a hill: The system
will be limited to gain power when
driving uphill because the engine
torque is restricted.
• When using sports mode: The system will be limited according to the
shift location.
• When the accelerator pedal is
deeply depressed for a few seconds: The system will be limited,
judging that the driver wants to
speed up.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:31 PM
Page 55
Driving your vehicle
ECONOMICAL OPERATION
Your vehicle's fuel economy depends
mainly on your style of driving, where
you drive and when you drive.
Each of these factors affects how
many miles (kilometers) you can get
from a gallon (liter) of fuel. To operate
your vehicle as economically as possible, use the following driving suggestions to help save money in both
fuel and repairs:
• Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a
moderate rate. Don't make "jackrabbit" starts or full-throttle shifts
and maintain a steady cruising
speed. Don't race between stoplights. Try to adjust your speed to
the traffic so you don't have to
change speeds unnecessarily.
Avoid heavy traffic whenever possible. Always maintain a safe distance from other vehicles so you
can avoid unnecessary braking.
This also reduces brake wear.
• Drive at a moderate speed. The
faster you drive, the more fuel your
vehicle uses. Driving at a moderate
speed, especially on the highway,
is one of the most effective ways to
reduce fuel consumption.
• Don't "ride" the brake pedal. This
can increase fuel consumption and
also increase wear on these components. In addition, driving with
your foot resting on the brake pedal
may cause the brakes to overheat,
which reduces their effectiveness
and may lead to more serious consequences.
• Take care of your tires. Keep them
inflated to the recommended pressure. Incorrect inflation, either too
much or too little, results in unnecessary tire wear. Check the tire
pressures at least once a month.
• Be sure that the wheels are
aligned correctly. Improper alignment can result from hitting curbs
or driving too fast over irregular
surfaces. Poor alignment causes
faster tire wear and may also result
in other problems as well as
greater fuel consumption.
• Keep your vehicle in good condition. For better fuel economy and
reduced maintenance costs, maintain your vehicle in accordance
with the maintenance schedule in
section 7. If you drive your vehicle
in severe conditions, more frequent
maintenance is required (see section 7 for details).
• Keep your vehicle clean. For maximum service, your vehicle should
be kept clean and free of corrosive
materials. It is especially important
that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be
allowed to accumulate on the
underside of the vehicle. This extra
weight can result in increased fuel
consumption and also contribute to
corrosion.
• Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessary weight in your vehicle. Weight
reduces fuel economy.
• Don't let the engine idle longer
than necessary. If you are waiting
(and not in traffic), turn off your
engine and restart only when
you're ready to go.
5 55
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:31 PM
Page 56
Driving your vehicle
• Remember, your vehicle does not
require extended warm-up. After
the engine has started, allow the
engine to run for 10 to 20 seconds
prior to placing the vehicle in gear.
In very cold weather, however, give
your engine a slightly longer warmup period.
• Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine.
Lugging is driving too slowly in a
very high gear resulting in engine
bucking. If this happens, shift to a
lower gear. Over-revving is racing
the engine beyond its safe limit.
This can be avoided by shifting at
the recommended speed.
5 56
• Use your air conditioning sparingly.
The air conditioning system is
operated by engine power so your
fuel economy is reduced when you
use it.
• Open windows at high speeds can
reduce fuel economy.
• Fuel economy is less in crosswinds
and headwinds. To help offset
some of this loss, slow down when
driving in these conditions.
Keeping a vehicle in good operating
condition is important both for economy and safety. Therefore, have an
authorized Kia dealer perform
scheduled inspections and maintenance.
WARNING - Engine off
during
motion
Never turn the engine off to
coast down hills or anytime the
vehicle is in motion. The power
steering and power brakes will
not function properly without
the engine running. Instead,
keep the engine on and downshift to an appropriate gear for
engine braking effect. In addition, turning off the ignition
while driving could engage the
steering wheel lock resulting in
loss of vehicle steering which
could cause serious injury or
death.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:31 PM
Page 57
Driving your vehicle
SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS
Hazardous driving conditions
When hazardous driving conditions
are encountered such as water,
snow, ice, mud, sand, or similar hazards, follow these suggestions:
• Drive cautiously and allow extra
distance for braking.
• Avoid sudden braking or steering.
• When braking with non-ABS
brakes pump the brake pedal with
a light up-and-down motion until
the vehicle is stopped.
WARNING - ABS
Do not pump the brake pedal on
a vehicle equipped with ABS.
• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand,
use second gear. Accelerate slowly to avoid spinning the drive
wheels.
• Use sand, rock salt, or other nonslip material under the drive
wheels to provide traction when
stalled in ice, snow, or mud.
WARNING - Downshifting
Downshifting with an automatic
transaxle, while driving on slippery surfaces can cause an
accident. The sudden change in
tire speed could cause the tires
to skid. Be careful when downshifting on slippery surfaces.
Reducing the risk of a rollover
This multi-purpose passenger vehicle is defined as a Sports Utility
Vehicle (SUV). SUV’s have higher
ground clearance and a narrower
track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off-road
applications. Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of
gravity than ordinary vehicles. An
advantage of the higher ground
clearance is a better view of the
road, which allows you to anticipate
problems. They are not designed for
cornering at the same speeds as
conventional passenger vehicles,
any more than low-slung sports vehicles are designed to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions. Due to
this risk, driver and passengers are
strongly recommended to buckle
their seat belts. In a rollover crash,
an unbelted person is more likely to
die than a person wearing a seat
belt. There are steps that a driver can
make to reduce the risk of a rollover.
If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or
abrupt maneuvers, do not load your
roof rack with heavy cargo, and
never modify your vehicle in any way.
5 57
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:31 PM
Page 58
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - Rollover
As with other Sports Utility
Vehicle (SUV), failure to operate
this vehicle correctly may result
in loss of control, an accident or
vehicle rollover.
• Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles.
• Specific design characteristics (higher ground clearance,
narrower track, etc.) give this
vehicle a higher center of
gravity than ordinary vehicles.
• A SUV is not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional vehicles.
• Avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers.
• In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Make
sure everyone in the vehicle is
properly buckled up.
5 58
WARNING
Your vehicle is equipped with
tires designed to provide safe
ride and handling capability. Do
not use a size and type of tire
and wheel that is different from
the one that is originally
installed on your vehicle. It can
affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which
could lead to steering failure or
rollover and serious injury.
When replacing the tires, be
sure to equip all four tires with
the tire and wheel of the same
size, type, tread, brand and
load-carrying capacity. If you
nevertheless decide to equip
your vehicle with any tire/wheel
combination not recommended
by Kia for off road driving, you
should not use these tires for
highway driving.
Rocking the vehicle
If it is necessary to rock the vehicle
to free it from snow, sand, or mud,
first turn the steering wheel right and
left to clear the area around your
front wheels. Then, shift back and
forth between 1st (First) and R
(Reverse) in vehicles equipped with
a manual transaxle or R (Reverse)
and any forward gear in vehicles
equipped with an automatic
transaxle. Do not race the engine,
and spin the wheels as little as possible. If you are still stuck after a few
tries, have the vehicle pulled out by a
tow vehicle to avoid engine overheating and possible damage to the
transaxle.
CAUTION
Prolonged rocking may cause
engine overheating, transaxle
damage or failure, and tire damage.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:31 PM
Page 59
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - Spinning
tires
Do not spin the wheels, especially at speeds more than 56
km/h (35 mph). Spinning the
wheels at high speeds when the
vehicle is stationary could
cause a tire to overheat which
could result in tire damage that
may injure bystanders.
✽ NOTICE
The ESC system (if equipped)
should be turned OFF prior to rocking the vehicle.
WARNING
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
snow, mud, sand, etc., then you
may attempt to rock the vehicle
free by moving it forward and
backward. Do not attempt this
procedure if people or objects
are anywhere near the vehicle.
During the rocking operation
the vehicle may suddenly move
forward or backward as it
becomes unstuck, causing
injury or damage to nearby people or objects.
Smooth cornering
OUN056051
Avoid braking or gear changing in
corners, especially when roads are
wet. Ideally, corners should always
be taken under gentle acceleration. If
you follow these suggestions, tire
wear will be held to a minimum.
5 59
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:31 PM
Page 60
Driving your vehicle
Driving at night
OCM053010
Because night driving presents more
hazards than driving in the daylight,
here are some important tips to
remember:
• Slow down and keep more distance between you and other vehicles, as it may be more difficult to
see at night, especially in areas
where there may not be any street
lights.
5 60
• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the
glare from other driver's headlights.
• Keep your headlights clean and
properly aimed. (On vehicles not
equipped with the automatic headlight aiming feature.) Dirty or
improperly aimed headlights will
make it much more difficult to see
at night.
• Avoid staring directly at the headlights of oncoming vehicles. You
could be temporarily blinded, and it
will take several seconds for your
eyes to readjust to the darkness.
Driving in the rain
1VQA3003
Rain and wet roads can make driving
dangerous, especially if you’re not
prepared for the slick pavement.
Here are a few things to consider
when driving in the rain:
• A heavy rainfall will make it harder
to see and will increase the distance needed to stop your vehicle,
so slow down.
• Keep your windshield wiping
equipment in good shape. Replace
your windshield wiper blades when
they show signs of streaking or
missing areas on the windshield.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:31 PM
Page 61
Driving your vehicle
• If your tires are not in good condition, making a quick stop on wet
pavement can cause a skid and
possibly lead to an accident. Be
sure your tires are in good shape.
• Turn on your headlights to make it
easier for others to see you.
• Driving too fast through large puddles can affect your brakes. If you
must go through puddles, try to
drive through them slowly.
• If you believe you may have gotten
your brakes wet, apply them lightly
while driving until normal braking
operation returns.
Driving in flooded areas
Avoid driving through flooded areas
unless you are sure the water is no
higher than the bottom of the wheel
hub. Drive through any water slowly.
Allow adequate stopping distance
because brake performance may be
affected.
After driving through water, dry the
brakes by gently applying them several times while the vehicle is moving
slowly.
Driving off-road
Drive carefully off-road because your
vehicle may be damaged by rocks or
roots of trees. Become familiar with
the off-road conditions where you
are going to drive before you begin
driving.
Highway driving
Tires
Adjust the tire inflation pressures to
specification. Low tire inflation pressures will result in overheating and
possible failure of the tires.
Avoid using worn or damaged tires
which may result in reduced traction
or tire failure.
✽ NOTICE
Never exceed the maximum tire
inflation pressure shown on the
tires.
WARNING
• Underinflated or overinflated
tires can cause poor handling,
loss of vehicle control, and
sudden tire failure leading to
accidents, injuries, and even
death. Always check tires for
proper inflation before driving. For proper tire pressures,
refer to “Tires and wheels” in
section 8.
• Driving on tires with no or
insufficient tread is dangerous. Worn-out tires can result
in loss of vehicle control, collisions, injury, and even death.
Worn-out tires should be
replaced as soon as possible
and should never be used for
driving. Always check the tire
tread before driving your vehicle. For further information
and tread limits, refer to “Tires
and wheels” in section 7.
5 61
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:31 PM
Driving your vehicle
Fuel, engine coolant and engine
oil
High speed travel consumes more
fuel than urban motoring. Do not forget to check both the engine coolant
and engine oil.
Drive belt
A loose or damaged drive belt may
result in overheating of the engine.
5 62
Page 62
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:31 PM
Page 63
Driving your vehicle
WINTER DRIVING
Snowy or icy conditions
1VQA3005
Severe weather conditions in the
winter result in greater wear and
other problems. To minimize the
problems of winter driving, you
should follow these suggestions:
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it
may be necessary to use snow tires
on your tires. If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select tires
equivalent in size and type of the
original equipment tires. Failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
Furthermore, speeding, rapid acceleration, sudden brake applications,
and sharp turns are potentially very
hazardous practices.
During deceleration, use engine
braking to the fullest extent. Sudden
brake applications on snowy or icy
roads may cause skids to occur. You
need to keep sufficient distance
between the vehicle in operation in
front of your vehicle. Also, apply the
brake gently.
Snow tires
If you mount snow tires on your vehicle, make sure they are radial tires of
the same size and load range as the
original tires. Mount snow tires on all
four wheels to balance your vehicle’s
handling in all weather conditions.
Keep in mind that the traction provided by snow tires on dry roads may
not be as high as your vehicle's original equipment tires. You should drive
cautiously even when the roads are
clear. Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
Do not install studded tires without
first checking local, state and municipal regulations for possible restrictions against their use.
WARNING - Snow tire
size
Snow tires should be equivalent
in size and type to the vehicle's
standard tires. Otherwise, the
safety and handling of your
vehicle may be adversely affected.
5 63
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:31 PM
Page 64
Driving your vehicle
Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant
Change to "winter weight" oil
if necessary
Your vehicle is delivered with high
quality ethylene glycol coolant in the
cooling system. It is the only type of
coolant that should be used because
it helps prevent corrosion in the cooling system, lubricates the water
pump and prevents freezing. Be sure
to replace or replenish your coolant
in accordance with the maintenance
schedule in section 7. Before winter,
have your coolant tested to assure
that its freezing point is sufficient for
the temperatures anticipated during
the winter.
In some climates it is recommended
that a lower viscosity "winter weight"
oil be used during cold weather. See
section 8 for recommendations. If
you aren't sure what weight oil you
should use, consult an authorized
Kia dealer.
Check battery and cables
Winter puts additional burdens on
the battery system. Visually inspect
the battery and cables as described
in section 7. The level of charge in
your battery can be checked by an
authorized Kia dealer or a service
station.
5 64
Check spark plugs and ignition system
Inspect your spark plugs as
described in section 7 and replace
them if necessary. Also check all
ignition wiring and components to be
sure they are not cracked, worn or
damaged in any way.
To keep locks from freezing
To keep the locks from freezing,
squirt an approved de-icer fluid or
glycerine into the key opening. If a
lock is covered with ice, squirt it with
an approved de-icing fluid to remove
the ice. If the lock is frozen internally,
you may be able to thaw it out by
using a heated key. Handle the heated key with care to avoid injury.
Use approved window washer
anti-freeze in system
To keep the water in the window
washer system from freezing, add an
approved window washer anti-freeze
solution in accordance with instructions on the container. Window washer anti-freeze is available from an
authorized Kia dealer and most auto
parts outlets. Do not use engine
coolant or other types of anti-freeze
as these may damage the paint finish.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:31 PM
Page 65
Driving your vehicle
Don’t let your parking brake
freeze
Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged
position. This is most likely to happen when there is an accumulation
of snow or ice around or near the
rear brakes or if the brakes are wet.
If there is a risk the parking brake
may freeze, apply it only temporarily
while you put the gear shift lever in P
(Park, automatic transaxle) or in first
or reverse gear (manual transaxle)
and block the rear wheels so the
vehicle cannot roll. Then release the
parking brake.
Carry emergency equipment
Depending on the severity of the
weather, you should carry appropriate emergency equipment. Some of
the items you may want to carry
include tow straps or chains, flashlight, emergency flares, sand, shovel, jumper cables, window scraper,
gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, blanket, etc.
Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath
Under some conditions, snow and
ice can build up under the fenders
and interfere with the steering. When
driving in severe winter conditions
where this may happen, you should
periodically check underneath the
vehicle to be sure the movement of
the front wheels and the steering
components are not obstructed.
5 65
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:31 PM
Page 66
Driving your vehicle
TRAILER TOWING
If you are considering towing with
your vehicle, you should first check
with your country's Department of
Motor Vehicles to determine their
legal requirements.
Since laws vary the requirements for
towing trailers, cars, or other types of
vehicles or apparatus may differ. Ask
an authorized Kia dealer for further
details before towing.
WARNING - Towing a
trailer
If you don't use the correct
equipment and/or drive improperly, you can lose control when
you pull a trailer. For example, if
the trailer is too heavy, the
brakes may not work well - or
even at all. You and your passengers could be seriously or
fatally injured. Pull a trailer only
if you have followed all the
steps in this section.
You may require an additional wiring
harness connector to install a trailer
hitch. Please contact an authorized
Kia dealer for more details.
5 66
WARNING - Weight
limits
Before towing, make sure the
total trailer weight, GCW (gross
combination weight), GVW
(gross vehicle weight), GAW
(gross axle weight) and trailer
tongue load are all within the
limits.
CAUTION
Pulling a trailer improperly can
damage your vehicle and result
in costly repairs not covered by
your warranty. To pull a trailer
correctly, follow the advice in
this section.
Your vehicle can tow a trailer.* To
identify what the vehicle trailering
capacity is for your vehicle, you
should read the information in
“Weight of the trailer” that appears
later in this section.
Remember that trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in handling, durability, and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering requires
correct equipment, and it has to be
used properly.
This section contains many timetested, important trailering tips and
safety rules. Many of these are
important for your safety and that of
your passengers. Please read this
section carefully before you pull a
trailer.
Load-pulling components such as
the engine, transaxle, wheel assemblies, and tires are forced to work
harder against the load of the added
weight. The engine is required to
operate at relatively higher speeds
and under greater loads. This additional burden generates extra heat.
The trailer also adds considerably to
wind resistance, increasing the
pulling requirements.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:31 PM
Page 67
Driving your vehicle
Hitches
Safety chains
Trailer brakes
It's important to have the correct
hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large
trucks going by, and rough roads are
a few reasons why you’ll need the
right hitch. Here are some rules to
follow:
• Will you have to make any holes in
the body of your vehicle when you
install a trailer hitch? If you do, then
be sure to seal the holes later
when you remove the hitch.
If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your
exhaust can get into your vehicle,
as well as dirt and water.
• The bumpers on your vehicle are
not intended for hitches. Do not
attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to them. Use
only a frame-mounted hitch that
does not attach to the bumper.
• Kia trailer hitch accessory is available at an authorized Kia dealer.
You should always attach chains
between your vehicle and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer so that the
tongue will not drop to the road if it
becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may
be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.
Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety
chains. Always leave just enough
slack so you can turn with your trailer. And, never allow safety chains to
drag on the ground.
If your trailer is equipped with a braking system, make sure it conforms to
your state’s regulations and that it is
properly installed and operating correctly.
If your trailer weight exceeds the
maximum allowed weight without
trailer brakes, then the trailer will also
require its own brakes as well. Be
sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so you’ll be
able to install, adjust and maintain
them properly.
• Don’t tap into or modify your vehicle's brake system.
WARNING - Trailer
brakes
Do not use a trailer with its own
brakes unless you are absolutely certain that you have properly set up the brake system. This
is not a task for amateurs. Use
an experienced, competent
trailer shop for this work.
5 67
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:31 PM
Page 68
Driving your vehicle
Driving with a trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain
amount of experience. Before setting
out for the open road, you must get
to know your trailer. Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and
braking with the added weight of the
trailer. And always keep in mind that
the vehicle you are driving is now a
good deal longer and not nearly so
responsive as your vehicle is by
itself.
Before you start, check the trailer
hitch and platform, safety chains,
electrical connector(s), lights, tires
and mirror adjustment. If the trailer
has electric brakes, start your vehicle
and trailer moving and then apply the
trailer brake controller by hand to be
sure the brakes are working. This lets
you check your electrical connection
at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally
to be sure that the load is secure,
and that the lights and any trailer
brakes are still working.
5 68
Following distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the
vehicle ahead as you would when
driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations
that require heavy braking and sudden turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance
up ahead when you’re towing a trailer. And, because of the increased
vehicle length, you’ll need to go
much farther beyond the passed
vehicle before you can return to your
lane. Due to the added load to the
engine when going uphill the vehicle
may also take longer to pass than it
would on flat ground.
Backing up
Hold the bottom of the steering
wheel with one hand. Then, to move
the trailer to the left, just move your
hand to the left. To move the trailer to
the right, move your hand to the
right. Always back up slowly and, if
possible, have someone guide you.
Making turns
When you’re turning with a trailer,
make wider turns than normal. Do
this so your trailer won’t strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees,
or other objects near the edge of the
road. Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance before
turning or lane changes.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:31 PM
Page 69
Driving your vehicle
Turn signals when towing a trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle
has to have a different turn signal
flasher and extra wiring. The green
arrows on your instrument panel will
flash whenever you signal a turn or
lane change. Properly connected,
the trailer lights will also flash to alert
other drivers you’re about to turn,
change lanes, or stop.
When towing a trailer, the green
arrows on your instrument panel will
flash for turns even if the bulbs on
the trailer are burned out. Thus, you
may think drivers behind you are
seeing your signals when, in fact,
they are not. It’s important to check
occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working. You must also
check the lights every time you disconnect and then reconnect the
wires.
Do not connect a trailer lighting system directly to your vehicle’s lighting
system. Use only an approved trailer
wiring harness.
An authorized Kia dealer can assist
you in installing the wiring harness.
WARNING
Failure to use an approved trailer wiring harness could result
in damage to the vehicle electrical system and/or personal
injury.
Driving on grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower
gear before you start down a long or
steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your
brakes so much that they would get
hot and no longer operate efficiently.
On a long uphill grade, shift down
and reduce your speed to around 70
km/h (45 mph) to reduce the possibility of engine and transaxle overheating.
If your trailer weighs more than the
maximum trailer weight without trailer brakes and you have an automatic transaxle, you should drive in D
(Drive) when towing a trailer.
Operating your vehicle in D (Drive)
when towing a trailer will minimize
heat build up and extend the life of
your transaxle.
5 69
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:31 PM
Page 70
Driving your vehicle
CAUTION
• When towing a trailer on steep
grades (in excess of 6%) pay
close attention to the engine
coolant temperature gauge to
ensure the engine does not
overheat.
If the needle of the coolant
temperature gauge moves
across the dial towards “H”
(HOT), pull over and stop as
soon as it is safe to do so, and
allow the engine to idle until it
cools down. You may proceed
once the engine has cooled
sufficiently.
• You must decide driving
speed depending on trailer
weight and uphill grade to
reduce the possibility of
engine and transaxle overheating.
5 70
Parking on hills
Generally, if you have a trailer
attached to your vehicle, you should
not park your vehicle on a hill. People
can be seriously or fatally injured,
and both your vehicle and the trailer
can be damaged if they unexpectedly roll downhill.
However, if you ever have to park
your trailer on a hill, here's how to do
it:
WARNING - Parking on
a hill
Parking your vehicle on a hill
with a trailer attached could
cause serious injury or death,
should the trailer break loose or
brake stops working.
1.Pull the vehicle into the parking
space. Turn the steering wheel in
the direction of the curb (right if
headed downhill, left if headed up
hill).
2.If the vehicle has a manual
transaxle, place the vehicle in neutral. If the vehicle has an automatic
transaxle, place the vehicle in P
(Park).
3.Set the parking brake and shut off
the engine.
4.Place chocks under the trailer
wheels on the down hill side of the
wheels.
5.Start the vehicle, hold the brakes,
shift to neutral, release the parking
brake and slowly release the
brakes until the trailer chocks
absorb the load.
6.Reapply the brakes, reapply the
parking brake and shift the vehicle
to R (Reverse) for manual
transaxle or P (Park) for automatic
transaxle.
7.Shut off the vehicle and release the
vehicle brakes but leave the parking brake set.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:31 PM
Page 71
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - Parking
brake
It can be dangerous to get out
of your vehicle if the parking
brake is not firmly set.
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be
seriously or fatally injured.
When you are ready to leave after
parking on a hill
1. With the manual transaxle in
Neutral or automatic transaxle in P
(Park), apply your brakes and hold
the brake pedal down while you:
• Start your engine;
• Shift into gear; and
• Release the parking brake.
2. Slowly remove your foot from the
brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear
of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up
and store the chocks.
Maintenance when trailer towing
Your vehicle will need service more
often when you regularly pull a trailer. Important items to pay particular
attention to include engine oil, automatic transaxle fluid, axle lubricant
and cooling system fluid. Brake condition is another important item to
frequently check. Each item is covered in this manual, and the Index
will help you find them quickly. If
you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to
review these sections before you
start your trip.
Don’t forget to also maintain your
trailer and hitch. Follow the maintenance schedule that accompanied
your trailer and check it periodically.
Preferably, conduct the check at the
start of each day’s driving. Most
importantly, all hitch nuts and bolts
should be tight.
CAUTION
• Due to higher load during
trailer usage, overheating
might occur in hot days or
during uphill driving. If the
coolant gauge indicates overheating, switch off the A/C and
stop the vehicle in a safe area
to cool down the engine.
• When towing check transaxle
fluid more frequently.
5 71
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:31 PM
Page 72
Driving your vehicle
kg (lbs.)
If you do decide to pull a trailer
Here are some important points if
you decide to pull a trailer:
• Consider using a sway control. You
can ask a hitch dealer about sway
control.
• Do not do any towing with your
vehicle during its first 2,000 km
(1,200 miles) in order to allow the
engine to properly break in. Failure
to heed this caution may result in
serious engine or transaxle damage.
• When towing a trailer, be sure to
consult an authorized Kia dealer
for further information on additional
requirements such as a towing kit,
etc.
• Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed (less than 100 km/h
(60 mph)).
• On a long uphill grade, do not
exceed 70 km/h (45 mph) or the
posted towing speed limit,
whichever is lower.
• The chart contains important considerations that have to do with
weight:
5 72
Engine
2.4L
3.3L
Without brake system
750
(1,650)
750
(1,650)
With brake system
907
(1,999)
907
(1,999)
127
(280)
159
(350)
Item
Maximum trailer
weight
Gasoline Engine
Maximum tongue weight
To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you should
read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears later in this section.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:31 PM
Page 73
Driving your vehicle
Weight of the trailer
Tongue Load
Weight of the trailer tongue
Total Trailer Weight
Gross Axle Weight
The trailer tongue should weigh a
maximum of 10% of the total loaded
trailer weight, within the limits of the
maximum permissible trailer tongue
load. After you've loaded your trailer,
weigh the trailer and then the tongue,
separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they aren’t, you may be
able to correct them simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
Gross Vehicle Weight
C190E01JM
C190E02JM
What is the maximum safe weight of
a trailer? It should never weigh more
than the maximum trailer weight with
trailer brakes. But even that can be
too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use
your trailer. For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how often your vehicle is
used to pull a trailer are all important.
The ideal trailer weight can also
depend on any special equipment
that you have on your vehicle.
The tongue load of any trailer is an
important weight to measure
because it affects the total gross
vehicle weight (GVW) of your vehicle. This weight includes the curb
weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who
will be riding in the vehicle. And if you
will tow a trailer, you must add the
tongue load to the GVW because
your vehicle will also be carrying that
weight.
5 73
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:31 PM
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - Trailer
• Never load a trailer with more
weight in the rear than in the
front. The front should be
loaded with approximately
60% of the total trailer load;
the rear should be loaded with
approximately 40% of the total
trailer load.
• Never exceed the maximum
weight limits of the trailer or
trailer towing equipment.
Improper loading can result in
damage to your vehicle and/or
personal
injury.
Check
weights and loading at a commercial scale or highway
patrol office equipped with
scales.
• An improperly loaded trailer
can cause loss of vehicle control.
5 74
Page 74
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:32 PM
Page 75
Driving your vehicle
VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT
OXM059100N/OXMA053203N/OXM059102N/OXMA053205
OXMA059102N/OXMA053204A/OXMA053200N/OXMA053206
Tire and loading information label
The label located on the driver's door sill gives the original tire size, cold tire pressures recommended for your vehicle, the number of people that can be in your vehicle and vehicle capacity weight.
5 75
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
4/10/2013
4:36 PM
Page 76
Driving your vehicle
Vehicle capacity weight:
5 persons : 420 kg (930 lbs.)
7 persons : 506 kg (1120 lbs.)
Vehicle capacity weight is the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo. If your vehicle is equipped
with a trailer, the combined weight
includes the tongue load.
5 76
Seating capacity:
Total - 5 persons
(Front seat : 2 persons,
Rear seat : 3 persons)
- 7 persons
(Front seat : 2 persons,
Rear seat : 5 persons)
Seating capacity is the maximum
number of occupants including a
driver, your vehicle may carry.
However, the seating capacity may
be reduced based upon the weight of
all of the occupants, and the weight
of the cargo being carried or towed.
Do not overload the vehicle as there
is a limit to the total weight, or load
limit including occupants and cargo,
the vehicle can carry.
Towing capacity:
- 2.4L Engine
Without trailer brakes
: 750 kg (1650 lbs.)
With trailer brakes
: 907 kg (2000 lbs.)
- 3.3L Engine
Without trailer brakes
: 750 kg (1650 lbs.)
With trailer brakes
: 907 kg (2000 lbs.)
- with trailer package
: 1588 kg (3500 lbs.)
Towing capacity is the maximum
trailer weight including its cargo
weight, your vehicle can tow.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:32 PM
Page 77
Driving your vehicle
Cargo capacity:
The cargo capacity of your vehicle
will increase or decrease depending
on the weight and the number of
occupants and the tongue load, if
your vehicle is equipped with a trailer.
Steps for determining correct load
limit
1.Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg
or XXX lbs.'' on your vehicle's placard.
2.Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3.Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
the "XXX" amount equals 635 kg
(1400 lbs.) and there will be five 68
kg (150 lbs.) passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity
is 295 kg (650 lbs).
(635-340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg or
1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
5.Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6.If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
5 77
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:32 PM
Page 78
Driving your vehicle
Example 1
A
Example 2
B
C
A
C190F01JM
Item
A
B
C
Description
Total
Vehicle Capacity
635 kg
Weight
(1400 lbs)
Subtract Occupant
136 kg
Weight
(300 lbs)
68 kg (150 lbs) × 2
Available Cargo and 499 kg
Luggage weight (1100 lbs)
Example 3
B
C
A
C190F02JM
Item
A
B
C
Description
Total
Vehicle Capacity
635 kg
Weight
(1400 lbs)
Subtract Occupant
340 kg
Weight
(750 lbs)
68 kg (150 lbs) × 5
Available Cargo and 295 kg
Luggage weight (650 lbs)
B
C
C190F03JM
Item
A
B
C
Description
Total
Vehicle Capacity
635 kg
Weight
(1400 lbs)
Subtract Occupant
390 kg
Weight
78 kg (172 lbs) × 5 (860 lbs)
Available Cargo and 245 kg
Luggage weight (540 lbs)
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle's capacity weight
and seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle's
capacity weight.
5 78
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:32 PM
Page 79
Driving your vehicle
Certification label
The certification label is located on
the driver's door sill at the center pillar.
This label shows the maximum
allowable weight of the fully loaded
vehicle. This is called the GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The
GVWR includes the weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, fuel and
cargo.
This label also tells you the maximum weight that can be supported
by the front and rear axles, called
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
To find out the actual loads on your
front and rear axles, you need to go
to a weigh station and weigh your
vehicle.Your dealer can help you with
this. Be sure to spread out your load
equally on both sides of the centerline.
WARNING - Over
loading
• Never exceed the GVWR for
your vehicle, the GAWR for
either the front or rear axle
and vehicle capacity weight.
Exceeding these ratings can
cause an accident or vehicle
damage. You can calculate the
weight of your load by weighing the items (or people)
before putting them in the
vehicle. Be careful not to overload your vehicle.
• Do not load your vehicle any
heavier than the GVWR, either
the maximum front or rear
GAWR and vehicle capacity
weight. If you do, parts,
including tires on your vehicle
can break, and it can change
the way your vehicle handles
and braking ability. This could
cause you to lose control and
crash. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
The label will help you decide how
much cargo and installed equipment
your vehicle can carry.
If you carry items inside your vehicle
- like suitcases, tools, packages, or
anything else - they are moving as
fast as the vehicle. If you have to stop
or turn quickly, or if there is a crash,
the items will keep going and can
cause an injury if they strike the driver or a passenger.
5 79
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:32 PM
Page 80
Driving your vehicle
WARNING
• Overloading your vehicle can
cause heat buildup in your
vehicle's tires and possible
tire failure that could lead to a
crash.
• Overloading your vehicle can
cause increased stopping distances that could lead to a
crash.
• A crash resulting from poor
handling vehicle damage, tire
failure, or increased stopping
distances could result in serious injury or death.
5 80
CAUTION
• Overloading your vehicle may
cause damage. Repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Do not overload your
vehicle.
• Using heavier suspension
components to get added
durability might not change
your weight ratings. Ask your
dealer to help you load your
vehicle the right way.
WARNING - Loose cargo
Items you carry inside your
vehicle can strike and injure
occupants in a sudden stop or
turn, or in a crash.
• Put items in the cargo area of
your vehicle. Try to spread the
weight evenly.
• Never stack items, like suitcases, inside the vehicle
above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured
child restraint in your vehicle.
• When you carry something
inside the vehicle, secure it.
• Do not drive with a seat folded
down unless necessary.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 5.QXP
1/23/2013
3:32 PM
Page 81
Driving your vehicle
VEHICLE WEIGHT GLOSSARY
This section will guide you in the
proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle
weight within its design rating capability, with or without a trailer.
Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of the vehicle design performance. Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself
with the following terms for determining your vehicle's weight ratings, with
or without a trailer, from the vehicle's
specifications and the certification
label:
Base curb weight
This is the weight of the vehicle
including a full tank of fuel and all
standard equipment. It does not
include passengers, cargo, or optional equipment.
Cargo weight
This figure includes all weight added
to the Base Curb Weight, including
cargo and optional equipment.
GAW (Gross axle weight)
This is the total weight placed on
each axle (front and rear) - including
vehicle curb weight and all payload.
GVWR
(Gross vehicle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle
(including all options, equipment,
passengers and cargo). The GVWR
is shown on the certification label
located on the driver’s door sill.
GAWR
(Gross axle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single
axle (front or rear). These numbers
are shown on the certification label.
The total load on each axle must
never exceed its GAWR.
GVW (Gross vehicle weight)
Vehicle curb weight
This is the weight of your new vehicle
when you picked it up from your dealer plus any aftermarket equipment.
This is the Base Curb Weight plus
actual Cargo Weight plus passengers.
5 81
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 6.QXP
1/23/2013
3:33 PM
Page 1
What to do in an emergency
Road warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
• Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
In case of an emergency while driving. . . . . . . . . . 6-3
• If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing. . . . . . . 6-3
• If you have a flat tire while driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
• If engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
If the engine does not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
• If engine doesn’t turn over or turns over slowly . . . . 6-4
• If engine turns over normally but does not start . . . . 6-4
Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
• Jump starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
• Push-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
If the engine overheats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
If you have a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
• Jack and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
• Removing and storing the spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
• Changing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
• Use of temporary compact spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
• Towing service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 6.QXP
1/23/2013
3:33 PM
Page 2
What to do in an emergency
ROAD WARNING
It should be used whenever emergency repairs are being made or
when the vehicle is stopped near the
edge of a roadway.
Depress the flasher switch with the
ignition switch in any position. The
flasher switch is located in the center
console switch panel. All turn signal
lights will flash simultaneously.
Hazard warning flasher
■ Type A
OXM063002
■ Type B
OXM063001
The hazard warning flasher serves
as a warning to other drivers to exercise
extreme
caution
when
approaching, overtaking, or passing
your vehicle.
6 2
• The hazard warning flasher operates whether your vehicle is running or not.
• The turn signals do not work when
the hazard flasher is on.
• Care must be taken when using
the hazard warning flasher while
the vehicle is being towed.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 6.QXP
1/23/2013
3:33 PM
Page 3
What to do in an emergency
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILE DRIVING
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or
crossing, set the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position and then push the
vehicle to a safe place.
If you have a flat tire while
driving
If a tire goes flat while you are driving:
1.Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal and let the vehicle slow
down while driving straight ahead.
Do not apply the brakes immediately or attempt to pull off the road
as this may cause a loss of control.
When the vehicle has slowed to
such a speed that it is safe to do
so, brake carefully and pull off the
road. Drive off the road as far as
possible and park on a firm level
ground. If you are on a divided
highway, do not park in the median
area between the two traffic lanes.
2.When the vehicle is stopped, turn
on your emergency hazard flashers, set the parking brake and put
the transaxle in P (Park, automatic
transaxle) or reverse (manual
transaxle).
3.Have all passengers get out of the
vehicle. Be sure they all get out on
the side of the vehicle that is away
from traffic.
4.When changing a flat tire, follow
the instruction provided later in this
section.
If the engine stalls while driving
1.Reduce your speed gradually,
keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place.
2.Turn on your emergency flashers.
3.Try to start the engine again. If your
vehicle will not start, contact an
authorized Kia dealer or seek other
qualified assistance.
✽ NOTICE
If there was a check engine light and
loss of power or stall and if safe to do
so to wait at least 10 seconds to
restart the vehicle after it stalls. This
may reset the car so it will no longer
run at low power (limp home) condition.
6 3
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 6.QXP
1/23/2013
3:33 PM
Page 4
What to do in an emergency
IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START
If engine doesn't turn over or
turns over slowly
1.If your vehicle has an automatic
transaxle, be sure the shift lever is
in N (Neutral) or P (Park) and the
emergency brake is set.
2.Check the battery connections to
be sure they are clean and tight.
3.Turn on the interior light. If the light
dims or goes out when you operate
the starter, the battery is discharged.
4.Check the starter connections to
be sure they are securely tightened.
5.Do not push or pull the vehicle to
start it. See instructions for "Jump
starting".
6 4
WARNING
If the engine will not start, do
not push or pull the vehicle to
start it. This could result in a
collision or cause other damage. In addition, push or pull
starting may cause the catalytic
converter to overload and create a fire hazard.
If engine turns over normally
but does not start
1.Check the fuel level.
2.With the ignition switch in the
LOCK position, check all connectors at the ignition coils and spark
plugs. Reconnect any that may be
disconnected or loose.
3.Check the fuel line in the engine
compartment.
4.If the engine still does not start, call
an authorized Kia dealer or seek
other qualified assistance.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 6.QXP
1/23/2013
3:33 PM
Page 5
What to do in an emergency
EMERGENCY STARTING
Jump starting
Jumper Cables
(-)
(+)
(-)
(+)
Booster
battery
Discharged
battery
1VQA4001
Connect cables in numerical order
and disconnect in reverse order.
Jump starting can be dangerous if
done incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid
harm to yourself or damage to your
vehicle or battery, follow these jump
starting procedures. If in doubt, we
strongly recommend that you have a
competent technician or towing service jump start your vehicle.
CAUTION
Use only a 12-volt jumper system. You can damage a 12-volt
starting motor, ignition system,
and other electrical parts
beyond repair by use of a 24volt power supply (either two
12-volt batteries in series or a
24-volt motor generator set).
WARNING - Battery
Never attempt to check the electrolyte level of the battery as
this may cause the battery to
rupture or explode causing serious injury.
WARNING - Battery
• Keep all flames or sparks
away from the battery. The
battery produces hydrogen
gas which may explode if
exposed to flame or sparks.
If these instructions are not
followed exactly, serious personal injury and damage to
the vehicle may occur! If you
are not sure how to follow this
procedure, seek qualified
assistance. Automobile batteries contain sulfuric acid.
This is poisonous and highly
corrosive. When jump starting, wear protective glasses
and be careful not to get acid
on yourself, your clothing or
on the vehicle.
• Do not attempt to jump start
the vehicle if the discharged
battery is frozen or if the electrolyte level is low; the battery
may rupture or explode.
6 5
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 6.QXP
1/23/2013
3:33 PM
Page 6
What to do in an emergency
Jump starting procedure
1.Make sure the booster battery is
12-volt and that its negative terminal is grounded.
2.If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not allow the vehicles to
come in contact.
3.Turn off all unnecessary electrical
loads.
4.Connect the jumper cables in the
exact sequence shown in the illustration. First connect one end of a
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery (1),
then connect the other end to the
positive terminal of the booster
battery (2).
Proceed to connect one end of the
other jumper cable to the negative
terminal of the booster battery (3),
then the other end to a solid, stationary, metallic point (for example,
the engine lifting bracket) away
from the battery (4). Do not connect it to or near any part that
moves when the engine is cranked.
6 6
Do not allow the jumper cables to
contact anything except the correct
battery terminals or the correct
ground. Do not lean over the battery when making connections.
CAUTION - Battery
Push-starting
Vehicles equipped with automatic
transaxle lock system cannot be
push-started.
Follow the directions in this section
for jump-starting.
cables
Do not connect the jumper
cable from the negative terminal
of the booster battery to the
negative terminal of the discharged battery. This can cause
the discharged battery to overheat and crack, releasing battery acid.
5.Start the engine of the vehicle with
the booster battery and let it run at
2,000 rpm, then start the engine of
the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
If the cause of your battery discharging is not apparent, you should have
your vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING
Never tow a vehicle to start it
because the sudden surge forward when the engine starts
could cause a collision with the
tow vehicle.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 6.QXP
1/23/2013
3:33 PM
Page 7
What to do in an emergency
IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS
If your temperature gauge indicates
overheating, you experience a loss
of power, or hear loud pinging or
knocking, the engine will probably be
too hot. If this happens, you should:
1.Pull off the road and stop as soon
as it is safe to do so.
2.Place the shift lever in P (Park,
automatic transaxle) or Neutral
(manual transaxle) and set the
parking brake. If the air conditioning is on, turn it off.
3.If engine coolant is running out
under the vehicle or steam is coming out from underneath the hood,
stop the engine. Do not open the
hood until the coolant has stopped
running or the steaming has
stopped. If there is no visible loss
of engine coolant and no steam,
leave the engine running and
check to be sure the engine cooling fan is operating. If the fan is not
running, turn the engine off.
4.Check to see if the water pump
drive belt is missing. If it is not
missing, check to see that it is
tight. If the drive belt seems to be
satisfactory, check for coolant leaking from the radiator, hoses or
under the vehicle. (If the air conditioning had been in use, it is normal for cold water to be draining
from it when you stop).
WARNING
While the engine is running,
keep hair, hands and clothing
away from moving parts such
as the fan and drive belts to prevent injury.
5.If the water pump drive belt is broken or engine coolant is leaking
out, stop the engine immediately
and call the nearest authorized Kia
dealer for assistance.
WARNING
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. This
may result in coolant being
blown out of the opening and
cause serious burns.
6.If you cannot find the cause of the
overheating, wait until the engine
temperature has returned to normal. Then, if coolant has been lost,
carefully add coolant to the reservoir to bring the fluid level in the
reservoir up to the halfway mark.
7.Proceed with caution, keeping
alert for further signs of overheating. If overheating happens again,
call an authorized Kia dealer for
assistance.
CAUTION
Serious loss of coolant indicates there is a leak in the cooling system and this should be
checked as soon as possible by
an authorized Kia dealer.
6 7
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 6.QXP
1/23/2013
3:33 PM
Page 8
What to do in an emergency
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE
Jacking instructions
The jack is provided for emergency
tire changing only.
To prevent the jack from “rattling”
while the vehicle is in motion, store it
properly.
Follow jacking instructions to reduce
the possibility of personal injury.
Jack and tools
OXM063003
The jack, jack handle, wheel lug nut
wrench are stored in the luggage
compartment.
Pull up the luggage box cover to
reach this equipment.
(1) Jack handle
(2) Jack
(3) Wheel lug nut wrench
(4) Socket
6 8
WARNING - Changing
tires
• Never attempt vehicle repairs
in the traffic lanes of a public
road or highway.
• Always move the vehicle completely off the road and onto
the shoulder before trying to
change a tire. The jack should
be used on a firm level
ground. If you cannot find a
firm, level place off the road,
call a towing service company
for assistance.
• Be sure to use the correct
front and rear jacking positions on the vehicle; never
use the bumpers or any other
part of the vehicle for jack
support.
(Continued)
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 6.QXP
1/23/2013
3:33 PM
Page 9
What to do in an emergency
(Continued)
• The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack causing serious
injury or death. No person
should place any portion of
their body under a vehicle that
is supported only by a jack;
use vehicle support stands.
• Do not start or run the engine
while the vehicle is on the
jack.
• Do not allow anyone to remain
in the vehicle while it is on the
jack.
• Make sure any children present are in a secure place away
from the road and from the
vehicle to be raised with the
jack.
Removing and storing the
spare tire
OXM063005
OXM063004
Your spare tire is stored underneath
your vehicle, directly below the cargo
area.
To remove the spare tire:
1.Open the tailgate.
2.Find the hex bolt cover and bend
the cover back.
3.Connect the socket and wheel lug
nut wrench.
4.Use the wheel lug nut wrench to
loosen the bolt enough to lower the
spare tire.
Turn the wrench counterclockwise
until the spare tire reaches the
ground.
6 9
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 6.QXP
1/23/2013
3:34 PM
Page 10
What to do in an emergency
WARNING
Ensure the spare tire retainer is
properly aligned with the center
of the spare tire to prevent the
spare tire from “rattling”.
Otherwise, it may cause the
spare tire to fall off the carrier
and lead to an accident.
OXM069004
OXM069005
5.After the spare tire reaches the
ground, continue to turn the
wrench counterclockwise, and
draw the spare tire outside. Never
rotate the wrench excessively, otherwise the spare tire carrier may be
damaged.
6.Remove the retainer (1) from the
center of the spare tire.
To store the spare tire:
1.Lay the tire on the ground with the
valve stem facing up.
2.Place the wheel under the vehicle
and install the retainer (1) through
the wheel center.
3.Turn the wrench clockwise until it
clicks.
6 10
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 6.QXP
1/23/2013
3:34 PM
Page 11
What to do in an emergency
Changing tires
WARNING - Changing
a tire
1VQA4023
1VQA4022
1.Park on a level surface and apply
the parking brake firmly.
2.Place the transaxle shift lever in R
(Reverse) with manual transaxle or
P (Park) with automatic transaxle.
3.Activate the hazard warning flashers.
4.Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,
jack, jack handle, and spare tire
from the vehicle.
5.Block both the front and rear of the
wheel that is diagonally opposite
from the jack position.
• To prevent vehicle movement
while changing a tire, always
set the parking brake fully,
and always block the wheel
diagonally opposite the wheel
being changed.
• We recommend that the
wheels of the vehicle be
blocked, and that no person
remain in a vehicle that is
being jacked.
6 11
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 6.QXP
1/23/2013
3:34 PM
Page 12
What to do in an emergency
OXM069006
OCM054013
OAM069009
6.Loosen the wheel lug nuts counterclockwise one turn each, but do
not remove any nut until the tire
has been raised off the ground.
7.Place the jack at the front or rear
jacking position closest to the tire
you are changing. Place the jack at
the designated locations under the
frame.
8.Insert the jack handle into the jack
and turn it clockwise, raising the
vehicle until the tire just clears the
ground. This measurement is
approximately 30 mm (1 in.).
Before removing the wheel lug
nuts, make sure the vehicle is stable and that there is no chance for
movement or slippage.
WARNING - Jack
location
To reduce the possibility of
injury, be sure to use only the
jack provided with the vehicle
and in the correct jack position;
never use any other part of the
vehicle for jack support.
6 12
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 6.QXP
1/23/2013
3:34 PM
Page 13
What to do in an emergency
9.Loosen the wheel nuts and remove
them with your fingers. Slide the
wheel off the studs and lay it flat so
it cannot roll away. To put the wheel
on the hub, pick up the spare tire,
line up the holes with the studs and
slide the wheel onto them. If this is
difficult, tip the wheel slightly and
get the top hole in the wheel lined
up with the top stud. Then jiggle the
wheel back and forth until the
wheel can slide over the other
studs.
WARNING
Wheels may have sharp edges.
Handle them carefully to avoid
possible severe injury. Before
putting the wheel into place, be
sure that there is nothing on the
hub or wheel (such as mud, tar,
gravel, etc.) that prevents the
wheel from fitting solidly
against the hub.
If there is, remove it. If the contact of the mounting surface
between the wheel and hub is
not good, the wheel nuts could
come loose and cause the loss
of a wheel. Loss of a wheel may
result in loss of control of the
vehicle. This may cause serious
injury or death.
10. To install the wheel, hold it on the
studs, put the wheel nuts on the
studs and tighten them finger
tight. Jiggle the tire to be sure it is
completely seated, then tighten
the nuts as much as possible
with your fingers again.
11. Insert the wrench into the jack
and lower the vehicle to the
ground by turning the wheel nut
wrench counterclockwise.
6 13
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 6.QXP
1/23/2013
3:34 PM
Page 14
What to do in an emergency
OUN047019
Then position the wrench as shown
in the drawing and tighten the wheel
nuts. Be sure the socket is seated
completely over the nut. Do not stand
on the wrench handle or use an
extension pipe over the wrench handle. Go around the wheel tightening
every nut following the numerical
sequence shown in the image until
they are all tight. Then double-check
each nut for tightness. After changing
wheels, have an authorized Kia dealer tighten the wheel nuts to their
proper torque as soon as possible.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
9~11 kg·m (65~79 lb·ft)
6 14
If you have a tire gauge, remove the
valve cap and check the air pressure.
If the pressure is lower than recommended, drive slowly to the nearest
service station and inflate to the correct pressure. If it is too high, adjust
it until it is correct. Always reinstall
the valve cap after checking or
adjusting the tire pressure. If the cap
is not replaced, dust and dirt may get
into the tire valve and air may leak
from the tire. If you lose a valve cap,
buy another and install it as soon as
possible.
After you have changed the wheels,
always secure the flat tire in its place
and return the jack and tools to their
proper storage locations.
CAUTION
Your vehicle has metric threads
on the wheel studs and nuts.
Make certain during wheel
removal that the same nuts that
were removed are reinstalled or, if replaced, that nuts with
metric threads and the same
chamfer configuration are used.
Installation of a non-metric
thread nut on a metric stud or
vice-versa will not secure the
wheel to the hub properly and
will damage the stud so that it
must be replaced.
Note that most lug nuts do not
have metric threads. Be sure to
use extreme care in checking
for thread style before installing
aftermarket lug nuts or wheels.
If in doubt, consult an authorized Kia dealer.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 6.QXP
1/23/2013
3:34 PM
Page 15
What to do in an emergency
WARNING - Wheel studs
If the studs are damaged, they
may lose their ability to retain
the wheel. This could lead to the
loss of the wheel and a collision
resulting in serious injuries.
To prevent the jack, jack handle,
wheel lug nut wrench and spare tire
from rattling while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
WARNING - Inadequate
spare tire pressure
Check the inflation pressures
as soon as possible after
installing the spare tire. Adjust
it to the specified pressure, if
necessary. Refer to “Tires and
wheels” in section 8.
Important - use of compact spare
tire (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare tire. This compact spare
tire takes up less space than a regular-size tire. This tire is smaller than a
conventional tire and is designed for
temporary use only.
CAUTION
• You should drive carefully
when the compact spare is in
use. The compact spare
should be replaced by the
proper conventional tire and
rim at the first opportunity.
• The operation of this vehicle
is not recommended with
more than one compact spare
tire in use at the same time.
WARNING
The compact spare tire is for
emergency use only. Do not
operate your vehicle on this
compact spare at speeds over
80 km/h (50 mph). The original
tire should be repaired or
replaced as soon as possible to
avoid failure of the spare possibly leading to personal injury or
death.
The compact spare should be inflated to 420 kPa (60 psi).
✽ NOTICE
Check the inflation pressure after
installing the spare tire. Adjust it to
the specified pressure, as necessary.
6 15
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 6.QXP
1/23/2013
3:34 PM
Page 16
What to do in an emergency
When using a compact spare tire,
observe the following precautions:
• Under no circumstances should
you exceed 80 km/h (50 mph); a
higher speed could damage the
tire.
• Ensure that you drive slowly
enough for the road conditions to
avoid all hazards. Any road hazard,
such as a pothole or debris, could
seriously damage the compact
spare.
• Any continuous road use of this tire
could result in tire failure, loss of
vehicle control, and possible personal injury.
• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maximum load rating or the load-carrying capacity shown on the sidewall
of the compact spare tire.
6 16
• Avoid driving over obstacles. The
compact spare tire diameter is
smaller than the diameter of a conventional tire and reduces the
ground clearance approximately
25 mm (1 inch), which could result
in damage to the vehicle.
• Do not take this vehicle through an
automatic vehicle wash while the
compact spare tire is installed.
• Do not use the compact spare tire
on any other vehicle because this
tire has been designed especially
for your vehicle.
• The compact spare tire’s tread life
is shorter than a regular tire.
Inspect your compact spare tire
regularly and replace worn compact spare tires with the same size
and design, mounted on the same
wheel.
• The compact spare tire should not
be used on any other wheels, nor
should standard tires, snow tires,
wheel covers or trim rings be used
with the compact spare wheel. If
such use is attempted, damage to
these items or other vehicle components may occur.
• Do not use more than one compact
spare tire at a time.
• Do not tow a trailer while the compact spare tire is installed.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 6.QXP
1/23/2013
3:34 PM
Page 17
What to do in an emergency
TOWING
For trailer towing guidelines information, refer to “Trailer towing” in section 5.
Towing service
On 4WD vehicles, your vehicle must
be towed with a wheel lift and dollies
or flatbed equipment with all the
wheels off the ground.
CAUTION
dolly
dolly
OXM069028
If emergency towing is necessary,
we recommend having it done by an
authorized Kia dealer or a commercial tow-truck service. Proper lifting
and towing procedures are necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle. The use of wheel dollies or
flatbed is recommended.
The 4WD vehicle should never
be towed with the wheels on the
ground. This can cause serious
damage to the transaxle or the
4WD system.
WARNING
If your vehicle is equipped with
side and curtain air bag, set the
ignition switch to LOCK or ACC
position when the vehicle is
being towed.
The side and curtain air bag
may deploy when the ignitions
is ON, and the rollover sensor
detects the situation as a
rollover.
On 2WD vehicles, it is acceptable to
tow the vehicle with the rear wheels
on the ground (without dollies) and
the front wheels off the ground.
If any of the loaded wheels or suspension components are damaged
or the vehicle is being towed with the
front wheels on the ground, use a
towing dolly under the front wheels.
When being towed by a commercial
tow truck and wheel dollies are not
used, the front of the vehicle should
always be lifted, not the rear.
6 17
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 6.QXP
1/23/2013
3:34 PM
Page 18
What to do in an emergency
When towing your vehicle in an
emergency without wheel dollies :
1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC
position.
2. Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
3. Release the parking brake.
OUN046030
CAUTION
Failure to place the transaxle
shift lever in N (Neutral) may
cause internal damage to the
transaxle.
OCM054034
CAUTION
• Do not tow the vehicle backwards with the front wheels on
the ground as this may cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Do not tow with sling-type
equipment. Use wheel lift or
flatbed equipment.
6 18
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:35 PM
Page 1
Maintenance
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
• Owner’s responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
• Owner maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
• Filter inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Owner maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
• Blade inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
• Blade replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
• Owner maintenance schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
Scheduled maintenance service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 7-27
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
• For best battery service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
• Battery recharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
• Reset items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
• Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
• Changing the engine oil and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
• Checking the coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
• Changing the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Brake/clutch fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
• Checking the brake/clutch fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
• Checking the washer fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
• Checking the parking brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Air cleaner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
• Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
• Tire care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
• Recommended cold tire inflation pressures . . . . . . . 7-50
• Checking tire inflation pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
• Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
• Wheel alignment and tire balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
• Tire replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
• Wheel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
• Tire traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
• Tire maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
• Tire sidewall labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
7
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:35 PM
Page 2
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64
• Fuse/relay panel description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-68
Appearance care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-74
• Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-74
• Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-79
Emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-81
7
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:35 PM
Page 3
Maintenance
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
■ 2.4L GDI
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
5. Fuse box
6. Positive battery terminal
7. Negative battery terminal
8. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
9. Radiator cap
10. Engine oil dipstick
* : if equipped
* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OXMA072001
7 3
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:35 PM
Page 4
Maintenance
■ 3.3L GDI
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
5. Fuse box
6. Negative battery terminal
7. Positive battery terminal
8. Radiator cap
9. Engine oil dipstick
10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
* if equipped
* The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OXMA073001
7 4
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:35 PM
Page 5
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE SERVICES
You should exercise the utmost care
to prevent damage to your vehicle
and injury to yourself whenever performing any maintenance or inspection procedures.
Should you have any doubts concerning the inspection or servicing of
your vehicle, we strongly recommend that you have an authorized
Kia dealer perform this work.
An authorized Kia dealer has factory
trained technicians and genuine Kia
parts to service your vehicle properly. For expert advice and quality service, see an authorized Kia dealer.
Inadequate, incomplete or insufficient servicing may result in operational problems with your vehicle that
could lead to vehicle damage, an
accident, or personal injury.
Owner’s responsibility
✽ NOTICE
Maintenance Service and Record
Retention are the owner's responsibility.
We recommend you have your vehicle maintained and repaired by an
authorized Kia dealer. An authorized
Kia dealer meets Kia’s high service
quality standards and receives technical support from Kia in order to provide you with a high level of service
satisfaction.
You should retain documents that
show proper maintenance has been
performed on your vehicle in accordance with the scheduled maintenance service charts shown on the
following pages. You need this information to establish your compliance
with the servicing and maintenance
requirements of your vehicle warranties.
Detailed warranty information is provided in your Warranty & Consumer
Information manual.
Repairs and adjustments required as
a result of improper maintenance or
a lack of required maintenance are
not covered.
7 5
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:35 PM
Page 6
Maintenance
Owner maintenance precautions
Improper or incomplete service may
result in problems. This section gives
instructions only for the maintenance
items that are easy to perform.
As explained earlier in this section,
several procedures can be done only
by an authorized Kia dealer with special tools.
✽ NOTICE
Improper owner maintenance during the warranty period may affect
warranty coverage. For details, read
the separate Warranty & Consumer
Information manual provided with
the vehicle. If you're unsure about
any servicing or maintenance procedure, have it done by an authorized
Kia dealer.
7 6
WARNING Maintenance work
• Performing maintenance work
on a vehicle can be dangerous. You can be seriously
injured while performing some
maintenance procedures. If
you lack sufficient knowledge
and experience or the proper
tools and equipment to do the
work, have it done by an
authorized Kia dealer.
• Working under the hood with
the engine running is dangerous. It becomes even more
dangerous when you wear
jewelry or loose clothing.
These can become entangled
in moving parts and result in
injury. Therefore, if you must
run the engine while working
under the hood, make certain
that you remove all jewelry
(especially rings, bracelets,
watches, and necklaces) and
all neckties, scarves, and similar loose clothing before getting near the engine or cooling
fans.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:35 PM
Page 7
Maintenance
OWNER MAINTENANCE
The following lists are vehicle checks
and inspections that should be performed by the owner or an authorized Kia dealer at the frequencies
indicated to help ensure safe,
dependable operation of your vehicle.
Any adverse conditions should be
brought to the attention of your dealer as soon as possible.
These Owner Maintenance Checks
are generally not covered by warranties and you may be charged for
labor, parts and lubricants used.
Owner maintenance schedule
When you stop for fuel:
• Check the engine oil level.
• Check the coolant level in the
coolant reservoir.
• Check the windshield washer fluid
level.
• Look for low or under-inflated tires.
WARNING
Be careful when checking your
engine coolant level when the
engine is hot. Scalding hot
coolant and steam may blow
out under pressure. This could
cause burns or other serious
injury.
While operating your vehicle:
• Note any changes in the sound of
the exhaust or any smell of
exhaust fumes in the vehicle.
• Check for vibrations in the steering
wheel. Notice any increased steering effort or looseness in the steering wheel, or change in its straightahead position.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly
turns slightly or “pulls” to one side
when traveling on smooth, level
road.
• When stopping, listen and check
for unusual sounds, pulling to one
side, increased brake pedal travel
or “hard-to-push” brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the
operation of your transaxle occurs,
check the transaxle fluid level.
• Check the automatic transaxle P
(Park) function.
• Check the parking brake.
• Check for fluid leaks under your
vehicle (water dripping from the air
conditioning system during or after
use is normal).
7 7
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:35 PM
Page 8
Maintenance
At least monthly:
• Check the coolant level in the
engine coolant reservoir.
• Check the operation of all exterior
lights, including the stoplights, turn
signals and hazard warning flashers.
• Check the inflation pressures of all
tires including the spare.
At least twice a year
(i.e., every Spring and Fall):
• Check the radiator, heater and air
conditioning hoses for leaks or
damage.
• Check the windshield washer
spray and wiper operation. Clean
the wiper blades with clean cloth
dampened with washer fluid.
• Check the headlight alignment.
• Check the muffler, exhaust pipes,
shields and clamps.
• Check the lap/shoulder belts for
wear and function.
• Check for worn tires and loose
wheel lug nuts.
7 8
At least once a year:
• Clean the body and door drain
holes.
• Lubricate the door hinges and
checks, and hood hinges.
• Lubricate the door and hood locks
and latches.
• Lubricate the door rubber weatherstrips.
• Check the air conditioning system.
• Inspect and lubricate the automatic transaxle linkage and controls.
• Clean the battery and terminals.
• Check the brake fluid level.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:35 PM
Page 9
Maintenance
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Follow the Normal Maintenance
Schedule if the vehicle is usually
operated where none of the following
conditions apply. If any of the following conditions apply, follow the
Maintenance Under Severe Usage
Conditions.
• Repeated short distance driving.
• Driving in dusty conditions or
sandy areas.
• Extensive use of brakes.
• Driving in areas where salt or other
corrosive materials are being used.
• Driving on rough or muddy roads.
• Driving in mountainous areas.
• Extended periods of idling or low
speed operation.
• Driving for a prolonged period in
cold temperatures and/or extremely humid climates.
• More than 50% driving in heavy
city traffic during hot weather
above 32°C (90°F).
If your vehicle is operated under the
above conditions, you should
inspect, replace or refill more frequently than the following Normal
Maintenance Schedule. After 120
months or 240,000 km (150,000
miles) continue to follow the prescribed maintenance intervals.
7 9
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:35 PM
Page 10
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance.
Keep receipts for all vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the
frequency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.
*1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one
bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
2
* : Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be
maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends on
fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters
like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard
starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult
an authorized Kia dealer for details.
7 10
*3 : Transfer case oil and rear axle oil should be changed
anytime they have been submerged in water.
4
* : Inspect for excessive tappet noise and/or engine
vibration and adjust if necessary.
5
* : The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur
or tension is reduced excessively.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:35 PM
Page 11
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 6 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *6
(12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *1
(12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake pedal free play
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 12 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 24 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *1
(24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 24 months)
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake pedal free play
❑ Inspect all latch, hinges and locks
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
7 11
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:35 PM
Page 12
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
36,000 km (22,500 miles) or 18 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(36,000 km (22,500 miles) or 36 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *1
(36,000 km (22,500 miles) or 36 months)
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake pedal free play
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
48,000 km (30,000 miles) or 24 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect fuel filter *2
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *2
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
(Continued)
7 12
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
2/13/2013
9:55 AM
Page 13
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
(Continued)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(48,000 km (30,000 miles) or 48 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *1
(48,000 km (30,000 miles) or 48 months)
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake pedal free play
❑ Inspect all latch, hinges and locks
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
60,000 km (37,500 miles) or 30 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid
(Every 40,000 miles or 48 months)
❑ Inspect rear axle oil (AWD) *3
❑ Inspect transfer case oil (AWD) *3
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(60,000 km (37,500 miles) or 60 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *1
(60,000 km (37,500 miles) or 60 months)
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake pedal free play
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
7 13
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
2/13/2013
9:55 AM
Page 14
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
72,000 km (45,000 miles) or 36 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(72,000 km (45,000 miles) or 72 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *1
(72,000 km (45,000 miles) or 72 months)
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake pedal free play
❑ Inspect all latch, hinges and locks
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
7 14
84,000 km (52,500 miles) or 42 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(84,000 km (52,500 miles) or 84 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *1
(84,000 km (52,500 miles) or 84 months)
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake pedal free play
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
2/13/2013
9:55 AM
Page 15
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 48 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect fuel filter *2
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *2
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank
❑ Inspect valve clearance *4
(Continued)
❑ Inspect drive belts
(First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months
after every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 24 months) *5
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 96 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *1
(96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 96 months)
❑ Replace coolant
(First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 60 months
after every 48,000 km (30,000 miles) or 24 months)
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake pedal free play
❑ Inspect all latch, hinges and locks
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
(Continued)
7 15
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
2/13/2013
9:55 AM
Page 16
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
108,000 km (67,500 miles) or 54 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(108,000 km (67,500 miles) or 108 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *1
(108,000 km (67,500 miles) or 108 months)
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake pedal free play
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
120,000 km (75,000 miles) or 60 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid
(Every 40,000 miles or 48 months)
❑ Inspect rear axle oil (AWD) *3
❑ Inspect transfer case oil (AWD) *3
❑ Inspect drive belts
(First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months
after every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 24 months)*5
(Continued)
7 16
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
2/13/2013
9:55 AM
Page 17
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
(Continued)
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(120,000 km (75,000 miles) or 120 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *1
(120,000 km (75,000 miles) or 120 months)
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake pedal free play
❑ Inspect all latch, hinges and locks
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
132,000 km (82,500 miles) or 66 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(132,000 km (82,500 miles) or 132 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *1
(132,000 km (82,500 miles) or 132 months)
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake pedal free play
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
7 17
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
2/13/2013
9:55 AM
Page 18
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
144,000 km (90,000 miles) or 72 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect fuel filter *2
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *2
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank
❑ Inspect drive belts
(First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months
after every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 24 months) *5
(Continued)
7 18
(Continued)
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(144,000 km (90,000 miles) or 144 months)
❑ Replace coolant
(First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 60 months
after every 48,000 km (30,000 miles) or 24 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *1
(144,000 km (90,000 miles) or 144 months)
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake pedal free play
❑ Inspect all latch, hinges and locks
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
2/13/2013
9:55 AM
Page 19
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
156,000 km (97,500 miles) or 78 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(156,000 km (97,500 miles) or 156 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *1
(156,000 km (97,500 miles) or 156 months)
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake pedal free play
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
168,000 km (105,000 miles) or 84 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect drive belts
(First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months
after every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 24 months) *5
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(168,000 km (105,000 miles) or 168 months)
(Continued)
7 19
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
2/13/2013
9:55 AM
Page 20
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
(Continued)
180,000 km (112,500 miles) or 90 months
❑ Add fuel additive *
(168,000 km (105,000 miles) or 168 months)
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake pedal free play
❑ Inspect all latch, hinges and locks
1
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid
(Every 40,000 miles or 48 months)
❑ Inspect rear axle oil (AWD) *3
❑ Inspect transfer case oil (AWD) *3
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(180,000 km (112,500 miles) or 180 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *1
(180,000 km (112,500 miles) or 180 months)
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake pedal free play
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
7 20
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
2/13/2013
9:55 AM
Page 21
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
192,000 km (120,000 miles) or 96 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect fuel filter *2
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *2
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank
❑ Inspect valve clearance *4
❑ Inspect drive belts
(First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months
after every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 24 months) *5
(Continued)
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(192,000 km (120,000 miles) or 192 months)
❑ Replace coolant
(First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 60 months
after every 48,000 km (30,000 miles) or 24 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *1
(192,000 km (120,000 miles) or 192 months)
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake pedal free play
❑ Inspect all latch, hinges and locks
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
(Continued)
7 21
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
2/13/2013
9:55 AM
Page 22
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
204,000 km (127,500 miles) or 102 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(204,000 km (127,500 miles) or 204 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *1
(204,000 km (127,500 miles) or 204 months)
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake pedal free play
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
216,000 km (135,000 miles) or 108 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect drive belts
(First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months
after every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 24 months) *5
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace spark plugs
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(216,000 km (135,000 miles) or 216 months)
(Continued)
7 22
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
2/13/2013
9:55 AM
Page 23
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
(Continued)
228,000 km (142,500 miles) or 114 months
❑ Add fuel additive *
(216,000 km (135,000 miles) or 216 months)
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake pedal free play
❑ Inspect all latch, hinges and locks
1
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(228,000 km (142,500 miles) or 228 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *1
(228,000 km (142,500 miles) or 228 months)
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake pedal free play
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
7 23
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
2/13/2013
9:55 AM
Page 24
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
240,000 km (150,000 miles) or 120 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect fuel filter *2
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *2
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank
❑ Inspect rear axle oil (AWD) *3
❑ Inspect transfer case oil (AWD) *3
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid
(Every 40,000 miles or 48 months)
❑ Inspect drive belts
(First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months
after every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 24 months) *5
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(240,000 km (150,000 miles) or 240 months)
❑ Replace coolant
(First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 60 months
after every 48,000 km (30,000 miles) or 24 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *1
(240,000 km (150,000 miles) or 240 months)
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake pedal free play
❑ Inspect all latch, hinges and locks
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
No check, No service required
❑ Automatic transaxle fluid (if equipped)
7 24
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
2/13/2013
9:55 AM
Page 25
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer
to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace
I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER
R
EVERY 6,000 KM (3,750 MILES)
OR 6 MONTHS
DRIVING CONDITION
A, B, C, D, E, F, G,
H, I, J, K
AIR CLEANER FILTER
R
MORE FREQUENTLY
C, E
SPARK PLUGS
R
MORE FREQUENTLY
A, B, H, I, K
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID
R
EVERY 96,000 KM (60,000 MILES)
A, C, E, F, G, I
MANUAL TRANSAXLE FLUID
R
EVERY 120,000 KM (80,000 MILES)
C, E, F, G, I, J
FRONT BRAKE DISC/PADS, CALIPERS
I
MORE FREQUENTLY
C, D, G, H
REAR BRAKE DISC/PADS
I
MORE FREQUENTLY
C, D, G, H
PARKING BRAKE
I
MORE FREQUENTLY
C, D, G, H
STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE &
BOOTS/LOWER ARM BALL JOINT,
UPPER ARM BALL JOINT
I
MORE FREQUENTLY
C, D, E, F, G, H, I
MAINTENANCE ITEM
7 25
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:35 PM
Page 26
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
DRIVING CONDITION
DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS
I
EVERY 12,000 KM (7,500 MILES) OR
6 MONTHS
C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
TRANSFER CASE OIL (AWD)
R
EVERY 120,000 KM (75,000 MILES)
C, D, E, G, H, I, J
REAR AXLE OIL (AWD)
R
EVERY 120,000 KM (75,000 MILES)
C, D, E, G, H, I, J
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER
(FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER
UNIT)
R
MORE FREQUENTLY
C, E
PROPELLER SHAFT
I
EVERY 12,000 KM (7,500 MILES) OR
6 MONTHS
C, E
MAINTENANCE ITEM
SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS
A - Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 8 km (5 miles)
in normal temperature or less than 16 km (10 miles) in freezing temperature
B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances
C- Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or saltspread roads
D- Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in
very cold weather
E - Driving in sandy areas
7 26
F - Driving in heavy traffic area over 32°C (90°F)
G- Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road
H- Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack
I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle
towing
J - Driving over 170 km/h (106 mph)
K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:35 PM
Page 27
Maintenance
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Engine oil and filter
Fuel filter (cartridge)
The engine oil and filter should be
changed at the intervals specified in
the maintenance schedule. If the
vehicle is being driven in severe conditions, more frequent oil and filter
changes are required.
A clogged filter can limit the speed at
which the vehicle may be driven,
damage the emission system and
cause multiple issues such as hard
starting. If an excessive amount of
foreign matter accumulates in the
fuel tank, the filter may require
replacement more frequently.
After installing a new filter, run the
engine for several minutes, and
check for leaks at the connections.
Fuel filters should be installed by an
authorized Kia dealer.
Drive belts
Inspect all drive belts for evidence of
cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil
saturation and replace if necessary.
Drive belts should be checked periodically for proper tension and
adjusted as necessary.
Fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and
connections for leakage and damage. Have an authorized Kia dealer
replace any damaged or leaking
parts immediately.
Vapor hose and fuel filler cap
The vapor hose and fuel filler cap
should be inspected at those intervals specified in the maintenance
schedule. Make sure that a new
vapor hose or fuel filler cap is correctly replaced.
7 27
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:35 PM
Page 28
Maintenance
Vacuum crankcase ventilation
hoses (if equipped)
Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence of heat and/or mechanical
damage. Hard and brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and
excessive swelling indicate deterioration. Particular attention should be
paid to examine those hose surfaces
nearest to high heat sources, such
as the exhaust manifold.
Inspect the hose routing to assure
that the hoses do not come in contact with any heat source, sharp
edges or moving components which
might cause heat damage or
mechanical wear. Inspect all hose
connections, such as clamps and
couplings, to make sure they are
secure, and that no leaks are present. Hoses should be replaced
immediately if there is any evidence
of deterioration or damage.
7 28
Air cleaner filter
Cooling system
A Genuine Kia air cleaner filter is
recommended when the filter is
replaced.
Check the cooling system components, such as the radiator, coolant
reservoir, hoses and connections for
leakage and damage. Replace any
damaged parts.
Spark plugs
Make sure to install new spark plugs
of the correct heat range.
Coolant
Valve clearance (if equipped)
The coolant should be changed at
the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule.
Inspect for excessive valve noise
and/or engine vibration and adjust if
necessary. An authorized Kia dealer
should perform the operation.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:35 PM
Page 29
Maintenance
Automatic transaxle fluid
(if equipped)
Automatic transaxle fluid should not
be checked under normal usage
conditions.
But in severe conditions, the fluid
should be changed at an authorized
Kia dealer
in accordance to the
scheduled maintenance at the beginning of this section.
Manual transaxle fluid
(if equipped)
CAUTION
The use of a non-specified fluid
could result in transaxle malfunction and failure.
Use only specified automatic
transaxle fluid. (Refer to
“Recommended lubricants and
capacities” in section 8.)
Brake hoses and lines
Visually check for proper installation,
chafing, cracks, deterioration and
any leakage. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.
Brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid
Check the brake fluid level in the
brake fluid reservoir. The level should
be between “MIN” and “MAX” marks
on the side of the reservoir. Use only
hydraulic brake fluid conforming to
DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification.
Inspect the manual transaxle fluid
according to the maintenance schedule.
✽ NOTICE
Automatic transaxle fluid color is
basically red.
As the vehicle is driven, the automatic transaxle fluid will begin to
look darker.
It is the normal condition and you
should not judge the need to replace
the fluid based upon the changed
color.
7 29
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
3/4/2013
10:31 AM
Page 30
Maintenance
Parking brake
Suspension mounting bolts
Drive shafts and boots
Inspect the parking brake system
including the parking brake lever (or
pedal) and cables.
Check the suspension connections
for looseness or damage. Retighten
to the specified torque.
Brake discs, pads, calipers
and rotors
Steering gear box, linkage &
boots/lower arm ball joint
Check the drive shafts, boots and
clamps for cracks, deterioration, or
damage. Replace any damaged
parts and, if necessary, repack the
grease.
Check the pads for excessive wear,
discs for run out and wear, and
calipers for fluid leakage.
With the vehicle stopped and engine
off, check for excessive free-play in
the steering wheel.
Check the linkage for bends or damage. Check the dust boots and ball
joints for deterioration, cracks, or
damage. Replace any damaged
parts.
Exhaust pipe and muffler
Visually inspect the exhaust pipes,
muffler and hangers for cracks, deterioration, or damage. Start the
engine and listen carefully for any
exhaust gas leakage. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary.
7 30
Power steering pump, belt and
hoses (if equipped)
Check the power steering pump and
hoses for leakage and damage.
Replace any damaged or leaking
parts immediately. Inspect the power
steering belt (or drive belt) for evidence of cuts, cracks, excessive
wear, oiliness and proper tension.
Replace or adjust it if necessary.
Air conditioning refrigerant
Check the air conditioning lines and
connections for leakage and damage.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:36 PM
Page 31
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil level
■ Type A
3. Turn the engine off and wait for a
few minutes (about 5 minutes) for
the oil to return to the oil pan.
4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean,
and re-insert it fully.
■ Type A
WARNING - Radiator
hose
OXM079004
■ Type B
Be very careful not to touch the
radiator hose when checking or
adding the engine oil as it may
be hot enough to burn you.
OXM079005
■ Type B
5. Pull the dipstick out again and
check the level. The level should
be between F and L.
CAUTION
OXMA073004
1. Be sure the vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Start the engine and allow it to
reach normal operating temperature.
• Do not overfill the engine oil. It
may damage the engine.
• Do not spill engine oil, when
adding or changing engine
oil. If you drop the engine oil
on the engine room, wipe it off
immediately.
OXMA073005
If it is near or at L, add enough oil to
bring the level to F. Do not overfill.
Use a funnel to help prevent oil
from being spilled on engine components.
7 31
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:36 PM
Page 32
Maintenance
Use only the specified engine oil.
(Refer to “Recommended lubricants
and capacities” in section 8.)
Changing the engine oil and
filter
Have engine oil and filter changed by
an authorized Kia dealer according
to the Maintenance Schedule at the
beginning of this section.
WARNING
Used engine oil may cause irritation or cancer of the skin if
left in contact with the skin for
prolonged periods of time.
Always protect your skin by
washing your hands thoroughly
with soap and warm water as
soon as possible after handling
used oil.
7 32
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:36 PM
Page 33
Maintenance
ENGINE COOLANT
The high-pressure cooling system
has a reservoir filled with year round
antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is
filled at the factory.
Check the antifreeze protection and
coolant level at least once a year, at
the beginning of the winter season,
and before traveling to a colder climate.
Checking the coolant level
WARNING
Removing radiator
cap
• Never attempt to remove the
radiator cap while the engine
is operating or hot. Doing so
might lead to cooling system
and engine damage and could
result in serious personal
injury from escaping hot
coolant or steam.
• Turn the engine off and wait
until it cools down. Use
extreme care when removing
the radiator cap. Wrap a thick
towel around it, and turn it
counterclockwise slowly to
the first stop. Step back while
the pressure is released from
the cooling system.
(Continued)
(Continued)
When you are sure all the
pressure has been released,
press down on the cap, using
a thick towel, and continue
turning counterclockwise to
remove it.
• Even if the engine is not operating, do not remove the radiator cap or the drain plug
while the engine and radiator
are hot. Hot coolant and
steam may still blow out
under pressure, causing serious injury.
7 33
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:36 PM
Page 34
Maintenance
WARNING
The electric motor
(cooling fan) is controlled by the engine
coolant temperature,
refrigerant pressure
and vehicle speed. It may sometimes operate even when the
engine is not running. Use
extreme caution when working
near the blades of the cooling
fan so that you are not injured
by a rotating fan blades. As the
engine coolant temperature
decreases, the electric motor
will automatically shut off. This
is a normal condition.
If your vehicle is equipped with
GDI, the electric motor (cooling
fan) may operate until you disconnect the negative battery
cable.
7 34
OXM079006
Check the condition and connections
of all cooling system hoses and
heater hoses. Replace any swollen
or deteriorated hoses.
The coolant level should be filled
between F and L marks on the side
of the coolant reservoir when the
engine is cool.
If the coolant level is low, add enough
specified coolant to provide protection against freezing and corrosion.
Bring the level to F, but do not overfill. If frequent additions are required,
see an authorized Kia dealer for a
cooling system inspection.
Recommended engine coolant
• When adding coolant, use only
deionized water or soft water for
your vehicle and never mix hard
water in the coolant filled at the factory. An improper coolant mixture
can result in serious malfunction or
engine damage.
• The engine in your vehicle has aluminum engine parts and must be
protected by an ethylene-glycolbased coolant to prevent corrosion
and freezing.
• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol
coolant or mix them with the specified coolant.
• Do not use a solution that contains
more than 60% antifreeze or less
than 35% antifreeze, which would
reduce the effectiveness of the
solution.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:36 PM
Page 35
Maintenance
Changing the coolant
For mixture percentage, refer to the
following table.
Ambient
Temperature
-15°C (5°F)
-25°C (-13°F)
-35°C (-31°F)
-45°C (-49°F)
Have the coolant changed by an
authorized Kia dealer according to
the Maintenance Schedule at the
beginning of this section.
Mixture Percentage
(volume)
Antifreeze
35
40
50
60
Water
65
60
50
40
CAUTION
OXMA073007
WARNING
Put a thick cloth around the
radiator cap before refilling the
coolant in order to prevent the
coolant from overflowing into
engine parts such as the alternator.
Radiator cap
WARNING - Coolant
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine and radiator
are hot. Scalding hot coolant
and steam may blow out under
pressure which may result in
serious injury.
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely
obscure
visibility
when
sprayed on the windshield
and may cause loss of vehicle
control or damage the paint
and body trim.
7 35
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:36 PM
Page 36
Maintenance
BRAKE/CLUTCH FLUID
Checking the brake/clutch*
fluid level
If the level is low, add fluid to the
MAX level. The level will fall with
accumulated mileage. This is a normal condition associated with the
wear of the brake linings and/or
clutch disc (if equipped). If the fluid
level is excessively low, have the
brake/clutch* system checked by an
authorized KIA dealer.
Use only the specified brake/clutch*
fluid. (Refer to “Recommended lubricants and capacities” in section 8.)
WARNING - Brake/
clutch* fluid
When changing and adding
brake/clutch* fluid, handle it
carefully. Do not let it come in
contact with your eyes. If brake/
clutch* fluid should come in
contact with your eyes, immediately flush them with a large
quantity of fresh tap water. Have
your eyes examined by a doctor
as soon as possible.
OXM079008
Check the fluid level in the reservoir
periodically. The fluid level should be
between MAX and MIN marks on the
side of the reservoir.
Before removing the reservoir cap
and adding brake/clutch* fluid, clean
the area around the reservoir cap
thoroughly to prevent brake/clutch*
fluid contamination.
* if equipped
7 36
Never mix different types of fluid.
WARNING - Loss of
brake/clutch* fluid
In the event the brake/clutch*
system requires frequent additions of fluid, the vehicle should
be inspected by an authorized
Kia dealer.
CAUTION
Do not allow brake/clutch* fluid
to contact the vehicle's body
paint, as paint damage will
result. Brake/clutch* fluid, which
has been exposed to open air
for an extended time should
never be used as its quality cannot be guaranteed. It should be
disposed of properly. Don't put
in the wrong kind of fluid. A few
drops of mineral-based oil, such
as engine oil, in your brake/
clutch* system can damage
brake/clutch* system parts.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:36 PM
Page 37
Maintenance
WASHER FLUID
Checking the washer fluid
level
■ Type A
ODMNMC2019
■ Type B
OXMA073010
The reservoir is translucent so that
you can check the level with a quick
visual inspection.
Check the fluid level in the washer
fluid reservoir and add fluid if necessary. Plain water may be used if
washer fluid is not available.
However, use washer solvent with
antifreeze characteristics in cold climates to prevent freezing.
WARNING - Coolant
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely
obscure
visibility
when
sprayed on the windshield
and may cause loss of vehicle
control or damage to paint
and body trim.
• Windshield
washer
fluid
agents contain some amounts
of alcohol and can be flammable under certain circumstances. Do not allow sparks
or flame to contact the washer
fluid or the washer fluid reservoir. Damage to the vehicle or
occupants could occur.
• Windshield washer fluid is
poisonous to humans and animals. Do not drink and avoid
contacting windshield washer
fluid. Serious injury or death
could occur.
7 37
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:36 PM
Page 38
Maintenance
PARKING BRAKE
Checking the parking brake
Type B
Type A
OXM059015
OXM059013
Check whether the stroke is within
specification when the parking brake
pedal is depressed with 30 kg (66 lb,
294 N) of force. Also, the parking
brake alone should securely hold the
vehicle on a fairly steep grade. If the
stroke is more or less than specified,
have the parking brake adjusted by
an authorized Kia dealer.
Stroke : 8~9 notch
7 38
Check the stroke of the parking
brake by counting the number of
“clicks’’ heard while fully applying it
from the released position. Also, the
parking brake alone should securely
hold the vehicle on a fairly steep
grade. If the stroke is more or less
than specified, have the parking
brake adjusted by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Stroke : 5~6 “clicks’’ at a force of
20 kg (44 lbs, 196 N).
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:36 PM
Page 39
Maintenance
AIR CLEANER
Filter replacement
OXM079012
It must be replaced when necessary,
and should not be washed.
You can clean the filter when inspecting the air cleaner element.
Clean the filter by using compressed
air.
OXM079013
OXM073099
1. Loosen the air cleaner cover
attaching clips and open the cover.
2. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner
box.
3. Replace the air cleaner filter.
4. Lock the cover with the cover
attaching clips.
7 39
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:36 PM
Page 40
Maintenance
Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is operated in extremely dusty or sandy areas, replace the
element more often than the usual
recommended intervals. (Refer to
“Maintenance under severe usage
conditions” in this section.)
7 40
CAUTION
• Do not drive with the air cleaner removed; this will result in
excessive engine wear.
• When removing the air cleaner
filter, be careful that dust or
dirt does not enter the air
intake, or damage may result.
• Use a Kia genuine part. Use of
non-genuine parts could damage the air flow sensor.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:36 PM
Page 41
Maintenance
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (IF EQUIPPED)
Filter inspection
The climate control air filter should
be replaced according to the maintenance schedule. If the vehicle is
operated in severely air-polluted
cities or on dusty rough roads for a
long period, it should be inspected
more frequently and replaced earlier.
When you replace the climate control
air filter, replace it performing the following procedure, and be careful to
avoid damaging other components.
OXM079015
OXM079016
1. Open the glove box and remove
the support strap (1).
2. With the glove box open, remove
the stoppers on both sides.
7 41
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:36 PM
Page 42
Maintenance
OXM079017
OXM079018N
3. Remove the climate control air filter case by pulling out both sides
of the cover.
4. Replace the climate control air filter.
5. Reassemble in the reverse order
of disassembly.
✽ NOTICE
When replacing the climate control
air filter install it properly.
Otherwise, the system may produce
noise and the effectiveness of the filter may be reduced.
7 42
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:36 PM
Page 43
Maintenance
WIPER BLADES
Blade inspection
Contamination of either the windshield or the wiper blades with foreign matter can reduce the effectiveness of the windshield wipers.
Common sources of contamination
are insects, tree sap, and hot wax
treatments used by some commercial vehicle washes. If the blades are
not wiping properly, clean both the
window and the blades with a good
cleaner or mild detergent, and rinse
thoroughly with clean water.
1JBA5122
✽ NOTICE
Commercial hot waxes applied by
automatic vehicle washes have been
known to make the windshield difficult to clean.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
Blade replacement
When the wipers no longer clean
adequately, the blades may be worn
or cracked, and require replacement.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper
arms or other components, do
not attempt to move the wipers
manually.
CAUTION
The use of a non-specified
wiper blade could result in
wiper malfunction and failure.
7 43
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:36 PM
Page 44
Maintenance
Front windshield wiper blade
1JBA7037
OHM078059
Type B
1. Raise the wiper arm.
1LDA5023
Type A
1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the
wiper blade assembly to expose
the plastic locking clip.
CAUTION
Do not allow the wiper arm to
fall against the windshield,
since it may chip or crack the
windshield.
7 44
CAUTION
1JBA7038
2. Compress the clip and slide the
blade assembly downward.
3. Lift it off the arm.
4. Install the blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
Do not allow the wiper arm to
fall against the windshield,
since it may chip or crack the
windshield.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:37 PM
Page 45
Maintenance
Rear window wiper blade
OHM078060
OHM078061
2. Lift up the wiper blade clip. Then
pull down the blade assembly and
remove it.
3. Install the new blade assembly in
the reverse order of removal.
OHM078062
1. Raise the wiper arm and pull out
the wiper blade assembly.
7 45
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:37 PM
Maintenance
OHM078063
2. Install the new blade assembly by
inserting the center part into the
slot in the wiper arm until it clicks
into place.
3. Make sure the blade assembly is
installed firmly by trying to pull it
slightly.
To prevent damage to the wiper arms
or other components, have an
authorized Kia dealer replace the
wiper blade.
7 46
Page 46
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:37 PM
Page 47
Maintenance
BATTERY
For best battery service
WARNING - Battery dangers
Always read the following instructions carefully
when handling a battery.
Keep lighted cigarettes
and all other flames or
sparks away from the
battery.
OXM079100
• Keep the battery securely mounted.
• Keep the battery top clean and dry.
• Keep the terminals and connections clean, tight, and coated with
petroleum jelly or terminal grease.
• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from
the battery immediately with a
solution of water and baking soda.
• If the vehicle is not going to be
used for an extended time, disconnect the battery cables.
Hydrogen, a highly combustible gas, is always
present in battery cells
and may explode if ignited.
Keep batteries out of the
reach
of
children
because batteries contain highly corrosive
SULFURIC ACID. Do not
allow battery acid to
contact your skin, eyes,
clothing or paint finish.
(Continued)
If any electrolyte gets
into your eyes, flush
your eyes with clean
water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate
medical attention.
If electrolyte gets on
your skin, thoroughly
wash the contacted
area. If you feel pain or
burning sensation, get
medical attention immediately.
Wear eye protection
when charging or working near a battery.
Always provide ventilation when working in an
enclosed space.
(Continued)
(Continued)
7 47
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:37 PM
Page 48
Maintenance
(Continued)
An inappropriately disposed battery can be
harmful to the environPb
ment and human health.
Dispose the battery
according to your local
law(s) or regulation.
• When lifting a plastic-cased
battery, excessive pressure
on the case may cause battery
acid to leak, resulting in personal injury. Lift with a battery
carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
• Never attempt to recharge the
battery when the battery
cables are connected.
• The electrical ignition system
works with high voltage.
Never touch these components with the engine running
or the ignition switched on.
Failure to follow the above
warnings can result in serious
bodily injury or death.
7 48
CAUTION
If you connect unauthorized
electronic devices to the battery, the battery may be discharged. Never use unauthorized devices.
Battery recharging
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,
calcium-based battery.
• If the battery becomes discharged
in a short time (because, for example, the headlights or interior lights
were left on while the vehicle was
not in use), recharge it by slow
charging (trickle) for 10 hours.
• If the battery gradually discharges
because of high electric load while
the vehicle is being used, recharge
it at 20-30A for two hours.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:37 PM
Page 49
Maintenance
WARNING - Recharging
battery
When recharging the battery,
observe the following precautions:
• The battery must be removed
from the vehicle and placed in
an area with good ventilation.
• Do not allow cigarettes,
sparks, or flame near the battery.
• Watch the battery during
charging, and stop or reduce
the charging rate if the battery
cells begin gassing (boiling)
violently or if the temperature
of the electrolyte of any cell
exceeds 49°C (120°F).
• Wear eye protection when
checking the battery during
charging.
• Disconnect the battery charger in the following order.
(Continued)
(Continued)
1. Turn off the battery charger
main switch.
2. Unhook the negative clamp
from the negative battery terminal.
3. Unhook the positive clamp
from the positive battery terminal.
WARNING
• Before performing maintenance or recharging the battery, turn off all accessories
and stop the engine.
• The negative battery cable
must be removed first and
installed last when the battery
is disconnected.
Reset items
Items should be reset after the battery has been discharged or the battery has been disconnected.
• Auto up/down window
(See section 4)
• Sunroof (See section 4)
• Trip computer (See section 4)
• Climate control system
(See section 4)
• Clock (See section 4)
• Audio (See section 4)
7 49
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:37 PM
Page 50
Maintenance
TIRES AND WHEELS
Tire care
CAUTION
For proper maintenance, safety, and
maximum fuel economy, you must
always maintain recommended tire
inflation pressures and stay within
the load limits and weight distribution
recommended for your vehicle.
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures
All tire pressures (including the
spare) should be checked when the
tires are cold. “Cold Tires” means the
vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours or driven less than
1.6 km (one mile).
Recommended pressures must be
maintained for the best ride, vehicle
handling, and minimum tire wear.
For recommended inflation pressure,
refer to “Tire and wheels” in section
8.
7 50
OXM079101L
All specifications (sizes and pressures) can be found on a label
attached to the driver’s side center
pillar.
WARNING - Tire underinflation
Severe underinflation (70 kPa
(10 psi) or more) can lead to
severe heat build-up, causing
blowouts, tread separation and
other tire failures that can result
in the loss of vehicle control
leading to severe injury or
death. This risk is much higher
on hot days and when driving
for long periods at high speeds.
• Underinflation also results in
excessive wear, poor handling
and reduced fuel economy.
Wheel deformation also is
possible. Keep your tire pressures at the proper levels. If a
tire frequently needs refilling,
have it checked by an authorized Kia dealer.
• Overinflation produces a
harsh ride, excessive wear at
the center of the tire tread, and
a greater possibility of damage from road hazards.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:37 PM
Page 51
Maintenance
CAUTION
• Warm tires normally exceed
recommended cold tire pressures by 28 to 41 kPa (4 to 6
psi). Do not release air from
warm tires to adjust the pressure or the tires will be underinflated.
• Be sure to reinstall the tire
inflation valve caps. Without
the valve cap, dirt or moisture
could get into the valve core
and cause air leakage. If a
valve cap is missing, install a
new one as soon as possible.
WARNING - Tire Inflation
Overinflation or underinflation
can reduce tire life, adversely
affect vehicle handling, and
lead to sudden tire failure. This
could result in loss of vehicle
control and potential injury.
CAUTION - Tire pressure
Always observe the following:
• Check tire pressure when the
tires are cold. (After vehicle
has been parked for at least
three hours or hasn't been
driven more than 1.6 km (one
mile) since startup.)
• Check the pressure of your
spare tire each time you check
the pressure of other tires.
• Never overload your vehicle.
Be careful not to overload a
vehicle luggage rack if your
vehicle is equipped with one.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your tread is badly
worn, or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.
Checking tire inflation pressure
Check your tires once a month or
more.
Also, check the tire pressure of the
spare tire.
How to check
Use a good quality gauge to check
tire pressure. You cannot tell if your
tires are properly inflated simply by
looking at them. Radial tires may
look properly inflated even when
they're underinflated.
Check the tire's inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. - "Cold"
means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three hours or driven no
more than 1.6 km (1 mile).
7 51
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:37 PM
Page 52
Maintenance
Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve stem. Press the tire gauge firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the tire and loading
information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the pressure is
low, add air until you reach the recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the
center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gauge. Be
sure to put the valve caps back on
the valve stems. They help prevent
leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.
7 52
WARNING
• Inspect your tires frequently
for proper inflation as well as
wear and damage. Always use
a tire pressure gauge.
• Tires with too much or too little
pressure wear unevenly causing poor handling, loss of vehicle control, and sudden tire
failure leading to accidents,
injuries, and even death. The
recommended cold tire pressure for your vehicle can be
found in this manual and on
the tire label located on the driver's side center pillar.
• Worn tires can cause accidents. Replace tires that are
worn, show uneven wear, or
are damaged.
• Remember to check the pressure of your spare tire. Kia
recommends that you check
the spare every time you
check the pressure of the
other tires on your vehicle.
Tire rotation
To equalize tread wear, it is recommended that the tires be rotated
every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or
sooner if irregular wear develops.
During rotation, check the tires for
correct balance.
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage. Abnormal wear is
usually caused by incorrect tire pressure, improper wheel alignment, outof-balance wheels, severe braking or
severe cornering. Look for bumps or
bulges in the tread or side of tire.
Replace the tire if you find either of
these conditions. Replace the tire if
fabric or cord is visible. After rotation,
be sure to bring the front and rear tire
pressures to specification and check
lug nut tightness.
Refer to “Tire and wheels” in section
8.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:37 PM
Page 53
Maintenance
Disc brake pads should be inspected
for wear whenever tires are rotated.
Without a spare tire
✽ NOTICE
Rotate radial tires that have an
asymmetric tread pattern only from
front to rear and not from right to
left.
S2BLA790A
Directional tires (if equipped)
CBGQ0707A
WARNING
• Do not use the compact spare
tire (if equipped) for tire rotation.
• Do not mix bias ply and radial
ply tires under any circumstances. This may cause
unusual handling characteristics that could result in death,
severe injury, or property
damage.
Wheel alignment and tire balance
The wheels on your vehicle were
aligned and balanced carefully at the
factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
In most cases, you will not need to
have your wheels aligned again.
However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling one way
or the other, the alignment may need
to be reset.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating
when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need to be rebalanced.
CAUTION
Improper wheel weights can
damage your vehicle's aluminum wheels. Use only
approved wheel weights.
7 53
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:37 PM
Page 54
Maintenance
Tire replacement
WARNING - Replacing
Tread wear indicator
OEN076053
If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear
indicator will appear as a solid band
across the tread. This shows there is
less than 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) of tread
left on the tire. Replace the tire when
this happens.
Do not wait for the band to appear
across the entire tread before replacing the tire.
7 54
tires
To reduce the chance of serious
or fatal injuries from an accident caused by tire failure or
loss of vehicle control:
• Replace tires that are worn,
show uneven wear, or are
damaged. Worn tires can
cause loss of braking effectiveness, steering control, and
traction.
• Do not drive your vehicle with
too little or too much pressure
in your tires. This can lead to
uneven wear and tire failure.
• When replacing tires, never
mix radial and bias-ply tires
on the same vehicle. You must
replace all tires (including the
spare) if moving from radial to
bias-ply tires.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Using tires and wheels other
than the recommended sizes
could cause unusual handling
characteristics and poor vehicle control, resulting in a serious accident.
• Wheels that do not meet Kia’s
specifications may fit poorly
and result in damage to the
vehicle or unusual handling
and poor vehicle control.
• The ABS works by comparing
the speed of the wheels. The
tire size affects wheel speed.
When replacing tires, all 4
tires must use the same size
originally supplied with the
vehicle. Using tires of a different size can cause the ABS
(Anti-lock Brake System) and
ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) to work irregularly.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:37 PM
Page 55
Maintenance
Compact spare tire replacement
A compact spare tire has a shorter
tread life than a regular size tire.
Replace it when you can see the
tread wear indicator bars on the tire.
The replacement compact spare tire
should be the same size and design
tire as the one provided with your
new vehicle and should be mounted
on the same compact spare tire
wheel. The compact spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
size wheel, and the compact spare
tire wheel is not designed for mounting a regular size tire.
Wheel replacement
Tire traction
When replacing the metal wheels for
any reason, make sure the new
wheels are equivalent to the original
factory units in diameter, rim width
and offset.
Tire traction can be reduced if you
drive on worn tires, tires that are
improperly inflated or on slippery
road surfaces. Tires should be
replaced when tread wear indicators
appear. Slow down whenever there
is rain, snow or ice on the road to
reduce the possibility of losing control of the vehicle.
WARNING
A wheel that is not the correct
size may adversely affect wheel
and bearing life, braking and
stopping abilities, handling
characteristics, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance,
snow
chain
clearance,
speedometer and odometer calibration, headlight aim and
bumper height.
Tire maintenance
In addition to proper inflation, correct
wheel alignment helps to decrease
tire wear. If you find a tire is worn
unevenly, have your dealer check the
wheel alignment.
When you have new tires installed,
make sure they are balanced. This
will increase vehicle ride comfort and
tire life. Additionally, a tire should
always be rebalanced if it is removed
from the wheel.
7 55
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:37 PM
Page 56
Maintenance
Tire sidewall labeling
1
5,6
7
4
2
3
1
I030B04JM
This information identifies and
describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides
the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The
TIN can be used to identify the tire in
case of a recall.
1. Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or Brand name is
shown.
7 56
2. Tire size designation
A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire
size designation. You will need this
information when selecting replacement tires for your vehicle. The following explains what the letters and
numbers in the tire size designation
mean.
Example tire size designation:
(These numbers are provided as an
example only; your tire size designator could vary depending on your
vehicle.)
P235/65R17 108T
108 - Load Index, a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry.
T - Speed Rating Symbol. See the
speed rating chart in this section
for additional information.
P - Applicable vehicle type (tires
marked with the prefix “P’’ are
intended for use on passenger
vehicles or light trucks; however,
not all tires have this marking).
235 - Tire width in millimeters.
65 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width.
R - Tire construction code (Radial).
17 - Rim diameter in inches.
Example wheel size designation:
7.0JX17
Wheel size designation
Wheels are also marked with important information that you need if you
ever have to replace one. The following explains what the letters and
numbers in the wheel size designation mean.
7.0 - Rim width in inches.
J - Rim contour designation.
17 - Rim diameter in inches.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:37 PM
Page 57
Maintenance
Tire speed ratings
The chart below lists many of the different speed ratings currently being
used for passenger vehicle tires. The
speed rating is part of the tire size
designation on the sidewall of the
tire. This symbol corresponds to that
tire's designed maximum safe operating speed.
Speed
Rating
Symbol
S
T
H
V
Z
Maximum Speed
180 km/h (112 mph)
190 km/h (118 mph)
210 km/h (130 mph)
240 km/h (149 mph)
240 km/h (Above 149 mph)
3. Checking tire life (TIN : Tire
Identification Number)
Any tires that are over 6 years old,
based on the manufacturing date,
(including the spare tire) should be
replaced by new ones. You can find
the manufacturing date on the tire
sidewall (possibly on the inside of the
wheel), displaying the DOT Code.
The DOT Code is a series of numbers on a tire consisting of numbers
and English letters. The manufacturing date is designated by the last four
digits (characters) of the DOT code.
DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO
The front part of the DOT means a
plant code number, tire size and
tread pattern and the last four numbers indicate week and year manufactured.
For example:
DOT XXXX XXXX 1613 represents
that the tire was produced in the 16th
week of 2013.
WARNING - Tire age
Tires degrade over time, even
when they are not being used.
Regardless of the remaining
tread, we recommend that tires
be replaced after approximately
six (6) years of normal service.
Heat caused by hot climates or
frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging
process. Failure to follow this
warning can result in sudden
tire failure, which could lead to
a loss of control and an accident involving serious injury or
death.
7 57
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:37 PM
Page 58
Maintenance
4. Tire ply composition and material
The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the
materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
The letter "R" means radial ply construction; the letter "D" means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the
letter "B" means belted-bias ply construction.
5. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure. Refer
to the Tire and Loading Information
label for recommended inflation
pressure.
7 58
6. Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that
can be carried by the tire. When
replacing the tires on the vehicle,
always use a tire that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tire.
7. Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
For example:
TREADWEAR 200
TRACTION AA
TEMPERATURE A
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one-and-ahalf times (1½) as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
These grades are molded on the
side-walls of passenger vehicle tires.
The tires available as standard or
optional equipment on your vehicle
may vary with respect to grade.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:37 PM
Page 59
Maintenance
Traction - AA, A, B & C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on straightahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature -A, B & C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
WARNING - Tire
temperature
The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
build-up and possible sudden
tire failure. This can cause loss
of vehicle control and serious
injury.
7 59
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:37 PM
Page 60
Maintenance
Tire terminology and definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air
inside the tire pressing outward on
the tire. Air pressure is expressed in
kilopascal (kPa) or pounds per
square inch (psi).
Accessory Weight: This means the
combined weight of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories
are,
automatic
transaxle, power seats, and air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a
tire's height to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords
that is located between the plies and
the tread. Cords may be made from
steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel
wires wrapped by steel cords that
hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in
which the plies are laid at alternate
angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
7 60
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of
air pressure in a tire, measured in
kilopascals (kPa) or pounds per
square inch (psi) before a tire has
built up heat from driving.
Curb Weight: This means the weight
of a motor vehicle with standard and
optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, but without passengers and
cargo.
DOT Markings: The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the
tire manufacturer, production plant,
brand and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the Front Axle.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the Rear axle.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The
side of an asymmetrical tire, that
must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for
air pressure.
Load Index: An assigned number
ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity
of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The
maximum air pressure to which a
cold tire may be inflated. The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load
rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that
tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:
The sum of curb weight; accessory
weight; vehicle capacity weight; and
production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The
number of occupants a vehicle is
designed to seat multiplied by 68 kg
(150 pounds).
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:37 PM
Page 61
Maintenance
Occupant Distribution: Designated
seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side
of a asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces outward when
mounted on a vehicle. The outward
facing sidewall bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same moldings on
the inner facing sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire
used on passenger cars and some
light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure:
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended tire inflation pressure and shown
on the tire placard.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in
which the ply cords that extend to the
beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and
upon which the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire
between the tread and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric
code assigned to a tire indicating the
maximum speed at which a tire can
operate.
Traction: The friction between the
tire and the road surface. The
amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that
comes into contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
bands, sometimes called "wear
bars," that show across the tread of a
tire when only 2/32 inch of tread
remains.
UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality
Grading Standards, a tire information
system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire's traction, temperature and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers
using government testing procedures. The ratings are molded into
the sidewall of the tire.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated seating positions
multiplied by 68 kg. (150 lbs) plus the
rated cargo and luggage load.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the
Tire: Load on an individual tire due to
curb and accessory weight plus
maximum occupant and cargo
weight.
Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal occupant weight and driving by 2.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a vehicle showing the
original equipment tire size and recommended inflation pressure.
7 61
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:37 PM
Page 62
Maintenance
All season tires
Snow tires
Kia specifies all season tires on
some models to provide good performance for use all year round,
including snowy and icy road conditions. All season tires are identified
by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud
and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow
tires have better snow traction than
all season tires and may be more
appropriate in some areas.
If you equip your vehicle with snow
tires, they should be the same size
and have the same load capacity as
the original tires. Snow tires should be
installed on all four wheels; otherwise,
poor handling may result.
Snow tires should carry 28 kPa (4 psi)
more air pressure than the pressure
recommended for the standard tires
on the tire label on the driver's side of
the center pillar, or up to the maximum pressure shown on the tire sidewall, whichever is less. Do not drive
faster than 120 km/h (75 mph) when
your vehicle is equipped with snow
tires.
Summer tires
Kia specifies summer tires on some
models to provide superior performance on dry roads. Summer tire performance is substantially reduced in
snow and ice. Summer tires do not
have the tire traction rating M+S
(Mud and Snow) on the tire side wall.
if you plan to operate your vehicle in
snowy or icy conditions, Kia recommends the use of snow tires or all
season tires on all four wheels.
7 62
Radial-ply tires
Radial-ply tires provide improved
tread life, road hazard resistance and
smoother high speed ride. The radial-ply tires used on this vehicle are of
belted construction, and are selected
to complement the ride and handling
characteristics of your vehicle.
Radial-ply tires have the same load
carrying capacity, as bias-ply or bias
belted tires of the same size, and use
the same recommended inflation
pressure. Mixing of radial-ply tires
with bias-ply or bias belted tires is
not recommended. Any combinations of radial-ply and bias-ply or bias
belted tires when used on the same
vehicle will seriously deteriorate
vehicle handling. The best rule to follow is: Identical radial-ply tires should
always be used as a set of four.
Longer wearing tires can be more
susceptible to irregular tread wear. It
is very important to follow the tire
rotation interval shown in this section
to achieve the tread life potential of
these tires. Cuts and punctures in
radial-ply tires are repairable only in
the tread area, because of sidewall
flexing. Consult your tire dealer for
radial-ply tire repairs.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
4:46 PM
Page 63
Maintenance
Low aspect ratio tire
(if equipped)
Low aspect ratio tires, whose aspect
ratio is lower than 50, are provided
for sporty looks.
Because the low aspect ratio tires
are optimized for handling and braking, it may be more uncomfortable to
ride in and there is more noise compare with normal tires.
CAUTION
Because the sidewall of the low
aspect ratio tire is shorter than
the normal, the wheel and tire of
the low aspect ratio tire is easier to be damaged. So, follow the
instructions below.
- When driving on a rough road
or off road, drive cautiously
because tires and wheels may
be damaged. And after driving, inspect tires and wheels.
- When passing over a pothole,
speed bump, manhole, or curb
stone, drive slowly so that the
tires and wheels are not damaged.
- If the tire is impacted, we recommend that you inspect the
tire condition or contact an
authorized Kia dealer.
- To prevent damage to the tire,
inspect the tire condition and
pressure every 3,000km.
CAUTION
• It is not easy to recognize the
tire damage with your own
eyes. But if there is the slightest hint of tire damage, even
though you cannot see the tire
damage with your own eyes,
have the tire checked or
replaced because the tire
damage may cause air leakage from the tire.
• If the tire is damaged by driving on a rough road, off road,
pothole, manhole, or curb
stone, it will not be covered by
the warranty.
• You can find out the tire information on the tire sidewall.
7 63
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:37 PM
Page 64
Maintenance
FUSES
■ Blade type
Normal
Blown
■ Cartridge type
Normal
Blown
■ Multi fuse
Normal
Normal
Blown
Blown
OLM079051N
7 64
A vehicle’s electrical system is protected from electrical overload damage by fuses.
This vehicle has 2 (or 3) fuse panels,
one located in the driver’s side panel
bolster, the other in the engine compartment near the battery.
If any of your vehicle’s lights, accessories, or controls do not work, check
the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse
has blown, the element inside the
fuse will melt.
If the electrical system does not
work, first check the driver’s side
fuse panel.
Always replace a blown fuse with
one of the same rating.
If the replacement fuse blows, this
indicates an electrical problem. Avoid
using the system involved and immediately consult an authorized Kia
dealer.
Three kinds of fuses are used: blade
type for lower amperage rating, cartridge type, and multi fuse for higher
amperage ratings.
WARNING - Fuse
replacement
• Never replace a fuse with anything but another fuse of the
same rating.
• A higher capacity fuse could
cause damage and possibly a
fire.
• Never install a wire or aluminum foil instead of the
proper fuse - even as a temporary repair. It may cause
extensive wiring damage and
a possible fire.
CAUTION
Do not use a screwdriver or any
other metal object to remove
fuses because it may cause a
short circuit and damage the
system.
✽ NOTICE
The actual fuse/relay panel label
may differ from equipped items.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:37 PM
Page 65
Maintenance
If you do not have a spare, use a
fuse of the same rating from a circuit
you may not need for operating the
vehicle, such as the power outlet
fuse.
If the headlights or other electrical
components do not work and the
fuses are OK, check the fuse panel
in the engine compartment. If a fuse
is blown, it must be replaced.
Inner panel fuse replacement
ODM072018
OXM073020
1. Turn the ignition switch and all
other switches off.
2. Open the fuse panel cover.
3. Pull the suspected fuse straight
out. Use the removal tool provided
on the engine compartment fuse
panel cover.
4. Check the removed fuse; replace it
if it is blown.
Spare fuses are provided in the
engine compartment fuse panel.
5. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips.
If it fits loosely, consult an authorized
Kia dealer.
7 65
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:37 PM
Page 66
Maintenance
Fuse switch
Engine compartment fuse
replacement
3. Check the removed fuse; replace it
if it is blown. To remove or insert
the fuse, use the fuse puller in the
engine compartment fuse panel.
4. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips. If it fits loosely, consult
an authorized Kia dealer.
CAUTION
OXM073022
Always, put the fuse switch at the ON
position.
If you move the switch to the OFF
position, some items such as audio
and digital clock must be reset and
transmitter (or smart key) may not
work properly.
CAUTION
Always place the fuse switch in
the ON position while driving
the vehicle.
7 66
OXMA073023
1. Turn the ignition switch and all
other switches off.
2. Remove the fuse panel cover by
pressing the tab and pulling the
cover up.
After checking the fuse panel in
the
engine
compartment,
securely install the fuse panel
cover. If not, electrical failures
may occur from water contact.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:37 PM
Page 67
Maintenance
Multi fuse
ODM072047
If the multi fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the nuts shown in the picture above.
4. Replace the fuse with a new one
of the same rating.
5. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
✽ NOTICE
If the multi fuse is blown, consult an
authorized Kia dealer.
7 67
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:37 PM
Page 68
Maintenance
Fuse/relay panel description
ODM072017
Inside the fuse/relay panel covers,
you can find the fuse/relay label
describing fuse/relay name and
capacity.
✽ NOTICE
Not all fuse panel descriptions in
this manual may be applicable to
your vehicle. It is accurate at the
time of printing. When you inspect
the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer
to the fuse panel label.
7 68
OXMA073116
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:37 PM
Page 69
Maintenance
Inner fuse panel
Description
Fuse rating
Protected component
MODULE 2
10A
Instrument Cluster (IND./MICOM), Steering Angle Sensor, Alternator, Smart Key Control Module, A/V &
Navigation Head Unit, STOP_SW, SI_ECU, HLLD LH/RH
MODULE 1
A/BAG IND
A/BAG
START
WIPER RR
WIPER FRT
7.5A
10A
15A
7.5A
15A
25A
SPORTS MODE SW/KEY_SOL, SPORT_MODE_SW
Instrument Cluster (IND.), Digital Clock
SRS Control Module, PODS Module
E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Relay - Start, Sub Start, Burglar Alarm), PDM
ICM Relay Box (Rear Wiper Relay), Rear Wiper Motor, Multifunction Switch (Wiper)
E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Wiper (Low) Relay), Front Wiper Motor, Multifunction Switch (Wiper)
MODULE 3
10A
ESC Off Switch, Front A/C Control Module, Instrument Cluster, Audio, MTS, A/V & Navigation Head Unit,
Tire Pressure Monitoring Module, Power Window Main Switch, 4WD ECU, P_WDW_PASS_SW_IMS,
Rear Parking Assist SNSR, FRT_DRV_SEAT_EXT, FRT_PASS_SEAT_EXT, CONSOLE_EXTN , IPM
(BCM IG1)
A/CON
7.5A
Front A/C Control Module, Active Incar Sensor, Cluster Ionize, ICM Relay Box (Rear A/C Relay) E/R
Fuse & Relay Box (Blower Relay)
AMP
P/OUTLET 1
P/OUTLET 2
BLOWER RR
30A
15A
20A
20A
AMP
LUGGAGE_POWER_OUTLET, FRT_POWER_OUTLET_DRV
ICM Relay Box (Rear A/C Relay)
7 69
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:37 PM
Page 70
Maintenance
Description
Fuse rating
Protected component
P/WDW LH
25A
Driver Power Window Relay, Power Window Main Switch, Rear Power Window Switch LH, Driver Safety
Power Window Module
P/WDW RH
25A
Passenger Power Window Relay, Power Window Main Switch
Passenger Power Window Switch, Rear Power Window Switch RH
DR LOCK
20A
Door Lock/Unlock Relay, ICM Relay Box (Two Turn Unlock Relay), Driver/Passenger Door Lock Actuator,
Rear Door Lock Actuator LH/RH, ICM Relay Box (T/GATE LATCH Relay)
SMART KEY 4
S/HTR FRT
P/SEAT DRV
P/SEAT PASS
HTD STRG
F/LID
10A
20A
30A
20A
15A
15A
PDM, Start Stop Button Switch, FOB Holder
FRT_DRV_SEAT_EXT, FRT_PASS_SEAT_EXT
Driver Power Seat Switch, Driver Lumbar Support Switch
Passenger Power Seat Switch
Steering wheel heater
Fuel Filler Door Switch
MODULE4
10A
O/S Mirror Switch, Power Window Switch, E/R Fuse & Relay Box(POWER OUTLET RLY), Digital Clock,
MTS, Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit
HTD MIRR
SMART_KEY_1
SMART_KEY_2
SMART_KEY_3
S/HEATER RR
10A
25A
7.5A
7.5A
15A
Driver/Passenger Power Outside Mirror, Front A/C Control Module
SMART KEY/SMK_UNIT
Smart Key Control Module
Smart Key Control Module
ICM Relay Box (RR SEAT WARMER LH RLY), ICM Relay Box (RR SEAT WARMER RH RLY)
INTERIOR LAMP
10A
DR_SCUFF_LP_DRV, DR_SCUFF_LP_PASS, DR_WARNG_SW, S_VISOR_LP_LH/RH, OHC_LAMP,
ROOM_LP, RL/RR_PERSONAL_LAMP, CARGO_LAMP
MULTIMEDIA
15A
Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, MTS
MEMORY
10A
OBD_II, Front A/C Control Module, TPMS, Digital Clock, INSIDE_MIRR, S_WARMER_SW_LH/RH,
AIR_VENT_SEAT_SW_LH/RH, CLUSTER, O_S_MIRR_SW, P_WDW_MAIN_SW,
FRT_DRV_SEAT_EXT, P_WDW_PASS_SW
7 70
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:37 PM
Page 71
Maintenance
Engine compartment fuse panel
OXMA073027
OXMA073131
7 71
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:37 PM
Page 72
Maintenance
Engine compartment fuse panel
Description
Fuse rating
Protected component
I/P B+2
60A
IPM (Fuse - S/HTR FRT, P/Seat SUN ROOF-1 25A, IPS1 (FOG LH/RH, TAIL LAMP LH), ARISU LH
(HEAD LAMP LOW LH, HEAD LAMP HI LH, TURN SIG RL, TURN SIG FL)
BLOWER
RR HTD
ABS 1
ABS 2
40A
40A
40A
40A
Blower Relay
Rear Defogger Relay
ESC Control Module, Multipurpose Check Connector
ESC Control Module, Multipurpose Check Connector
I/P B+3
60A
SMART_KEY-1 25A, SMART_KEY-4 10A, MODULE-1 7.5A, SUNROOF-2 25A, (FUSE SW RLY,
INTERIOR LAMP 10A : DR_SCUFF_LP_DRV, DR_SCUFF_LP_PASS, DR_WARNG_SW,
S_VISOR_LP_LH/RH, OHC_LAMP, ROOM_LP, RL/RR_PERSONAL_LAMP, CARGO_LAMP, MULTIMEDIA 15A : Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, MTS, MEMORY 10A : OBD_II, Front A/C Control
Module, TPMS, Digital Clock, INSIDE_MIRR, S_WARMER_SW_LH/RH, AIR_VENT_SEAT_SW_LH/
RH, CLUSTER, O_S_MIRR_SW, P_WDW_MAIN_SW, FRT_DRV_SEAT_EXT, P_WDW_PASS_SW)
I/P B+1
MDPS
C/FAN
IGN 2
TRAILER
IGN 1
HORN
DEICER
50A
80A
60A
40A
30A
40A
15A
15A
AMP 30A, P/WDW LH 25A, P/WDW RH 25A, S/HEATER_RR 15A
MDPS_ECU
E/R Fuse & Relay Box (C/FAN RLY)
Start Relay, W/O Smart Key - Ignition Switch, With Smart Key - E/R Fuse & Relay Box (IGN2 Relay)
Trailer Power Outlet
W/O Smart Key - Ignition Switch, With Smart Key - E/R Fuse & Relay Box (IGN1 Relay, ACC Relay )
Horn Relay
Front Wiper Deicer Relay
I/P B+4
50A
IPM (DR LOCK 20A, BLOWER RR 20A, FUEL LID 15A, IPS3 (TAIL LAMP RH, TAIL INT LAMP),
ARISU RH (HEAD LAMP LOW RH, HEAD LAMP HI RH, TURN SIG RR, TURN SIG FR)
ABS
B/UP LP
4WD
7.5A
7.5A
20A
ESC Control Module, Multipurpose Check Connector
Back-Up Lamp Relay (A/T), Back-Up Lamp Switch (M/T)
4WD_ECU
MULTI
FUSE
FUSE
7 72
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:37 PM
Page 73
Maintenance
Description
FUSE
Fuse rating
Protected component
B/A HORN
SENSOR 5
TCU
A/CON
AC INVERTER
POWER OUTLET
P/TAILGATE
H/LAMP RH
AMS
15A
7.5A
15A
10A
30A
25A
30A
10A
10A
B/A RLY
PCM
Transaxle Range Switch, PCM
E/R Fuse & Relay Box(BLOWER RLY, Front A/C Control Module)
AC_INVERTER_UNIT
E/R Fuse & Relay Box (POWER OUTLET RLY), RR_P_OUTLET, FRT_POWER_OUTLET_PASS
PTGM
E/R Fuse & Relay Box(H/LAMP RH RLY), H_LP_RH
E/R Fuse & Relay WIPER LO RLY), PCM
EMS
40A
EMS BOX(MAIN RLY(IGN_COIL 20A, ECU_1 20A, SNSR_1 10A, SNSR_2 10A, ECU_2 10A,
INJECTOR_1 10A), F/PUMP 15A, ECU_4 15A
SENSOR 1
10A
Theta : Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Oil Control Valve #1/2, Variable Intake Manifold Valve,
Crankshaft Position Sensor, Oxygen Sensor Up/Down
Lambda : PCM, Oxygen Sensor #1/2/3/4
SENSOR 2
10A
Theta : C/FAN RLY, Canister Close Valve
Lambda : C/FAN RLY, PCM, Canister Close Valve, Oil Control Valve #1/2 (Exhaust), Oil Control Valve
#1/2 (Intake), Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Variable Intake Manifold Valve #1/2,
Immobilizer Module
ECU 1
20A
PCM
F/PUMP
15A
Fuel Pump Relay
IGN_COIL
20A
Theta : IG_COIL_CAPACITOR, IG_COIL_1/2/3/4,
Lambda : CONDENSOR1/2,IGN_COIL_HARN_LAG, GN_COIL_2/4/6
INJECTOR_1
10A
Theta : Immobilizer Module, F/PUMP RLY,
Lambda : PCM, F/PUMP RLY
ECU 4
15A
Theta : PCM, Lambda : PCM, IDB
EMS
BOX
7 73
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:37 PM
Page 74
Maintenance
APPEARANCE CARE
Exterior care
Exterior general caution
It is very important to follow the label
directions when using any chemical
cleaner or polish. Read all warning
and caution statements that appear
on the label.
7 74
Finish maintenance
Washing
To help protect your vehicle’s finish
from rust and deterioration, wash it
thoroughly and frequently at least
once a month with lukewarm or cold
water.
If you use your vehicle for off-road
driving, you should wash it after each
off-road trip. Pay special attention to
the removal of any accumulation of
salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign
materials. Make sure the drain holes
in the lower edges of the doors and
rocker panels are kept clear and
clean.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial pollution and similar
deposits can damage your vehicle’s
finish if not removed immediately.
Even prompt washing with plain
water may not completely remove all
these deposits. A mild soap, safe for
use on painted surfaces, may be
used.
After washing, rinse the vehicle thoroughly with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not allow soap to dry on the finish.
CAUTION
• Do not use strong soap, chemical detergents or hot water,
and do not wash the vehicle in
direct sunlight or when the
body of the vehicle is warm.
• Be careful when washing the
side windows of your vehicle.
Especailly, with high-pressure
water. Water may leak through
the windows and wet the interior.
• To prevent damage to the
plastic parts and lamps, do
not clean with chemical solvents or strong detergents.
WARNING - Wet brakes
After washing the vehicle, test
the brakes while driving slowly
to see if they have been affected
by water. If braking performance
is impaired, dry the brakes by
applying them lightly while
maintaining a slow forward
speed.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:37 PM
Page 75
Maintenance
OJB037800
CAUTION
• Water washing in the engine
compartment including high
pressure water washing may
cause the failure of electrical
circuits located in the engine
compartment.
• Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with
electrical/electronic components inside the vehicle as
this may damage them.
Waxing
Wax the vehicle when water will no
longer bead on the paint.
Always wash and dry the vehicle
before waxing. Use a good quality
liquid or paste wax, and follow the
manufacturer’s instructions. Wax all
metal trim to protect it and to maintain its luster.
Removing oil, tar, and similar materials with a spot remover will usually
strip the wax from the finish. Be sure
to re-wax these areas even if the rest
of the vehicle does not yet need waxing.
CAUTION
• Wiping dust or dirt off the
body with a dry cloth will
scratch the finish.
• Do not use steel wool, abrasive cleaners, acid detergents
or strong detergents containing high alkaline or caustic
agents on chrome-plated or
anodized aluminum parts.
This may result in damage to
the protective coating and
cause discoloration or paint
deterioration.
7 75
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:37 PM
Page 76
Maintenance
Finish damage repair
Deep scratches or stone chips in the
painted surface must be repaired
promptly. Exposed metal will quickly
rust and may develop into a major
repair expense.
✽ NOTICE
If your vehicle is damaged and
requires any metal repair or
replacement, be sure the body shop
applies anti-corrosion materials to
the parts repaired or replaced.
7 76
Bright-metal maintenance
• To remove road tar and insects,
use a tar remover, not a scraper or
other sharp object.
• To protect the surfaces of brightmetal parts from corrosion, apply a
coating of wax or chrome preservative and rub to a high luster.
• During winter weather or in coastal
areas, cover the bright metal parts
with a heavier coating of wax or
preservative. If necessary, coat the
parts with non-corrosive petroleum
jelly or other protective compound.
Underbody maintenance
Corrosive materials used for ice and
snow removal and dust control may
collect on the underbody. If these
materials are not removed, accelerated rusting can occur on underbody
parts such as the fuel lines, frame,
floor pan and exhaust system, even
though they have been treated with
rust protection.
Thoroughly flush the vehicle underbody and wheel openings with lukewarm or cold water once a month,
after off-road driving and at the end
of each winter. Pay special attention
to these areas because it is difficult
to see all the mud and dirt. It will do
more harm than good to wet down
the road grime without removing it.
The lower edges of the doors, rocker
panels, and frame members have
drain holes that should not be
allowed to clog with dirt; trapped
water in these areas can cause rusting.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:37 PM
Page 77
Maintenance
WARNING
After washing the vehicle, test
the brakes while driving slowly
to see if they have been affected
by water. If braking performance
is impaired, dry the brakes by
applying them lightly while
maintaining a slow forward
speed.
Aluminum or chrome wheel maintenance
The aluminum or chrome wheels are
coated with a clear protective finish.
• Do not use any abrasive cleaner,
polishing compound, solvent, or
wire brushes on aluminum or
chrome wheels. They may scratch
or damage the finish.
• Clean the wheel when it has
cooled.
• Use only a mild soap or neutral
detergent, and rinse thoroughly
with water. Also, be sure to clean
the wheels after driving on salted
roads. This helps prevent corrosion.
• Avoid washing the wheels with
highspeed vehicle wash brushes.
• Do not use any alkaline or acid
detergents It may damage and corrode the aluminum or chrome
wheels coated with a clear protective finish.
Corrosion protection
Protecting your vehicle from corrosion
By using the most advanced design
and construction practices to combat
corrosion, we produce vehicles of
the highest quality. However, this is
only part of the job. To achieve the
long-term corrosion resistance your
vehicle can deliver, the owner's
cooperation and assistance is also
required.
Common causes of corrosion
The most common causes of corrosion on your vehicle are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is
allowed to accumulate underneath
the vehicle.
• Removal of paint or protective
coatings by stones, gravel, abrasion or minor scrapes and dents
which leave unprotected metal
exposed to corrosion.
7 77
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:37 PM
Page 78
Maintenance
High-corrosion areas
If you live in an area where your vehicle is regularly exposed to corrosive
materials, corrosion protection is
particularly important. Some of the
common causes of accelerated corrosion are road salts, dust control
chemicals, ocean air and industrial
pollution.
Moisture breeds corrosion
Moisture creates the conditions in
which corrosion is most likely to
occur. For example, corrosion is
accelerated by high humidity, particularly when temperatures are just
above freezing. In such conditions,
the corrosive material is kept in contact with the vehicle’s surface by
moisture that evaporates slowly.
Mud is particularly corrosive
because it dries slowly and holds
moisture in contact with the vehicle.
Although the mud appears to be dry,
it can still retain the moisture and
promote corrosion.
7 78
High temperatures can also accelerate corrosion of parts that are not
properly ventilated so the moisture
can be dispersed. For all these reasons, it is particularly important to
keep your vehicle clean and free of
mud or accumulations of other materials. This applies not only to the visible surfaces but particularly to the
underside of the vehicle.
To help prevent corrosion
You can help prevent corrosion from
beginning by observing the following:
Keep your vehicle clean
The best way to prevent corrosion is
to keep your vehicle clean and free
of corrosive materials. Attention to
the underside of the vehicle is particularly important.
• If you live in a high-corrosion area
— where road salts are used, near
the ocean, areas with industrial
pollution, acid rain, etc.—, you
should take extra care to prevent
corrosion. In winter, hose off the
underside of your vehicle at least
once a month and be sure to clean
the underside thoroughly when
winter is over.
• When cleaning underneath the
vehicle, give particular attention to
the components under the fenders
and other areas that are hidden
from view. Do a thorough job; just
dampening the accumulated mud
rather than washing it away will
accelerate corrosion rather than
prevent it. Water under high pressure and steam are particularly
effective in removing accumulated
mud and corrosive materials.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:38 PM
Page 79
Maintenance
• When cleaning lower door panels,
rocker panels and frame members,
be sure that drain holes are kept
open so that moisture can escape
and not be trapped inside to accelerate corrosion.
Keep your garage dry
Don't park your vehicle in a damp,
poorly ventilated garage. This creates a favorable environment for corrosion. This is particularly true if you
wash your vehicle in the garage or
drive it into the garage when it is still
wet or covered with snow, ice or
mud. Even a heated garage can contribute to corrosion unless it is well
ventilated so moisture is dispersed.
Keep paint and trim in good condition
Scratches or chips in the finish
should be covered with "touch-up"
paint as soon as possible to reduce
the possibility of corrosion. If bare
metal is showing through, the attention of a qualified body and paint
shop is recommended.
Bird droppings : Bird droppings are
highly corrosive and may damage
painted surfaces in just a few hours.
Always remove bird droppings as
soon as possible.
Don't neglect the interior
Moisture can collect under the floor
mats and carpeting and cause corrosion. Check under the mats periodically to be sure the carpeting is dry.
Use particular care if you carry fertilizers, cleaning materials or chemicals in the vehicle.
These should be carried only in
proper containers and any spills or
leaks should be cleaned up, flushed
with clean water and thoroughly
dried.
Interior care
Interior general precautions
Prevent chemicals such as perfume,
cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner, and air freshener from contacting
the interior parts because they may
cause damage or discoloration. If
they do contact the interior parts,
wipe them off immediately. If necessary, use a vinyl cleaner, see product
instructions for correct usage.
CAUTION
Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with
electrical/electronic
components inside the vehicle as this
may damage them.
7 79
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:38 PM
Page 80
Maintenance
CAUTION
When cleaning leather products
(steering wheel, seats etc.), use
neutral detergents or low alcohol content solutions. If you use
high alcohol content solutions
or acid/alkaline detergents, the
color of the leather may fade or
the surface may get stripped off.
Cleaning the upholstery and interior trim
Vinyl
Remove dust and loose dirt from
vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a
vinyl cleaner.
Fabric
Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solution recommended for upholstery or
carpets. Remove fresh spots immediately with a fabric spot cleaner. If
fresh spots do not receive immediate
attention, the fabric can be stained
and its color can be affected. Also, its
fire-resistant properties can be
reduced if the material is not properly maintained.
CAUTION
Using anything but recommended cleaners and procedures
may affect the fabric’s appearance and fire-resistant properties.
7 80
Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt
webbing
Clean the belt webbing with any mild
soap solution recommended for
cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow
the instructions provided with the
soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the
webbing because this may weaken
it.
Cleaning the interior window
glass
If the interior glass surfaces of the
vehicle become fogged (that is, covered with an oily, greasy or waxy
film), they should be cleaned with a
glass cleaner. Follow the directions
on the glass cleaner container.
CAUTION
Do not scrape or scratch the
inside of the rear window. This
may result in damage of the rear
window defroster grid.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:38 PM
Page 81
Maintenance
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
The emission control system of your
vehicle is covered by a written limited
warranty. Please see the warranty
information contained in the
Warranty & Maintenance booklet in
your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with an
emission control system to meet all
applicable emission regulations.
There are three emission control
systems, as follows.
(1) Crankcase emission control system
(2) Evaporative emission control system
(3) Exhaust emission control system
In order to assure the proper function
of the emission control systems, it is
recommended that you have your
vehicle inspected and maintained by
an authorized Kia dealer in accordance with the maintenance schedule in this manual.
Caution for the Inspection and
Maintenance Test (With Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system)
• To prevent the vehicle from misfiring during dynamometer testing, turn the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system off by
pressing the ESC switch.
• After dynamometer testing is
completed, turn the ESC system
back on by pressing the ESC
switch again.
1. Crankcase emission control
system
The positive crankcase ventilation
system is employed to prevent air
pollution caused by blow-by gases
being emitted from the crankcase.
This system supplies fresh filtered air
to the crankcase through the air
intake hose. Inside the crankcase,
the fresh air mixes with blow-by
gases, which then pass through the
PCV valve into the induction system.
2. Evaporative emission control (including ORVR:
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery)
system
The Evaporative Emission Control
System is designed to prevent fuel
vapors from escaping into the atmosphere.
(The ORVR system is designed to
allow the vapors from the fuel tank to
be loaded into a canister while refueling at the gas station, preventing
the escape of fuel vapors into the
atmosphere.)
7 81
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:38 PM
Page 82
Maintenance
Canister
Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel
tank are absorbed and stored in the
onboard canister. When the engine is
running, the fuel vapors absorbed in
the canister are drawn into the surge
tank through the purge control solenoid valve.
3. Exhaust emission control
system
Purge Control Solenoid Valve
(PCSV)
The purge control solenoid valve is
controlled by the Engine Control
Module (ECM); when the engine
coolant temperature is low during
idling, the PCSV closes so that evaporated fuel is not taken into the
engine. After the engine warms up
during ordinary driving, the PCSV
opens to introduce evaporated fuel to
the engine.
Vehicle modifications
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification of your vehicle could
affect its performance, safety or
durability and may even violate governmental safety and emissions regulations.
In addition, damage or performance
problems resulting from any modification may not be covered under
warranty.
• If you use unauthorized electronic
devices, it may cause the vehicle to
operate abnormally, wire damage,
battery discharge and fire. For your
safety, do not use unauthorized
electronic devices.
7 82
The Exhaust Emission Control
System is a highly effective system
which controls exhaust emissions
while maintaining good vehicle performance.
Engine exhaust gas precautions
(carbon monoxide)
• Carbon monoxide can be present
with other exhaust fumes.
Therefore, if you smell exhaust
fumes of any kind inside your vehicle, have it inspected and repaired
immediately. If you ever suspect
exhaust fumes are coming into
your vehicle, drive it only with all
the windows fully open. Have your
vehicle checked and repaired
immediately.
WARNING - Exhaust
Engine exhaust gases contain
carbon monoxide (CO). Though
colorless and odorless, it is
dangerous and could be lethal if
inhaled. Follow the instructions
on this page to avoid CO poisoning.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:38 PM
Page 83
Maintenance
• Do not operate the engine in confined or closed areas (such as
garages) any more than what is
necessary to move the vehicle in or
out of the area.
• When the vehicle is stopped in an
open area for more than a short
time with the engine running,
adjust the ventilation system (as
needed) to draw outside air into the
vehicle.
• Never sit in a parked or stopped
vehicle for any extended time with
the engine running.
• When the engine stalls or fails to
start, excessive attempts to restart
the engine may cause damage to
the emission control system.
Operating precautions for catalytic converters (if equipped)
WARNING - Fire
• A hot exhaust system can
ignite flammable items under
your vehicle. Do not park, idle
or drive the vehicle over or
near flammable objects, such
as grass, vegetation, paper,
leaves, etc.
• The exhaust system and catalytic system are very hot
while the engine is running or
immediately after the engine
is turned off. Keep away from
the exhaust system and catalytic, you may get burned.
Also, do not remove the heat
sink around the exhaust system, do not seal the bottom of
the vehicle or do not coat the
vehicle for corrosion control.
It may present a fire risk under
certain conditions.
Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter emission control
device.
Therefore, the following precautions
must be observed:
• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for
gasoline engines.
• Do not operate the vehicle when
there are signs of engine malfunction, such as misfire or a noticeable
loss of performance.
• Do not misuse or abuse the
engine. Examples of misuse are
coasting with the ignition off and
descending steep grades in gear
with the ignition off.
• Do not operate the engine at high
idle speed for extended periods (5
minutes or more).
• Do not modify or tamper with any
part of the engine or emission control system. All inspections and
adjustments must be made by an
authorized Kia dealer.
• Avoid driving with a extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, damaging the catalytic converter.
7 83
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 7.QXP
1/23/2013
3:38 PM
Maintenance
Failure to observe these precautions
could result in damage to the catalytic converter and to your vehicle.
Additionally, such actions could void
your warranties.
7 84
Page 84
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 8.QXP
1/23/2013
4:01 PM
Page 1
Specifications & Consumer information
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Bulb wattage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Gross vehicle weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Luggage volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Recommended lubricants and capacities . . . . . . . 8-6
• Recommended sae viscosity number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Vehicle certification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Tire specification and pressure label . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Refrigerant label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 8.QXP
1/23/2013
4:01 PM
Page 2
Specifications & Consumer information
DIMENSIONS
Item
Overall length
Overall width
Overall height
Front tread
Rear tread
Wheelbase
mm (in)
4,685 (184.4)
1,885 (74.2)
1,700 (66.9)/1,735 (68.3)*1/1,745 (68.7)*2
P235/65 R17
1,626 (64.0)
235/60 R18
1,621 (63.8)
P235/55 R19
1,621 (63.8)
P235/65 R17
1,623 (63.8)
235/60 R18
1,618 (63.7)
P235/55 R19
1,618 (63.7)
2,700 (106.29)
*1 with roof rack
*2 with sunroof and roof rack
ENGINE
Item
Displacement
cc (cu. in)
Bore x Stroke
mm (in.)
Firing order
No. of cylinders
8 2
Gasoline Theta
II 2.4
Gasoline 3.3L
2,359
(143.95)
3,342
(203.9)
88x97
(3.46X3.81)
92 x 83.8
(3.62 x 3.30)
1-3-4-2
4. In-line
1-2-3-4-5-6
V-type
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 8.QXP
1/23/2013
4:01 PM
Page 3
Specifications & Consumer information
BULB WATTAGE
Front
Rear
Interior
Light Bulb
Headlamps(Low)
Headlamps(Low)- HID type*
Headlamps(High)
Front turn signal lamps
Front position lamps
Front fog lamps
Front Side marker
Side Repeater lamps (Outside Mirror)*
Rear Stop/Tail lamps (outside)
Bulb type Rear tail lamps (Inside)
Side marker
Rear Stop lamps
LED type Rear Tail lamps
Side marker
Rear turn signal lamps
Back-up lamps
High mounted stop lamp*
License plate lamps
Map lamps
Room lamps
Personal lamps*
Vanity mirror lamps*
Glove box lamp
Luggage lamp
Wattage
55
35
55
28
LED
27
LED
LED
27 or 8
8
5
LED
LED
LED
27
18
LED
5
10
10
8
5
5
10
Bulb type
H7SLL
D3S
H7LL
PY28/8W
LED
GE881
LED
LED
P27/8W
P27/8W
W5W
LED
LED
LED
PY27W
W18W
LED
FESTOON
W10W
FESTOON
FESTOON
FESTOON
FESTOON
FESTOON
* If equipped
8 3
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 8.QXP
1/23/2013
4:01 PM
Page 4
Specifications & Consumer information
TIRES AND WHEELS
Inflation pressure kPa (psi)
Normal load
Maximum load
(
)
(
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
230 (33)
230 (33)
230 (33)
230 (33)
Item
Tire size
Wheel sizee
Full size tire
P235/65R17
235/60R18
P235/55R19
7.0J×17
7.5J×18
7.5J×19
T165/90R17
4.0T×17
420 (60)
Compact spare tire
(if equipped)
)
9~11
(65~79, 88~107)
420 (60)
420 (60)
420 (60)
CAUTION
When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.
Using tires of a different size can damage the related parts or make it work irregularly.
8 4
Wheel lug nut torque
kg•m (lb•ft, N•m)
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 8.QXP
1/23/2013
4:01 PM
Page 5
Specifications & Consumer information
GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT
2.4GDI
5 Seater
7 Seater
AT
2WD
2130 kg (4696 lbs.)
2250 kg (4960 lbs.)
AT
2WD
2180 kg (4806 lbs.)
2300 kg (5071 lbs.)
4WD
2260 kg (4982 lbs.)
2380 kg (5247 lbs.)
3.3GDI
AT
2WD
2270 kg (5004 lbs.)
2400 kg (5291 lbs.)
4WD
2350 kg (5181 lbs.)
2480 kg (5467 lbs.)
LUGGAGE VOLUME
ltem
VDA
MIN.
MAX.
5 Seater
660 l (23.3 cu ft)
1,675 l (59.2 cu ft)
7 Seater
116 l (4.1 cu ft)
1,530 l (54.0 cu ft)
Min : Behind rear seat to upper edge of the seat back.
Max : Behind front seat to roof.
8 5
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 8.QXP
1/23/2013
4:01 PM
Page 6
Specifications & Consumer information
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality.
The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.
These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.
Lubricant
Engine oil *1 *2
(drain and refill)
Manual transaxle fluid
Volume
5.0 l (5.28 US qt.)
2.4 Engine
API Service SM*3,
ILSAC GF-4 or above
3.3 Engine
5.7 l (6.02 US qt.)
2.4 Engine
1.8 l (1.90 US qt.)
2.4 Engine
7.1 l (7.50 US qt.)
3.3 Engine
7.8 l (8.24 US qt.)
Automatic transaxle fluid
2.4 Engine
AT
7.4 l (7.8 US qt.)
MT
7.1 l (7.5 US qt.)
Coolant
3.3 Engine
8 6
Classification
AT
Without Trailer
Packege: 8.7 l
(9.2 US qt.)
With Trailer
Packege : 9.1 l
(9.6 US qt.)
API GL-4, SAE 75W/85
MICHANG ATF SP-IV, SK ATF SP-IV, NOCA
ATF SP-IV Kia genuine ATF & SP-IV or other
brands meeting the above specification
approved by Kia motors corp.
Mixture of antifreeze and distilled water
(Ethylene glycol base coolant
for aluminum radiator)
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 8.QXP
1/23/2013
4:01 PM
Page 7
Specifications & Consumer information
Lubricant
Volume
0.7~0.8 l
(0.7~0.8 US qt.)
Brake fluid
0.7 l (0.74 US qt.)
Rear differential oil (AWD)
Transfer case oil (AWD)
Fuel
Classification
FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
HYPOID GEAR OIL API GL-5, SAE 75W/90
(SHELL SPIRAX X or equivalent)
2.4 Engine
0.6 l (0.63 US qt.)
3.3 Engine
0.7 l (0.74 US qt.)
HYPOID GEAR OIL API GL-5, SAE 75W/90
(SHELL SPIRAX X or equivalent)
66 l (17.4 US gal.)
Refer to “Fuel requirements” in section 1
*1 Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.
*2 Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure
in everyday driving, but in a year’s time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.
*3 If the API service SM or ACEA A5 engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL or ACEA A3.
8 7
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 8.QXP
1/23/2013
4:01 PM
Page 8
Specifications & Consumer information
Recommended SAE viscosity
number
CAUTION
Always be sure to clean the area
around any filler plug, drain
plug, or dipstick before checking or draining any lubricant.
This is especially important in
dusty or sandy areas and when
the vehicle is used on unpaved
roads. Cleaning the plug and
dipstick areas will prevent dirt
and grit from entering the
engine and other mechanisms
that could be damaged.
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has
an effect on fuel economy and cold
weather operating (engine start and
engine oil flowability). Lower viscosity engine oils can provide better fuel
economy and cold weather performance, however, higher viscosity
engine oils are required for satisfactory lubrication in hot weather.
Using oils of any viscosity other than
those recommended could result in
engine damage.
When choosing an oil, consider the
range of temperature your vehicle
will be operated in before the next oil
change. Proceed to select the recommended oil viscosity from the
chart.
Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
°C -30
-20
-10
0
10
20
30
40
Temperature
(°F)
-10
0
20
40
60
80
100
Gasoline
Engine Oil *1
5W-30, 5W-40
5W-20 (5W-30)
1. For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of
a viscosity grade SAE 5W-30 (API SM / ILSAC GF-4). However, if
the engine oil is not available in your country, select the proper
engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.
8 8
50
120
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 8.QXP
1/23/2013
4:02 PM
Page 9
Specifications & Consumer information
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
Frame Number
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL
VIN Label (if equipped)
OXM089001
OEN086004N
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the number used in registering your vehicle and in all legal matters pertaining to its ownership, etc.
The number is punched on the floor
under the front passenger seat. To
check the number, open the carpet
flap.
The VIN is also on a plate attached
to the top of the dashboard. The
number on the plate can easily be
seen through the windshield from
outside.
OCM056002
The vehicle certification label
attached on the driver’s side center
pillar gives the vehicle identification
number (VIN).
8 9
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) 8.QXP
1/23/2013
4:02 PM
Page 10
Specifications & Consumer information
TIRE SPECIFICATION AND
PRESSURE LABEL
REFRIGERANT LABEL
ENGINE NUMBER
■ 2.4L
OXM089003
OXM079101L
■ 3.3L
The tires supplied on your new vehicle are chosen to provide the best
performance for normal driving.
The tire label located on the driver's
side center pillar gives the tire pressures recommended for your vehicle.
OHG080004
The engine number is stamped on
the engine block as shown in the
drawing.
8 10
OXMA073130
The refrigerant label is located at the
front of the engine room.
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) Index.qxp
1/23/2013
3:41 PM
Page 1
Index
II
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) Index.qxp
1/23/2013
3:41 PM
Page 2
Index
A
A/V Mode ......................................................................4-80
AC Inverter ..................................................................4-152
Active eco system..........................................................5-54
Active eco operation ................................................5-54
Air bag warning label ....................................................3-77
Air bag warning light ....................................................3-50
Air bags..........................................................................3-47
Operation ..................................................................3-48
Do not install a child restraint on the
Front passenger’s seat ..............................................3-50
Air bag warning light ................................................3-50
SRS components and functions ................................3-51
Driver's and passenger's front air bag ......................3-60
Side air bag................................................................3-66
Curtain air bag ..........................................................3-67
SRS care ....................................................................3-74
Air bag warning label................................................3-77
Air cleaner ....................................................................7-39
Airconditioning system................................................4-121
Manual climate control system ..............................4-121
Airconditioning system................................................4-131
Automatic climate control system ..........................4-131
I 2
Alarm system ................................................................4-19
All wheel drive ..............................................................5-23
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ......................................5-34
Appearance care ............................................................7-74
Exterior care ..............................................................7-74
Interior care ..............................................................7-79
Armrest (rear) ................................................................3-24
Ashtray ........................................................................4-154
Automatic climate control system ..............................4-131
Automatic heating and air conditioning..................4-133
Manual heating and air conditioning ......................4-134
Air conditioning ......................................................4-139
Automatic transaxle ......................................................5-16
Sports mode ..............................................................5-18
Shift-lock override ....................................................5-20
B
Battery............................................................................7-47
Battery saver function..................................................4-108
Blind spot detection system ..........................................5-49
Warning type ............................................................5-50
Detecting sensor ........................................................5-51
Warning Message ......................................................5-51
Non operating condition............................................5-53
Bottle holder ................................................................4-150
Brake system..................................................................5-30
Power brakes ............................................................5-30
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) Index.qxp
1/23/2013
3:41 PM
Page 3
Index
Parking brake ..........................................................5-32
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)..................................5-34
Electronic stability control (ESC) ............................5-36
Vehicle stability management ..................................5-40
Hill-start assist control (HAC) ..................................5-41
Brakes/clutch fluid ........................................................7-36
Bulb wattage ....................................................................8-3
C
Camera (Rear view) ....................................................4-106
Capacities (Lubricants)....................................................8-6
Care................................................................................7-50
Tire care ....................................................................7-50
Exterior care ..............................................................7-74
Interior care ..............................................................7-79
Center console storage ................................................4-146
Central door lock switch................................................4-23
Checking the parking brake ..........................................7-38
Checking tire inflation pressure ....................................7-51
Child restraint system ....................................................3-38
Seat belt ....................................................................3-40
Tether anchor system ................................................3-43
Child-protector rear door lock ......................................4-24
Climate control air filter ................................................7-41
Clock............................................................................4-154
Clothes hanger ............................................................4-155
Combined instrument, see instrument cluster ..............4-68
Compact spare tire ........................................................6-15
Compact spare tire replacement ....................................7-55
Coolant ..........................................................................7-33
Cooling fluid, see engine coolant ..................................7-33
Crankcase emission control system ..............................7-81
Cruise control system ....................................................5-44
Cruise control switch ................................................5-45
To set cruise control speed........................................5-45
Cup holder ..................................................................4-149
Curtain air bag ..............................................................3-67
D
Dashboard illumination, see instrument panel
illumination ................................................................4-69
Dashboard, see instrument cluster ................................4-68
Day/night rearview mirror ............................................4-55
Daytime running light..................................................4-109
Defogging (Windshield) ..............................................4-142
Defogging logic ..........................................................4-144
Defroster (Rear window) ............................................4-120
Defrosting (Windshield) ..............................................4-142
Dimensions ......................................................................8-2
Display illumination, see instrument panel
illumination ................................................................4-69
Displays, see instrument cluster ....................................4-68
Do not install a child restraint on the
front passenger’s seat ................................................3-50
I 3
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) Index.qxp
1/23/2013
3:41 PM
Page 4
Index
Door locks......................................................................4-21
Central door lock switch ..........................................4-23
Child-protector rear door lock ..................................4-24
Drinks holders, see cup holders ..................................4-149
Driver position memory system ......................................3-8
Storing positions..........................................................3-9
Recalling positions ......................................................3-9
Easy access function ................................................3-10
Driver's and passenger's front air bag............................3-60
Driving at night..............................................................5-60
Driving in flooded areas ................................................5-61
Driving in the rain ........................................................5-60
Driving off-road ............................................................5-61
DRL see Daytime running light ..................................4-109
E
Economical operation ....................................................5-55
Electric chromic mirror (ECM) ....................................4-56
Electric power steering ..................................................4-49
Electronic stability control (ESC) ................................5-36
Emergency starting ..........................................................6-5
Jump starting ..............................................................6-5
I 4
Emission control system................................................7-81
Crankcase emission control system ..........................7-81
Evaporative emission control System ......................7-81
Exhaust emission control system ..............................7-82
Engine ..............................................................................8-2
Engine compartment........................................................2-6
Engine coolant ..............................................................7-33
Engine Coolant Temperature guage ..............................4-72
Engine number ..............................................................8-10
Engine oil ......................................................................7-31
Engine overheats..............................................................6-7
Engine start/stop button ..................................................5-8
Engine start/stop button position ................................5-8
Engine start/stop button position ....................................5-8
Engine will not start ........................................................6-4
Evaporative emission control System ..........................7-81
Exhaust emission control system ..................................7-82
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ..............7-27
Exterior care ..................................................................7-74
Exterior overview (Front)................................................2-2
Exterior overview (Rear) ................................................2-3
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) Index.qxp
1/23/2013
3:41 PM
Page 5
Index
F
Flat tire ............................................................................6-8
Jack and tools ..............................................................6-8
Removing and storing the spare tire ..........................6-9
Changing tires ..........................................................6-11
Compact spare tire ....................................................6-15
Floor mat anchor(s) ....................................................4-155
Fluid ..............................................................................7-36
Brakes/clutch fluid ....................................................7-36
Washer fluid ..............................................................7-37
Fog light (front) ..........................................................4-112
Front seat adjustment - Manual ......................................3-5
Front seat adjustment - power ........................................3-6
Fuel Economy................................................................4-89
Fuel filler lid ..................................................................4-40
Fuel Gauge ....................................................................4-72
Fuel requirements ............................................................1-3
Fuse switch ....................................................................7-66
Fuses ..............................................................................7-64
Instrument panel fuse ................................................7-65
Fuse switch................................................................7-66
Multi fuse ..................................................................7-67
Fuse/relay panel description......................................7-68
G
Gauges ..........................................................................4-71
Glove box ....................................................................4-146
Gross vehicle weight ......................................................8-5
H
Hazard warning flasher................................................4-107
Hazardous driving conditions........................................5-57
Headlamp escort function............................................4-108
Headlamp welcome ....................................................4-108
Headlamp welcome function ......................................4-108
Headrest(front) ..............................................................3-10
Headrest(rear) ................................................................3-22
Heated steering wheel....................................................4-51
Heater ..........................................................................4-131
Automatic climate control system ..........................4-131
High - beam operation ................................................4-111
Hight adjustment............................................................3-28
Highway driving ............................................................5-61
Hill-start assist control (HAC) ......................................5-41
Hood ..............................................................................4-38
Horn ..............................................................................4-51
How to use this manual ..................................................1-2
I 5
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) Index.qxp
1/23/2013
3:41 PM
Page 6
Index
I
Ignition switch position ..................................................5-5
Immobilizer system ........................................................4-8
Indicator light ................................................................4-91
Inside rearview mirror ..................................................4-55
Instrument cluster ..........................................................4-68
Instrument panel illumination ..................................4-69
LCD Display Control ................................................4-70
Gauges ......................................................................4-71
Transaxle Shift Indicator ..........................................4-74
Instrument panel fuse ....................................................7-65
Instrument panel overview ..............................................2-5
Interior care....................................................................7-99
Interior features............................................................4-149
Cup holder ..............................................................4-149
Sunvisor ..................................................................4-150
Bottle holder............................................................4-150
Power outlet ............................................................4-151
Floor mat anchor(s) ................................................4-155
Luggage net (holder) ..............................................4-156
Side curtain..............................................................4-156
Interior lamp AUTO cut ..............................................4-117
Interior light ................................................................4-117
Interior lamp AUTO cut ..........................................4-117
Map lamp ................................................................4-118
Room lamp ..............................................................4-117
Luggage lamp ..........................................................4-119
I 6
Vanity mirror lamp ..................................................4-119
Interior overview ............................................................2-4
J
Jack and tools ..................................................................6-8
Jump starting....................................................................6-5
K
KEY ................................................................................5-5
Ignition switch position ..............................................5-5
Keys ................................................................................4-4
Immobilizer system ....................................................4-8
L
Label ..............................................................................3-77
Air bag warning label................................................3-77
Tire sidewall labeling ................................................7-56
Tire specification and pressure label ........................8-10
Refrigerant label........................................................8-10
Lap/shoulder belt ..........................................................3-27
LCD display ..................................................................4-75
LCD modes ..............................................................4-75
Service Mode ............................................................4-76
User Settings Mode ..................................................4-78
A/V Mode..................................................................4-80
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) Index.qxp
1/23/2013
3:41 PM
Page 7
Index
Turn By Turn Mode ..................................................4-80
Warning Messages ....................................................4-81
LCD Display Control ....................................................4-70
LCD modes....................................................................4-75
Lighting........................................................................4-108
Battery saver function ............................................4-108
Headlamp escort function ......................................4-108
Headlamp welcome function ..................................4-108
Lighting control ......................................................4-109
High - beam operation ............................................4-111
Turn signals ............................................................4-112
Front fog light ........................................................4-112
Daytime running light ............................................4-109
Lighting control ..........................................................4-109
Autolight..................................................................4-110
Lubricants and capacities ................................................8-6
Luggage net (holder) ..................................................4-156
Luggage room lamp ....................................................4-119
Luggage volume ..............................................................8-5
M
Maintenance ....................................................................7-5
Maintenance services ..................................................7-5
Owner maintenance ....................................................7-7
Scheduled maintenance service ..................................7-9
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ..........7-27
Tire maintenance ......................................................7-55
Maintenance schedule ..................................................7-10
Maintenance services ......................................................7-5
Manual climate control system....................................4-121
Manual transaxle............................................................5-13
Map lamp ....................................................................4-118
Mirrors ..........................................................................4-55
Day/night rearview mirror ........................................4-55
Electric chromic mirror (ECM) ................................4-56
Inside rearview mirror ..............................................4-55
Outside rearview mirror ............................................4-64
Moonroof, see panorama sunroof..................................4-44
Multi fuse ......................................................................7-67
O
Odometer ......................................................................4-73
Oil (Engine) ..................................................................7-31
Outside rearview mirror ................................................4-64
Overheats ........................................................................6-7
Owner maintenance ........................................................7-7
P
Panorama sunroof ..........................................................4-44
Parking brake ................................................................5-32
Checking the parking brake ......................................7-38
Power brakes..................................................................5-30
Power outlet ................................................................4-151
I 7
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) Index.qxp
1/23/2013
3:41 PM
Page 8
Index
Power window lock button............................................4-36
Pre-tensioner seat belt....................................................3-31
R
Rear parking assist system ..........................................4-102
Rear seat adjustment......................................................3-15
Rear view camera ........................................................4-106
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures ..................7-50
Recommended lubricants and capacities ........................8-6
Recommended SAE viscosity number........................8-6
Refrigerant label ............................................................8-10
Road warning ..................................................................6-2
Rocking the vehicle ......................................................5-58
Room lamp ..................................................................4-117
Rotation (Tire) ..............................................................7-58
S
Scheduled maintenance service ......................................7-9
Seat belt Precautions......................................................3-34
Seat belt restraint system ..............................................3-25
Seat belt warning ..........................................................3-26
Seat belts........................................................................3-25
Seat belt restraint system ..........................................3-25
Seat belt warning ......................................................3-26
Lap/shoulder belt ......................................................3-27
Hight adjustment ......................................................3-28
I 8
Pre-tensioner seat belt ..............................................3-31
Seat belt Precautions ................................................3-34
Seat warmer (front)........................................................3-12
Seat warmer (rear) ........................................................3-21
Seat warmer with air ventilation (front) ........................3-14
Seatback pocket ............................................................3-14
Seats ................................................................................3-2
Front seat adjustment - Manual ..................................3-5
Front seat adjustment - power ....................................3-6
Headrest(front) ..........................................................3-10
Seat warmer (front) ..................................................3-12
Seat warmer with air ventilation (front) ..................3-14
Seatback pocket ........................................................3-14
Rear seat adjustment ................................................3-15
Armrest (rear)............................................................3-24
Headrest(rear)............................................................3-22
Seat warmer (rear) ....................................................3-21
Service Mode ................................................................4-76
Shift-lock override ........................................................5-20
Side air bag ....................................................................3-66
Side curtain ..................................................................4-156
Smart key ......................................................................4-11
Battery replacement ..................................................4-18
Smooth cornering ..........................................................5-59
Snow tires ......................................................................5-63
Spare tire..........................................................................6-9
Removing and storing the spare tire ..........................6-9
Changing tires ..........................................................6-11
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) Index.qxp
1/23/2013
3:41 PM
Page 9
Index
Compact spare tire ....................................................6-15
Compact spare tire replacement................................7-55
Special driving conditions ............................................5-57
Hazardous driving conditions ..................................5-57
Rocking the vehicle ..................................................5-58
Smooth cornering ......................................................5-59
Driving at night ........................................................5-60
Driving in the rain ....................................................5-60
Driving in flooded areas............................................5-61
Highway driving........................................................5-61
Driving off-road ........................................................5-61
Speedometer ..................................................................4-71
Sports mode ..................................................................5-18
SRS care ........................................................................3-74
SRS components and functions ....................................3-51
Starting difficulties, see engine will not start ..................6-4
Steering wheel................................................................4-49
Electric power steering..............................................4-49
Tilt and telescopic steering........................................4-50
Horn ..........................................................................4-51
Heated steering wheel ..............................................4-51
Flex steer ..................................................................4-52
Storage compartment ..................................................4-146
Center console storage ............................................4-146
Glove box ................................................................4-146
Sunglass holder ......................................................4-147
Luggage box............................................................4-148
Sunglass holder............................................................4-147
Sunvisor ......................................................................4-150
T
Tachometer ....................................................................4-71
Tailgate ..........................................................................4-25
Tether anchor system ....................................................3-43
Theft-alarm system ........................................................4-19
Tilt and telescopic steering ............................................4-50
Tire and wheels................................................................8-4
Tire rotation ..................................................................7-52
Tire specification and pressure label ............................8-10
Tires and wheels ............................................................7-50
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures..............7-50
Tire care ....................................................................7-50
Checking tire inflation pressure ................................7-51
Tire rotation ..............................................................7-52
Tire replacement........................................................7-54
Wheel alignment and tire balance ............................7-53
Wheel replacement....................................................7-55
Tire maintenance ......................................................7-55
Tire sidewall labeling ................................................7-56
Tire traction ..............................................................7-55
Compact spare tire replacement................................7-55
I 9
XM(FL) CAN(ENG) Index.qxp
1/23/2013
3:41 PM
Page 10
Index
Towing ..........................................................................6-17
Towing service ..........................................................6-17
Trailer towing ................................................................5-66
Transaxle........................................................................5-13
Manual transaxle ......................................................5-13
Automatic transaxle ..................................................5-16
Transaxle Shift Indicator ..............................................4-74
Trip A/B ........................................................................4-88
Trip computer ................................................................4-87
Trip A/B ....................................................................4-88
Fuel Economy ..........................................................4-89
Turn By Turn Mode ......................................................4-80
Turn signals..................................................................4-112
U
User Settings Mode ......................................................4-78
V
Vanity mirror lamp ......................................................4-119
Vehicle break-in process..................................................1-5
Vehicle identification number (VIN) ..............................8-9
Vehicle stability management........................................5-40
Vehicle weight ..............................................................5-81
I 10
W
Warning light ................................................................4-91
Warning Messages ........................................................4-81
Washer fluid ..................................................................7-37
Welcome system ..........................................................4-108
Headlamp welcome ................................................4-108
Wheel alignment and tire balance ................................7-53
Wheel replacement ........................................................7-55
Windows ........................................................................4-33
Power window lock button ......................................4-36
Windshield defrosting and defogging..........................4-142
Windshield washers ....................................................4-115
Windshield wipers ......................................................4-114
Winter driving................................................................5-63
Snow tires..................................................................5-63
Wiper blades ..................................................................7-43
Wipers and washers ....................................................4-113
Windshield wipers ..................................................4-114
Windshield washers ................................................4-115
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement